Home

USER MANUAL

Contents

1. EDIT SBana TAA HAA 00216 N00000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA ES 1000 1012 Q0 1107 o 1001 Q 1013 0 1108 0 1002 Q 1014 O 1109 0 1003 Q 1015 1110 Y 1004 0 1032 0 1111 le 1005 O 1100 Q 1112 0 Q 1006 1101 1113 o 1007 Q0 1102 9 1114 3 1008 0 1103 Q 1115 0 3 1009 1104 1182 1010 Q 1105 Q 1133 0 e 1011 O 1106 0 2001 0 000 1000 Read G54 0 s value 10 29 37 A PUB VAR LOCAL VAR svs var FIND P 4 Variable data range integral type 2147483648 2147483647 real number type 10 102 0 or 10 10 Intergral type 2147483648 2147483647 real number type 10 10 0 or 10 10 e Types of variables Variables are classified into four types by variable number Variabl T f lable ype O Range number variable HO NU This Mae IS ui Du No value NULL variable can be assigned to this variable Local variable can only be used within a macro to hold data such as Local the results of operations When the 1 33 power is turned off local variables vane are initialized to null When a macro is called arguments are assigned to local variables When the power is turned off variables Public Public variables can be shared are initialized to null variable among different macro programs When the power is turned off data is stored 100 199 read write dispi 500 999 id aia 1000 1015 G54 G55 output Sto
2. 2 Press to select the required D parameter to be DATA INPUT FIND modified or press ADRESS to input the required D to be selected press and the cursor positions to the parameter The screen displays definitions of the bit at the bottom O Lo D um Q r O 3 At the moment the selected D parameter is the revisability state the digit key is pressed directly to input corresponding numerical value DATA 4 Input the required modification numerical value and then press to complete modification 3 3 DT parameter setting In PLC data state display page pros On SETTING to enter DT parameter setting display page MDI SBBBB T58 HAB LADDER gt PLC DATA gt DT SETTING 00001 N04932 NO NUMERICAL MINIMUM MAXIMUM DT0000 DT0001 DT0002 DT0003 DT0004 DT0005 DT0006 DT0007 DT0008 DT0009 DT0010 DT0011 e 10 16 10 FIND K SETTING D SETTING or serine DC SETTING ADDRESS Setting method of DT parameter are the same that of D eee co 0 0 0 c c 3 4 DC parameter setting In PLC data state display page gress Mo SETTING to enter DC parameter setting display page 219 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GskK MDI 57274 T58 HB LADDER gt PLC DATA gt DC SETTING 00001 NO2517 L O NO O NUMERICAL MINIMUM MAXIMUM DC0000 DC0001 DC0002 DC0
3. Signals for 2 spindle G27 a SC A et 415 GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Single analog spindle control T type gear shift M type gear shift SIMSPL Q gt o o D 5 Q x TH O N G G 7 Ww ao a WINIA N I 416 Appendix ARIS ARI4 AR13 ARI2 ART AR10 AR9 AR8 10 9 Definition of Analog Spindle Signal Line Signal line of the spindle Cable number 00 785C Cable usage CNC connected with a frequency Applicable converter products Wiring diagram Frequency converter CNC interface CNIS Cold terminals SVC GND 12 AG SVC GND Metal shielding shell Signal line of the spindle Cable number 00 785D CNC spindle speed control with DAPO3 or Applicable Cable usage DAY series servo spindles connected products Wiring diagram CNC DAPO3 DAY series spindle servo drive jay90s ajeu 1990s ajeuwa LNO 0 jpauuo gt D 5 Q x Nidvv SVC Metal shell is connected to shielding eul Z NIdGZ SINO 0 joauuoy 9utpe 417 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Signal line of the spindle Cable number 00 785G CNC spindle speed control with GS Cable usage series economic servo spindle connected Wiring diagram CNC GS series economic E ee 19 23
4. MDI 57047 165 HBA COOR OPT CAS PEDI ARES crab SCALE 100 CENTER 0 0000 X AXIS VALUE CENTER 0 0000 Y AXIS VALUE CENTER 0 0000 Z AXIS VALUE X MAX 120 0000 Y MAX 120 0000 Z MAX 120 0000 X MIN 120 0000 Y MIN 120 0000 Z MIN 120 0000 09 35 09 AAA LL 09 39 09 PEE 2 Graph track Press MES to enter the graph track page as follows MDI 59839 138 HAB O Lo D um Q r O TRACK DISPLAY 00001 N01 32 3 150 2 350 3 245 09 35 35 GRAPH PARAMETER Imc START S CLEAR CHANGE K In graph track page the user can execute operations including start sketch stop stetch graph zoom clear change move and so on The above displays the current block and the next in Auto mode 209 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 09 35 56 i DA runs case i E JE A MDI 0471 T30 m O Lo D Q O A me lj jl Press e to popup graph feature information at lower right corner as follows MDI 9736 119 HAB Ls 0 100 09 44 17 A e rem 0 0 gt 210 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 3 9 PLC interface PLC interface includes l O state ladder monitor PLC data and file list which contents can be viewed by pressing corresponding soft key file list page can be viewed with 2 level
5. g mx IE v EC gt D 5 Q x we 1718 BIA 375 GSE C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Appendix 2 Outline Dimension of GSK980MDc V po de DM US 1037 1 N D A D l iS ca c P ENCODER MPG COM PORT ov p CN51 Ju CN21 CN31 l AXIS Z AXIS Y AXIS X AXIS 4 CN14 AXIS 5 SPINDLE ik a Be Appendix 3 Dimensions of Additional Panel APO1 AP01 applies to GSK980MDc whose figures and dimensions are as follows gt o o D 5 Q x o 9165 6 reserved botton holes 7 5 222 0 Reserved button hole 245 Reserved MPG installation hole 376 Appendix Appendix 4 Dimensions for Additional Panel AP02 APO2 applies to GSK98
6. PROGRAM MAIN INFORMATION A Jog F 4741 N0005 G1 G3 CO X100 Y100 7100 A100 C100 FED OVRI 884 RAP OYRI 76 GO SPI OYRI 68 NOO20 C00 X75 23 175 86 785 A45 C36 W03 082 C2 GA PART CNT 611 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 05 21 m CUT TIME 00 00 32 15 29 1 ABSOLUTE ros amp Pre RELATIVE INTEGRATED i 1 3 2 Program interface 1 Program content page Press to enter program interface which includes program content MDI programs current program modal and local directory When the U disk is inserted its catalogue is displayed In the page the program content including the current block can be displayed in Edit mode In Edit mode the program content can be viewed forward or backward by pressing or key EDIT 8122B T35 HAB 00001 N 9213 N999 G50 1 G143 G1 G3 X 9999 9999 Y 9999 9999 7 9999 9999 U 9999 9999 2 O Lo D um Q O PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT NODOS GI G3 GO X100 Y100 Z100 A100 C100 GO N0020 GOO X75 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 M03 G8 G2 G4 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 05 21 NO050 G98 Xb2 232 Yb5 789 N0060 G74 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F1005 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 X1 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 Y5O 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 25 W10 7 120 K8 5 Q9 7 F1600 NO110 G112 120 JO DO N0120 GO X55 Y55 785 A75 C60 N0130 G135 R55 735 I70 J60 K8 W15 U
7. y A O Q Q 3 3 Q GSK The value is 0 No change of axes the system reserves relevant cycle modal data When L gt 1 using round number C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual The value is decimal When L lt 1 it is processed as L 0 not moving but reserving its modal data and relevant cycle parameter values Note 1 Input range of command L 99999999 99999999xleast input increment Decimals is ignored and absolute value is used instead of negative value L code is effective only in current block Note 2 In continuous drilling the return planes are R point plan After the last hole is processed the return plane is specified by G98 G99 Note 3 When there is no axis position command in the specified L block it means drilling cycle is performed L times in the original place Note 4 Fixed cycle G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 have no consecutive drilling function Note 5 When LO is specified no drilling will be performed Related parameters status parameter No 582 LPTK 1 hole positioning of linear continuous drilling is executed by cutting path G01 0 hole positioning of linear continuous drilling is executed by rapid traverse path GOO 3 24 3 2 Rectangle Series Punch G140 G141 Format G140 G98 G99 Gx X Y R Z A B J F G141 Function Performing series punch on each side of the rectangle according to the punch number specified Explanation G140 P
8. H 1 By pressing the 0ERDE or soe key in Spindle Override keys the spindle speed can be changed by real time adjusting of the spindle override that has 8 levels of 50 120 236 Chapter 4 MPG Step Operation CHAPTER 4 MPG STEP OPERATION Note The keys functions of this GSK980MDc machine panel are defined by Ladder please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDc standard PLC programs In MPG Step mode the machine moves by a specified increment 4 1 Step Feed O Set HWL of the bit parameter No 001 to 0 and press _ 8 key to enter the Step mode it displays as follows STEP 51722 174 HAB RELATIVE POS 00001 N04662 MODAL INFORMATION GOO GOI G02 GOZ G04 00001 NO1770 names is 9118 X 1 a 254 n F 9784 mm min 12345 mm min HAIN INFORMATION Y 766 817 5727 STEP INC 0 037 RAP OVRI 76 Z 543 436 mm SPI OVRI 44 PART CNT 4694 CUT TIME 00 00 24 11 35 51 ABSOLUTE POS amp PRG revarive INTEGRATED 4 1 1 Increment Selection Press e v este Uv S096 UV1005 Ley to select the move increment the increment will be shown in the page Note In the EDIT mode ES PEA keys are invalid In the AUTO MDI or Machine Zero Return mode rapid override will be changed by pressing the abov
9. to select the window to make the corresponding block ladder program be displayed in the window and the user can find commands parameters network and so on in the window 2 Press wwe uo to position the cursor to the home and end of the block corresponded to the window to view them O Lo D um Q r O MDI SAAAA TAA HB LADDER gt MONITOR WIN2 Level2 00002 N00000 A111 B PH Kap ei NETWORK 33 F3 0 LN es NETWORK1 34 F3 1 Ra 6 ils NETWORK1 35 Pl Pl subprogram of choosing a axis on the handwheel and adjusting mpg step P1 F3 B CALL NETWORK1 36 P2 subprogram of adjusting rate in the rapid mode F3 3 10 07 57 FAL WINI Es WINS SELECT FIND s Level PO BLOCK CALLER FIND l 3 Press PARAMETER to find relevant parameters of the ladder such as R X Y G and soon For example input R335 7 press E c to find R335 7 as follows 215 m O Lo D Q O 216 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MDI SBBBd TAA HAD LADDER gt MONITOR WIN Level2 00002 N00000 A111 0 PA LA RE CALL NETWORK133 F3 B RB 7 DIFD NETWORK134 F3 1 Ra 6 DIFD NETWORK135 Pl Pl subprogram of choosing a axis on the handwheel and adjusting mpg step F3 H P1 CALL F3 1 RB8 6 RB 7 FIND PARAMETER Rood E 10 08 29 e Men a FIND 4 press como to find the relevant commands of the ladder such
10. 1 3 1 Speed of Increment Systems 1u IS B 0 14 IS C Metric machine Inch machine Metric machine Inch machine system system system system Output mode mm min inch min mm min inch min Pulse direction 60 000 6 000 6 000 600 AB quadrature phase 240 000 24 000 24 000 2 400 1 3 2 Unit of Increment Systems In different increment system the least input output increment varies with metric inch system The specific data is shown as follows Least input increment Least command 1p IS B for input increment for output TP 0 001 0 001 Metric Metric input G21 mm a 0 001 d 0 001 d machine deg deg Sa 0 0001 inch 0 001 mm ysm eer Dorm cc 0 001 deg 0 001 deg ER 0 001 0 0001 h Inch Metric input G21 AH ey 0 001 deg 0 001 deg pcne 0 0001 inch 0 0001 inch ss mad oo A 0 001 deg 0 001 deg for input increment for output Metric input 0 0001 mm 0 0001 0 0001 mm 0 0001 0 0001 mm Metric ta 0 0001 deg nch inp 620 Metric inpu Inch machine G21 0 0001 deg 0 0001 err system Inch input 0 00001 inch 0 00001 inch G20 0 0001 deg 0 0001 deg Least input increment for input is metric or inch can be set by G20 or G21 Least command increment for output is metric or inch is determined by machine tool and set by bit SCW of parameter NO 004 es s a 1 3 3 Data Ranges of Increment System Limited by pulse output
11. 4Jiswdemd 2000 0 Jvaeistosmi 200 0 Uvaweitobg orlJistosmd Cao 0 Jwkeitobg Cazo 0 SSC valu is too small 392 Appendix Alarm No in Alarm Message WAY g TYPE 213 0 E U value is less than tool radius 214 0 0 J is too small or K is too big this resule in overcut 215 0 o0 no J or no rectangle for end and start points coincide 2160 0 no drill G73 G89 for G140 G143 continuous drilling 217 0 0 drill holes can t less than 2 2480 0 pitch F not specified in G74 G84 219 0 0 drill interval too small in canned cycle 2300 0 S is 0 Spindle disabled 231 0 0 S value is over top by rigid tapping 232 0 0 other axis move specified between M29 and G74 G84 233 0 0 G61 0 signal abnormal in rigid tapping 234 0 EA M29 repeated 235 0 o0 M29 with G74 G84 in a block disabled in positioning 236 0 E 5th axis for ratory needed before rigid tapping 237 0 NN Specified data in G10 abnormal 2880 0 P value specified by G10 is not within 0 6 2390 0 P value specified by G10 is not within 1 48 240 0 0 P value is not within 1 48 when an additional coordinate system is specified 250 0 Cutter compensation C will not be founded because compensation start position is different from circle start position 251 0 0 Error programming has led to error operation in C tool compensation 252 0 0 Error programming has led to error end point of arc in C tool compensation 253 0 T
12. 5 N et D T le Ii 5 o oP T le C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE are employed in CNC design And the following measures are necessary during CNC connection 1 Make CNC far from the interference devices inverter AC contactor static generator high pressure generator and powered sectional devices etc 2 To supply the CNC via an isolation transformer the machine with the CNC should be grounded the CNC and drive unit should be connected with independent grounding wires at the grounding point 3 To suppress interference connect parallel RC circuit at both ends of AC coil Fig 1 2 RC circuit should approach to inductive loading as close as possible reversely connect parallel freewheeling diode at both ends of DC coil Fig 1 3 connect parallel surge absorber at the ends of AC motor coil Fig 1 4 oed d 4 24 Fig l Z Fig l 3 Fig 1_4 4 To employ with twisted shield cable or shield cable for the leadout cable of CNC the cable shield tier is grounded by single end at CNC side signal cable should be as short as possible 5 In order to decrease the mutual interference between CNC cables or CNC cables with strong power cables the wiring should comply to the following principles Group Cable type Wiring requirement AC powerline Tie up group cables with a clearance at least 10cm A rom that of B C groups or shield A group cables from AC cont
13. D 5 Q x 411 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 10 6 Explanations of some signals Spindle stop signal SSTP G29 6 Spindles stop signal SSTP1 G27 3 SSTP2 G27 4 eSignal Type PLC NC eSignal Function Break off the output of spindle speed instruction The signal sets S instructions in NC to 0 showing as the sequence chart below eNote When spindle stop signal SSTP is 0 output voltage turns to 0 When spindle stop signal SSTP is 1 analog voltage outputs instruction value And if this signal is not used keep setting this signal to1 to make CN perform spindle speed control O Signal Address G27 Input instructions miscellaneous function treatment IA IA A cio 73 x spindle stop signal s my Analog voltage AAA Y 117 1 gt Enabling signal ENB ii ctt Spindle speed override signalSOV10 SOV13 SOV24 SOV27 G30 eSignal Type PLC NC eSignal Function PLC assigns value to G30 and G30 transfers the value to NC NC according to the value of the G30 determines the different spindle speed override SOV10 SOV13 are used for the 1 spindle while SOV24 SOV27 are used for the 2 spindle SOV10 SOV13 coding and override values have a relationship as follows gt o o D 5 Q x eNote Spindle override function is not available in the tapping cycle and thread cutting eSignal Address Spindle enabling signal ENB F001 4 The 2 spindle enabling signal ENB2 F38 2
14. Format Circular interpolation Arc in the XY plane Gli Arc in the XZ plane G16 GU Ro G19 d 3 P 503 I K Helical interpolation Arc interpolation in XY plane Z axis linear interpolation linkage Lo ms Arc in the YZ plane 32 Chapter 3 G Command F G02 E Gi x Y RO Fo G03 E d Arc interpolation in XZ plane Y axis linear interpolation linkage F 502 aR 18 LE ae pe 503 I KE Arc interpolation in YZ plane X axis linear interpolation linkage F G02 G19 Y wo Fo G03 J E Function Only two axes of circular interpolation can be linked for controlling tool movement along with the arc on the selected plane in any time If the 3rd axis is specified simultaneously in linear interpolation mode it will be linked by linear interpolation type to constitute helical interpolation G02 movement path is CW from start to end points G03 movement path is CCW from start to end points Explanation G02 and G03 are modal G commands R is an arc radius its value 99999999 99999999xleast input increment When the circle center is specified by address I J and K they are corresponding with the X Y and Z axes separately is the difference between the center point and the arc start point in the X axis direction l center point coordinate X X coordinate of arc start point its value 99999999 99999999xleast input increment J is the difference between the center point and the arc start point in t
15. Q O O O O Q N O Q N O O Co y D t 2 D O O 2 D om O p G 3 O o D O Q O c O O N Q I O Q I N o O OI O O When the power off G mode of group10 G98 G99 When the power off G mode of group11 G50 G51 When the power off G mode of group12 G66 G67 CO O CO O gt J D 2 er 2 D O O 2 D s O h Q 3 O Q D O Q O c O I G Ql I G gdl O 8 9 9 9 9 When the power off G mode of group17 G15 G16 When the power off G mode of group22 G50 1 G51 1 X axis 1 Y axis 1 Z axis he value of F when the power off gt D 2 er ED y D O O 2 D om O p Q 3 O Q D O O O c O O G O Co l G O O O O O O he value of S when the power off O O al ololo ol ol ofl oO ceo co co he value of H when the power off E NOT f O O O JJ O Oy OINI i Of O TSTE 2lIl2 DICO i pe Di3 Olio TO FO OIO lt lt DIO 3 OIIO J k OIO 3l3 OIO Qo DIO OIO O O 3 OIO cic TO FO NIN NIN mol OIO am O1 ojo f od OIO am O1 dh ood dh dh Ii he value of D when the power off O NES O Counts of X pulse from checking PC to receiving PC in Ref ounts of Y pulse from checking PC to receiving PC in Ref ounts of Z pulse from checking PC to r
16. Q__ _ _ ____ _ _ _____ ___ 10 09 28 FIND FIND FIND A HOME END PARAMETER COMMAND NETHORK 6 press and the screen displays to return the previous menu 2 5 Return In the above figure press and the screen window displays to return the previous menu 3 PLC data page In ladder page press 45 8 1 to enter the PLC data state display page and the system displays K0000 K0039 DT000 DTO099 DCOOO DCO99 D0000 D0999 Press to view PLC data values In PLC data page there is a prompt line at the bottom to display definitions of the parameter at which the current cursor points which is shown below 217 O Lo D um Q r O CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MDI 87781 T13 HBB NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA K0000 0000000 K0012 00000000 K0024 00000000 K0001 00000000 K0013 00000000 K0025 00000000 K0002 00000000 K0014 00000000 K0026 00000000 K0003 00000000 K0015 00000000 K0027 00000000 K0004 00000000 K0016 00000000 K0028 00000000 K0005 00000000 K0017 00000000 K0029 00000000 K0006 00000000 K0018 00000000 K0030 00000000 K0007 00000000 K0019 00000000 K0031 00000000 K0008 00000000 K0020 00000000 K0032 00000000 K0009 00000000 K0021 00000000 K0033 00000000 K0010 00000000 K0022 00000000 K0034 00000000 K0011 00000000 K0023 00000000 K0035 00000000 4 K0000 BIT7
17. SETA 1B vee EN4 4 14 GND ALMA Drive alarm signal RDYA ZSDA 15 GND CONN MB WN EN4 Axis enable signal SET4 Pulse disable signal Ii Fig 2 11 Interface CN14 DB15 female 2 2 2 Connection of 4th Axis Interface as Linear Axis DASS A drive unit T et D et O GSE SSOMDc CN1 4 DA9SB DAO1B drive GSK980MDc CN14 unit signalinterface e oe a ALMA 308 Chapter2 Interface Signals DY3 dnwe unit signal intertace DFS dnve umt GSKOSOMDc CNL4 lees GSKSBOMDc CNL 4 1 UP Hd nra TEL LL E TUE Hio m nw y 14 REL E B E E 5 ANA 5 AMA a O C ME A Y HUM d Fig 2 12 Connection of 4 axis interface to drive unit 2 2 3 Connection of 4th Axis Interface as Rotary Axis DAPOS spindle drive unit CNI interface 22 PULSE GSESBOMDc CCNI4 co come C HE 42 EN Metal shell Fig 2 13 Connection of 4 axis interface to spindle drive unit 5 o 2 3 Connection of Spindle Port 2 3 1 Definition of Signal zi 2 DIRS Ia OR gt 15 DIRS DIR5 DIRS 5 direction signal 4 ALMS 16 GND ALM5 X5 3 5 alarm signal i We Exa Output of voltage 8 X52 O 20 Y5 0 9 GND 2L YS 1 SETS 5 disable signal o Pes o o 22 YS2 S enable signal 11 24V o 23 Y53 12 GND A 24 SVC2 13 SVC 10 25 GND Fig 2 14 CN15 Spindle Prot C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling
18. bara para OFTEN usen PITCH coup FIND P Methods of data parameter setting are the same those of bit parameters FIND P INPUT o input the required parameter serial number and then press to position the to select the required parameter to modify or press 12 Press cursor to the parameter DATA 2 Press the numerical key to set numerical value and then press HT to confirm the setting completion 3 Press oo tt y to select other required parameters to set ADD TO In BIT PARA page press BIT PARA to enter the sub menu press n to set corresponding parameter number to often used parameter page to display 205 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT 8113 T41 HBH NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0015 X 0024 X 400 0032 X 200 N MEER 400 Y 200 psc pS 400 II 200 0016 X 1 0025 2000 0034 X 0 EM 1 0026 100 IN 0 1 0027 8000 Z 0022 X 7600 0028 200 0041 200 Saat 7606 0029 100 0042 X 100 E 7600 0030 50 II 100 0023 X 100 0031 X 5000 MEM 100 y 100 EID 5000 0043 X 5000 E 100 ME 5000 MEME 5000 0015 Command multiplier for each axis 09 27 38 ES OFTEN a zb mll 3 OFTEN USED PARA page O Lo OFTEN USED D In PARAMETER page press to enter often used parameter page as follows
19. gt o o D 5 Q x 0 actions of manipulator not to detect the reference point and spindle orientation signal ELDH 1 spindle releasing clamping tool function valid 0 spindle releasing clamping tool function invalid HILT1 HILT2 parameters set as follows BT40 tool Turret tool tool magazine tool magazine magazine magazine function invalid function invalid qq qoum wat 0 1 eer rey ei 448 Appendix ELDC 1 MDc Vertical panel releasing clamping tool key is valid 0 MDc external releasing clamping tool key is valid HTCY 1 turret tool magazine starts toolpot spinning and do not check the spindle is at the 2 reference point 0 turret tool magazine starts toolpot spinning and check the spindle is at the 2 reference point CCWT 1 Delay detection of toolpot counting reversely 0 No delay detection of toolpot counting reversely Data parameters Initial tool No Max tool No Call the initiate M code of the subroutine Call the initiate program No 0 9999 corresponding to M code Allow number of M code calling subroutine 0 8000 0 this function invalid e M function instructions M54 make the spindle release tool M55 make the spindle clamp tool M65 make the toolpot turn right close to the spindle M66 make the toolpot turn left away from the spindle M60 start tool magazine rotating M61 finish tool change and update the system tool messages M19 the spindle orienta
20. s GSK C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual eo Negative magnification rate When a negative scale is specified mirror image is formed see related explanations of programmable mirror image e Scale of different figure 1 Magnification rate of linear scaling ab alb Scaling magnification of X axis Y cd cd Scaling magnification of Y axis 0 Scaling center U le Q Q 3 gt le Programmed figure 2 Scaling of circular interpolation Even different magnifications are specified to circular interpolation tool will not trace ellipse When magnifications for axes are different and the circular interpolation is programmed with radius R its figure is as follows magnification 2 is applied to X axis and magnification 1 is applied to Y axis Scaled shape 0 0 100 0 200 0 G90 G00 X0 0 Y100 0 G51 X0 0 YO 0 20 0 12000 J1000 G02 X100 0 Y0 0 R100 0 F500 Above commands are equivalent to the following commands G90 G00 X0 0 Y100 0 20 0 G02 X200 0 Y0 0 R200 0 F500 Magnification of radius R is depends on l or J whichever is larger When different magnifications are applied to axes and circular interpolation is specified with I J K alarm occurs after scaled if a circular is not formed 3 Tool compensation The scaling is invalid in tool radius compensation values tool length compensation values and tool offset values Only the figure before scaling are proceeded
21. 0150 0 Mcode has been commanded when notin analog spindle 389 gt D 5 Q x GER CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Alarm No wen Alarm Message WAY J TYPE 0 Tool ofsetnumber is out ofrange 0 32 Tool number isn t in the range specified between No 5025 and No 5026 data a MR 018 0 Data commanded in G02 or G03 can t build an correct arc or error in NO 3410 II ae KE EE ircular i ES 0 The value of Jor Kis not correct in G02 or G3 command cmo 0 TheeinoGMipmgam 0250 0 There is no tool in the current tool group in Tool Life 0260 0 The curent tool group is not defined in Tool Lfe 0270 0 There are more than 8 tools in the current tool group in Tool Life oso 0 Tool Lfe is iwalid DontuseG10L3 cmo o GhdotbeuedbereGI 0300 o The offset plane is changed in using tool ofset 0310 0 The plane and coordinate are not changed in using comer 0320 0 Helical interpolation is invalid if defined plane hasnt movement 033 0 a Offset is founded or changed the corresponding move displacement must be defined 0340 o role data or comp Direction is wrong in cutter comp Coso 0 TheGicmmotbeusedinofset Coso 0 Fomatofcomeriswong 03 0 0 The number of characteris more than 256inone block 038 0 The switch of the inch system or the metric system must be headed of main program 0340 0 When radi
22. 10 15 25 FIND A K serrano D SETTING DT SETTING DC SETTING ADDRESS 3 1 K parameter setting 1 In PLC data state display page press K SETTING to enter K parameter setting display page K variable of K0000 K0009 cannot be modified amp E0007aouo o O Lo D um Q O 2 Press to select the required parameter to be modified FIND DATA Or press LESS to input the required K to be selected press um and the cursor positions to the a m parameter Press L and to move the cursor different bits of the parameter number and the screen displays definitions of the bit at the bottom 3 Press and the cursor positions to the corresponding state bit press E repetitively to switch the state bit between O and 1 modify the state of the selected K bit Input the parameter state bit by inputting the digit key O and 1 4 Press if y l to move the cursor to complete modification 3 2 D parameter setting 1 In PLC data state display page press o SETTING enter D parameter setting display page 218 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI SB481 TB2 HAB LADDER gt PLC DATA gt D SETTING 00001 NO3143 NO NUMERICAL MINIMUM MAX IMUM D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0006 D0007 D0008 D0009 D0010 D0011 RR 10 15 44 e K SETTING o seme DT SETTING DC SETTING Ls c 2E E EE
23. 3 The additional linear axis can not performed a circular arc cutting G02 03 otherwise the P S alarm may occur 4 The pitch error of additional linear axis and the compensation function of inverse interval are same as the basis three axis 4 6 Rotation Axis of The Additional Axis Oo Input unit Pulse equivalent of 980MDC s rotary axis is set by No 187 maximum output pulse frequency is 2M When the selection is output based on the direction of pulse adding it can be inputted a maximum speed n 60 f 36000 833 33 r min e Rotation axis speed The feedrate of rotation axis is regarded the degree min as a unit When the linear axis X Y and Z is performed a linear interpolation with the rotation axis the speed specified with F mm min is the compound feedrate both X Y and Z and the rotation axis Feedrate calculation Calculate the required time when the feedrate is performed to the end then the feedrate unit of rotation axis is changed into deg min For example G91 G01 X20 0 C40 0 F300 0 The unit of C axis is switched into 40mm from the 40 0 degree The required time to the end is 20 407 300 0 14907 min The speed of C axis is 40 0 14907 Note When there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration the axis names of additional rotation axes are expressed with C 0268 3 deg min e The cycle function of rotation axis The coordinate cycle function of the additional rotation axis setting is ena
24. 3 2 System backup recover function With different operation authority the user can backup and resume corresponding files With 2 level operation authority the user can backup and resume part programs parameters pitch compensation tool offset ladder parameters ladder and upgrade the system With 3 level operation authority the user can backup and resume part programs parameters pitch compensation tool offset and ladder parameters With 4 level operation authority the user can backup part programs parameters pitch compensation tool offset and resume part programs and tool offset 201 O Lo D um Q r O CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MDI 50008 TAA HAB B GSK990MDc B u SYSTEM FILES LB 00001 CNC IH PARAM PAR I 00002 CNC LD TOFF CHP 13 09000 CNC LPS HOFF WMP N 09001 CNC PROGRAM o PAA LA 00001 CNC LA 00082 CNC LM 00200 CNC I 09080 CNC L 09001 CNC lt 17 26 24 e 17 20 24 secr smirene oigo mea System backup resume page O E MDI SBBBB TAO HAA 3 BACKUP OPTION z MPARAMETER m PROGRAM v OFFSET 1 SELECT YOU NEED 5 ITEMS PRESS EXECU TE SOFT KEY TO BA CKUP RESTORE M PITCH COMP v PLC PARA iv PLC iv LOG RESUME OPTION 2 CORRESPONDING IT EM OF RESTORING CO ULD NOT BE SELECTE D WHEN THE FILE DO ESN T EX T PARAMETER M PROGRAM T OFFSET T PITCH COMP FPLC PARA T PLC SO
25. Command example G18X Z ZX plane X Y Invariable plane ZX plane Note 1 The plane selection command can share the same block with other group G commands Note 2 The move command is regardless of the plane selection For example the Z axis is not On XY plane the Z axis movement is regardless of the XY plane in command G17Z_ 3 10 Conversion of Inch and Metric G20 and G21 Format G20 G21 Function The input unit either inch or metric is chosen by G code Explanation Unit system least setting unit The G code should be placed in front of the program when inch and metric is switched each other Before the coordinate system is set it is specified by a single block command The following unit systems vary according to the G code for inch or metric conversion 1 Feedrate command value by F 2 Command value related to the position 3 Offset 45 D x O Q Q 3 gt Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 4 1 scale value for MPG 5 Step amount value 6 current coordinate value Note 1 The G code for inch or metric conversion when the power is turned on is the same as that at the power off Note 2 Changing G20 and G21 are unallowed during programming Or the alarm occurs Note 3 When the unit systems between the machine and input are different the max error is 0 5 of the min move unit and the error is not be cumulated Note 4 As the inch input G20 and the metric in
26. Fig 2 19 Encode signal circuit 2 4 3 Connection of Spindle Encoder Interface The connection of GSK980MDc to spindle encoder is shown in Fig 2 20 twisted pair cables are used to connection Gs RGOM Ic CHE 1 Encode terminal Fig 2 20 Connection of GSK980MDc to encoder 2 5 Connection to Handwheel 2 5 1Handwheel Interface Definition N Jo PNE 13 GND d EE 12 GND es 25 11 GND See 24 10 GND e o 23 9 X63 a 29 8 X62 e 2 T e e 20 6 X6 1 e 19 5 X6 0 eze l 4 HB e 17 3 HB e amp e 16 2 HA 15 1 HA ae 4 14 S N N Fig 2 21 CN31 handwheel interface DB26 male s Address X6 0 X6 1 X6 2 X6 3 X6 4 X6 5 312 ocket Symbol EHDX EHDY EHDZ EMPO EMP1 EMP2 X63 Signa Explanation l HA HA Handwheel A phase signal HB HB Handwheel B phase signal 424V X6 0 X6 5 PLC adress 5V Direct current VCC GND 5V 5V Function of the Ladder Diagram Function External MPG X axis selection signal External MPG Y axis selection signal External MPG Z axis selection signal External x1 override External x10 override External x100 override Chapter2 Interface Signals 2 5 2 Signal Explanation HA HA HB HB are the input signals of handwheel A and B phases Its interior connection circuit is shown in Fig 2 22 93 470R U55 XHA TLP181 Na Na XHA R96 470R U57 XHB XHB Fig 2 2
27. NO VALUE G NO VALUE G NO VALUE i 0000 mmm 0200 a 0400 a 0001 0 0201 0 0401 0 0002 0 0202 0 0402 0 0003 0 0203 0 0403 0 0004 0 0204 0 0404 0 0005 0 0205 0 0405 0 0006 0 0206 0 0406 0 0007 0 0207 0 0407 0 0008 0 0208 0 0408 0 0009 0 0209 0 0409 0 0010 0 0210 0 0410 0 0011 0 0211 0 0411 0 0012 0 0212 0 0412 0 0013 07 0213 07 0413 07 09 29 57 BIT PARA DATA PARA OFTEN USED rires cow FIND P There are 1024 pitch error compensation points Pitch range of each axis can be modified by 3620 3621 3622 The user can view or set pitch compensation value corresponded to each compensation number EJ 1 Y a In pitch compensation page press l i E i l to select the required pitch compensation number to set its compensation value or press PIDE to search the pitch compensation number position the cursor to the required compensation number to modify its compensation value DATA When the operation authority is equal to or more than 2 level is pressed to make compensation value of the selected compensation number be modification state Press numerical key to input DATA INPUT i compensation value and then m to confirm the modification completion 1 3 7 Diagnosis interface DIAGNOSIS Press to enter diagnosis interface including diagnosis and system information subpage which content can be viewed by pressing corresponding soft key 207 O Lo
28. Press the address key and key in the program No 4 Press EM or a key the program retrieved will be shown on the screen if the program doesn t exist the system prompts the required file does not exist at the bottom of the CNC Press the program retrieved will be shown on the screen if the program doesn t exist the idcm somes PROGRAM DOES NOT EXIST Note In step 4 if the program to be retrieved does not exist a new program will be setup by CNC system after pressing key 2 Scanning method 1 Select the Edit or Auto mode O Lo D um Q r O PROGRAM Press pac key to enter the PRG display page 3 Press the address key 4 Press the Or 0 key to display the next or previous program 5 Repeat the step 3 4 above to display the saved program one by one 3 File open method Select the edit or operation mode 1 Press key twice to enter the page of file list 2 Press I keys to move the cursor to the file will be selected 3 Press key to select a file 267 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR EOB 4 Press E08 key to open the selected file Note The file can not be opened if the expanded name is not CNC 7 1 2 Program Start o 1 Press key to select the Auto mode 2 Press A key to start the program and the program execution begins Note Since the program execution begins from the block where the cursor locates before pressing the Be
29. Spindle ccw Spindle stop Q Spindle ccw Spindle stop gt Q Point R P Point R O peration 3 Operation 5 O peration 3 Operation 5 i Spindle stop Spindle cw Spindle stop a Spindle cw o P Operation 4 PointZ P Operation 4 PointZ Explanations When the tapping operation 3 is being performed the feedrate override can not be adjusted when the operation 5 is performing the speed override value is set by the data parameterNo 5211 when the data parameter No 5211 is set to 0 the override value is fixed as 100 When the tapping operation 3 is being performed the linear acceleration or deceleration constant value is set by the data parameter No 5261 when the tapping operation 5 is performed the linear acceleration constant value is set by data parameter No 5271 if the data parameter No 5271 is se to O the linear acceleration deceleration time constant in operation 5 is set by the data parameter No 5261 3 30 2 Peck Rigid Tapping Code format High speed standard peck left handed rigid tapping G74 X Y Z R PFD _L Q C High speed standard peck right handed rigid tapping G84 X Y Z R_P_F I LQ C Code function When the peck tapping is performed in rigid tapping due to chips sticking to the tool or 113 U O Q Q 3 3 Q U A O Q Q 3 3 Q GS5R CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual increased cutting resistance in such cases the preferab
30. T esp D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE CN62 interface 11 Y1 2 Note 1 The I O function of GSK980MDc drilling and milling CNC except the fixed address is defined by ladder diagram Note 2 If output function is valid the output signal is on to OV If output function is invalid the output signal is cut off by high impendance Note 3 If input function is valid except X5 0 X5 3 the input signal is on to 24V If input function is invalid the input signal is cut off with 24V Note 4 The effectiveness of 24V 0V is equal to GSK980MDc power box terminals that have the same name Note 5 XDEC YDEC ZDEC DEC4 DEC5 ESP SKIP are fixed signals that can t be altered 2 8 1 Input Signal Input signal means the signal from machine to CNC when this signal is on with 24V the input is valid when it is off with 24V the input is invalid The contact point of input signal at machine side should meet the following conditions The capacity of the contact point DC30V 16mA above Leakage current between contact points in open circuit 1mA below Voltage drop between contact points in closed circuit 2V below current 8 5mA including cable voltage drop There are two external input types for input signals one type is input by trigger point switch whose signals are from keys stroke switch and contacts of relay at machine side as is shown in Fig 2 28 316 Chapter2 Interface
31. The feed hold is disabled between the movement 3 5 in commands G74 and G84 but the indicator of feed hold will light up But the control stops till the operation 6 If the feed hold is performed again in operation 6 then it is stopped immediately c Override The feedrate override is considered for 100 percent in the operation G74 and G84 the override change is disabled 9 When the bit 1 of parameter 3 D R is set to 1 the D value in tool compensation page indicates diameter value D x O Q Q 3 gt Q 3 24 5 Examples for Modal Data Specified in Canned Cycle No Data Specification Explanation N0010 GOO X Ms GOO positioning at the rapid traverse and rotating the spindle N0020 G81 X Y Z R Because it is the beginning for the canned cycle so the value F needs to be specified for Z R and F The corresponding hole machining data is same to the previous N0030 hole only the position Y is different so G81Z R F can be omitted As for the hole position is shifted for Y hole machining is performed further by using the G81 The hole position needs to be moved along the X axis as for the N0040 pervious one The Z R and F of previous hole and the P specified by this hole are taken as hole machining data by the G82 The hole machining is not executed all of the hole machining data N0050 G80 X_Y_M5 are cancelled except for the F The GO positioning is performed with XY The Z and R are needed
32. USER MANUAL GSK 980MDc Milling CNC System W9 SAS ON SUNIN IdIN086 MSD agar M ef sp Saca ZZ o e Iz pepe er 2 0 95 ORGAO OSS HERERO aims 7 fe00 aoe n TINE 12 SS SBRZ ol GSK CNC EQUIPMENT CO LIE i rore or me arno eee voce we Add A pi Luochong North Road Luochongwei Guangzhou Oo00000 go soem EIEIEIE3ER ES ES ET 3 anal oa Http www gsk com cn E mail salel gsk com cn EJEIETETETEXER RS ss Bee Hans Tel 86 20 81796410 81797922 Fax 86 20 81993683 All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice May 2012 Edition 2 August 2012 Printing 1 TH131212 35525 CHINA GSK CNC EQUIPMENT CO LTD ATTP WWW GSK COM CN E MAIL SALE1 GSK COM CN si This user manual describes all items concerning the operation of the system in detail as much as possible However it is impractical to give particular descriptions of all unnecessary and or unavailable operations of the system due to the manual content limit product specific operations and other causes Therefore the operations not specified herein shall be considered impossible or unallowable ae This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is against the law for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of GSK and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their leg
33. block after a waiting time same as A above C when S code and feed movement are both in the same program block instructions S code have been outputted over a time that set by data parameter NO 3740 the CNC begins to detect SAR signal then initiates feeding when SAR signal is 1 eSignal Address SAR Spindle actual speed signal detect F40 F41 F202 F203 eSignal Type NC PLC eSignal Function NC detects the current spindle speed F40 F41 are used by the 1 spindle andF202 and F203 are used by the 2 spindle eSignal Address Spindle orientation signal SOR G29 5 When this signal is 1 spindle stops while is 0 spindle is spinning in a certain speed set by data parameter No 3732 No matter how is the gear state spindle will rotate at a certain speed so in the mechanical spindle positioning it can be used to rotate into the brake and pin and so on In M series spindle motor can be made rotating in a certain speed by setting data parameter NO 3732 in which situation because the rotating speed is constant in the gear switch devices it can be used to gear shift miscellaneous function treatment Input instructions ML uio NM Bos stop commands Location detect 1 spindle stop signal gt o o D 5 Q x spindle orientation signal i y Max 70ms Output to spindle instructions Actuating signal spindle speed Oo min 414 Appen
34. indicating that the current toolcase No O is 1 If the data corresponding to the toolpot is not 1 please check machine tools electric is correct or not OBC 4 there is no key in 980MDc V panel If other keys needed to be set the ladder diagram should be altered gt o o D 5 Q x B Manual toolpot rotation In 980MDc V system in the mode of MPG STEP or MANUAL press the tool magazine rotation key the toolpot will rotate CW a tool location If the toolpot will not rotate 1 please make sure the tool magazine parameter K11 6 and K11 7 set in pot tool magazine valid 2 please make sure that the CNC is in the mode of MPG STEP or MANUAL 3 press the key check up in ladder gt PLC to see Y1 6 has an output or not If Y1 6 has an output please check the machine tools electric part that whether it has inputted to toolpot motor to start toolpot 442 Appendix spin 4 there is no function in 980MDc V panel If other keys needed to be set the ladder diagram should be altered B Auto toolpot rotation In AUTO or MDI mode input T instruction and do not beyond the range of data parameter NO5026 Input T instruction start the system the toolpot of the system will rotate If not 1 please make sure the tool magazine parameter K11 6 and K11 7 set pot tool magazine valid 2 make sure the current T instruction data inputted is equal to ATC SET toolcase number in No 0 toolcase toolcase number in spindle If they
35. o After power on if G28 is executed prior to the manual machine zero return the process of G28 machine zero return should be consistent with manual machine zero return and the deceleration signal and one rotation signal should be detected The G28 machine zero return hereafter will not detect the deceleration signal and one rotation signal but directly position to zero point e During the process of point AB and BR the two axes move at two independent speeds therefore the paths may not be linear o After the execution of G28 machine zero return the bit 7 of parameter No 13 decides whether cancel cutter compensation or not e In compensation mode if command G28 is specified the compensation will be cancelled in the intermediate point The compensation mode is cancelled automatically after reference point return f zero point switch is not equipped on the machine tool G28 command and machine zero return are disabled e The intermediate point can only be established during the movement from the intermediate point to the reference point which is followed the movement from the start point to the intermediate point e After the modification of parameters which set the zero return point manual reference point return is necessary G28 command can be executed later e 3 12 Return from Reference Point G29 Format G29X Y Z Function When a rapid traverse is performed from the current point to mid point it positions to the specified
36. 0 0 1757 1 0 0 LEmesn2 1 0 1 9 1 9 1 90 Outputresut 1 0 90 0 1 1 21 9 Example 1 IF 210121 amp amp 102 gt 3 GOTO 12 while 101 gt 1 and 102 gt 3 are truth the system skips to N12 block otherwise it does not execute the skip Set 101 to 2 and 102 to 5 and the program executes skip Example 2 only one of IF 101 gt 1 2310223 GOTO 12 101 gt 1 and 102 gt 3 is truth skipping to N12 is executed otherwise the skip is not executed 101 is set to 3 the system executes the skip even if 102 value is anyone Note B Macro program logical expression can execute the logical for many expressions but their output result must be 0 or 1 Output result 1 of logical expression means the condition to be true 0 means not be true Logical expression must be with IF or while statement otherwise an alarm occurs Logical expression supports judgement statement of a single expression For example IF 101 or IF 1 or IF A gt 088 101 101 or the constant reading data is O or 1 the expression can run an alarm occurs when the data is 1 0 5 4 5Repetition WHILE Statement Specify a conditional expression after WHILE While the specified condition is satisfied the program from DO to END is executed If not program execution proceeds to the block after END Example ILE Conditional expression Dom m 1 2 3 Program If the condition is If the condition not fulfilled is fulfilled END m Explanations Whil
37. 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 00000000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 0000001 1 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 000000160 0008 00011111 c 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 000001 11 c 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 i 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 01000101 0650 00000000 0006 kkk xxx xxx 7M5 7M4 ZWZ ZMY ZMX BITO Ref point X return in Mode 0 B 1 C 09 25 23 ooo l 2 DATA PARA page DATA PARA O In PARAMETER page press to enterer data parameter page Press E to enter each page to view or modify revelant parameters as follows c In DATA PARA page there is a line of Chinese prompt displaying the parameter definition where the O current cursor is 5 EDIT 88815 T36 HAD PARAMETER gt DATA PARAMETER 00001 N09390 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0015 X 0024 X 400 0032 X 200 cce BE 400 Y 200 gt H 1 BED 400 i 200 0016 X 1 0025 2000 0034 X 0 sec 1 0026 100 IN 0 1 0027 3000 Z 0 0022 X 7600 0028 200 0041 200 7600 0029 100 0042 X 100 n 7600 80030 50 IMSS 100 0023 X 100 0031 X 5000 IM 100 100 MED 5000 0043 X 5000 gt Pi 100 MELLLIS 5000 Y 5000 0015 Command multiplier for each axis 09 27 03 BIT PARA
38. 101 o 102 G65 Hm R 100 P 101 Q15 101 15 o 100 G65 Hm Q 100 R 100 P 102 102 100 o 100 Note 1 G65 H should be commanded prior to operation or jump command Note 2 when P code is commanded in G65 block G65 P means macro program call H means argument No operation or jump command is performed Note 3 At most 4 decimal numbers of the constant decimal part can be obtained for rounding 3 digit numbers can be displayed in the window e Code function explanation U im O e um 9 3 3 e 1 Variable value assignment 2 J G65 H01 PI QZJ example G65 H01 P 101 Q125 101 125 G65 H01 P 101 Q 110 101 110 G65 H01 P 101 Q 102 101 102 2 Addition operation 1 J K G65 H02 P I QZJ R K example G65 HO2 P 101 Q 102 R15 101 102 15 G65 H02 P 101 Q 110 R 102 101 110 102 3 Subtraction operation l J FK G65 H03 P I QZJ R K example G65 H03 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 4 Multiplication operation Zl J x K 145 G EsSsIN CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual G65 H04 PFI Q J R K example G65 H04 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 x 103 5 Division operation Zl J K G65 H05 PFI Q J RAK example G65 HOS P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 Note The divisor k cannot be 0 otherwise an alarm occurs 6 OR operation Zl J OR K G65 H11 P I Q J R K example G65 H11 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 OR 10
39. 141 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual i Used to read all 32 bits of a signal at one time Note Please refer to the GSK980TD PLC User Manual for the relationships between variables and F G signals e Tool compensation value tool compensation value can be read and written Compensation No Tool length compensation Cutter compensation Geometric H Wear H Geometric D Wear D 2201 2001 2601 2401 2202 2002 2602 2402 U im O e um 9 3 3 e 2203 2003 2603 2403 2231 2031 2631 2431 2232 2032 2632 2432 e Automatic operation control The control state of automatic operation can be changed Variable Variable Completion of an Single block d No value auxiliary function E Enabled To be awaited Disabled To be awaited Enabled Not to be awaited Disabled Not to be awaited Note 1 When the power is turned on the value of this variable is 0 Note 2 When single block stop is enabled G46 1 is 1 the state of 3003 can change the execution of single block stop Note 3 When single block stop is disabled G46 1 is 0 single block stop operation is not performed even if the single block switch is set to ON Note 4 When a wait for the completion of auxiliary function M S and T functions is not specified program execution proceeds to the next block before completion of auxiliary functions Also distribution completion signal DEN is not output Variable No vanale F
40. 4 EGRADE OK CLOCK SET TIME bw STOP TTE CENTER STOP TIME DiC LIST SELECT SWITCHING LAY TO E DISR COPY TO ONC BACKUP SELECT SELECT ALL CANCEL ALL DIAGNOSS SELECT PATH PERFORMI DIAGNOSIS LOCK SCREEN CNC UPDATE PERFORM CNC VERSION FIND PLC 1 0 STATE X Y F GRA C T FIND WINI LEVELL WIN LEVEL WINS PO SELECT BLOCK OK Ago TD FIND CALLER o LL cssc FIND PARAMETER NEXT FIND COMMAND LAST CANCEL K SETTING D SETTING DT SETTING DC SETTING FIND ADDRESS O Lo D um Q O MONITOR PLC DATA Pi PARAMETER PARAMETER TRACK DISPLAY START BIT PARA ADD TO OFTEN USED DATA PARA J ADD TO OFTEN USED OFTEN USED WOVE LP MOVE DOWN FATUO ORDER REMOVE FROM OFTEN USED REMOVE ALL 200M DOME md CHANGE PTTCH COMP CENTER DISPLAY FIND GRAGH FEATURE 182 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 3 1 Position Interface Press to enter position interface which includes pages ABSOLUTE RELATIVE INTEGRATED and POS amp PRG and these pages can be viewed by corresponding soft function key 1 ABSOLUTE POS display page The X Y Z coordinates displayed are the absolute position of the tool in current workpiece coordinate system these coordinates are memorized as power is down EDIT 58229 T58 HB ABSOLUTE POS 00001 NO
41. 5 compensation data xci of macro me Edition of part program Editmode 234 ON A 9 3 3 Operation of File List e Files in the U disk 289 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Related operations Operation Authority of Program Parameter mode CNC switch switch Opening of gt 9000 Edit auto d program file 9000 mode Edition after gt E v program file a Edit mode E 3 4 Note Open indicates EOB operation e Files in the CNC Related operations Operation Authority of Program Parameter ONO Opening ot mm e ae Le program file 9000 Bode Edition after program file 9000 Edit mode opening 9000 e Data transmission U disk 2CNC Related operations Operation ineo of Program Parameter mode Dupl f gt uplication o gt 9000 moda program file EN ASA e Data transmission CNC U disk Related operations Operation gp of Program Parameter mode switch p Duplication of gt gt 9000 uplication o Edit mode program file E 9 3 4 Backup Resume Operation e Backup CNC gt U Transmitted data Operation pere of Program Parameter mode switch switch Seer reme parameter A Part program program 2 oa 4 tact offset MDI mode Pitch BE 2 L3 4 Ladder Legem 2 284 4 Ladder 2 3 4 e Resume U disk gt CNC Transmitted data Operation C of Program Parameter mode switch switch System parameter MDI
42. 55x key to make the machine lock indicator in State area to light up it means 9 that it has entered the machine lock state While in the machine lock mode 1 The machine carriage doesn t move the MACHINE in the INTEGRATED POS page of the POSITION interface does not vary too The RELATIVE POS and ABSOLUTE POS DIST TO GO are refreshed normally 2 M S T commands can be executed normally 7 3 4 MST Lock In Auto mode the ways to make MST lock function valid are as follows MST 9 MST Da Da Press the key to make the MST lock indicator LE State area to light up it means that it has entered the MST lock state And the carriage move is not performed by M S T commands Note When the MST lock is valid it has no effect on the execution of M00 M30 M98 M99 7 3 5 Block Skip If a block in program is not needed to be executed and not to be deleted this block skip function can be used When the block is headed with sign and Block skip function is valid this block is skipped without execution in Auto mode In Auto mode the way to make block skip function valid is as follows 5 Press the key to make the block skip indicator 9 amp in State area to light up it means that the block skip function is valid Note While the block skip function is invalid the blocks headed with signs are executed normally in Auto mode 7 3 6 Optional Stop In AUTO mode the valid optional stop function is as follows
43. Command format G10 Lm Pn Rx Command explanation m modified data type n data serial number x input value is determined to absolute or increment by G90 G91 3 7 1 Modifying Tool Compensation Data Tool compensation Command format Explanation type Geometry G10 L10 P P tool compensation number compensation value R_ of H command Geometry G10 L P R Tool compensation value is sum of it compensation value R y adding the value of specified tool of D command compensation number in absolute value 12 command G90 or incremental value value of H command command G91 Wear compensation G10 L13 P Note Geometry compensation value of tool radius compensation D cannot be negative otherwise an alarm occurs 3 7 2 Modifying a Workingpiece Coordinate System Command format G10 L2 Pn IPL n 0 modify workpiece zero float n 1 6 modify workpiece zero floats of workpiece coordinate system 1 6 IP coordinate setting value IP value is a setting value of corresponding coordinate system When G91 is executed the specified value of setting value IP of current coordinate system is a setting value of a new coordinate system Corresponding coordinate system s value of default axis does not change When P is defaulted a coordinate system is not set which is taken an alarm An alarm occurs when the specified P is beyond 0 6 An alarm occurs when the specified coordinate data is beyond the above range When a program is exec
44. D um Q r O O Lo D um Q p O CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 1 System diagnosis page DIAGNOSIS Press to enter diagnosis interface press soft key nias to enter the system diagnosis page including keyboard diagnosis status diagnosis and auxiliary function parameters which can be viewed by pressing 3 AUTO 83427 T38 HOO DIAGNOSIS CNC DATA STATE 00001 N03288 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0000 0000000 0012 12 0024 00011000 0001 00000001 0013 13 0025 00011001 0002 0000001 0014 14 0026 0001101 0003 0000001 1 0015 00001111 0027 00011011 0004 000001 0016 00000000 0028 00011100 0005 00000101 0017 00000000 0029 00011101 0006 00000110 0018 00000000 0030 0001111 0007 000001 11 0019 0031 00011111 0008 00001000 0020 00000000 0032 001 0009 00001001 0021 00000000 0033 00100001 001 1 0022 00000000 0034 0010001 0011 11 0023 00000000 0035 00100011 0000 ESP xxx xxx DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX BIT ESP signal There are two lines to display diagnosis number contents the first displays English abbreviations of all bits of the diagnosis number where the current cursor is and display of their diagnosis bit can be changed by pressing or V the second displays Chinese definitions of all bits of the diagnosis number where the cursor is LOCK Press _ SeREEN to lock the screen After lock the use
45. E Ni 4 f Y axis i ON if L e start position X axis unit mm Perform tool setting in the mode of offset cancellation after finishing the tool setting and set the tool radius D in OFFSET page Table 4 2 Geometric H Wearing H Geometric D Wearing D 01 T e ae 157 C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK 07 NS e 2 000 0 000 08 Programs NO G92 XO YO ZO Tool are positioned at start position XO YO and ZO when the absolute coordinate system is specified N1 G90 G17 G00 G41 D07 X250 0 Y550 0 Start up cutter the tool is shifted to the tool path by the distance specified in DO7 geometric radius of DO7 is set to 2 0mm tool wearing O then the tool radius is 2mm U im O e um 9 3 3 e N2 G01 Y900 0 F150 Specifies machining from P1 to P2 N3 X450 0 Specifies machining from P2 to P3 N4 G03 X500 0 Y1150 0 R650 0 Specifies machining from P3 to P4 N5 G02 X900 0 R 250 0 Specifies machining from P4 to P5 N6 G03 X950 0 Y900 0 R650 0 Specifies machining from P5 to P6 N7 G01 X1150 0 Specifies machining from P6 to P7 N8 Y550 0 opecifies machining from P7 to P8 N9 X700 0 Y650 0 Specifies machining from P8 to P9 N10 X250 0 Y550 0 opecifies machining from P9 to P1 N11 GOO G40 XO YO Cancels the offset mode the tool is returned to the start position XO YO 6 2 Offset Path Explanation for Cutter Radius Compensation 6 2 1 Conception for inner side or outer side Inner side a
46. F lt Rx0O x mm min 180 Thereinto R Indicates the cylinder radius of specified cylindrical interpolation unit mm Wmax Upper cutting feedrate of each axis parameter No 27 it of rotary axis deg min Note Speed command F should be specified in the mode G94 If it is specified in G95 P S alarm occurs Auxiliary function e Command can be performed correctly in cylindrical interpolation mode with auxiliary function M e Please command tool T H commands before cylindrical interpolation If it is commanded in cylindrical interpolation mode P S alarm occurs Tool nose radius compensation To perform tool nose radius compensation in the cylindrical interpolation mode cancel any ongoing tool nose radius compensation before entering the cylindrical interpolation mode Then start and stop tool nose radius compensation in the cylindrical interpolation mode The tool offset value can not be changed in cylindrical interpolation mode Cylindrical interpolation accuracy In the cylindrical interpolation mode the travel amount of rotary axis specified by an angle is converted to a distance of a linear axis on the outer surface in the system so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with another axis After interpolation this travel amount is changed into angle Therefore when the radius of a cylinder is small the actual amount of travel amount may differ from the specified one after the travel amount i
47. Not inserted U When it is identified the system displays file list of the U disk catalog as follows EDIT 50008 TUB HAB DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 00200 NO0000 de GSK980MDc be lu SYSTEM FILES I 3 PARAM PAR HE TOFF CMP LTA HOFF WHP PROGRAM LM 00001 CNC LN 00082 CNC I 09000 CNC LM 09001 CNC E RECYCLER LM 00001 CNC HA 00902 CNC LM 00280 CNC HA 09080 CNC LTA 09801 CNC CNC E SETTING ca ee The left of the above page displays CNC catalog message and the right displays the U disk catalog message When the system has not checked the U disk the right does not display contents Notes 1 The current catalog page only displays catalog message of current open files 2 The system does not support Chinese Traditional characters temporarily Note File name composed of O 4 bit digit CNC is considered to CNC format file such as 01234 CNC 10 2 Often Used File Operation Function Introduction 10 2 1 File extension and return Move the cursor to the required extension file 203 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MDI sanan TAA HOD DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 0200 NE N i GSK980MDc dy u SYSTEM FILES HA 123 1d2 LD PARAM PAR M 2012 03 16_09 30 19_272 ji LT TOFF CMP LM GSK980HC_Test LD2 LTY WOFF WMP HM GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LADDER FILES amp 5 gsk980mdc backup IT GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LM GSK980MDc_CNOSHRES IMG
48. O e um 9 3 3 e GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual In cutter compensation C when the move command such as G01 X 101 adopts variables P S alarm occurs Because cutter compensation C mode is block preread mode the end point of the next block is essential for calculating the current transmission point position Specifying X 101 an unknown data does not enable a correct calculation of the current transmission point e Single block operation MDI In MDI mode macro programs can be specified but macro program call cannot be executed In MDI mode e Skip A appearing in the middle of an expression enclosed in brackets on the right hand side of an arithmetic expression is regarded as a division operator it is not regarded as the specified for an optional block skip code e Reset A reset operation clears any called states of custom macro programs and subprograms and cursor returns to the first block of the main program 154 Chapter Cutter Compensation CHAPTER6 CUTTER COMPENSATION 6 1 Application for Cutter Radius Compensation 6 1 1 Brief Generally the parts machining process is programmed according to parts drawing in one point on a tool As for the tool used actually because of the processing or other requirement the tool is not an ideal point but an arc only The position offset exists between actual cutting point and ideal point when the cutting feed is performed It m
49. Positioning signal is used for gear shift 0 Positioning signal is used for spindle orientation Em MSI Multi Spindle control function is B type 0 Multi Spindle control function is A type MSEN 2 1 Multi Spindle function is valid 0 Multi Spindle function is invalid 0 6 5 0 PLA 1 PLC axis control is valid 0 PLC axis control is invalid PRPD 1 PLC axis rapidly uses input value 0 PLC axis rapidly uses input parameter 0 7 0 0 CHPW CHPW 1 Real time detection for the stability of voltage isn t performed 335 Ii T esp 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 0 Real time detection for the stability of voltage is performed EXTIO 1 External remote IO is valid 0 External remote IO is invalid 0 8 0 0 p L2 L1 LO Interface language selection Chinese 90 09 9 Ew j 9 9 1 Fame 9 or LS Sw 9 1 Germen Italian Russian Komm 31 DISP PROD 1 Rel coord don t with comp 0 Rel coord with comp DISP 1 Enter absolute page after power on 0 Enter relative page after power on MER 1 After the last block is executed in MDI operation the executed programs are not deleted 0 After the last block is executed in MDI operation the executed programs are deleted MCL 1 The programs edited in MDI operation are deleted by the reset operation 0 The programs edited in MDI operation are
50. Q Voltage offset value when spindle max speed analog voltage 10V output Setting range 2000 2000 unit mV 3 7 3 1 Voltage compensation for OV analog voltage output Setting range 1000 1000 unit mV 3 1 3 2 Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift or spindle speed of spindle orientation rpm Setting range 0 4095 Aldd Min clamping speed of spindle motor 12 bits code value in gearing type M Ii 3 7 3 5 3 7 3 6 Max clamping speed of spindle motor 12 bits code value in gearing type M Setting range 0 4095 3 7 4 O0 Delay of spindle speed in position signal detection Setting range 074080 unitms T esp 2 D et O Spindle motor speed when gear 1 is shifted to gear 2 12 bits code value Spindle motor speed when gear 2 is shifted to gear 3 12 bits code value Spindle motor speed when gear 3 is shifted to gear 4 12 bits code value in gearing type M Setting range 0 4095 4 9 0 0 Max spindle speed fluctuation allowed by system Setting range 50 1000 unit r min 348 Chapter 3 Parameter 3 2 5 Encoder tapping 0 02 8 Threading axes start speed Setting range 6 8000 Unit mm min 3 2 6 Rigid tapping j 5 33 RTORI 71 M29 is executed Spindle need to return zero 0 M29 is executed Spindle need not to return zero RTPCP 1 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle G73 0 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle
51. Software limit is valid after zero return at power on 0 Software limit is valid once power on G01 1 G01 status when power on 0 G00 status when power on 0 0 1 3 MZRn 71 Machine zero return in negative each axis 0 Machine zero return in positive each axis CALH 71 Length offset not cancelled in reference point return 0 Length offset cancelled in reference point return 329 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE ZRSn 1 There are machine zero point in each axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in each axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 0 1 9 CMRx each axis multiplier coefficient Setting range 1 7 32767 0 0 1 6 CMDx each axis frequency division coefficient Setting range 1 7 32767 CMR x30600 Z x CMD xL Z Electronic gear ratio formula S min command output unit Zm belt wheel teeth of lead screw a motor rotation angle for a pulse Zp Wheel teeth of motor belt L Screw lead 0 02 2 Each axis max rapid traverse speed Setting range IS C 10 24000 thereinto 5th 10 6000 Unit mm min IS B 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 02 3 Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of each axis rapid traverse ms Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms 0 0 2 4 Rapid t
52. eSignal Type NC PLC eSignal Function Indicate that whether spindle instruction exits 412 Appendix eNote instruction setting non zero speed output to spindle NC turns F1 4 to 1 when speed instruction is O then the ENB signal is set 0 In analog spindle spindle motor will rotate in a low speed in spite of NC outputs instruction O to the spindle namely analog voltage is OV because the frequency converter has a drift voltage Under this condition ENB signal can used to stop spindle motor O Signal Address Gear select signalGR1 GR2 G28 1 G28 2 The 2 spindle gear select signal GR21 GR22 G29 0 and G29 1 eSignal Type PLC CNC eSignal Function This signal informs CNC the current chosen gear stage for specific action to see previously described O Signal Address S12 bit code signal R010 R120 F036 0 F037 3 R0102 R1202 F236 0 F237 3 eSignal Type NC PLC eSignal Function This signal changes spindle speed instruction value computed by NC spindle control function into data 0 4095 and outputs the results to PLC The relationship between 10V voltage and S 12 bit code is as follows old bit code ROTOR 1209 A 2 Lov U en eSignal Address Spindle speed arrival signal Spindle speed arrival signal SAR 629 4 is input signal condition of the CNC starts cutting feed Usually when spindle comes to an appointed speed it is used to start the cutting feed At this moment
53. level ON CO ontent AJevel Edit mode ON content uonejeq Delete many serial blocks DELETE number 221 O Lo D um Q e O GSE C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Display Password Program Parameter peu Function f __ Operation j Mode bage level ON OFF ON OFF Pro ram evel Delete a block program name Edit mode 9 level ON content DELETE level 228 m ms Dem Rename a Program s ON program content eset 4 INES State 2 level State parameter ia Edit mode paramet 3 level ON er 4 level Ed 2 level Data parameter alice Edit mode paramet duel ON er Pitch compensation alios Edit mode parameter Send a part program o program name Edit mode OUTPUT send all part L 1999 Edit mode programs rum OUTPUT 2 level Tool offset Edit mode level ON 4 level State parameter Edit mode EE ON level Data parameter Edit mode Mer level Pitch compensation Edit mode 2 level ON parameter 2 level Part program Edit mode level ON 4 level Parameter switch ON OFF 2 level ON OFF setting 3 level Program switch ON OFF Ped level ON setting 4 level peojuwop INID Id H3O NO U9 IIMS Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display A l Display Password Program Parameter ort Function Operation Mode page l vel ON OFF ON OFF Automatic serial O ON OFF number ON setting ON OFF 2 level sett
54. main program or be assigned the calculated value when executing the macro body Multiple variables can be identified by numbers 1 Variable representation A number sign followed by a variable number is shown as follows i i 1 2 3 4 For example 5 109 1005 2 Omission of decimal point When a variable value is defined in a program the decimal point can be omitted For example when defining 1 123 the actual value of variable 1 is 123 000 3 Referencing variables 133 U im O e a 9 3 3 e G EsSsSIN CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual To reference the value of a variable in a program specify a word address followed by the variable number A program with an expression address Zi or lt address gt i indicates that the variable value or negative value is used as address value For example Z 110 when 110 250 it is equals to Z 250 G 130 when 130 3 it is equals to G3 4 Replace variable numbers with variables When replace variable numbers with variables 9100 rather than 100 is used the 9 followed means the replacement For example when 100 105 105 500 X 9100 and X500 are equal i e X 9100 X 100 X 105 X500 X 9100 and X 500 are equal Note Program number o sequence number N and optional block skip number cannot be followed with variables For example O71 2 N S e Variable display 1 On macro variable page Null indicate
55. number K The distance between the finish milling start point and the side of rectangle along the X axis range 99999999 99999999xleast input increment U Corner arc radius if it is omitted no corner arc transition U A O Q Q 3 gt Q Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1 5 Perform the circular and linear interpolation by the path of 2 3 4 5 6 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 7 and return to the start point 7 Returning to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command Path Related Explanation 1 The interpolation direction of transition arc is inconsistent to that of the fine milling arc when a fine milling is performed outside the rectangle The interpolation direction is the one for the fine milling arc in the command explanation 2 The commands Q P and L are disabled in this cycle but the value of Q and P are reserved as canned cycle modal value For example A finished rough milling rectangle groove is performed by the fine milling by the command G138 in canned cycle See the following figure 100 Chapter 3 G Command 7 Y Point E y Mang a E x 100 40 30 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G138 X25 Y25
56. rires cow FIND P 9 2 The Password Setting and Alteration To prevent the part programs CNC parameters from malignant alteration this GSK980MD provides an authority setting function that is graded for 5 levels By descending sequence they are the 2 level for machine builder the 3 level for equipment management the 4 level for machine operation the 5 level for basic operation and the 6 level for operation authority CNC s current operation level is displayed by CURRENT LEVEL in the authority level page The 2 level Modification of the CNC bit parameter data parameter pitch data tool offset data part program edit including macro programs PLC ladder transmission etc are allowed O Lo D um Q O The 3 level the CNC bit parameter data parameter tool offset data part program edit operations are allowed The 4 level tool offset data for tool setting macro variables part program edit operations are allowed but the CNC bit parameter data parameter pitch data operations are unallowed The 5 level current programs and tool offset data modification are allowed The 6 level Only the machine panel operation is allowed and the operations of part program edit and selection the alteration operations of CNC bit parameter data parameter pitch data tool offset data are unallowed EDIT 54378 148 HBA SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT amp ON PROGRAM SWT ON IN
57. the signal is taken as alarm signal of common converter or gear spindle F35 0 is 1 in the alarm When the 5 axis is invalid and ALM5 X5 3 pin signal is unused NO 009 is set to 0 When the 5 axis is invalid and ALM5 X5 3 pin signal is taken as the alarm signal the Level is set by NO 009 ALM5 ALM5 0 when it is connected with OV alarm occurs 1 when itt is not connected with OV alarm occurs 145 RAS TLP181 3k8 0 5W Ii _ALMn 2 4 Connection to Spindle Encoder 2 4 1 Spindle Encoder Interface Definition eN 5 N c 2 T le i por lt 15 GND Name Explanation i e 14 GND PAO PAO Encode A phase pulse 6 PBO e 13 VCC 5 PBO o 12 VCC PBO PBO Encode B phase pulse 4 PZO e 11 GND PZO PZO Encode Z phase pulse 3 PZO e io e 10 E pis Fig 2 18 CN21 Encode interface DB15 male socket 2 4 2 Signal Explanation PZO PZO PBO PBO PAO PAO are the encoder Z B A phase differential input signals respectively which are received by 26LS32 MPB MPB MPA MPA are normal square wave of phase shift 90 with the maximum signal frequency less than 1MHz the encoder pulses for GSK980MDc are set by data parameter No 3720 whose range is from O to 5000 Its interior connection circuit is shown in Fig 2 19 nzA B Z 311 Ii T esp D et O C GSK CNC GSE GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual PnO PnO AM26LS32
58. the spindle rotates one turn every time a certain feed thread lead which takes place along the tapping axis This operation does not vary even during acceleration or deceleration 112 Chapter 3 G Command 3 30 1 Rigid Tapping Code format Left handed rigid tapping G74 X_Y Z R PFO LC Right handed rigid tapping G84 X Y Z R PFY LC Code function In rigid mode tapping is performed by controlling the spindle motor as if it were a servo motor and by interpolating between the tapping axis and spindle When tapping is performed in rigid mode the spindle rotates one turn every time a certain feed thread lead which takes place along the tapping axis This operation does not vary even during acceleration or deceleration Cycle process 1 Position to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Reduce to the point R plane rapidly then to the position where the C is specified at the rapid traverse rate 3 Tapping is performed to the bottom of the hole then the spindle stops 4 Dwell time P is performed if the P is specified 5 Spindle rotates reversely returns to the point R plane the spindle then stops dwell time P is performed if the P is specified 6 Return to the origin plane if the command is G98 Code path G74 shows a sample G74 G98 G74 G99 Spindle stop Spindle stop gt O GE gt O Initial level Com Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 6 Operation 2 Point R
59. 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE 777 ist 48 FZ E VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 12 02 29 58 10 33 10 ooo o A Loca DIR USB DIR m PLC RUN gt COPY TO Press IIK and the ladder at which the cursor is is copied to the U disk When there are the same names in the U disk the system prompts whether to remove the file which is shown below MDI SAAAA TAA HB LADDER gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00002 N00000 NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Serial2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Vis 18 AZ A 4 GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V EUA E O Lo D um Q r O FILE GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE THE FILE IN OVERWRITE CAN CANCEL s 10 33 40 tocat pin USB DIR riety PLC RUN Par DATA Press and the prompt line is cancelled to suspend the copy operation Press and the file with the same name as that of the copied in the U disk is removed as follows MDI sBBBHB TAB HAD LADDER gt FILE LIST gt USB DIRECTORY u 00002 N00000 LADDER VERSION NOTES 123 1d2 GSK980HC Test LL10 04 30 8A4B GSK980HCJUix FH GSK980MDc Series 2011 68 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST IOU Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE I ix 18 FZ E IO TEST PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE F7 ix t8 FZ E VERIFY C
60. 10 X1 1 GEAR Spindle mgenanicel gear stage CN62 9 Y1 0 signal GEAR2 opindle mechanical gear stage CN62 10 Y1 1 signal 2 signal GEAR3 Spindle mechanical gear stage CN62 11 Y 1 2 signal 3 input Function description GEAR4 Spindle mechanical gear stage CN62 12 signal 4 Gear 1of the spindle auto gear shift Instruction M2 Gear 2 of the spindle auto gear shift NENNEN M41 M42 m s Gear 3 ofthe spinde auto gear shit m s Gear ofthe spindle auto gear shit Spindle auto gear shift function is used to control auto shifting mechanical gear stage operating S code CNC computes analog voltage which output to spindle servo or frequency converter according to the current M instruction controlling the corresponding parameters M41 M44 respectively control data parameterNO101 NO104 to control the actual speed of spindle is the same as S code appointing Parameter control K parameter K13 SPCD SPSE Data parameter PLC 426 parameter DT32 DT33 e d j SPee 1 spindle auto gear shift function is valid 0 spindle auto gear shift function is invalid 1 spindle auto gear shift output gear stage signal maintains 0 spindle auto gear shift output gear stage signal does not maintain GRMAX 1 Max speed for the 1st spindle gear 1 GRMAX 2 Max speed for the 1st spindle gear 2 GRMAX 3 Max speed for the 1st spindle gear 3 GRMAX 4 Max speed for the
61. 16 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 G49 Function G17 G18 943 Ho 719 G44 Tool length compensation function Explanation G43 and G44 are modal G codes they are effective before meeting other G codes in the same group Supposed Specify this difference value to be tool Actual tool regarded as tool length compensation value Workpiece p The end point specified by Z axis moves an offset value as above figure G17 plane is selected Difference between supposed and actual machined tool length value is pre set at the offset storage when the program is applied Different length tool can be employed by changing tool length compensation value so program change is not needed Different offset directions were specified by G43 and G44 the offset number is specified by H code Offset axis The offset axes are vertical to the specified planes G17 G18 and G19 Specifying plane Offset axes G17 Z axis G18 Y axis Tool position offset for two or more axes can be used to specify the offset axis and the offset axis changed by 2 3 blocks Example X and Y axes compensation G19 G43 H_ X axis offset G18 G43 H_ Y axis offset composed with the previous block X and Y axes are compensated Offset direction G43 Positive offset G44 Negative offset 54 Chapter 3 G Command Compensation axes can be regarded as zZz Y and X Either absolute or incremental command the end point coordinate value specifi
62. 1st spindle gear 4 speed setting for spindle auto gear shift 0 4095 Shutting time for spindle to auto close the old gear stage Appendix DT34 Delay time after spindle auto gear shift in position DT35 Check time of the auto gear shift DT33 The initialization for 5 seconds users can set the parameter to adjust it but don t set too short time to cause the spindle damage due to little time for spindle switching in to lower gear stage too long times means Timeliness is relatively low and processing efficiency affected DT34 The initialization for 5 seconds users can set the parameter to adjust it but don t set too short time that spindle cannot reach the appointed speed during the M instruction implement too long to affect the processing efficiency e Action sequence The action sequence is as below according to control logic Spindle voltage Ex gear stage Arrival e Control logic gt When K13 7 parameter set to 1 spindle auto gear shift function is valid gt Toimplement any of M41 M42 M43 M44 judge input gear stage is consistent with the current one or not else gear stage should shift gt Gear shift starts CNC outputs analog voltage set by parameterDT30 to spindle servo or frequency converter gt After a time set by parameterDT31 gear shift time1 a shut gear stage output signal and output new gear shift signal Check gear shift completed or not if not wait for complete signal gt Inati
63. 2012 03 19 64 X5 M99 14 32 14 PROGRAM HDI ES CONTENT PROCRAM mim CURRENT roca or 2 Select program to be opened by pressing LOL LA 3 Open program by pressing key 6 5 Execution of a Program After the program to be executed is selected by the method in Section 6 4 select the Auto mode then press Be key or press external cycle start key the program will be executed automatically 6 6 Rename of a Program 1 Enter local program page in Edit mode 2 Press Romie and key a new program name 3 Press key 255 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 6 7 Copy of a Program To save the current program as 1 Enter local program page in Edit mode SAVE AS 2 Press PERSE and key a new program name DATA INPUT 3 Press key 6 8 Position a Program 1 To the position where the program stops last time u Select Edit mode to enter program content page Pressing SEEK the system displays to n input the required line number to position at the left bottom Then press up or down key searching 3 and positioning are displayed at this time the cursor will move to the position where program stops o last time 5 2 Position to specified block 5 In program content page locate to the specified block Press SEER after entering program content page the system displays to input the required line number to position at the left bottom and DATA then ses
64. 255 6 5 Execulionol a ProOgEdli escola ac ICI EIDsEE 255 66 Rename ora Oda o sdEeE goedu Rie Gus den comun fu eC oMuduE cO cEdE 255 6 7 GOO AA al o 256 0 0 POSIHOLT a PEOGEFAI esta de riera iia 256 629 PREVIEW a Prod AIM 2 iad nep iaa 256 6 10 Calculator FUNCION ec m Emme 257 6 11 Aided Programming RUNGCUOM soe eus eet tier one aice o ed id 259 CHAPTER 7Z AUTO OPERATION cites tactu evade de 267 Troe A e O E EET 267 Tia Selection of a Program To Be RUN ads 267 TO PEE o A o A assoaadeeec arse asataeee yas 268 TA O OM AUTO A 268 7 1 4 Auto Run From an Arbitrary Block oooccccnnnccccncccnnccccnononnnonncnonanononcnconcnonannnnnnnonnnos 269 7 1 5 Adjustment of feedrate override rapid override ooccccooncccconccccnncncnnncncnnncncnnncnnnnncnnns 269 7 1 6 Spiridle override adjUstimient 2 EE d ec Oh deen ende i Reco od dines 270 1627 INO RUNNING ai mu faece aod os omae eden deco die ici 270 RS RUANO erc tT UTD 270 7 05 ine Melee dim ede he m O 270 ras AO A on a M a D Pos Ula C SM Lia cede 271 72960 Macho Cs cias da ias 271 Po MST Location ini 271 Foo BOCK OK Dreonia EE E E 271 XII CONTENTS Feo Or SOO Mal SOL mmu netus tute T se MR DRAMA D M MIO NUI E D DCN 14 Memaorizing at POWerdOWN ii Opis dd 7 4 1 Program Interruption in Non DNC Auto Operation cccccoonccccccncconccnnnnnconnnnnncnnnanononnnos 7 4 2 Interruption at Power down on DNC Auto OperatiON ccccc
65. 400 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 1 120 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 003 16 34 00 ADDITORY INPUT oreser oo m CLEAR ALL MACH em Workpiece coordinate system setting page MDI 53919 T22 HAB OFFSET gt ADDITORY WORKPIECE COORDINATE 00001 N00339 P1 COORDINATE P2 COORDINATE P3 COORDINATE ABSOLUTE x X 0 000 X 0 000 X 46 600 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 37 110 7 0 000 7 0 000 7 0 000 Z 3 332 P4 COORDINATE P5 COORDINATE P6 COORDINATE MACHINE X 0 000 X 0 000 X 0 000 X 5 150 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 4 120 Z 0 000 7 0 000 7 0 000 Z 0 010 16 34 30 INPUT OFFSET CD IE FIND P CLEAR ALL MACH COORD Additory workpiece coordinate system setting page Set coordinate system zero point workpiece coordinate zero offset G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 and 48 additory workpiece coordinate systems e Absolute data input The user input data input key modify the data where the cursor is into the data input by user o Relative data input The user input data change key the sum between the previous data where the cursor is and data input by the user changes the previous data where the cursor is Automatic measurement input INPUT Move the cursor to corresponding position then press Matt COORD and the system changes automatically the previous data where the cursor is into the curr
66. 45 gt D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE MANUAL mode During the process the debugging tools should be collocated because the positions are needed to be relatively exact to avoid possible tool hitting in the next step tool changing B Manipulator boosting and retreating The spindle needs to accomplish the orientation and return to the 2nd reference point as well as 1100 1 when the tool magazine is boosting or retreating In debugging no need to orient or return to the reference point please set K11 2 to 0 After debugging set it to 1 to improve the safety of the tool magazine M65 the manipulator catches tools boosting to the right in catching make sure where to catch the tool and make the spindle orientate to avoid manipulator hitting the machine M66 the manipulator retreats to the left in retreating make sure the tool clamped to avoid that the tool falls from it If the function is not worked out 1 parameter K11 2 1 make sure the spindle orientation accomplished and has returned to the reference point If both are done please 72110071 in mode of MDI or AUTO If the function does not worked out please make sure Y1 4 manipulator boosting or Y1 5 manipulator retreating is 1 in Ladder gt PLC If it is 1 please check the machine tools electric 3 if there is a manipulator operation key the above actins can be achieved in non auto mode B Overall debugging Only eve
67. 5 Macro Statement and NC statement The following blocks are referred to as macro statements e Blocks containing arithmetic or logic operation e Blocks containing a controlling statement such as GOTO DO END e Blocks containing a macro call command such as G65 G66 Blocks other than macro statements are referred to as NC statement 5 5 1 Macro programming and Registering Custom macro program are similar to subprogram They can be edited registered and used in the same way as subprogram M98 can call a custom macro program but cannot pass arguments Usually the macro program is provided by tool builders but it can also be programmed by customers It is not necessary for the customers to remember all related commands in macro programs besides codes that call macro programs 5 5 2 Limitation e Macro statement processing in cutter compensation C mode In cutter compensation C mode G41 G42 in order to calculate the transmission point NC prereads the next block The processing way is not the same as general NC statement When a macro statement is executed as a single block it is the block that does not involve movement And in some cases it cannot correctly execute compensation strictly speaking such block involves O distance of movement gt Jump GOTO DO END In cutter compensation C mode when jump command GOTO DO END is specified P S alarm Occurs gt When the move command adopts variables 153 U im
68. 8 8 EN v UU UjEio pu Y J gt dias zi p n I I O O gt O H lt 383 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Signal line of the spindle Cable number 00 785H CNC spindle rigid tapping including speed position and speed position Applicable control with GS series universal products servo spindles connected Cable usage Wiring diagram GS series universal spindle Servo SRV Y5 2 CCW 22 11 10 s Psi 13 w o ENS 13 son 44 re xs1 is ese re x52 as come 1 ce s Puse re Paos fa Paor 6 Peor 2 PBOr Metal shell is connected to shielding jsuep ublu NIHOS LNO 0 129uu02 onja 1990s jew eut Z NIdGZ GLNO 01 12euuo2 gt o o D 5 Q x D 3 D D o O O 2 D SUII E NIdGL LZNO 384 Appendix 7 1 2 CNC connected with spindle servo drive unit use deconcentrator When iGSK980MDc has spindle rigid tapping function and deconcentrator MCTO5 is used in it The wiring diagram is as follows i i i GSEUSUMDc i i IBN ID This connection is required if th machine encoder is used in positioning gt D 5 Q x 385 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Signal line of the spindle Cable number 00 785B CNC spindle rigid tapping including speed position and speed position Applicable Cable usa
69. After the CNC system power on it is lubricating for a time set by DT0017 then the lubrication output stops After a time set by DT0016 the lubrication is output again and it cycles by sequence In automatic lubrication M32 M33 commands as well as the lubrication key on the panel are all inactive DT17 bai 11 2 8 Block Skip If a block in a program needs not to be executed and deleted the block skip function can be selected When the block is headed with sign and the block skip switch is turned on machine panel key or external input of the block is active the block will be skipped without execution in auto running e Related signal Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC type No State Diagnosis Input Block skip key on the machine panel X18 7 signal Output Block skip indicator on the machine Y18 6 signal panel e Function description 1 When the block skip signal is valid the block with sign is skipped without being executed 2 The block skip function is only valid in Auto MDI and DNC mode 11 2 9 Machine Lock eo Related signal Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC 3 type No State Diagnosis 3 Input Machine lock on the machine panel X19 0 21 signal Machine lock indicator on the Y18 5 machine panel e Function description 1 Machine lock is valid in any mode 2 The state of the machine lock cannot be changed in program executing 43 gt o o D
70. Applicable products jay90s ajeuw jay9os ajeu eul Nidvy LNO 0 jpauuoy Ull Z NIdSZ SLNO 0 JOOUUOD SVC GND 14 VCMD Metal shell is connected to shielding Ghent Eepe ess Cable usage series universal servo spindle connected products Wiring diagram CNC GS series universal Hume ET z srvivs2 n cow 2s sens w ew joeuuo2 jay90s ojJeuJ O gt o o D 5 Q x 39 6 X 15 PSR Ajsuep uDiu NIHOS LNO 0 128uuo2 eull Z NldS2 SLNO 418 Appendix Appendix 11 Explanations for Standard Ladder Function 11 1 Address Definition CN61 address D r fz X0 0 TDEC O BT40 pot turret position X0 2 TPCH BT40 pot turret X0 3 DECX fixed address X0 4 TCOT BT40 pot turret Signal of the 4 axis deceleration 33 X2 4 DEC4 fixed address Q9 D X2 5 DEC5 WEA X0 5 ESP fixed address Toolcase horizontally in position 7 X0 6 THCH detection toolpot back in position BT40 pot turret E detection Toolcase vertically in position X0 7 TVCH detection toolpot forward in BT40pot turret m EM position detection Stop detection of ATC arm of pot D X10 tool IDogazine splioe tool BT40potturret detection signal in turret tool magazine Catching tool detection of the BT40pot turret X14 AN arm of pot tool magazine the current place dry detection in turret tool magazine origin detection I releasing clamping tool input magazine overload MEC DECS Signal of the 5 ax
71. BIT4 DECY signal is 0 low 1 high 17 26 32 er para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P B Alteration of the data parameter pitch data 1 Data parameter alteration 1 Turn on the parameter switch 2 Enter the MDI mode O Lo D um Q O 3 Move the cursor to the No of the parameter to be set 4 Key in the new parameter value DATA 5 Press key the value is entered and displayed 6 After all parameters setting is finished the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF for security Example 1 Set the data parameter N2025 to 4000 Move the cursor to N2025 by the steps above key in 4000 by sequence in the prompt line the figure is shown below MDI 51964 TUM HAB PARAMETER gt DATA PARAMETER 00001 N06421 NO DAT NO DATA NO DATA 0015 X 1 0024 X 400 0032 X 200 Y 1 400 Y 200 7 1 Z 400 Z 200 0016 X 1 0025 4000 0034 X 0 Y 1 0026 100 Y 0 7 1 0027 8000 Z 0 0022 X 7600 0028 200 0041 200 Y 7600 0029 100 0042 X 100 1 7600 0030 50 Y 100 0023 X 100 0031 X 5000 Z 100 Y 100 Y 5000 0043 X 5000 1 100 Z 5000 Y 5000 0025 Feedrate of DRY run mm min 17 27 13 BIT PARA bara para OFTEN usen PITCH cow FIND P DATA Press key to finish t
72. ETE 5 After the searching the CNC system is still in searching state press 4 9 hey again the CHANGE next character can be searched Or press key to exit the searching state 6 If the character is not found the prompt of Srch fail will be displayed Note During the searching it doesn t search the characters in the called subprogram 3 Method to return to the program head 1 In the Program Display page of the Edit mode press D d key the cursor returns to the program head 2 Search the program head character by the methods in II Operation Section 6 1 3 6 1 4 Insertion of a Character Steps 250 Chapter Auto Operation 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode the page is as follows EDIT 58049 T25 HOB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 N0849 GOO G17 G54 G90 GOO XO YO ZO GOI X10 Y10 X 20 Y22 or OM 14 24 50 A UNDO SAVE SEEK EDIT NOTES EI 2 Input the character to be inserted to insert G98 code before X 20 in the above figure 8j ej sj rs input e LZ the page is as follows EDIT 56438 T32 HAB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT x 00001 N04853 GOO G17 G54 G90 GOO XO YO 70 GOI X10 Y10 G98_X 20 Y22 W99 H30 O Lo D um Q r O orm wh 14 25 40 ES UNDO SAVE SEEK EDIT NOTES ES ALTER MACRO Note In program content edit mode or MDI mode of pro
73. F unit mm min G95 feed per rotation F definition and ranges are as follows Metric input G21 0 001 500 000 0 0001 500 0000 Inch input G20 0 0001 50 0 0 00001 50 0 1 4 Additional Axes Increment System In the least increment system IS B or IS C under the condition that the additional axes are not involved in simultaneous control and just used for separate motion such as feeding and the requirement for precision is not high when the least increment is 0 01 the feedrate will be much faster greatly increasing the efficiency Therefore the additional axes least increment system is not necessary to be in accordance with the current least increment system To meet various requirements of users the system adds optional function to least increment system Additional axes increment system is set by state parameter No 187 Shown as follows IS1X ISOX IS1Y IS0Y IS1Z IS1A4 ISOA4 IS1A5 ISOAS A4 S1 A4ISO Select increment system of 4th IS1A4 ISOA4 Increment System of 4TH Least input output 9 Same tothe XYZ Pan 9 MER o NNNM 0187 IS B 0 001 1 010007 A5IS1 A5ISO Select increment system of 5th IS1A5 ISOAS5 Increment System of 5TH Least input output 9 Sametothe x 2 nin 9 9 BA T 1 9 B8 0007 11 U im O e um 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 0 0001 Note the least input
74. G2 G4 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 85 58 725 05 21 N0050 G98 X52 232 Y55 789 N0060 G74 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F1005 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 Xl 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 YbO 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 25 W10 7 I 20 K8 5 Q9 7 F1600 N0110 G112 120 JO DO N0120 GO X55 Ybb 785 A75 C60 15 42 15 A RENAME SAVE AS DELETE au NAME SORT TIME SORT gt 4 U directory page When the system USB has a U disk _7_ is pressed to display a soft key USB DIR Press USB DIR and the window display CNC program directory in a U file The files in the U disk directory can be input or output MDI 50088 TAB HAD PROGRAM gt USB_DIRECTORY u 00001 N0000 TOTAL 4 O Lo D um Q O SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00001 00001 855 B 2012 03 16 00001 HLR HEHA FA 5883 83 SS OMDCEE FF 4TH 00002 821 B 2012 03 16 Beeoh 5TH 2E4h 09000 330 B 2012 03 16 N0005 GOO X100 ue 7100 A100 C100 09001 203 B 2012 03 15 N0010 G17 G90 G54 G49 GO X50 Y50 750 A 50 C50 HO N0020 G00 X75 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 MO 25 N0030 G98 G82 R75 721 5 P2000 F1200 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 Q5 21 N0050 G98 X52 232 Y55 789 N0060 G74 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F5 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 X1 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 Y50 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 2 15 57 53 rmnm dmm o e In the USB directory page the TOOMING ope
75. G99 Return to R point in canned CCW system 4 cycle Workpiece coordinate Inner circle groove roughing Tool life 59 Workpiece coordinate 444 Inner circle groove roughing management system 6 CW 100 s BIO programy magro G112 Inner circle finishing CCW management end code XY plane selection G66 e Program OA G113 Inner circle finishing CW eu ZX plane selection G67 Macro program modal C114 Circular outer finish milling call cancel CW G69 Coordinates rotation Outer circle finishing ra YZ plane selection nud CAGE G115 CCW 620 Inch input G73 da ai peck G116 Outer roughing CCW Metric input Counter tapping cycle G117 Outer roughing CW Reference position G76 Finishing boring cycle G132 Rectangular roughing G28 return CCW Return from ll G133 Rectangular roughing CW reference position 2nd 3rd Ath U im O e a 9 3 3 e p Drilling cycle spot Rectangular groove ae e position G81 Grilling cycle 2134 roughing CCW Drilling cycle stepped 6135 Rectangular groove Skip function hole boring cycle 139 roughing CW Cutter Rectangular groove inner G40 ue ae G83 Peck drilling cycle G136 finishing CCW Cutter Rectangular groove inner compensation left Tapping cyce d finishing CW Cutter Rectangular outer finishing compensation right POMO EUER TD CCW Tool length Rectangular outer finishin G43 compensation G86 Drilling cycle G139 CW f dire
76. GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 276 Chapter 10 Document Management CHAPTER9 DATA SETTING BACKUP AND RESTORE 9 1 Data Setting 9 1 1 Switch Setting In SWITCH SETTING page the ON OFF state of PARM SWT parameter switch PROG SWT program switch AUTO SEG auto sequence No can be displayed and set the figure is as follows P ZERO 52634 T45 HAD SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT amp OFI CURRENT LEYEL 3 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT P ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT OFI ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION BACKUP PAR USER RESUME PAR USER RESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 1 LEVEL RESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR S3 SERVO 0 11 LEVEL PRESS KEY L TO TURNON PRESS KEY W TO TURNOFF o sie am ETA ow r jJ 1 Press key to enter the Setting interface then press see to enter SWITCH SETTING page 2 Press Or key to move the cursor to the item to be set D LJ LJ 3 Press and to shift the ON OFF state press Y E being OFF sets the switch to OFF being ON sets the switch to ON Only the PARM SWT is set to ON could the parameter be altered so are PROG SWT and AUTO SEG Note When parameter switch is shifted from off to on CNC alarm occurs Alarm will occur again when nes EN m EM keys together to eliminate parameter switch is shifted from on to off
77. LOCAL DIRECTORY O Lo D um Q r O NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES LA GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC I1d2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE 77 Jul it tb AZ A FILESIZE 71 6 K VERIFY CODE 2869 THE PROGRAM SAVED PLCI w 11 01 44 DATA Input the file saved as to PLC1 press to confirm the save as operation After the save as operation is done successfully there is another ladder file PLC1 ld2 which is shown below MDI SBBBH TAA HAB CADE 7 FICE Clot COUCH DYRECTURT 00002 N00000 LADDER VERSION NOTES Ch GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC 1d2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V AE Fin t8 RE PLC 1d2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 19 10 52 54 11 01 54 Se a a a Y 222 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR 1 e Common us T List Display Password Program Parameter X axis relative relative CHANGE coordin coordinate clear ate Y axis relative pid coordinate clear ee ate Z axis relative Te T coordinate clear Part amount clear mm O coordina Tool radius offset O c D clear o 5 Tool length offset H clear relativ e coordi nate relativ e coordi nate relativ e X axis relative coordinate divided into 2 Y axis relative coordinate divided into
78. Loca DIR use pm Forge Pre RUN gt DATA The system prompts whether data defaulted by PLC ladder replaces the one in CNC register is DATA ou is pressed to run PLC not to replace the register pressed to run PLC and use the default register data DATA j data and is pressed not to run PLC After is pressed LA before the ladder means running the ladder is completed successfully which is shown below MDI i in positive SAAAA TAB HAB gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY _ NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Series2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Jut tb A4 ER VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 19 10 52 54 10 57 46 Eu COPY TO 224 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 4 4 Save as When the local directory and the U disk directory are copied each other there maybe be the same name save as is executed to backup the ladder before copy to avoid the ladder being removed sana TOA HOA MDI _ NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Series2011 08 12 GSK980MDC MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Jut tb A4 ER VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 19 10 52 54 ws 11 01 16 ee Press ME and there is a prompt to input the file name to save as follow MDI SBBBB TAA HAA LADDER gt FILE LIST gt
79. MDI LCD unit D code determines the compensation value in tool offset page according to the bit 1 of parameter No 002 it is very important to notice that the value applied is diameter or radius Setting range of compensation value is as follows Compensation value 0 9999999xleast input increment e Compensation vector The compensation vector is two dimensional vector it is equal to the compensation value specified with D code The compensation vector is calculated in control unit its direction is real time modified along with the tool path in each block You can calculate how much compensation is needed for tool movement when the compensation value is applied in control unit Compensation path tool center path programmed path tool radius or diameter determined by compensation direction Note e Compensation operation is executed in the plane selected by G17 G18 G19 For example when XY plane is selected X Y or I J is used to carry out compensation operation and vector operation The coordinate value whose axis in not in the compensation plane is not affected by the compensation e In 3 axis linkage control compensation only performed for the tool path projected on the compensation plane The alteration of compensation plane should be executed posterior to the compensation mode cancelled Otherwise the system will give an alarm and machine stops e When the cutter compensation is cancelled by G40 movement amount sh
80. Machine zero retum pal DEC signal nDEC Meglected nPE signal o l ian a High speed machine zero return Velocity y slo iere UN Deceleration edil e over Start deceleration l K Machine zero Lowespeed machine zero return ES me t Fig 2 38 4 Machine zero return process A Select machine zero return mode press the manual positive or negative feed key machine zero return direction is set by bit parameter No 13 the corresponding axis moves to the machine zero by a rapid traverse speed As the axis press down the deceleration switch to cut off deceleration signal the feed slows down immediately and it continues to run in a fixed low speed B When the deceleration switch is released the deceleration signal contact point is closed again And CNC begins to detect the encoder one rotation signal if the signal level changes the motion will be stopped And the corresponding zero indicator on the operator panel lights up for machine zero return completion e Machine zero return type B as an proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero signals D Its sketch map is shown in the following 32 Ii 5 N e 2 T O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Metal inductive block fixed on the machine slider PNP NC d approach switch nDEC and nPC signals connected together Fig
81. O 5 EDIT 55392 T15 HBB PARAMETER gt OFTEN USED PARAMETER 00001 N00672 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0188 X 10000100 mi 01000101 7 01000101 0015 X Y 7 0002 00000010 BIT Unused 0189 X RRTx Xxx xxx ox RRLx RABx ROAx 09 28 31 BIT PARA DATA PARA oeren usen PITCH coup FIND P Often used parameters include parameters often used by user in bit parameter and data parameters Setting methods of often used parameters are the same similar to those of data parameters and bit parameters In often used parameter page press OFTEN USED to enter the submenu as follows The user can move or remove parameters Removing often used parameters cannot influence the removed parameter 206 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display EDIT 53445 T48 HBA NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0188 x ay 01000101 EE 01000101 0015 X 1 mi ee 1 0002 00000010 0188 xx RRTx ok ook xxx RRLx RABx ROAx BIT Unused 09 28 54 REMOVE EX MOVE UP MOVE DOWN AUTO ORDER OFTEN usep REMOVE ALL e PITCH COMP page Press MEE to enter pitch compensation page as follows EDIT 58804 T51 HAA PARAMETER gt SCREW PITCH COMPENSATION 00001 NO6746 AXIS X AXIS Y AXIS Z
82. P sub0 7 P8 sub08 sub09 10 06 33 n E Jou emm y Se t y 3 press to select the ladder block corresponded to the window 4 press x confirm the selection and return to the previous menu press omen to cancel the selection and return to the previous menu 2 3 Call view The window used for view ladder is a subprogram of the ladder the screen displays CALLER at the lower right corner of the window to view where PLC subprograms are called which is shown below MDI SBBB8 TAA HAA LADDER gt MONITOR WIN3 PO sub0 NETWORK YA 2 yellow lamp El FA 5 NETWORK2 YA 1 green lamp Fa 5 NETWORKS YW H red lamp FI A NETWORKA 18 06 55 SELECT FIND gt __ BLOCK CALLER WINI WIN2 Level Level 214 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI 58000 TOO HAB LADDER gt MONITOR WIN Level 00002 NO0000 Pa CALL NETWORK133 F3 H RB 7 Bm ERR NETWORK134 F3 1 RB B5 DEDE NETWORK135 Pl Pl subprogram of choosing a axis on the handwheel and adjusting mpa step d P1 CALL NETWORK1 36 P2 subprogram of adjusting rate in the rapid mode 16 67 24 E WINI E WINS SELECT FIND gt Levell PQ BLOCK CALLER 2 4 Find 1 Select the required commands parameters network and other block windows respectively WIN2 WIN3 press lee
83. PROCR N meam CURRENT LOCAL DIR gt 3 If the mode G M T F command of the current block where the cursor locates is defaulted and inconsistent with the running mode of this block the corresponding modal function should be executed to continue the next step 4 Press key to enter the Auto mode then press A key to start the program 7 1 5 Adjustment of feedrate override rapid override In Auto mode the running speed can be altered by adjusting the feedrate override rapid override with no need to change the settings of the program and parameter e Adjustment of the feedrate override Wo F OVERRIDE W00 F OVERRIDE LJ W Wii Wii Press the F OVERRIDE or FOVERRDE key jn rome it can realize 16 level real time feedrate adjustment 269 O Lo D um Q r O O Lo D um Q r O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual TA Press the FWFMEkey each time the feedrate override ascends a gear level till 150 Press the F OverRIDEKey each time the feedrate override decends a gear level till 0 Note 1 The actual feedrate value is specified by F in program feedrate override adjustment Note 2 Actual feedrate value specified by Fx feedrate override e Adjustment of rapid override It can realize the 4 level real time rapid override Fo 25 50 100 adjustment by pressing roa nouo Tixo Tix1000 UFO VL25 VW50 V100 Note 1 The max rapid traverse sp
84. Part program More than 4 level including 4 level operation l Ladder diagram More than 2 level including 24 level Note 2 level or above operation level is needed for part program operation above number 9000 2 Operation Instructions gt Parameter backup and resume Backup parameters Copy current all parameter states and values to U gsk980MDc_backup user in the U disk in the form of file Param par Tcomp cmp Wcomp wmp If the above mentioned file does not exist set up a new one If the file exists this file will be overwritten by the new one Resume parameters Copy parameter files in the U disk memory unit U gsk980MDc_backup user to the CNC system to resume the system parameter Resume operation cannot be done if the above mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is renamed Note Repower the CNC system after parameter load is successful Part program resume and backup Backup part programs Copy all part programs of current system to U gsk980MDc backup gsk980MDc backup NCPROG of USB memory unit in the form of file CNC If the above mentioned file does not exist set up a new one If the file exists this file will be overwritten by the new one Resume part programs Copy all part programs from the U disk memory unit UA gsk980MDc_backup user NCPROG to the CNC system to resume the part program Resume operation cannot be done if the above mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name i
85. Press to delete the last input digit as follows a EDIT SAAANA TAA HAD et Aided programming 8G NGO S 1 N00015 GO X100 Y100 Z100 N 00020 F G110 X200 P G143 Y200 U G Z 200 Y5 W 20 B E E L I 20 D2 4 H Center K 18 M R R 50 S Q 18 T 3 N00025 GBB XO YO ZO Arc radius in arc serial punch 16 15 07 as A Ec A to exit graph dialog programming When a program is edit or modified there is a prompt to save or not as follows 6 11 3 Exit EDIT SANAA TAA HAA 1 N00015 GOI X100 Y100 7100 N 00020 E G110 X200 P G143 Y200 U G Z 200 v5 W 20 BB E E i I 20 D2 J H Center K 18 M R R 50 S Q 10 T Contents altered save or not INPUT SAVE CANCEL QUIT 16 15 15 Se A Ja Jem JJ 14 265 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR Press cwn not to save data and exit aided programming page Press x to save edited programs The user can modify programs according to prompt messages and the correct programs can be saved 6 11 4 Save 1 Save edited programs as follows EDIT Saaaa TAA HBB Aided programming 00200 N00004 1 N00015 GOI X100 Y100 7100 P TT F X 200 P Y 200 U 7 200 Y5 A W 20 BO E B L 1 20 pp J H K 18 H R 50 9 Q10 T 3 N00025 GOB XO YO 70 Sequence number of tool radius 16 48 50 8 Fi 7708 a ae 2 In Edit mode press _ w to save the edited program After the save is done succes
86. QU Y NS NY SNS SN WIN ta lt lt aN AUN AN UY S Y NUS fS a EIN CN Sa ki SY a i AA C A d o E N D ETA KON CA xQ d ZA Ni ws an CA 4 xa AN TX UN KO d NON AN US SAN eT UNS AY Np NUS KA 44 FTA Z 44 a aa KIN A ENV KEN Y A Y YY AN J gt AO p ES SY IN ME Y Y ANN AD XD t K KS me Bis AG LDS Y H NP ANN AY BY NA CN MCT01B JO1 gt CN61 JO2 gt CN62 J2 cn15 Appendix Sy Pes S SAR MCTOIB 1 RDY o o 9 o oe oso oo oo oo o e o o O oo O o o e 9 O na o e ld Z O di I I o 7 J3 gt cN21 J4 COM VP STAO SP1 ARST SFR 380 Appendix Appendix 7 Explanations of Rigid tapping 7 1 Definition of Spindle Signal Line 7 1 1 CNC connected with spindle servo drive unit directly When GSK980MDc has spindle rigid tapping function and it directly connected with spindle servo drive unit The wiring diagram is as follows Encader af machine This connectio is required if the apindle servo machine spindle in positioning xipuaddy 381 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Signal line of the spindle Cable number 00 785A CNC spindle rigid tapping including speed position and speed position control with App
87. R5 Z 50 180 J50 K30 U5 F800 D1 The rectangle outside finish milling is performed under the canned cycle at the bottom of a hole D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled it returns from the point R plane M30 The starting position U a O a um o 3 3 e 3 24 3 Continuous Drilling Continuous equal interval drilling cycle is performed in the way that canned cycle is called according to the specified linear rectangular or arc path Parameters related to continuous drilling 0 5 8 2 i LPTK 1 Locating with G01 in line interval drill 0 Locating with GOO in line interval drill RPTH 1 Locating with G01 in circle and rectangle interval drill 0 Locating with GOO in circle and rectangle interval drill BRCH 1 the return plane when continuous drilling is selected by G98 G99 0 the return plane when continuous drilling is selected by G99 3 24 3 1 Line Series Punch L function L holes machining cycle should be performed from current plane position to end point specified by X and Y are indicated if the L word is specified in canned cycle so the current position block start and end will not be drilled the end point position is regarded as the last hole holes are equal spaced as follows start point P L value setting System execution result Value is negative Ineffective the value should be positive Th lue i ified ide Rs ed Normal drilling cycle 1 time or equals to 1
88. RESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 SERYO 0 19 LEVEL CRESUME STORED PAR PRODUCE TEST CAN MODIFY SCRW COMP 8 MACRO PROG PLC 17 25 20 o je m mum omm 2 level user display page 3 Authority level setting display set user s operation level GSK980MDc password level is divided into 6 from top to low including machine manufacturer 2 level device management 3 level machine operation 4 level basic operation 5 level and operation limit 6 level Machine manufacturer level modify CNC status parameters data parameters pitch compensation parameters tool offset data edit part programs including macro programs edit and modify PLC ladder upload and download ladder Device management level modify CNC status parameters data parameters tool offset data and edit programs Machine operation level modify tool offset data toolsetting operation macro variables edit part programs do not modify CNC status parameters data parameters and pitch compensation parameters Basic operation level run the current program and modify tool offset data Operation limit level no password level Operate the machine panel cannot modify tool offset data cannot select programs cannot edit programs cannot modify CNC status parameters data parameters and pitch compensation parameters 198 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display EDIT 59941 TB5 HAB SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT OFF CURRENT LE
89. Restart In MDI stop mode after editing MDI programs are executed the run is started again from the position of current cursor 8 In MDI mode after a program is compiled a empty area in the program storage is used When the storage is full any programs cannot be compiled in MDI mode 5 6 Subprograms Call in MDI Mode In MDI mode compiled M98 can execute subprogram call function Up to 4 level subprograms can be called In MDI mode macro programs can be compiled called and executed In MDI page when the called subprogram runs the subprogram must not be edited O0000 cannot call subprograms Nain program Subpropgram Subpropgram 00000 y 01000 02000 MSSP1000 MOSP2000 A M9SP3000 M30 M99 M99 Level 1 nested Level 2 nested 245 O Lo D um Q r O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 246 Chapter Auto Operation CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGEMENT In Edit mode the programs can be created selected modified copied and deleted and the bidirectional communication between CNC and CNC or CNC and PC can also be achieved To prevent the program to be modified or deleted accidentally a program switch is set for this GSK980MDd system And it must be turned on before program editing Also 3 level user authority is set in this GSK980MDc system to facilitate the management Only the operation authority is above 4 level 4
90. Se d to switch among C T press ith V to view parameters of C T In the page the system displays states of C00 C99 TOO T99 which is shown below 212 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI 59706 TB2 HOB LADDER gt 1 0 STATE gt C T 00001 NO747 8 C CNT PRESET VALUE CURRENT VALUE T TIMER PRESET VALUE CURRENT VALUE v PACA 8 a p E 1 B 1 B i mg a 2 as a a SENI a m 7 a l a b g 8 em Sas 9 amp o a 0 9 0 0 it 8 9 a mo TETETE G R A FIND P x Y F 2 Ladder graph monitor page There are 3 PLC program view windows in ladder monitor page to view state information of ladder which can select blocks view call page up down search parameters command network and so on as follows MDI 50888 TAA HAD LADDER gt MONITOR WIN2 Level2 00002 N00000 NETWORK1 i B Clnsor returns in auto mode X24 0 K18 KK gt HA T e Lo D um Q e O NETWORK2 A335 8 Sign of AUTO MDI DNC mode F3 3 R335 8 NETWORKS R335 F 25 SUR 180 key can be used to adjust rapid rate in AUTO MDI Dh F3 5 R335 7 Ege G19 HA 16 66 64 A WINI E WINS SELECT FIND Level PQ BLOCK CALLER MDI 50008 TAO HAA LADDER gt MONITOR WIN2 Level2 00002 N00000 NETWORK K14 1 Cursor returns in auto mode s24 0 KI 6 NETWORK2 R335 8 Sign of AUTO MDI DNC mode F3
91. Sewededecaelaon GM Fed ranita Dring podio Int ittent Les e re Ems Dwell spindle stop Full circle helical l Round groove internal rough in Rapid feed fon rough milling milling CCW Chapter 3 G Command 6111 Intermittent ee helical Rapid feed R Ung groove internal rough fee rough milling milling CW G112 Full circle fine milling Rapid feed Full circle int fi illi Full circle fine milling Rapid feed SENE EREA AE SMS CW Rapid feed G113 Feed Full circle internal fine milling CCW G115 Full circle fine milling Rapid feed External round fine milling CW G116 Intermittent Outer rough million CCW Outer rough milling Rapid feed G117 feed Outer rough million CW G132 Intermittent Rectangle G133 feed milling G134 Intermittent neclangle feed milling G135 Intermittent neclangle feed milling G136 Feed pede milling G137 Feed pode milling R G138 Feed range milling R G139 Feed ecient milling 3 24 1 2 Canned circle explanations d G114 ull circle fine milling Rapid feed External round fine milling CCW rough Rectangle rough million CCW Rapid feed Rectangle rough million CW rough Rectangle groove internal rough Rapid feed rough Rapid feed neciang e groove internal rough milling CW fine Rectangle groove internal fine Rapid feed fine Rapid feed Resangle groove internal fine milling CW fine Rectangle groove external fine Rapid feed fine Rap
92. Signals 5 CHC Fig 2 28 The other type is input by switch with no contacts transistor as is shown in Fig 2 29 2 30 24 TUTE ndu m Ii 5 N c 2 T O Fig 2 30 Connection of PNP 2 8 2 Output Signal The output signal is used for the machine relay and indicator if it is on with OV the output function is valid if it is off with OV the output function is invalid There are total 36 digital volume outputs in I O interface that they all have the same structure as is shown in Fig 2 31 EE Machine ULM Z80 3 e AO n UTX Fig z 31 Circuit for digital volume output module The logic signal OUTx output from the main board is sent to the input terminal of inverter ULN2803 via a connector And there are 2 output types for nOUTx output with OV or high impedance lts typical application is shown in follows e To drive LED 317 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE A serial resistance is needed to limit the current usually 10mA that goes through the LED by using ULN2803 output to drive LED which is shown in Fig 2 32 CHC Machine ULH 603 output KE Fig 2 32 output ta drive LED e To drive filament indicator An external preheat resistance is needed to decrease the current impact at power on by using ULN2803 output to drive filament indicator and this resistance value should be within a range that the indicator can
93. Specify angles and radius with absolute commands 44 Chapter 3 G Command N1 G17 G54 G90 G16 Specify the polar coordinate command and select XY plane Set the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system G54 as the origin of the polar coordinate command N2 G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specify a distance of 100mm and an angle of 30 degrees N3 Y150 Specify a distance of 100mm and an angle of 150 degrees N4 Y270O opecify a distance of 100mm and an angle of 270 degrees N5 G15 G80 Cancel the polar coordinate system command eo Specify angles with relative values N1 G17 G54 G90 G16 Specify the polar coordinate command and select XY plane Set the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system G54 as the origin of the polar coordinate command N2 G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specify a distance of 100mm and an angle of 30 degrees N3 G91 Y120 Specify a distance of 100mm and an angle of 120 degrees N4 Y120 Specify a distance of 100mm and an angle of 120 degrees U O Q um 9 3 3 e N5 G15 G80 Cancel the polar coordinate system command 3 9 Plane Selection Command G17 G18 and G19 Format GIF gry XY plane G18 ZX plane G19 3 YZ plane Function The plane of arc interpolation and tool radius compensation are chosen by using the G code Explanation G17 G18 and G19 are modal G commands the plane will not be changed when a block without any command inside
94. UNDO SAVE SEEK BEES gt Relevant explanation Program note supports Chinese characters Edit Chinese note in the PC machine and then download it to the CNC and Chinese cannot be displayed but the Chinese characters cannot be directly input in the CNC 6 2 2 Program Note Modification Operation steps are the same as program note setting steps on section 6 2 1 6 3 Deletion of a Program 6 3 1 Deletion a Single Program Steps 1 Select the PRG DISPLAY page in Edit mode 1 2 Key in address key 9 numerical key 2 2 9 KENN sequence take an example of the program O0001 3 Press key program O0001 will be deleted 253 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR DELETE Note Press key in page Local Directory and the system prompts whether to delete 00001 and then DATA INPUT i i press to confirm the deletion 6 3 2 Deletion of All Programs Steps 1 Select the LOCAL DIRECTORY page in Edit mode EDIT 55578 T30 HAA PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00001 N03829 TOTAL 3 SPACE 30 0 M USED 20 0 M IDLE 10 0 M NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00001 8 00001 0 B 2012 03 19 00002 788 B 2011 11 30 00003 55 B 2012 03 19 O Lo MD um Q O 14 31 06 A RENAME SAVE AS DELETE au NAME SORT TIME SORT gt 2 Press LI to delete all programs 6 4 Selection of a Program When there are multip
95. VI VIT 3l eT oy P Related explanation Commanding P L in the cycle is invalid but P value is saved as modal value of the fixed cycle Example G133 commands to rough mill a convex plate of outer rectangle which is shown below 544 50 as i yao G90 GOO XO YO Z50 GOO rapidly position G99 G133 X50 Y50 R5 Z 50 150 J40 A100 B80 W20 Q10 K10 C20 E2 U5 F800 D1 execute the rough milling cycle of inner groove cycle D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 cancel fixed cycle return from point R plane M30 3 24 2 18 Rectangle Groove Rough milling G134 G135 Format G134 G98 G99 X Y Z R J K WM Q V U DF G135 Function From the center of the rectangle the linear cutting cycle is applied by the specified parameter data till the rectangle groove with programmed dimension is made out Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the table 3 2 G134 Rectangle groove rough milling in CCW G135 Rectangle groove rough milling in CW 95 C EsSSIM CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual l The width of rectangle groove along the X axis direction J The width of rectangle groove along the Y axis direction K The cut width increment inside XY plane it is less than the tool radius but more than 0 W Forthe first cutting along the Z axis direction the distance is downward to the R reference surface it is more than O if the first cutting is over the position of the bottom of the groove then the bottom of the gro
96. X Y Z Explanation 1 G31 which is a non modal G code it is effective only in the block in which it is specified 2 G31 can not be specified in the tool compensation C and chamfering or the alarm will be generated lt is very necessary to cancel the tool compensation C and chamfering firstly before the G31 command is specified 3 Error is allowed in the position of the tool when a skip signal is input Signal The SKIP signal input is on the fixed address X1 0 CN61 42 a a ee SKIP 1 HIGH level SKIP is valid 0 LOW level SKIP is valid G31P 1 G31 is for immediate stop as the SKIP signal is valid Parameter 0 G81 is for decelerating stop as the SKIP signal is valid 1 The next block to G31 is incremental command 1 it moves with incremental value 50 Chapter 3 G Command from the position interrupted by the skip signal Example G31 G91 X100 0 F100 Y50 0 Actual movement SKIP signal input point 50 0 Movement without BEN SKIP signal a 100 0 2 The next block to G31 is absolute command for one axis The command axis moves to the specified position and the axis not specified keeps at the skip signal input position Example G31 G90 X200 0 F100 U a O a um o 3 3 e Y100 0 kee 200 0 SKIP signal input Actual movement point EN 3 The next block to G31 is absolute command for 2 axes Wherever the skip signal input is the tool moves to specified po
97. Z 50 F500 1100 A45 B30 H5 M30 Macro program the called program O9100 HIZHADOS esses Stores G codes of 03 group IF 3 EQ 90 GOTO 1 Branches to N1 in the G90 mode 24 5001 24 eee eee cece cece eee Calculates the X coordinate of the center point hey 26 010 sas he ae Calculates the Y coordinate of the center point N1 WHILE 11 GT 0 DO 1 Until the number of remaining holes reaches O HO 24 4 COSI Calculates the hole position onX axis 426 825 HI SIN 21 occ eee eee es Calculates the hole position on X axis G90 G81 X 5 Y 6 Z 26 R 18 F 9 Drilling after moving to the target position PTC E Updates the angles 41124211 1 Decrements the number of holes END 1 G 3 GOO PETS Returns the G codes to the original state M99 Argument meanings 3 store G codes of 03 group 5 X coordinate of the next hole to drill 6 Y coordinate of the next hole to drill gt G66 modal call Shown as follows machine 3 holes h1 h2 h3 132 Chapter 5 Macro Program Current tool monta position X0 123 5 Y m mo 7 ae X100 20 Call format G66 P9201 Aa Bb Cc the argument in this example is assumed Macro program 00001 G90 G17 G00 X0 YO ZO G00 X150 Y20 position G66 P9201 A 10 B 40 C2000 pass the argument be ready for machining G00 X100 Y20 position to h1 call macro pr
98. Z axis move key is positive tis negative For Y axis move key is positive is negative For Y axis move key y is positive Z is negative For X axis move key is positive is negative For X axis move key is positive is negative 7 5 HPF When speed of handwheel exceeds the max speed set in Para 43 the exceeded handwheel pulses are not neglected 0 When speed of handwheel exceeds the max speed set in Para 43 the exceeded handwheel pulses are neglected HWn 1 Coordinate is increscent when the MPG in cew 0 Coordinate is increscent when the MPG in cw 1 0 1 9 Setting range 3 5 1 0 2 0 Define the name of the each axis Setting range 65 67 65 A 66 B 67 C 022 344 Chapter 3 Parameter Setting range 5 77 parallel of X 5 parallel of Y 6 parallel of Z 7 1 02 3 The servo axis No of output interface for each axis power on Setting range 1 5 3 2 2 Acceleration amp Deceleration Control 0 02 2 Each axis max rapid traverse speed Setting range IS C 10 24000 thereinto 5th 10 6000 Unit mm min IS B 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 02 3 Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of each axis rapid traverse ms Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms 0 0 2 4 Rapid traverse speed when rapid override is FO Setting range 6 4000 Unit mm min 0 02 5 Feedrate of dry run Setting range 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 02 6 Initial value
99. ZO back to the reference point of the tool change 445 gt D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE N5 IF 1000EQ1 GOTO7 wait for toolpot stopping spindle orientation accomplished and toolcase falling N6 GOTO 5 toolpot not stopping yet N7 M68 the motor of the ATC arm starts for the first time the ATC arm catches the tool N8 M54 the spindle releases the tool N9 M69 the motor of the ATC arm starts for the second time the ATC arm changes the tool N10 M55 the spindle clamps the tool N11 M70 the motor of the ATC arm starts for the third time the ATC arm returns to the situ N12 G 501 recover the value of G9091 M99 B Exception Handling Handle the chaos tools in toolpot 1 when the current toolcase is in the right position for tool falling then open the switch of the parameter in the MDI mode and input the right corresponding tool to the toolcase number in O ATC SET CHANGE 2 when the current fallen toolcase number is not correspond to the toolpot then press the key in ATC SET do not release at meantime moving the up and down keys to the proper place In this way the sequence number of the fallen toolcase No is adjusted 3 please alter toolcase No O when there is an error of the tool NO in spindle 4 when input the tool No and toolcase No the one to one relationship should be noticed If there are reduplicate tools in the toolcase sequence the
100. a fault in the keypad circuit 0 O0 1 6 Ajo in felled a lel eT key _ ____ _______ e aeoo Corresponding key 0 001 8 Corresponding key MINAS E Corresponding key 7020 Ere M eel Corresponding G poa ETE key G IN OUT o pe CAN Corresponding key 0 0 22 P ini in AA om je je foe key Corresponding lt pese ro es es re 5 1 4 CNC Internal State During the CNC auto run the current CNC running state can be viewed by DGN 064 DGN 110 diagnosis messages if there is no alarm and moving As power off X start position of executing segment s power off Y start position of executing segment s power off Z start position of executing segment s power off 4th start position of executing segment Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message 0 0 8 2 As power off 5th start position of executing segment When the power off G mode of group 01 G00 G03 G73 G139 7 619 G91 G95 G21 G42 When the power off G mode of group 08 G43 44 49 G99 651 EE D gt r x D O O 2 D nm O p Q 3 O Q D O Q O c O O NO G N Q O 8 7 8 2 3 DI CD gt 53 el ct gt J 3 DI O OI O OIO DI CD s 5 OIO QIO 3 3 Ol O Qo DI CD OIO h Oj s s OIO eE OI O CO dm C nal a 9I O OT O AI O 9I O Ol O oO O O 2 D m er 2 D O O 2 D s O h G 3 O oa D O
101. accomplishment signal X0 7 action costs too long time X0 6 Toolcase of pot tool magazine lHave not detected the raised raising overtime please check accomplishment signal toolcase raising accomplishment signal X0 6 action costs too long time X1 0 The tool change detection signal Have not detected the catching tools and X1 1 of the ATC arm of pot tool stop signal the ATC arm acts overtime magazine is overtime please check signal X1 0 X1 1 X1 2 back to situ detection signal of Have not detected the ATC arm back to 0 the ATC arm of pot tool magazine signal the ATC arm acts overtime is overtime please check accomplishment signal X1 2 X1 0 Rotation check accomplishment The falling accomplishment is not X1 1 signal of the auto ATC arm of pot detected in MANUL the key of toolcase X1 2 tool magazine is overtime please falling has been pressed too long time check signal X1 0 X1 1 X1 2 B Note 1 T displaying in the CNC interfaces stands for the tool No of the current tool used by the spindle not the toolpot No of the current toolpot 2 in AUTO MDI and DNC mode the appointed T instruction stands for tool no not the toolpot No 3 when toolpot chooses tool T displaying in the CNC interfaces is not changed but the toolpot is rotating and pre choose the corresponding tool 4 when machine is back to O press the tool change key in the panel the toolpot will rotate to Toolcase No 1 and T displaying in the CNC interfaces
102. analog values which are inputted to the spindle to control the speed CNC informs the PLC of the current spindle control mode by issuing SIMSPL signal Spindle Mode Signal SIMSPL F200 4 eSignal Type NC PLC eSignal Function By setting SIMSPL to 0 or 1 to decide the spindle control mode NC then transfers SIMSPL to PLC messaging PLC the current spindle control mode eSignal Activity SIMSPL 1 indicates that what control mode the CNC sets is analog spindle S codes issue in the form of analog values SIMSPL 1 said that what control mode the CNC sets is mechanical spindle S codes issue in the form of switch values eSignal Address A A 10 1 Analog Spindle S instructions inputted by workpiece program are used to set the speed CNC controls the analog spindle S instructions is given by spindle speed actually it is the spindle motor that is controlled for what reason that CNC needs to know the gears that connect the spindle and spindle motor via certain ways The tapping way does not take spindle shift into consideration Deal with gear shift S instructions set the spindle speed but the actual controlled subject turns out to be the motor In this way there should be one to one corresponding relationship between the spindle motor speeds and gears Whichever gear the machine decides to use CNC will output the correspondingly spindle speed Here are two gear shifts to choose M Type only for M series In responds to S instruc
103. are equaled please re input T instruction 3 After inputting instruction and starting the program if the input toolcase number is not consistent with Win O ATC SET the toolpot will not rotate Please re input T instruction 4 If the above situations are all ruled out toolpot is still not spinning Please observe Y1 6 or Y1 7 inputted or not in Ladder gt PLC when start the toolpot rotation If Y1 6 or Y1 7has been inputted and toolpot does not spin please make sure that the machine tools electric has started toolpot rotation function B Manual spindle releasing clamping tool Please make sure there is no tool in spindle when test the degree of tightness of the spindle to avoid tool damage In the mode of MPG STEP or MANUAL press the release clamp tool key in the machine spindle Press and do not release which means asking spindle to release the tool air pressure outputted Release the key means asking spindle to clamp the tool If the releasing clamping tool does not work 1 make sure K11 5 spindle releasing clamping tool parameter set to1 2 when spindle clamping tool observe X1 5 is changing or not in Ladder gt PLC If it is not changed check the machine tools electric 3 if X1 5 changed please observe Y2 0 has an output or not in Ladder gt PLC If it do has check the machine tools electric and the motor controlling spindle releasing clamping tool is started or not 4 if there is an overtime alarm when tool releasing clamp
104. cid 241 sul ee Aere 241 Due BIOCKS EXCCUlO Misas la ld iia 242 SIME Lucullo o ed 242 54 Dala Modifica lO RETI 242 XI C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC User Manual 5 5 Multi Line Program Running in MDI Mode ooccccccccncccccnnccccnnccnnnnocononononcnononnnnnnncononaronononos 244 5 6 subprograms Gall in MDBIMOGe idis tet emissi ds 245 CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGEMENT oooccccccnccncnnnnccnnonnncnononnncnnnononnnncononnnncnnonennnnnos 247 GT sProglamiGEeallollsusascmbetiocalisea n e e ad 247 6 1 Greann aora Block NUmEbetr acu esiend eod eua nd 247 61 2 Input Program COn a o ape ine 247 6 1 3 Searcning a charca NA Ns 249 6 1 4 InsS rtorn o l Characidae Ee Rt iia 250 6 15 Deletion ola GharaelBl o tn a 251 6 1 6 Modification ota Character aui eoe Debet dad 252 6 1 7 Deletioriof a oimngle BlOCK nio tan iia ia 252 6ko Deleon or BOCK E UE DELE 252 02 Prora Neque m T 252 6 2 1 Note Tor Program INSEITIG cenas ae aoa eae delit cou ei EE beta dee Glo lidere 252 6 2 2 Program Note Modification seirer aaa aaa a aE 253 6 3 Deleon ola Progra aas Ea 253 6 Deletlor a SINGIE ProglaMiss sia E AT 253 6 3 2 Deletion oL All Programs ii id 254 6 4 Selection ota Progra socias di dida 254 Bibl Search MelliOg si ii 254 642 Scania Melinda dais TT 254 6 4 3 SOI FUNCION KEY Seal OD a en Sed ees 255 6 4 4 Select File by Using File List oooccccccconcccccccnnccccccnnncccnnnncncononnnnnnnonononannnnnnannnnnss
105. code 0 4095 gotten data parameterNO 3730 voltage compensate value when analog voltage output is 10V and data parameterNO 3730 voltage compensate value when analog voltage output is OV can be used to finally compensate and clamp adjustment to spindle speed instructions The formula is as follows take the 1st spindle for example Spindle speed output Ecetia LULA AE AS x 12 bit code NO 036 x a 9999 9999 eStop outputting conditions When SO instruction is used instructions output to spindle are all reset to 0 At this situation none of MO5 emergency or CNC reset can make spindle speed output instruction of NC reset to O gt D 5 Q x eanalog spindle interface 407 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE CNC outputs adjusted spindle speed output value in the form of analog voltage via analog spindle interface circuit to spindle frequency converter 10 3 M Type Gear Shift This gear shift pattern is valid only in single analog spindle To choose M type gear shift according to data parameter set value and S instruction value CNC makes a decision and outputs to PLC that which gear stage GR40 GR30 GR20 GR10 lt F034 3 F034 2 F034 1 F034 0 gt is needed for the appointed spindle speed After S code outputted only when CNC issues gear shift instructions to PLC do CNC output SF signal When there is auto running of any of input instructions SO S9999 CNC outputs spindle motor rota
106. coordinate system Supporting PLC axis control function Chinese English Russian and Spanish display selected by the parameters Full screen program editing 40MB program capacity for storing up to 40000 of part programs USB data communication CNC system upgrading machining programs reading through U disk and bidirectional transfer between CNC and U disk 2 channel OV 10V analog voltage output 41 input interfaces 36 output interface meeting logical control requirements for disc tool magazine and bamboo tool magazine e Alarm log multi level passwords for equipment maintenance and management e Bidirectional transfer between CNC and CNC CNC and PC upgrade of CNC software and PLC programs eo The installation dimensions and the electric ports are compatible with GSK980MD GSK980MDc GSK980MC Specifications Motion Controlled axes five axes X Y Z 4th and 5th for the 4th and 5th axes optional control axis types linear axis or revolving axis and CS contouring control available Interpolation functions linear interpolation for X Y Z 4th and 5th axes helical interpolation for X Y and Z axes circular interpolation for arbitrary 2 axes Position command range 99999999 99999999 least command increment 1um 0 1um selected via parameters Electronic gear ratio command multiplier 1 32767 command frequency divisor 132767 Rapid traverse speed maximum 60000mm min Rapid traverse override FO 25 50 100 four levels
107. e G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual system of all workpiece coordinate systems of the specified axis is cancelled If the coordinate values of the axes not all specified the local coordinate systems of the unspecified axes are not cancelled that is keep unchanged e Command G52 can not be specified at the same block with the length compensation command otherwise alarm occurs Cancel the offset of the tool radius compensation temporarily when the G52 command is being specified o After block G52 specify travel command immediately by absolute value mode Related parameters AER I1 E RLC 1 Local coordinate system is cancelled after reset RLC 0 Local coordinate system is not cancelled after reset MRC 1 Local coordinate system is cancelled after the execution of M02 M30 MRC 7 0 Local coordinate system is not cancelled after the execution of M02 M30 ZCL 1 Local coordinate system is cancelled after returning to the reference point ZCL 0 Local coordinate system is not cancelled after returning to the reference point 3 20 Select Machine Coordinate System G53 A specific point that serves as the reference point is referred to the machine zero point The coordinate system with a machine zero point set as its origin is referred to a machine coordinate system A machine coordinate system is set by performing manual reference position return after power on Once the machine coordinate system is set it r
108. executed The initial commands of GSK980MDc are GOO G15 G17 G40 G50 G50 1 G54 G67 G69 G80 G90 G94 and G98 3 1 2 Examples Example 1 O0001 G17 GO X100 Y100 Move to G17 plane X100 Y100 at the rapid traverse rate modal command GO and G17 valid X20 Y30 Move to X20 Y30 at the rapid traverse rate modal command GO can be omitted G1 X50 Y50 F300 Linear interpolation to X50 Y50 feedrate is 300mm min modal command G1 valid X100 Linear interpolation to X100 Y50 feedrate is 300mm min the Y coordinate is not input use current value Y50 keep F300 the modal command G01 25 e VI VIT 3l eT oy P D x O Q Q 3 gt Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual can be omitted GO X0 YO Move to XO YO at the rapid traverse rate modal G command GO valid M30 Example 2 00002 GO X50 Y5 Move to X50 Y5 at the rapid traverse rate G04 X4 Time delay for 4 seconds G04 X5 Time delay again for 5 seconds non modal command G04 should be input again M30 Example 3 the first operation after the power is turned on 00003 G90 G94 G01 X100 Y100 F500 G94 feed per minute feedrate is 500mm min G91 G95 G01 X10 F0 01 G95 feed per revolution input the F value again G90 G00 X80 Y50 M30 3 1 3 Related Definition The words or characters which are not specially described in this manual are as follows Start point the position before performin
109. explanation of canned cycle see the table 3 2 G136 Finish milling cycle inside groove of rectangle in CCW G137 Finish milling cycle inside groove of rectangle in CW I The rectangle width along the X axis range 99999999 99999999xleast input increment J The rectangle width along the Y axis range 99999999 99999999xleast input increment D Sequence number of tool radius the value range is 0 32 the O is default value of DO The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified sequence number K The distance between the finish milling start point and the rectangle side in X axis direction range 99999999 99999999xleast input increment U Corner arc radius no corner arc transition if it is omitted When the U is omitted or it is equal to O and the tool radius is more than O the alarm is generated Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1 5 Perform the circular and linear interpolation by the path of 2 3 4 5 6 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 7 and return to the start point 7 Returning to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Sa a a a 0 Command Path 98 Chapter 3 G Command Related Explanation The commands Q P and L
110. figure Y X Z G03 G03 G03 G02 G02 G02 X Z Y G17 G18 G19 CW or CCW The end point of an arc is specified by using the address X Y or Z and is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91 The incremental value is the distance value from start to end points of an arc The arc center is specified by address J and K against the X Y and Z respectively The numerical value following J and K however is a vector component from start point of an arc to the center point which is an incremental value with sign See the following figure End point X Y End point Z X End point Y Z Start point Start point Start point J K Center Center Center The F command is circular interpolation rate in helical interpolation in order to achieve the A linkage interpolation between linear axis and arc the speed of linear interpolation by the 3rd axis has the following relationship to the F command 34 Chapter 3 G Command f Fx oem axis length circular arc length Helical interpolation path is as follows U a le e o Tool path E El e The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate J and K have signs according to the direction The circular center also can be specified by radius R other than J and K as follows GO2X Y R GOS3X Y R Now the following two arcs can be described one arc is more than 180 the other is
111. for the first time Press L 7 the alarm 9 1 2 Graphic setting Press key to enter graphic interface Press parameter page key to access the following graphic MDI 56171 THB8 HAD GRAPH PARAMETER 00001 N08944 COOR OPT TO 0 XY 1 YX 2 ZX 3 XYZ 4 YZ 5 ZY 6 XZ 7 XZY SCALE 100 CENTER 0 0000 X AXIS VALUE CENTER a 0000 Y AXIS VALUE CENTER 0 0000 Z AXIS VALUE X MAX 120 0008 Y WAX 120 0000 Z MAX 170 0000 X MIN 128 0008 Y MIN 120 0000 7 MIN 170 0008 FAR A The way of setting graphic parameter 211 O Lo D um Q r O O Lo D um Q r O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR 1 In MDI mode press or EN to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 2 Input corresponding values DATA 3 Press L key and the setting is finished B Significance of graphic parameter Coordinate selection Display view angle of the graphic path can be selected by setting different values Corresponding coordinate for 0 7is as follows Scaling Display the scaling of current graphic path Graphic center Display the center of each axis Maximum minimum Set the maximum and minimum scope can be displayed by each axis C Graphic track operation Graphic track is as follows MDI 52267 140 HAA TRACK DISPLAY 00001 N05723 17 16 14 GRAPH PARAMETER HEN S
112. inner in an increment of K value every time U A O Q Q 3 gt Q 7 Z axis rapidly positions to R reference plane 8 Rapidly position to starting point XY plane 9 Z axis rapidly approaches the distance unmachined distance Q 10 Execute the above operation step 5 9 till the circle surface its total cutting depth is Z is machined completed 11 Return to initial point plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 12 Return to XY starting point Y Y Starting Initial plane G 7 point A ae ee Related explanation Commanding P L in the cycle is invalid but P value is saved as modal value of the fixed cycle Example G117 commands to rough mill a circle convex plate which is shown below 92 Chapter 3 G Command starting point 1 G90 GOO XO YO Z50 G00 rapidly position G99 G117 X50 Y50 R5 Z 50 120 J50 W20 Q10 K10 C20 E2 F800 D1 Cexecute the rough milling cycle of outer convex plate D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 cancel fixed cycle return from point R plane M30 3 24 2 17 Rectangular Roughing G132 G133 Command format G132 G98 99X Y Z R 1 J A BWQK CUEDF G133 Command function the tool executes the linear cutting cycle from starting at the specified parameter data till the programmed rectangular convex plane is machined completed Command explanation related commands are referred to Table 3 2 G132 outer rectangle roughing CCW G133 outer rectangle roughing CW
113. is max negative travel of X Y Z 4 5 axis When the machine position machine coordinates exceeds the set range the overtravel alarm occurs Releasing overtravel alarm press the reset key clear the alarm display and move reversely the worktable when the positive overtravel occurs the worktable is moved negatively and vice verse 2 4 Emergence Operation During the processing due to the user programming operation and the product default etc some unexpected situations may occur then GSK980MDc should stop working immediately In this chapter it mainly introduces the measures taken in emergency About the machine in emergency refer to the relative introduction of the machine manufacturer 2 4 1 Reset When GSK980MDc output and the coordinate axis moves abnormally is pressed to reset GSK980MDcC 1 All axes movement stops 2 Function of M and S output invalid The parameter sets whether the system automatically closes the spindle CW CCW the lubricating the cooling signal after ag is pressed 3 Auto running completes mode function and state hold 2 4 2 Emergency stop During the machine running in the dangerous or the emergency situation press the emergency stop button and the external emergency stop signal is valid and then CNC works in the emergency situation and the machine stops moving at once all output is off such as the revolving of the spindle and the cooling fluid After releasing the emergency stop butt
114. is set to start by G90 the origin point of the current workpiece coordinate system is set to be the origin of the polar coordinate system When a local coordinate system G52 is used the origin of the local coordinate system is set to be the origin of the polar coordinate system U a e a um o 3 3 e Polar radius Polar radius Program position ET Origin of the polar Current position Program positian cooridate system pole Origin of the palar Currant position polar angle cooridate syslen p la l sia palar angle Zero point of the workpiece coordinate E P d Zero point of the workpiece coordinate When the polar angle is specified with an absolute command P ng di i When the polar angle is specified with an incremental command Set the current position as the origin of the polar coordinate system If the polar coordinate command is set to start by G91 the current position is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system Polar radius Polar radius Program pasilion Ongin of the polar cooridate syslet pole glar angle polar angle Origin of the polar j i cooridate system pola Current position Current position Fa int af th kpieca coardinat la ci paa RE E Zero paint of the workpiece coordinate When the pol l fied weith bsolube c d E Oe tie RO SA When the polar angle is specified with an incremental cammand Specify radius of polar coordinate system In absolute mode th
115. is stopped It controls and performs this block and the blocks in the cutter radius compensation buffer memory in the compensation cancellation mode If the single block switch is turned on it stops after executing a block The next block is executed instead of reading it when the start key is pressed again a Tool movement along an inner side of a corner a2180 1 Linear to linear 2 Circular to linear Programmed path Tool center path C Programmed Tunbeenme e path path Fig 6 15a Linear to linear Fig 6 15h Circubrto linear inner side offset cancellation inner side offset cancellatiari b Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 2290 1 Linear to linear 2 Circular to linear Programmed path E Pa a Ei lc re A A c e Ee 2 C Tool center path L Intersection Programmed path Tool center path Fig 6 l6a Circular to linear Fig 16b Circular to linear obtuse outside offset cancellation obtuse outside offset cancellation 164 Chapter Cutter Compensation c Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an acute angle 180 2290 1 Linear to linear 2 Circular to linear y E le Q RS 3 3 5 ic le Tool center path L 2 Cs Programmed path Tool center path Fig 6 1 aLanear to linear Fig 6 17b Linear to linear acute angle outside offset cancellation acute angle outside offset cancellation d Tool movement along the corner outside at an ac
116. is taken when it is negative J Distance of fine milling between the start point and the circle HX 18 yu HH 99999999 99999999xleast command increment the absolute value is taken when it is negative the absolute value is taken when it is negative D The sequence number of tool radius the value range is 0 32 O is the default of DO The current tool radius value is taken according to the specified sequence number Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1 U A O Q Q 3 gt Q 5 Perform the full circle interpolation by the path of arc 2 and arc 3 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command path The center of a circle The conter of a circle lhe dtarting position Related Explanation 1 The interpolation direction of between transit arc and fine milling arc are different when the fine milling outside circle is performed the interpolation direction in command explanation is the interpolation direction of fine milling arc 2 The command Q P and L are disabled in this cycle but the Q and P value are reserved as canned cycle
117. is used to adjust the orientation of the changing tool and the tool change position of the system 6 after the tool change position is set input machine coordinate of the current tool change position into data parameter NO1241 the Z axis machine coordinate of the 2 reference point of all axis please compute and confirm the smallest unit of the current system to avoid mistakes B Overall debugging of pot tool magazine Only ensure that the debugging can complete the functions of toolpot spinning toolcase falling and down spindle orientation accomplishment and the ATC arm action can overall debugging be taking 1 When T instruction inputted to change tools the system will still go on to implement the program and at this moment the toolpot will search the target by preprocessing At meantime T instruction and M tool change program instruction can in the same block However in this way this program runs less efficient because of waiting for the toolpot stops before tool changed The program is as follows T10 G01 X10 Y10 2 The subroutine of the tool change is as follows And please run subroutine in STEP mode for the first time and make sure there is no tools in the spindle to avoid damage of the tool machine if debug errors happen O9001 09001 N1 501 4003 save G9091 N2 IF 1002EQ1 GOTO 12 if the target tool of the tool change is the current one then skip to the next N3 1101 1 l issue macro program signal N4 G91 G30
118. itis used to backup CNC parameters for user save RESUME PAR user it is used to resume the backup parameters for user read RESUME DEFAULT PAR 1 servo 1u level it is used to read initial standard parameters used to servo 1u level RESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 stepper 1u level it is used to read initial standard parameters used to stepper 1u level RESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 servo 0 1u level it is used to read initial standard parameters used to servo 1u level 197 O Lo D um Q O CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT 59941 TBa HBB SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING 3 DEGRADE PARAMETER SWT amp CURRENT a PROGRAM SWT ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER CRESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 1H LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 SERYO 0 19 LEVEL MODIFY PARAMETER AND EDIT PROGRAM 17 24 39 E CLOCK DOC LIST DEGRADE 3 4 5 level user display page EDIT 53717 179 HBH SHITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT amp OFF CURRENT LEVEL 2 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT ON INPUT PASSWORD 00 AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION C BACKUP CURRENT PAR MANUFACTORY CRESUME STORED PAR MANUFACTORY CRESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 18 LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR
119. key make a check whether the cursor is located at the block to be executed If begins from the start line but the cursor is not in this line move the cursor to the line 7 1 3 Stop of Auto Run e Stop by command M00 A block containing MOO is executed the auto run is stopped So the modal function and state are all O Lo D um Q r O reserved Press the key E or the external Run key the program execution continues e Stop by a relevant key 1 In Auto run by pressing key or external dwell key the machine remains at the following state 1 The machine feed decelerate to stop 2 During the execution of the dwell command G04 it pauses after G04 command execution is finished 3 The modal function and state are saved 4 The program execution continues after pressing the m key 2 Stop by Reset key JE 1 All axes movement is stopped 2 M S function output is invalid the automatic cut off of signals such as spindle CCW CW key can be set by the parameters lubrication cooling by pressing 3 Modal function and state is held on after the auto run 3 Stop by Emergency stop button If the external emergency button external emergency signal valid is pressed under the dangerous or emergent situation during the machine running the CNC system enters into emergency state and the machine moving is stopped immediately all the output such as spindle rotation coolant are c
120. level the steps are as follows 1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page key in the password by the method in Section 9 2 2 2 Move the cursor to the SET LOWER LEVEL line if the current CNC operation is the 3 level the page is as follows 287 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT 51612 T95 HAB SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT ON CURRENT LEVEL 3 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER CRESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 1H LEVEL RESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR C RESUME DEFAULT PAR S SERVO 0 1H LEVEL MODIFY PARAMETER AND EDIT PROGRAM 17 36 39 a A 0 MI jw DATA 3 Press key the CNC prompts SET THE PASSWORD LOWER the page is 9 as follows EDIT 7635 178 Hao A SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING O 5 PARAMETER SWT ON CURRENT LEVEL 3 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER RESUME DEFAULT PAR 1 SERYO 12 LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR S SERVO 0 1H LEVEL SET THE PASSWORD LOWER 17 37 02 _ _ _ _ c y 1 m Mee om er jum DATA 4 Press Eq key again if the demotion is successful the page is as follo
121. linear 2 Linear to circular 160 Chapter Cutter Compensation Programmed path Programmed path A i s L U i O Q E c Tool nose center path Tool nose center path E 3 Fig 6 9a Linear to linear Fig 6 9b Linear to circular obtuse angle outside movement obtuse outside movement 3 Linear to linear 4 Circular to circular Q Programmed path Tool nose center path Tool nose center path C Fig 9d Circular to circular Fig 6 Bc Circular to linear obtuse angle outside movement obtuse angle outside movement c Move along the outer of acute angle corner a lt 90 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to circular L S Tool nose center path Tool nose center path p Fig 6 10a Linear to linear Fig 10h Linear to circular acute movement outside acute movement outside 3 Circular to linear 4 Circular to circular L L L 5 Tool nose center path i Tool nose center path Fig 6 10 Sr fo linear acute Fig 6 10d Circular to circular acute movement outside movement outside 5 Inner side machining less than 1 degree and compensation vector amplification 161 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual SK 3 Tool nose center path ia UN E ee o A a im Programmed path A A A A gt gt gt i i i i i i i 2 En co m n Er pe e U im O a um y 3 3 e Fig 6 se Linear to li
122. modal value For example A finished rough milling round groove is performed by fine milling with the canned cycle G114 command see the following figure 90 o0 K when it Chapter 3 G Command Q0 L4 The center of a circle U a O a um o 3 3 e The starting position G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G114 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 150 J60 F800 D1 Start canned cycle the fine milling cycle is performed outside the circle at the bottom of a hole D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point R plane M30 3 24 2 16 Roughing Cycle Outside Circle G116 G117 Command format G116 G98 G99 X Y ZR R 1 J W_Q K_ CE DF G117 Command function the tool executes the full circle interpolation at the specified radius value and direction from the starting point till the programmed circle convex plate is machined completely Command explanation related commands are referred to Table 3 2 G116 roughing cycle for outside circle in CCW G117 roughing cycle for outside circle in CW l outer roughing circle radius it should be more than 0 and its absolute value is done when it is negative J blank workpiece radius it should be more than 0 and its absolute value is done when it is negative E allowance of excircle roughing in XY plane it should be more than 0 and its absolute value is done when it is negative the value set by No 5124 is done
123. mode Tal oO Lo D um Q O Part program Tool offset 290 Chapter 10 Document Management Pitch m H Ladder m Ladder e Ladder diagram upgrading U gt CNC Mad data Operation inr of Program Parameter mode switch switch EL software MDI mode upgrading 9 4 Parameter Operation The user data such as bit parameter and pitch data can be backup saved and restored read in this GSK980MDc system lt doesn t affect the part programs stored in the CNC system while backuping and restoring these data The backup page is as follows Press Lj LZ or key repeatedly SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING and E PARAMETER OPERATION pages can be switched o EDIT 50978 T72 HAA Oo SWITCH SETTING PARAMETER SWT amp OFF CURRENT LEVEL 3 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT amp OFF INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION BACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER CRESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 1H LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR C RESUME DEFAULT PAR S SERVO 0 11 LEVEL PRESS IN P TO CONFIRM POWER ON AGAIN 17 39 03 ey i a MEE fe e Turn on the parameter switch gt i e Press key to enter the MDI mode then press key to enter LEVEL SETTING page o Press gt gl or d and switch to the parameter operation page e Move the cursor to the desired it
124. movement distance It is easy to machine the screw holes distributed in circles shown in the figure above After a macro program used in circular holes is programmed and edited it can be performed if the NC system has circular hole machining function By the following command programming personnel can use circular holes function G65 PpRrAaBbKk p Macro program number of circular holes r Radius a Start angle of the hole b Angle of holes intervals k Holes number In this way users can improve the NC performance on their own Macro programs can be either provided by machine tool builder or defined by users 5 1 Macro Call Macro call G65 G66 differs from subprogram call M98 as described below 1 With G65 or G66 an argument data passed to a macro can be specified M98 does not have this capability 2 When an M98 block contains another NC command for example G01 X100 0 M98 P the macro program P is called after the command G01 is executed On the other hand G65 unconditionally calls a macro P 129 G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 3 When an M98 block contains another NC command for example G01 X100 0 M98 P the machine stops in the single block mode On the other hand G65 does not stop the machine 4 With G65 or G66 the level of local variables changes With M98 the level of local variables does not change Non modal call G65 When G65 is specified the macro program specif
125. not completed 1 when implementing M65 observe Y 1 4 in Ladder gt PLC to see whether it is outputted When implementing M65 observe Y 1 4 in Ladder gt PLC to see whether it is outputted If it is outputted but the toolcase does not move then please check the machine tools electric the connection to motor and the motor in good condition or not 3 If either Y1 4 or Y1 5 has no output please check the ATC arm is in situ or not If ATC arm is in situ toolcase can not fall because of the falling definitely causes the damage to the ATC arm 2 If either Y1 4 or Y1 5 has no output please check the ATC arm is in situ or not and signal X1 2 is O or not If the signal turns out to be 1 that means the ATC arm is in situ and toolcase actions forbidden 3 the tool magazine forward and backward keys in 980MDc V panel can realize the functions of M65 and M66 To backward and fall down the tool magazine make sure that toolpot spinning stopped and the ATC is in situ or the operation cannot be achieved If the operations cannot be done even if the massages mentioned above is ensured please check according to Step 1 and 2 B Spindle orientation accomplishment In MDI or AUTO mode starting M19 stands for spindle orientation accomplished If M19 cannot be work out 1 make sure Y3 0 has an output in Ladder gt PLC If there is an output please check the servo spindle is accomplishing the spindle orientation 2 if there is an alarm when spindle orientat
126. not deleted by the reset operation MKP 1 In MDI operation when M02 or M30 is executed the edited MDI programs are not deleted 0 In MDI operation when M02 or M30 is executed the edited MDI programs are deleted M30R 1 Cursor return after executing M30 in Auto mode 0 Cursor don t return after executing M30 in Auto mode o0 8 3 0 KEY1 71 Prog switch ON after power on 0 Prog switch OFF after power on MGEH 1 Aided programming function is shielded 0 Aided programming function is unshielded 0 1 9 Setting range 3 5 336 Chapter 3 Parameter 1 0 2 0 Define the name of the each axis Setting range 65 67 65 A 66 B 67 C toaa Setting range 5 7 parallel of X 5 parallel of Y 6 parallel of Z 7 1 0 2 3 The servo axis No of output interface for each axis power on Setting range 1 5 Each axis machine coordinate of 1 reference point Each axis machine coordinate of 2 reference point Each axis machine coordinate of 3 reference point Each axis machine coordinate of 4 reference point Setting range 99999999 99999999 0 001mm 1 2 4 6 Each axis axis machine zero offset Setting range 99999 99999 Unit 0 001mm 1 2 6 0 Movement per rotation of each axis Setting range 360000 360000 Unit 0 001deg 3 01 0 Delay time ms of strobe pulse signal SF during M gear shift Setting range 0 1000 unit ms 3 0 1 T Reset output time Setting ran
127. of cutting feedrate when power on Setting range 10 15000 Unit mm min 0 02 7 Axes top feedrate of cutting Setting range 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 02 9 Time constant of cutting feed Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms 0 0 3 0 Acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in cutting feed Setting range 0 8000 Unit mm min 0 0 4 1 Start speed in manual feed mm min Setting range 0 8000 Unit mm min 0 0 4 2 Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of manual feed Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms 0 0 4 3 Max rapid traverse speed of the handwheel of each axis Setting range 10 60000 01 7 5 345 Ii 5 N e D T rap le Ii T esp 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE HPF 1 When speed of handwheel exceeds the max speed set in Para 43 the exceeded handwheel pulses are not neglected 0 When speed of handwheel exceeds the max speed set in Para 43 the exceeded handwheel pulses are neglected HWnz1 Coordinate is increscent when the MPG in CCW 0 Coordinate is increscent when the MPG in CW 3 2 3 Machine Protection 0 0 4 5 4 Max each axis coordinate value of software limit 4 Min each axis coordinate value of software limit Setting range 99999999 99999999 Unit 0 001mm 17371 E ESCD 1 S code off at emergency stop 0 S code not off at emerg
128. one rotation signal PCn of X axis are connected z e independently during machine zero return the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required n X Y Z 4 th po NIK ZNLK 1 The direction keys are locked as machine zero return is performed by pressing the direction key once it moves to the machine zero automatically and stops By pressing the WE key at the machine zero return the motion stops immediately 0 The direction keys are not locked as machine zero return is performed but the direction keys should be pressed and held on 0 0 1 2 A SOT ISOT 1 Manual rapid traverse valid prior to machine zero return 0 Manual rapid traverse invalid prior to machine zero return 00 1 4 Tl r FERS5 ZRS4 ZRSZ ZRSY ZRSX ZRSZ ZRSX ZRSY ZRS4 ZRS5 1 To select machine zero return type B C which have machine zero it needs to detect deceleration and zero signals in machine zero return 319 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 0 To select machine zero return type A which has no machine zero it does not detect deceleration and zero signals in machine zero return DECX DECn 1 Deceleration signal is on with 24V for deceleration when machine zero return is performed 0 Deceleration signal is off 24V for deceleration when machine zero return is performed 00 1 3 1 TL IMzRs MZR4 MZRZ MZRY MZRX MZRn 71 The direction of zero return is negative
129. op TICIRUAL Press st key to enter optional stop and the indicator lights up The program will be stopped at command M01 Press A key again to continue program execution 271 O Lo D um Q r O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR 7 4 Memorizing at Power down In continuous drilling fixed cycle the power down memory function is invalid The power memory function is valid to the programs running in Auto or DNC mode 7 4 1 Program Interruption in Non DNC Auto Operation When power down resume is executed the user confirms whether serial number of No 77 s program name is the same that of the opened program the resume can be executed when path of the opened program is the same that of the automatic run before power down Operation method 1 Manual 0 AR SEEK iti l er power on press gt key in page program content edit execute position operation to the block where the execution stops last time 2 Switch to the pages coordinate amp program machine zero 3 Enter the next step after machine zero is performed 4 Switch to manual or MDI mode Locate to the block where it stops last time At this moment it is necessary to confirm whether it is at state G40 G49 G54 Ensure that tools are in a safe range during positioning 5 Switch to manual mode press conversion key It prompts Locate to the block where it stops last time It will recover the mode
130. open the safe gate during the auto running mode the CNC will cease in any minute and promote safe gate is not closed yet At this time shutting the spindle and cooling or not is decided by parameter 437 GSE C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual K14 2 When shutting the spindle and cooling is set then close the safe gate then restart the CNC which will run as the former state if shutting the spindle and cooling is not set then close the safe gate then restart the CNC open the spindle and cooling 11 2 22 Spindle Releasing clamping Tool eo Related signals Signal Type Symbol Significance io PLC C NC State Diagnosis JOGT Manual spindle releasing clamping CN61 14 tool control iputsignal TACT Check spindle releasing tool in CN61 16 CA Peewee Check spindle cl tool position Output Spindle releasing clamping tool CN62 29 signal output Control a eee LAGE E tool e Control parameter DT0030 Check delay time of spindle releasing clamping tool When the spindle is performing clamping tool if the CNC cannot detect the X2 0 clamping tool in position signal in the time DT30 set it will alarm When the spindle is performing releasing tool if the CNC cannot detect the X1 7releasing tool in position signal in the time DT30 set it will alarm e Function description rotation to avoid damaging the spindle during the use the interlock relationship is as below Forbidden starting spindl
131. or 3 level etc can open the program switch for program editing 6 1 Program Creation 6 1 1 Creation of a Block Number The program can be with or without a block No The program is executed by the block numbered sequence except the calling When the AUTO SEG switch in setting page is OFF the CNC doesn t generate the block number automatically but the blocks may be edited manually When AUTO SEG switch in switch setting page is on the CNC generates the block number O NEM 5 automatically In editing press key to generate block number of the next block automatically The D increment of this block number is set by No3216 a EDIT 52505 105 HAA S SWITCH SETTING PARAMETER SWT ON CURRENT LEVEL 3 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER CRESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 12 LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 SERYO 0 1 Hu LEVEL PRESS KEY L TO TURNON PRESS KEY W TO TURNOFF 14 18 30 S886 Jia nm een er 6 1 2 Input Program Content D 1 Press L key to enter the Edit mode POSITION 2 Press key to enter the Program interface select the PRG CONTENT page by pressing key 247 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT 87374 T15 HBB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 0
132. output Y3 3 Indicator for spindle rotates CCW Y23 1 Indicator for spindle rotates CW Y19 1 Indicator for spindle stop Y18 0 M03 Command signal for spindle rotates CCW M04 Command signal for spindle rotates Command CW output MOS Command signal for spindle stop M73 The 2 spindle CW instruction signal M74 The 2 spindle CCW instruction signal e Control parameter lI LLLI Lee RSJG 1 Spindle coolant and lubrication are not closed by the CNC during reset 0 Spindle coolant and lubrication are closed by the CNC during reset M command execution time Delay time from spindle stop to brake output DT0021 DT0022 DT0023 Spindle brake output time e Action sequence Operation sequence of spindle is as follows Spindle stop M o Spindle CCW CW Spindle stop O DR pTO22 i PTOZA r pe j Spindle brake UR gt D 5 Q x Note DT022 is the time from spindle stop signal issuing to spindle brake signal issuing DT023 is spindle brake 423 gt o o D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Gar holding time e Control logic SSTP output is valid after the CNC power on MO3 or M04 is executed when SSTP output is valid When SFR or SRV output is valid and held on SSTP output is stopped at the same time MO5 is executed when SFR or SRV is valid When SFR or SRV is stopped SSTP output is valid and held Spindle brake SP
133. parameter alteration The page is shown below MDI _ 83288 T37 H NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0001 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 1100000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 0000001 1 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 000000160 0008 00011111 cc 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 00000111 f 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 i 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 cce 01000101 0650 00000000 0004 DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX xxx xxx SCW BIT DEC5 signal is 0 low 1 high 17 23 32 err para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P 2 Bit alteration 1 Turn on the parameter switch 2 Enter the MDI mode 3 Move the cursor to the No of the parameter to be set Method 1 Press key to enter the page of the parameter to be set ses tt Or key to move the cursor to the No of the parameter to be set 280 Chapter 10 Document Management Method 2 Press address key key in parameter No then press soil key CHANGE 4 Press and hold key for 2 seconds or press key to skip to a bit of the parameter and the bit is backlighted Press or key to move the cursor to the bit to be altered then key in O or 1 5 After all parameters setting is finished the PARM SWT needs to be set for OFF for security
134. press key to feed line in the MDI program input box up to8 lines In MDI mode the compiled programs cannot be stored as follows MDI sauna TAO HOO G00 X0 YO Z0 GO1 X100 Y100 F500 X200 Y200 MODAL INFORMATION POSITION LABSOLUTE 0 000 300 G90 G94 640 G15 G50 G17 G21 G98 G49 G69 G50 1 G54 X Y 0 000 F100 HOO M30 LO S0000 DOQ T00 Z 0 000 T O Lo D um t O REESE F PROGRAM DI Aided CONTENT PROGRAM ta valuta in DiR MDI 50008 TAA HOA MDIL00000 INSERT GOO X0 YO 20 GO1 X100 Y100 F500 MODAL INFORMATION POSITION LABSOLUTE X 0 000 G00 G96 G94 G40 G15 G50 G1 G21 G98 G49 G69 G50 1 G54 Y 0 000 F100 H00 M30 LO 50000 DOO 100 Z 0 000 13 49 10 A CLEAR au UNDO REDO COPY ses PASTE ses Po MDI Sgggdd TAA HAA MELLA T TREER RON GOO X0 YO Zo GOI X100 Y100 F500 X200 1200 7200 G2 X300 R200 GOI X20 M30 MODAL INFORMATION POSITION GOO G90 G94 G40 G15 G50 ABSOLUTE G17 G21 G98 G49 G69 650 1 X 0 000 G54 Y 0 000 F100 HOQ M30 LO S0000 DOA TOO 7 0 000 14 66 46 a E ALL pL IL o el 244 Chapter 5 MDI Operation 2 In MDI page the system automatically address the program O0000 which is exclusive to MDI mode In Auto mode the program 00000 cannot be opened and edited When 00000 is in the U disk it is shielded and cannot be displayed in viewing
135. reset 4 0 Coordinate system not changed when reset PPD 1 Relative coordinate set by G92 G52 G54 1 G54 G59 0 Relative coordinate not set by G92 G52 G54 1 G54 G59 0 5 4 2 i RLC 1 Local coor system is canceled after cnc is reseted 0 Local coor system isn t canceled after cnc is reseted MRC 71 Local coor system is canceled after M02 or M30 is executed 0 Local coor system isn t canceled after M02 or M30 is executed ZCL 1 Local coor system is canceled after machine ref position is set 0 Local coor system isn t canceled after machine ref position is set 0 5 5 f di SKPI 71 High level valid for skip signal 0 Low level valid for skip signal G31P 1 G31 immediately stops when skip signal is valid 0 G31 slows down to stop when skip signal is valid 0 5 6 2 RIN RIN 1 Rotation angle of coordinate rotation is defined by G90 G91 0 Rotation angle of coordinate rotation is defined by G90 XSC 1 Scale rate of X Y Z is defined by l J K or para NO 5421 0 Scale rate of X Y Z is defined by P or para NO 5421 SCLZ 1 Z scale function is valid 0 Z scale function is invalid SCLY 1 Y scale function is valid 0 Y scale function is invalid SCLX 1 X scale function is valid 0 X scale function is invalid 0 5 8 2 iii cue eS JOE LPTK 1 Hole locating is done by cutting feed on line continuous drilling 0 Hole locating is done by rapid feed on line conti
136. scaling is executed first and then the coordinate are rotated The command G68 can not be issued in scaling mode G51 and cutter compensation C mode The coordinate system rotation command should always be specified prior to setting the cutter compensation C mode When the system is not in cutter compensation C mode specify the command in the following order G51 Scaling mode start G68 Coordinate system rotation mode start 70 Chapter 3 G Command G69 Coordinate system rotation mode cancel G50 Scaling mode cancel When the system is in cutter compensation C mode specify the command in the following order Cutter compensation C cancel G40 G51 Scaling mode start G68 Coordinate system rotation mode start G41 Cutter compensation C mode start Scaling and coordinate system rotation N1 G90 G69 G17 GOO X0 YO NS Y100 N2 G51 X300 Y150 P500 N6 X 200 N3 G68 X200 Y100 R45 N7 Y 100 N4 G91 G01 X400 Y100 F800 N8 X200 Y When only coordinate system rotation 13 applied d When scaling and coordinate system rotation are applied 200 When only scaling is applied Cutting progam 100 x i 100 200 300 400 Repetitive commands for coordinate system rotation It is possible to store a program as a subprogram and call subprogram several times by changing the angle The program when RIN parameter NO 562 is set to 1 The specified angular displacement is treated as an absolute or incrementa
137. sec gt MDI 50627 176 HBB MDI OO000 INSERT 1 E O O D Q O POSITION 670 G02 G27 G69 G68 C90 ABSOLUTE G90 Gil G67 G80 G89 C76 X 36 550 C54 Y 29 070 F12345 HOO H18 L1 82073 D00 148 7 3 312 15 37 13 Note other operations and relevant pages in the program page are referred to Chapter 5 3 Current program modal page In the current program page the current block display section contains the current running block information the displayed data is limited and the excessive cannot be displayed In the modal information section the status information of the system s current can be displayed the middle row XYZ PQR are modal data of fixed cycle commands their corresponding data can be displayed when the fixed cycle command runs L is the remainder times of calling subprograms currently DNC _ 7662 T66 HAA MODAL INFORMATION X F 619 X 8 800 F 12345 Y S Gas Y 8 900 S 3643 Z H G87 7d 9 000 M 66 a T G91 x 9 100 T 82 x H G11 x 9 200 H 00 I D G01 I 7 300 D J L G24 3 7 400 L 1 K A G15 K 7 500 U B G31 U 8 500 y C 663 y 8 600 H N G69 Y 8 700 P G27 P 80 Q 075 Q R 050 1 R 050 1 15 38 13 PROGRAM MDI CONTENT PROGRAM current LOCAL DIR 3 Local directory page 188 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Press LOCAL DIR to display the program directory as follows The following figure li
138. sends corresponding signals to PLC for processing When the G words share the same block with the M98 M99 M9000 M9999 these M words are performed by NC after G words the M signal not sent to PLC When G words and M S T words share the same block PLC program ladder diagram determines the execution consequence executed at the same time or G words before M S T words Refer to the manual from tool builder for relevant words execution sequence 1 3 Basic Axes Increment System The increment system consists of the least input increment for input and least command increment for output The least input increment is the minimum unit for programming moving distance The least command increment is the minimum unit for moving the tool on the machine Both increments are represented in mm inches or deg The basic axes herein means X Y Z axes The basic increment system includes IS B and IS C types which can be selected by bit ISC of parameter NO 0001 LE ee ee ee ee eee ee ISC 1 The increment system is IS C 0 1y 0 The increment system is IS B 1u In different increment system different pulse output type enables different output speed Selected by bit ABPx of parameter NO 0005 ABP ABPA ABPZ ABPY ABPX ABPx 1 The impulse mode of axis is AB phases 0 The impulse mode of axis is impulse and direction U O a um y 3 3 e e VI VIT 3 eT oy P C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual
139. sensor is used to detect spindle speed which sent to NC by PLC When editor PLC program is handling spindle speed arrival the spindle speed change instruction and cutting feed instruction issued at the same time the CNC will start cutting feed according to the former SAR signal before the spindle speed changes To avoid this problem after issuing S instruction and cutting feed instruction it is need that to take a delay monitoring of the SAR signal delay time set by data parameterNO 3740 To use SAR signal set the corresponding bit parameter first Spindle speed arrival signal SAR G029 4 gt D 5 Q x 413 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE eSignal Type PLC NC eSignal Function when the PLC makes G29 4 set to 1 passes to NC to notify the NC the NC can start cutting feed When G29 4 is 0 cutting feed is not started eNote Generally this signal is used to notify the CNC that spindle has arrived to the appointed speed Thus after spindle actual speed reaching to the designated value this signal should be set to 1 And then at this state the CNC can detect SAR signal A Have switched from fast move mode to cutting feed mode the CNC reads the feed program block before starting to locate the first feed move instruction program block and then after a time data parameter set starts to detect SAR B After S code instruction the CNC begins to locate the first feed instruction program
140. set spindle opted by spindle select signal SWS1 SWS2 and each spindle spinning at the specified speed If a spindle has not accepted the spindle select signal it will spin at the previous speed It is allowed that each spindle spinning at different speed at the same time and each has respective stop signal and enable signal Spindle Select Signal SWS1 SWS2 G27 0 G27 1 eSignal Type PLC NC eSignal Function In multi spindle mode it controls NC whether output S instructions to spindle or not SWS1 set to 1 output speed instructions to the 1st spindle SWS1 set to 1 do not output speed instructions to the 1st spindle SWS2 set to 1 output speed instructions to the 2nd spindle SWS1 set to 1 do not output speed instructions to the 2nd spindle eSignal Address c LL TL Ts There are several types of spindle control decided by parameter MSI that is e Dualanalog spindle control A type No 1 spindle chosen by SWS1 signal SIND signal is used to decide the spindle analog voltage controlled by PLC or CNC Signals R011 to R121 which have no effect on 2nd spindle play a role to set the spindle analog voltage Frame multi spindle control type A SIMDIG33 l CILAN 4 DE Ju se 55T1P11 6 27 3 LI F x EI re ra SSTPIG29 5J LI E lst spindle 2nd spindle e Dual analog spindle control B type Each spindle has a respective SIND signal 402 Appendix When spindle select signal and the 1 spi
141. speed command of epindle motor 5 code input 4 9 0 0 Max spindle speed fluctuation allowed by system Setting range 50 1000 unit r min 4 9 6 0 G76 G87 Spindle orientation M code selection Setting range 13 100 Ii 5 0 1 2 Max permissible angle error when the angle between two lines of radius compensation is 0 or 180 Setting range IS B 0 1000 Unit 0 001 IS C 0 10000 Unit 0 0001 5 0 2 5 initial tool No Setting of initial tool number must be less than that of max tool number otherwise an alarm occurs Setting range 0 99 T e A D et O 5 02 6 Max tool No Setting of max tool number must be more than that of initial tool number otherwise an alarm occurs Setting range 0 99 5 0 3 2 The number of PLC D data is corresponding to the number of start tool sheath Setting range 300 999 5 0 3 3 The number of PLC D data is corresponding to the number of exchanging tool sheath Setting range 300 999 o 1 0 8 Fixed loop return wait time ms Setting range 09999999 1 1 4 Retraction amount of G73 high deep hole drilling cycle Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm dl 340 Chapter 3 Parameter 5 1 T 5 Cutting initial point of G83 high deep hole drilling cycle Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm 5 1 2 2 6110 6111 6134 G135 Lead of helical tool infeed Setting range 0 999999 unit 0 001mm If setting value is less than 10 helical fe
142. spindle control mode is performed by the CON signal of PLC In the CS contour control mode of NC the CS contour control axis as the common servo axis can be performed manually or automatically e From spindle speed control shifts to the Cs contour control Set the CON G027 7 to 1 then the spindle can be set in the Cs contour control mode If the switch is performed during the spindle rotation the spindle is immediately stopped and then shifts e From Cs contour control shifts to the spindle speed control Set the CON G027 7 to O the spindle is then set in the spindle speed control mode Confirm the spindle movement command has been ended before shifting if the shift is performed when the spindle is being moved the system will alarm The reference position return of Cs contour control axis B After the spindle is shifted to the Cs contour control mode from the speed control mode the current position is not confirmed the spindle should be returned to the reference position The reference position return of Cs contour control axis is as follows e Manual reference position return After the spindle enters the Cs contour control mode shift to the machine zero return mode 126 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis The zero return of Cs axis is performed opening the feed axis and the direction selection signal Jn G100 or Jn G102 e Automatic Specify G28 after the spindle enters the Cs contour control mode and the spindle m
143. taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal is shown in Fig 2 8 24V MPM Hall element nDEC DECn Fig 4 8 Connection using MPM Hall elements b The connection for PNP Hall elements taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal is shown in Fig 2 9 TIN PNP Hall element nLDELC nee n Q Fig 2 9 Connection using PNP Hall elements D 2 1 7 Connection to Drive Unit 9 The connection of GSK 980MDc to GSK drive unit is shown in Fig 2 10 GSESSOMDc CN11 TASS CAOLE dive unit TE 3 TM GSKSSOMDo CN11 DASS A drive unit Pep acre 18 PLS dms El GNIZ CN 13 signal interface 9 xF O TPL sra 30 PULS SIGN 15 PULS rep wc Ip A NAAA Jar sw oe E A cr NER MERE 23 SON ARS ra a Ar e FSTP 38 OOM MEral shell Metal shell 2 Metal shell 307 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE GSKOBOMDc CN11 DF3 drive unit GSK9BOMDc CN11 ise mut CN12 CN13 signal interface C12 CN13 eel ORA GA 9 Pr E oe m Heo a m j10 DIRm a oO B gati COM FEN ge p E s am y o M nef OF TM TER m Meral shell Fig 2 10 Connection of X Y Z axis interface to drive unit 2 2 Connection of 4th Axis 2 2 1 Ath Axis Interface Definition D CP4 da Explanation DIR4 9 CP4 CP4 CP4 Command pulse signal PC4 o 10 DIR4 ye li GND DIR4 DIR4 Command direction signal ALMA All Sos VCC
144. the CNC bit parameter No 007 is set to 1 Now the previous block is decelerated to zero speed and it is positioned to the end of the block and then the next cutting feed block is performed The following block can be performed because each block is accelerating from the initial speed and then decelerating to zero at last If the program time is increasing it may cause the lower 21 Buuue IbDo d C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK machining efficiency The SMZ of bit parameter No 007 is set to O the transition between two adjacent blocks is processed according to the table 2 3 Table 2 3 Previous block Rapid Position Cutting feed Without move U im O e um 9 3 3 e Note X The subsequent block is performed after the previous block is accurately positioned at the end of the block O Each axis speed is transmitted according to the acceleration or deceleration between the adjacent blocks an arc transition is formed at the meeting point of the tool path Inaccurate positioning Example The BIT3 of the bit parameter is set to 0 G91 G01 X 100 X axis move negatively Z 200 Z axis move negatively Y 300 Y axis move negatively m Frogrammed path k 2 gt Actual movement tool path Fig 2 12 22 Chapter 3 G Command CHAPTER3 G COMMAND 3 1 G Command Brief The G command is composed by the command address G and the 1 to 3 digits command value after the comman
145. the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode 2 Press key to input the required characters press to the blocks between the cursor starting and finding the required deletion character 6 2 Program Note To facilitate the user to search manage and edit program the system provides program name note and block note functions 6 2 1 Note for Program Name The program note can be added in the brackets behind it For example program O0002 is used for machining bolt holes the note can be added in program contents as follows PROGRAM 1 Press PROGRAM key select du press PAGE UP DOWN as follows EDIT 56430 T32 HAA PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT x 00001 N04853 GOO G17 G54 G90 GOO XO YO ZO 14 25 40 7717 ES UNDO SAVE SEEK EDIT NOTES gt 252 Chapter Auto Operation 2 In the above page find the required block press eorr noves and there isa at the end of program as follows EDIT 54721 TM HBA PROGRAM LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT x 00001 N 5361 1 GOO G17 G54 G90 GOO XO YO 70 2 GO X10 Y10 3 G98 X 20 Y22 4 M99 5 M30 UNDO SAVE SEEK EDIT NOTES gt 4 Input note content in as follows EDIT 6801 T75 HBH PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT x 00001 N06757 GOO G17 G54 G90 GOO XO YO 70 1232DSAGSDGASTSEM GOI X10 Y10 G98 X 20 Y22 M99 M30 O Lo D um Q r O or w N l ES
146. the U disk 3 Use the general edit operation to compile the program OOOO In MDI mode compiling a program can execute the following operations including insertion modification deletion clearing programs cancel resume copying blocks pasting blocks and deleting blocks M99 is added to end of the block which is used to return to home of the program and execute the cycle start of MDI programs 4 The cursor moves to the required program position to execute the program press the cycle start key on the operation panel and so the program starts run After statements for end of program M02 or M30 is executed program run ends 5 The main program in MDI mode alone specifies M99 deleting programs is not controlled by 810 4 MER When M99 P program is specified the system executes skip 6 In MDI mode compiled programs can be deleted as follows When No 810 MER is set to 0 the program which last block is executed is automatically deleted it is not deleted when it is specified to executed When No 810 MER is set to 1 the program which last block is executed is not deleted No 810 MKP is 0 MO2 M30 is executed and the program is also deleted Press the soft press key deletion program in MDI page the MDI program input box is deleted When No 810 MCL is set to 1 and reset operation is executed MDI program input box is deleted In Auto mode or DNC mode start running programs programs in MDI program input box are automatically deleted 7
147. the beginning of previous block or at the corner When a step less than the tool radius is machined When a program contains a step which is an arc and less than tool radius tool center path may form a opposite movement direction to the programmed path So the first vector is ignored and it moves to the end of the second vector along a straight line The program will be stopped for Single block mode the cycle continues if it is not single block mode The compensation will be executed correctly and no alarm will be generated if the step is a straight line But the uncut part is reserved e When the sub program is contained in G code CNC should be in compensation cancellation mode before calling the sub program namely before the G98 is performed Offset can be applied after entering the sub program but the compensation cancellation 168 Chapter Cutter Compensation should be applied before returning to the main program before M99 or the alarm occurs e When compensation value is changed a Usually the compensation value is changed when the tool change is performed in compensation cancellation mode If the compensation value is changed in compensation mode the new one is ineffective which is effective till the program is executed again b If different compensation values are commanded in different blocks of a program different compensation value will be compensated to the corresponding block But if it is an arc the alar
148. the block that tool length compensation is specified G02 G03 G04 G92 G31 G142 and G143 cannot be specified at the same time otherwise an alarm will occur Note 2 Tool length compensation command can be specified in the block in which canned cycle is specified But after the canned cycle is executed the tool length compensation is disabled and is not modal Example Explanation H1 10 0mm H2 20 0mm G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G44 G01 X50 Y50 Z50 H2 direction G90 G00 X100 Y100 Z100 Linear interpolation setting H2 tool length compensation in negative direction Position to X100 Y100 2Z100 Z80 with H2 compensation offset In the same block with G02 G03 G04 G31 G92 G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G49 G02 X50 R25 H2 direction Alarm occurs In the same block with canned cycle code G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G44 G81 X50 R5 Z 70 H2 direction G90 G00 X100 Y100 Z100 Setting H2 tool length compensation in the negative direction Starts the canned cycle from H2 Specified in the canned cycle G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G90 G81 X50 R5 Z 70 direction G49 H2 Compensation offset with H1 enters into canned G49 GO X75 Y 75 Z75 HO cycle mode The tool length compensation G49 H2 in the canned 55 U A O Q Q 3 gt Q GSK C Est CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual cycle is in
149. the hole position by the absolute value or incremental R Fromihe ina plane tothe point distance Z Specify the dwell time at the bottom of the hole or at point R when a return _ _ ace Tre et near pore wen e not npu or ovas 0 Tool infeed value of peck tapping Aparture It indicates that the consecutive machining cycle of L holes are performed machining L on this line segment from start the start position of block to XY data coordinate position The continued drilling may not perform if it is not input or the value is 0 Metric thread leading the solution range 0 001 500mm The alarm 201 may alarm if it is not input The number of the thread head per inch the solution range is 0 06 25400 gear inch Start angle 3 30 4 Technical Specification Acceleration deceleration Rigid tapping adopts the acceleration or deceleration before a straight line to control eo Override 115 v E O e y 3 3 e G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual The override regulation is invalid for rigid tapping infeed but the override value can be adjusted or not which is determined by data parameter e Dryrun G84 G74 can be used a dry run the dry run equals to the feedrate along Z axis The override adjustment is invalid in dry run e Machine lock G84 G74 can be used a machine lock the tapping axis and spindle axis are not moved when the machine lock is enabled o Resetting The resetting can be res
150. the initial terminal speed of exponential acceleration or deceleration for cutting feed Data parameter No 030 for exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant of cutting feed Data parameter No 041 for initial or terminal speed of exponential acceleration or deceleration in manual feed Data parameter N2042 for exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant of manual feed 2 4 2 Manual Feed Manual feed This GSK980MDc can perform positive negative movement of X Y Z 4th or oth axis by the current manual feedrate in the Manual mode X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis can be moved at one time This NC offers 16 levels 0 150 10 each time manual feedrate override see the following table 2 2 The actual feedrate series and modification mode or the like in manual feeding are defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder The function description of GSK980MDc standard PLC ladder diagram is as follows for reference only Table 2 2 A panne TOELAE 2 0 3 2 5 0 7 9 12 6 20 32 50 79 126 200 320 500 79011260 mm min Note The manual feedrate of X axis is diameter variation per minute the feedrate defined by GSK980MDc standard PLC ladder diagram is memorized when the power is turned off Related parameter Data parameter No 041 for speed lower limit of acceleration or deceleration in manual feed Data parameter No 042 for exponential acceleration or decelerat
151. then performed spindle rotates positively regardless of the currently spindle rotation status and the positive or negative rotation are specified before the canned cycle 2 The command Q and P are disabled in this cycle but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 24 2 10 Back Boring Cycle G87 Command format G87 XY ZRQPFL X Y holes positioning data Z hole depth Incremental specifies distance between point R plane and hole bottom or absolute value specifies coordinates of hole bottom R Incremental specifies distance between point R plane and hole bottom or absolute value specifies coordinates of point R plane Q Offset amount of hole bottom P Pause time of hole bottom F Cutting feedrate L L means quantity of holing from starting point and point set by G87 L means times of currently circular holing when G87 does not set holing point Command function Back boring cycle is used to boring precise hole and the tool safely retracts to the initial plane after machining completion Cycle process D Rapidly position to XY plane 2 The spindle orientation is done and stops at the fixed position after XY plane positions 3 Traverse Q distance 4 Rapidly traverse to point R 5 Traverse Q distance 6 Spindle rotates CW 7 Execute boring cycle to point Z 8 When P is commanded the system pauses at P time 9 The spindle orientation is executed it stops at the fixed position 0 Travers
152. to be specified newly because all of the NOOGO G85X Z RP cala in previous DOCK ae cancelled the above valve specified is applied when the F is omitted Although the P value is commanded but it is not needed for this hole machining so the P value is saved di position just moves along the X axis The Z and R P values separately specified by N0070 and NOO6O NO080 G89X Y D the F value specified in NOO20 are taken as hole machining data which are used for G89 hole machining N0090 G1121 J F D The fine milling hole machined by G89 is performed by G112 NO100 GOX Y Z positioning for a rectangle machining G134 Start machining the rectangle ZRIJK UD N0120 YIJKUD Begins machining the second rectangle 106 N0110 Chapter 3 G Command N0130 X Y_IJ KUD Begins machining the 3rd rectangle G138X Y R Z The fine miling inside the machined rectangle groove is to be JKUDES performed the corresponding data are needed N0150 G01X Y PRICE the He machining mode and data except for F the G01 cutting feed is performed by XY Note Address I J K and U of canned cycle G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 and G139 are not saved as canned cycle modal data so the I J and K values need to be specified in each block or the alarm will be generated 3 24 6 Examples for Canned Cycle and Tool Length Compensation Reference point U O Q um 9 3 3 e 400 1
153. to light up the indicator of optional stop key and enter the optional stop state The program is stopped when M01 is being executed Press m to continue the execution 11 2 14 Stroke Limit and Emergency Stop eo Related signal Signal Symbol Significance PLC CNC type State Diagnosi S External emergency stop signal CN6818 X05 X positive mr COIE Input signal Z positive E e Control parameter gt D 5 Q x Corresponding F address MESP 0 External emergency stop signal is valid 1 External emergency stop signal is invalid en j o y un LTHL 1 alarm for X Y Z axis overtravel signal is disconnected with 24V 0 alarm for X Y Z axis overtravel signal is connected with 24V LTEN 1 check eternal overtravel signal to X Y Z axis 433 gt o o D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK 0 not check eternal overtravel signal to X Y Z axis Note when there is eternal overtravel alarm change the work mode into manual Or MPG mode move the alarming axis in another direction until the overtravel signal overturned finally press the Reset key to release the alarm e External connection of the machine The connection of the emergency stop and travel switch is as follows take 3 axis as example y o Emergency CNB 6 stop switch e Control logic When the contact of the emergency stop switch is cut off the ESP signal and 24V is
154. to modify bit parameters according to bits press and to select the required parameter bit to modify as follows MDI 85183 T81 HAB NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0001 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 00000000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 00000011 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00011111 gt 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 00000111 H 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 eum 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 j 01000101 0650 00000000 0006 kkk xxx xxx 7M5 7M4 ZWZ ZMY ZMX BITO Ref point X return in Mode 0 B 1 C 09 24 46 er para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P DIATA 3 oro repetitively to switch the parameter bit between O and 1 to modify the value of the parameter bit ADD TO In BIT PARA page press SIT PARA to enter the sub menu press OFEN USED to set corresponding parameter number to often used parameter page to display 204 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI _ 6932 34 HAA NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0001 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001
155. variable 5 Natural logarithm i LN j i Note that the relative error may be greater than 10 ii When the antilogarithm j is zero or smaller P S alarm is issued iii A constant can be used instead of the j variable 6 Exponential function Zi EXP Zj i Note that the relative error may be greater than 10 149 U im O e um 9 3 3 e C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK ii When the result of the operation exceeds 3 65x10 j is about 110 an overflow occurs and P S alarm is issued iii A constant can be used instead of the j variable 7 ROUND function When the ROUND function is included in an arithmetic or logic operation command IF statement or WHILE statement the ROUND function rounds off at the first decimal place Example When 1 ROUND 2 is executed where 2 1 2345 the value of variable 1 is 1 0 When the ROUND function is used in NC statement address the ROUND function rounds off the specified value according to the least input increment of the address 8 Rounding up and down to an integer With CNC when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer Conversely when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is less than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is refe
156. 0 F12345 HOQ H50 L1 5701 Dog 181 7 3 328 11 58 34 e 1 7 ol mew uaa prof comer coca om on E E 9 5 129 4 51 21 Pe by sequence the page is as follows MDI lt 88822 TUB HAA MDILOO000 INSERT POSITION G54 G42 G98 638 G07 G38 ABSOLUTE G04 G24 G80 G54 GOO G58 X 36 150 613 Y 28 750 F12345 HOQ H66 LI 4133 Dog 170 7 3 311 11 57 28 PROGRAM NUES CONTENT Im my ULM CURRENT LOCAL DIR 24 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 4 Press EJ the page is as follows 54143 T05 HBB MDI MDI 00000 MODAL INFORMATION POSITION 656 G03 G82 657 GOG G60 ABSOLUTE G09 G25 G31 G38 G97 680 X 15 400 G67 Y 12 150 F12345 HO M68 L1 8593 DOO T66 Z 3 269 PROGRAM CONTENT FA l CURRENT LOCAL DIR 5 2 Blocks Execution O Lo D um Q O ES After the words are input and resi the background color of program segment becomes nne these MDI words are executed after the B key is pressed During the execution pesa and Emergency Stop button may be pressed to terminate the MDI words execution Ifi key IS the background color of program segment will becomes black then words can be input again Note The subprogram call command M98 P etc is invalid in MDI mode 5 3 Parameter Setting In MDI mode the parameter va
157. 0 ILXT100 S1X1000 Wu25 Vu 5096 WL100 MACHINE ZERO MPG Step increment and Rapid override selection key Block Single key Block Skip key Machine Lock key M S T Lock key Dry Run key Edit mode key Auto mode key MDI mode key Machine zero mode key Step MPG mode key Manual mode key Operation Mode and Display Function explanation Move amount per handwheel scale 0 001 0 01 0 1 mm Move amount per step 0 001 0 01 0 1 mm For switching of block blocks execution Single block lamp lights up if Single mode is valid For skipping of block headed with sign if its switch is set for ON the Block Skip indicator lights up If the machine is locked its lamp lights up and X Z axis output is invalid If the miscellaneous function is locked its lamp lights up and M S T function output is invalid If dry run is valid the Dry run lamp lights up Dry run for program MDI blocks command To enter Edit mode To enter Auto mode To enter MDI mode To enter Machine zero mode To enter Step or MPG mode one mode is selected by parameter To enter Manual mode Function mode Auto mode MDI mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC mode Auto mode DNC mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Machine zer
158. 0 9 Program Example G84 shows an example for the following program O1000 Rigid tapping example GO X0 YO ZO M29 200 G84 X10 Y10 Z 10 R 5 P2000 F2 C20 X20 C40 G80 M30 U O Q Q 3 3 Q 119 GSK GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual y A O Q Q 3 3 Q 120 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis CHAPTER 4 CONTROL FUNCTION of ADDITIONAL AXIS 4 1 General The additional axis is determined by the instruction design of the machine sometimes an additional axis is required for example the cycle working table rotation working table This axis can be designed as both a linear axis and rotation axis The basis controllable number of 980MDc is three axes the maximum axis is 5 axis Cs axis included Namely two additional axes are added based upon the original one the 4 and the 5 axes in this case the relative functions of additional linear axis and rotation axis can be performed 4 2 Axis Name The names of three basis axes are always X Y or Z The axis name of additional axis can be set to A B or C using data parameter No 1020 eo Default axis name When the axis name does not set the axis name of the 4 one is an additional axis by default the axis name of the 5 one is C e Repeated axis name When the axis name is same between the added 4 axis and the 5 axis P S alarm may issue 4 3 Axis Display When the additional axis is treated a
159. 00000000 9 00000000 18 00000000 19 00000000 18 00000000 it 86000000 y 60000000 11 00000000 Maga xxx ttt ESP xxx DECK xxx xir xxi EIG ETIN GRA C T FIND P 1 2 G R A signal z i a Press MON to view state information of G R A At the moment press Sed ma to switch O E among R A K press t v to view parameters of R A K c In the page the system displays states of G0000 X0255 A0000 Y0024 R0000 R099 which is e 2 shown below MDI 31243 TBB HBH LADDER gt 1 0 STATE gt G R A OA R SIGNAL A SIGNAL 0 0000000 00000000 9 Os08000000 1 aaa 1 aaaaaada 1 BARBARA 2 00000000 2 gagaaggg Z gggggdd 3 00000000 3 00000000 3 00000000 4 00000000 4 00000000 4 00000000 5 00000000 fi 00000008 5 0000000 6 000008000 D 00000000 6 00000000 i 00000000 i 00000000 LEN gua 8 00000000 8 00000000 8 00000000 9 00000000 9 00000000 g 00000000 10 00080900 10 Q0008000 10 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 1 ATTE 0000 El I8 OXY cea C T FIND P 1 3 C T signal Press ae to view state information of C T At the moment press
160. 0001 N08147 NOQ05 GI G3 GO X100 Y100 7100 A100 C100 GO N0020 GOO X75 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 M03 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 05 21 N0050 G98 X52 232 Y55 789 N0060 G74 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F100 NO070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 X1 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 YbO 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 25 W10 7 120 K8 5 09 7 F1600 N0110 G112 120 JO DO N0120 GO Xbb Y55 785 A75 C60 N0130 G135 R55 735 170 J60 K8 15 US Q9 N0140 G137 X80 Y50 I70 J60 K8 Ub NO150 G90 GO X25 Y25 785 A5d5 5 066 66 G82 X90 Y90 R75 720 P1500 L5 14 14 24 y a eer ETE PROGRAM EE MOERS uti Di E AMEN 3 Key in address key numerical key and key by sequence e g Program 00001 creation m O Lo D Q O EDIT 5189 T58 HB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00002 INSERT 00002 N03487 00002 im 18 9L XY7 E A GOO X300 Y300 7300 A300 C300 G90 G54 G49 GO X50 Y5 750 A50 C50 HO X75 23 175 86 785 A75 369 C88 65 W03 G82 R75 721 5 C36 P2000 F1200 X60 55 Y22 2 C180 R70 725 05 21 X52 232 Y55 789 X1 5 G90 GOO X50 Y50 785 A100 CO G99 6110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 C45 745 25 W10 7 120 K8 5 Q9 7 F1650 SEA 6112 A125 558 120 JO DO GO X55 Y55 785 A100 C300 G135 R55 735 170 J60 K8 W15 Ub Q9 G137 X80 Y50 170 J60 K8 Ub G90 GO X25 Y2b 785 A45 C369 G82 X90 Y90 R75 720 P1500 L5 G140 G81 X80 Y50 J35 AD B7 725 14 17 42 ooo 1 7 Vm MDI A
161. 003 DC0004 DC0005 DC0006 DC0007 DC0008 DC0009 DC0010 DC0011 mj 10 16 35 A K SETTING D SETTING DT SETTING oc serrano oe Setting method of DC parameter are the same that of D O O S o S S pro n O 4 Ladder information 3 With less than 2 level operation authority the screen displays the soft key mc List at the bottom of um o m the ladder page Press to enter the ladder file list page to stop start backup and delete the ladder before the ladder means the ladder is running The displayed page is shown below MDI 88H34 T45 HOA LADDER gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00001 N00378 NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc SeriesEl2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder STDPLC LD2 v1 00 PIBE AAA PR Bl VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SEZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 09 15 49 13 10 17 14 1 0 smit PLC DATA MONITOR ene List COPY TO When the system finds the U disk the soft key nse appears which is shown below 4 1 Copy to U disk 220 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI sBBBB TAA HAB LADDER gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00002 N00000 NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Serial2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Vint FZ E 2 GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC I1d2 2011
162. 004 1 N00015 GO X100 Y100 7100 o F X 200 P a Y 200 U Z 200 Y5 A W 20 d lst BO E l ra E L e I 20 D2 i J H K 10 H e R 50 End Point ead 010 T X Y tex 3 N00025 GOO X0 YO 70 G143 Circular path serial punch in CCH 16 14 08 ee E HET A E A FA DELETE Press to delete G value and the system matches all valid address corresponded with all current input G commands as follows EDIT SAAAA TAA HAA 1 N00015 G01 X100 Y100 7100 G command function N 00020 F G0O Rapid positioning G110 X200 P GOI Linear interpolation Gh v200 U G02 Circular and helical 7 200 V5 interpolation clockwise A W 20 G03 Circular and helical BO E interpolation counterclockwise C L G04 Dwell I 20 D2 687 1 Cylindrical interpolation J H G15 Polar coordinate command cancel K 10 M G16 Polar coordinate command mode R50 3 G17 XY plane selection zi l G18 ZX plane selection 3 N00025 GOO XO YO 70 PUT SENE IS TUNE 16 14 26 ooo 33 Y E ER RR CREE E A CANCEL 2 press key 264 Chapter Auto Operation Press and at B address as follows EDIT SANAA TAA HAA Aided programming 00100 N00004 1 N00015 GO X100 Y100 7100 N 00020 F G110 X200 P G143 Y200 U G Z 200 v5 A 20 B E J L I 20 D2 J H Center K 18 H R R 50 S Q 18 T 3 N00025 GOO XO YO 70 Arc radius in arc serial punch Shift Save Exit O CANCEL 7 E
163. 01 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 00000000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 00000011 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00011111 EUR 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 00000111 sci 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 En 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 deem 7 01000101 0650 00000000 4 0001 xxx xxx xxx ACS HWL xxx ISC xxx BIT Unused err para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P There are two lines to display parameter contents the first displays English abbreviations of all bits of the parameter where the current cursor is and display of their parameter bit can be changed by pressing or the second displays Chinese definitions of all bits of the parameter where the cursor is The page displays detailed information of user parameters the system parameters can be set or modified the parameter currently set by user can be backup the user can resume the parameter to the one that the system defaults or resume it to the one that the user backups In MDI mode the PARA SWITCH is ON the operation authority is equal to or more than 3 level the E user can execute parameter setting Select the required modification parameter by pressing a J FIND P DATA or press to input t
164. 0MDc whose figures and dimensions are as follows 205 Reserved MPG installation hole 2727 gt Reserved button hole oe gt EQS 30105 Reserved button hole Be Appendix 5 Dimensions for Additional Panel AP03 APO03 applies to GSK980MDc V whose figures and dimensions are as follows M4 RG M yr DO 7 EEE AL XN A 6 020544 M gt D 5 Q x CN Li y 377 goma g E EA L yx px COLA m 9 El CX DEA TT C 1 PX O SA EA PU gt N AF C Apot Ay A0 A0 GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GR CNC Appendix 6 Diagram of I O deconcentrator 6 1 MCTO1B G G i TX TX c Av C L 0X JE OA C OA c gt lt LOA 9 0X S 0X N m c S gt lt 9 OA GOA OA p lt y OX 0 04 POL oO Avr C 903 JOt CN61 J04 aa T Av C m P J pe LA gt A0 gon CA L bx P amp D EA ZEA LOTA 9 PX CA e pen TA 1 ds TEA br Jl L C X SHX D QD nl eo eu 0 EA i tX C C a E Se ME we n C EX TCA Mer y C2 S CA APTF A0 TO A e APZ y lt J ITA V ZA D c X C Y L lt 47 a LTA L EX L K D e Jeu o TEX 0 ZA
165. 1 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 01100000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 0000001 1 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00011111 Y 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 00000111 0 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 gt Y 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 fe 01000101 0650 00000000 0004 DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX xxx xxx SCH BIT4 DECY signal is 0 low 1 high 17 25 52 err para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P Key in 1 to finish the alteration 281 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MDI 58741 147 HB NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0001 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 01110000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 00000011 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00011111 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 000001 11 oe 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 gt Y 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 j 01000101 0650 00000000 0004 DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX xxx xxx SCH
166. 1 5 axes G59 workpiece zero point 9999 099 9999 999 Read offset value write 5 2 1 Null Variables When the variable value is undefined the variable is null Variable 0 is always null and can be read O O O D 2 E D lt lt lt a referencing The address itself is ignored when an undefined variable null variable is quoted When 1 lt Null When 72120 G90 X100 Y 1 equals to G90 X100 G90 X100 Y 1 equals to G90 X100 YO b Arithmetic operation Null equals to 0 in any case except when assigned by Null When 1 lt Null gt 42 81 assignment 422 11 The arithmetic operation result 2 The arithmetic operation result 2 equals to Null equals to O 2 1 5 2 1 5 The arithmetic operation result 2 The arithmetic operation result 2 equals to 0 equals to O 22 31 11 2 1 1 The arithmetic operation result 2 The arithmetic operation result 2 equals to 0 equals to O 157 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK c Conditional expression Null differs from 0 only for EQ and NE When 1 Null When 72120 1 EQ 0 1 EQ 0 y l True False 1 NE 0 1 NE 0 l y False False U im O e um 9 3 3 e 1 GE 0 1 GE 0 False False 1 GT 0 1 GT 0 False False 5 2 2 Local Variables Local variables are the variables internally defined in a program They are effective only within the program i e it is only can be used within the program A local v
167. 1 N00015 GOl X100 Y100 7100 G command function N 00020 F G140 Rectangle path serial punch in G110 X200 P CH cM Y 200 U G141 Rectangle path serial punch in Z 200 v5 CCH A W 20 G142 Circular path serial punch in CW 0010 ME C L I 20 D2 J H K 10 M R 50 S Q 10 T 3 N00025 GOO XO YO 70 15 15 46 al Shift Save Exit DATA 5 Press and G commands pointed by the cursor in G command menu are input to G address input area which is left to the cursor as follows EDIT Saaaa TAA HBB Aided programming 00100 N00004 1 N00015 GOI X100 Y100 7100 N 00020 F G110 X200 P Ms G43 Y 200 U G 7 200 V5 A a IA lst B E ud B L Fd I 20 D2 J H H K 18 H R 50 S End Point a en 010 T x Y Lan 3 N00025 GOB XO YO 70 G143 Circular path serial punch in CCH 15 16 28 p a l EN Shift Save Exit Ie 2 Shortcut key Shortcut key rapidly positions only valid addresses Chapter Auto Operation 1 shortcut key In aided programming page press 84 and the cursor rapidly positions to G address Press ES repetitively and the cursor constantly positions circularly at G address as follows EDIT AAAA THE HAD Aided programming 00100 N00004 1 No00015 GOI X100 Y100 7100 F X 200 P Y Y 200 U ha 7 200 V5 A Wr WI ose 1st B E x C L ES 120 D2 f J H K 10 H e R 50 3 End Point dad 010 T X Y d 3 N00025 GOO XO
168. 1 SELECT YOU NEED IT PITCH COMP PLC PARA PLC AS i SOFT KEY TO BACKUP R ESTORE RESUME OPTION 2 CORRESPONDING ITEM OF RESTORING COULD M PARAMETER M PROGRAM M OFFSET NOT BE SELECTED WHEN PITCH COMP PLC PARA r PLC THE FILE DOESN T EX SOURCE PATH u gsk980mdc backupYuser COPY THE LOG TO u gsk980mdc backup A DESELECT SELECT ALL CANCEL au 11 4 Resume Operation Example 09 52 26 PERFORM 1 In BACKUP l page press f Or V to switch backup and resume 2 After the system is switched to the resume page a part program is selected by soft key 3 In MDI mode press soft keys or press OUT and the system prompts whether it executes resume press IN to execute resume operation When the resume operation fails the system prompts the failure O Lo D um Q r O MDI 87885 T58 HBB BACKUP OPTION HELP T PARAMETER F PROGRAM OFFSET 1 SELECT YOU NEED IT PITCH COMP FPLC PARA FPLC A i E SOFT KEY TO BACKUP R FLOG ESTORE MET gt CORRESPONDING ITEM OF RESTORING COULD NOT BE SELECTED WHEN PITCH COMP PLC PARA PLC THE FILE DOESN T EX PARAMETER PRESS IN KEY TO RESTORE 10 05 24 CAN L DESELECT SELECT ALL CANCEL ALL e PERFORM 11 5 Notes gt Notice If a file or list on target path has the same name as the one will be copied it will be overwritten and replaced by the system automatically Therefore to prevent
169. 10 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 Group 6 G20 G21 Group 7 G40 G41 G42 Group 14 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 H code M code 4114 Block sequence number mtis 4119 S code 4720 e Current position Position information can be read R z movement Workpi lock 45001 5005 orkpiece CODI SEDI block end point ERSBlsd tool compensation value not included 45021 45025 Machine cooramalg system current position tool Disabled compensation value included U im O e a 9 3 3 e 45041 45045 Workpiece coordinate system current position Disabled tool compensation value included 45061 45065 Workpiece cooramate Sytem skip signal position tool compensation value included Note 1 The first digit from 1 to 5 represents an axis number Note 2 The tool length compensation value currently used for execution rather than the immediately preceding tool compensation value is held in variables 5081 5085 Enabled 143 G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual e Workpiece coordinate system compensation value Workpiece coordinate system compensation value can be read and written Variable No Function 5201 5205 The first to the fifth axes external workpiece zero point offset value 5221 5225 The first to the fifth axes G54 workpiece zero point offset value 5241 5245 The first to the fifth axes G55 workpiece zero point offset value i6321 45325 U im O
170. 10_TEST_PLC 1d2 M GSK980MDc_SCRIPT INI LT PLC 1d2 I I0 TEST I0U 1d2 PROGRAM HA IO TEST PLC 1d2 00000 CNC 00001 CNC LN 00082 CNC 3 00200 CNC I 3 09800 cnc L 3 09001 cnc LM 08001 CNC LM 00002 CNC M 09000 CNC M 09001 CNC 13 PENDRIVE LM PLC 40X100T02 120314 Idx LM PLC 40X100T02 1203142 Idx s 09 19 55 oe jsHmg mox fe isr Chapter 10 Document Management 10 2 2 File copy current directory in C disk current directory in U disk nm SETTING In MDI mode press to select DATA INPUT SELECT press Or sug to select the file as follows and the cursor moves to the required file to copy D Selected O0001 CNC in the CNC MDI DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT d GSK980MDc SYSTEM FILES LDI PARAM PAR LD TOFF CMP LTA HOFF HHP LADDER FILES LM GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LB I0 TEST PLC 1d2 L PLC 1d2 PROGRAM LM 00080 CNC LA 00901 CNC LM 00082 CNC LM 00200 CNC I 3 09000 cnc L 3 09001 cnc sBBBHB TOO HAB 00200 N00000 09 26 49 SETTING CLOCK DOC LISI MDI DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT O Lo D um Q r O JJ COPY TO 2 After the file is selected U2ISK is pressed to copy O0001 CNC to the U disk as follows sBBBB TOO HAB 00200 N00000 B GSK9890MDc SYSTEM FILES L PARAM PAR LN TOFF CHP LPS WOFF WHP LADDER FILES LA GSK980MD
171. 12 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 has no continuous drilling function Note 3 The maximum drilling number C is 9999 the negative value is processed as absolute value the decimals are rounded Note 4 When C is not specified or equals to 0 it reaches the end point directly and no drilling will be performed 3 24 4 Cautions for Canned Cycle 1 The spindle should be rotated The M code should be correctly specified or the alarm will be generated the G74 by M04 G84 by M03 by using the miscellaneous function M code before the canned cycle is executed 2 Specifying any command of the X Y Z and R data the hole machining can be performed in the canned cycle of G73 G889 If neither data is contained in the block the hole machining is not performed 104 Chapter 3 G Command 6110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 and G139 are still needed to specify the corresponding address l J and K or the alarm occurs But the hole machining is not performed when the G04 X is specified in the circumstance of X because the X indicates for time when the G04 is specified GOO X GOO rapid positioning Ge1X Y Z RF L Hole machining performs Without hole machining F F value is refreshed without the hole machining M Performing the miscellaneous function only 3 When the canned cycle G74 or G84 is employed in spindle rotation consolation if the hole position X Y or distance fro
172. 2 c BUIPIAIG Z axis relative coordinate coordi divided into 2 nate State 2 level DATA State parameter MDI mode poet level Parameter value VET 2 level Data parameter pur MDI mode pe Parameter value level TUER compens MDI mode ation 2 level paramet er X axis pitch compensation parameter input Dunes ejeq Y axis pitch compensation amp compensation parameter input INPUT value MDI mode ation 2 level 226 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Display Password Program Parameter ort Function Operation Mode page ls ON OFF ON OFF Pitch Z axis pitch Z compens compensation compensation MDI mode ation 2 level ON parameter input E p E value Macro value 2 level Macro Macro variable level E variable 4 level Tool radius offset Tool D data input a offset Tool radius offset Tool H data input Data value acid offset Search downward from the current Edit mode position of cursor level O Lo D um Q r O Search upward Pro rami level from the current Edit mode con But level ON position of cursor NNI 4 level Search downward from the current program Search upward from the current program Search the specified program UoJeeg Search state parameter data parameter or pitch compensation parameter PLC state PLC data search Delete the character where IS the cursor is Edit mode Program
173. 2 39 In figure usually L12 1 5 2 folds To connect to 24V width of the approach switch L2 the width of the approach switch To connect to QV 2 Wiring of the deceleration signal See details in Section 2 1 6 of this chapter Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis Jof the bit parameter No 006 and the DECn of the bit parameter No 004 are all set to 0 ZCn n is X Y Z 4 axis Jof the bit parameter No 007 is set to 1 the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of zero return is shown as follows Machina zero return path nDEC m PC Velocity y High speed zero return Ii Deceleration d r Start deceleration over ut Y et 2 T O Machine zero Low speed zero retum Time t Fig 2 40 the action time sequence of zero return 4 Machine zero returns process A Select the Machine Zero mode press manual positive or negative zero return direction set by bit parameter No 13 feed key the corresponding axis will move to the zero at a traverse speed B As the approach switch touches the tongue for the first time the deceleration signal is valid and it slows down immediately to run in a low speed C As the approach switch detaches the tongue the deceleration signal is invalid it moves at a fixed low speed after deceleration and starts to detect zero signal PC D As the approach switch touches the tongue
174. 2 Handwheel signal circuit The connection of GSK980MDc to handwheel is shown in Fig 2 23 CSKOSONDe CNEL I TET GSKGB8O MDc CCN31 Hand wheel double input Fig 2 23 Connection of GSK980MDc to handwheel 5 2 6 Connection of GSK980MDc to PC o 2 6 1 Communication Interface Definition q 5 S l E Explanation 2 RXD 7 RXD For date reception 3 TXD 8 E A 0 9 TXD For date transmitting 5 GND o y GND For signal grounding Fig 2 24 CN51 communication interface DB9 female socket 2 6 2 Communication Interface Connection The communication between GSK980MDc and PC can be done via RS232 interface GSK980MDc communication software needed The connection of them is shown in Fig 2 25 GSEGSOMD C CNEL PC RS232 interface Fig 2 25 Connection of GSK980MDc to PC 313 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE The communication of a GSK980MDc to another GSK980MDc can be made via their CN51 interfaces and the connection of them is shown in Fig 2 26 GSESRO0MDc CN51 GSK9SOMDe CN51 Fig 2 26 Communication connection of GSK980MDc to GSK980MDc 2 Connection of Power Interface GSK PB2 power box is applied in this GSK980MDc which involves 4 groups of voltage 5V 3A 12V 1A 12V 0 5A 24V 0 5A and its common terminal is COM OV The connection of GSK PB2 power box to GSK980MDc CN1 interface has been done for its delivery from factory and the user only need t
175. 21 N0050 G98 X52 232 Y55 789 N0060 G74 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F1005 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 X1 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 YbO 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 25 W10 7 120 K8 5 09 7 F1600 N0110 G112 120 JO DO N0120 GO X55 Y55 285 A75 C60 N0130 G135 R55 735 170 J60 K8 15 US Q9 N0140 G137 X80 Y50 170 J60 K8 Ub N0150 G90 GO X29 Y25 85 Add 2 C66 66 15 34 7 5 UNDO REDO SAVE SEEK EDIT NOTES la 2 MDI program page PROGRAM Press to enter MDI page which displays the current G M S T F H D L commands and relevant program statuses The system can complete single block many blocks and subprogram call in the page MDI _ 56269 T78 HBB MDI O0000 INSERT MODAL INFORMATION POSITION ABSOLUTE X 28 300 615 613 G78 G15 G10 G40 G38 G42 G71 G73 G41 G98 G64 22 470 F12345 HOO M61 L1 1625 DOO 3 295 15 35 43 UN Ip ded programs CURRENT LOCAL orr In the page save cancel recover copy past delete locate search index and annotate the current program in Edit mode which is shown below 187 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MDILOO000 INSERT MODAL INFORMATION POSITION 626 G86 G24 GOG G51 G54 ABSOLUTE G20 657 G15 G73 G08 695 X 31 750 613 Y 2b 230 F12345 HOB M04 L1 6267 DOQ 164 Z 3 302 15 36 10 A CLEAR ALL UNDO REDO COPY SEG PASTE
176. 3 7 AND operation Zl J AND K G65 H12 PFI Q J RAK example G65 H12 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 AND 103 8 XOR operation 1 J XOR K G65 H13 PXI Q J R K example G65 H13 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 XOR 103 9 Square root HI AMI G65 H21 PAI QA U im O e um 9 3 3 e example G65 H21 P4101 Q 102 101 102 Note the radicand J cannot be negative otherwise an alarm occurs 10 Absolute value 1 J G65 H22 Pl QA example G65 H22 P 101 Q 102 4101 102 101 102 11 Rounding off 1 ROUNDJ J ROUND off the first decimal G65 H23 PXI_ QA example G65 H23 P 101 Q1 2359 101 1 2359 101 1 12 Rounding up Zl FUP J G65 H24 P2 QA 13 Rounding down Zl FIX J G65 H25 P I Q J With CNC when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer Conversely when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is less than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer Be particular careful when handling negative numbers Example suppose that 1 1 2 2 1 2 When 3 FUP 1 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 1 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FUP 2 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 2 is execute
177. 3 setting speed is not ignored When setting value of No 43 is less than that of No 41 Max speed is not limited by No 43 0 0 4 5 4 Max each axis coordinate value of software limit 4 Min each axis coordinate value of software limit Setting range 99999999 99999999 Unit 0 001mm 0 06 O 0 6 0 Acc amp dec time constant of CS axis constant of CS axis Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms UU a MST 1 External cycle start signal ST invalid 5 N et D J O 0 External cycle start signal ST valid MSP 1 External stop signal SP invalid 0 External stop signal SP valid with external stop switch connected otherwise CNC shows stop 331 Ii T esp 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE MOT 1 Not detect software stroke limit 0 Detect software stroke limit MESP 1 Emergency stop invalid 0 Emergency stop valid 03173 E ESCD 71 S code off at emergency stop 0 S code not off at emergency stop SMAL 1 Spindle manual gear shift for S command 0 Spindle auto gear shift for S command TMANL 1 Manual tool change for T code 0 Auto tool change for T code 017 4 SPD SPFD 1 Cutting feed stops if spindle stops 0 Cutting feed not stop after spindle stop SAR 1 Detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting 0 Not detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting THDA 71 Thread mac
178. 32 Lubrication start command signal input M33 Lubrication stop command signal e Control parameter DT0016 Interval time of automatic lubricating DT0017 0 Non automatic lubricating gt 0 Automatic lubricating time DT0018 In automatic lubrication 0 Turning lubrication 20 Regularly lubrication output time e Function description There are two types of lubrication function defined by the GSK980MDu standard ladder diagram non automatic and automatic lubrication which are set by PLC data DT0017 0 Non automatic lubrication 20 Automatic lubrication DT0016 lubricating time DT0017 and lubricating interval time DTO0016 can be set DT0018 0 Non automatic lubrication turning lubrication gt 1 Non automatic lubrication regularly lubrication 1 Non automatic lubrication function When PLC data DT0018 0 it is turning lubrication output Lubrication is output by pressing lubrication key once and it is cancelled by pressing the key again Lubrication output when M32 is executed The lubrication is cancelled when M33 is executed When PLC data DT0018 gt 1 it is turning lubrication output By pressing lubrication key lubrication is output and it is cancelled after a setting time by the PLC data DT0018 By executing M32 lubrication is 430 Appendix output and it is cancelled after a setting time by the PLC data DT0018 If the DT0018 setting time is not yet up M33 is executed to cancel the lubrication output 2 Automatic lubrication
179. 34 111 123 135 0100 Memory data set 0 after power on 10 26 35 o oi TOOL SET weno var COORDINATE FIND P 2 Pressing enters macro variable operation page which is shown below AAAA TAA HAD 00216 N00000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 100 112 124 181 113 125 102 114 126 103 115 127 104 116 128 105 117 129 106 118 130 107 119 131 108 120 132 109 121 133 118 122 134 111 123 135 0100 Memory data set 0 after power on 10 29 20 n 71711 Pus var LOCAL var SYS YAR FIND P 3 At the moment when the system finds the U disk and there is a macro program s note file 139 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual DK ANNOTATE F macronote tex in the U disk root catalog can be displayed and the imported note function is valid which is shown below OFT gt MACRO PUBLIC VARIABLE 00216 NO0000 El y 2 O Q Q 3 3 Q ARI i AMNI 4 Press OFT gt MACRO PUBLIC VARIABLE DATA N 4 m 140 Chapter 5 Macro Program e Public macro variable note file 1 import the public variable note by the U disk only modify notes of public variables 100 199 500 999 2 macro program note file edit by user is a text file with suffix txt the file name must be fy macrono
180. 49 oooccccccncccococononocononnnncononnnnnononennnnnonennnonanennnnnaness 54 cx SCA OSO Cie cc 57 3 18 Programmable Mirror Image G50 1 651 1 occcccoccnnnccnncnnnoconnnnnonnnnnnnononnnnnononnnnnnnonennnonnnennnnnnness 69 3 19 Setting Local Coordinate System GbZ occcoconcnncococonncococcnnnnnoccnnonnnnononnnnnonnnnonnnnnononcnnnonancnnnnnaness 61 3 20 Select Machine Coordinate System G53 sessi 64 3 21 Workpiece Coordinate System Gi54 G59 ssssessssssssssessssessee enean nennen nane 65 3 22 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System G54 1 seesssssssseseeee 67 3 23 Coordinate System Rotation G68 G69 ocoooccccconoconccococonnconononnnonononnonnnnnnnononnnnnononcnnnonancnnnnnaness 67 9 24 Compound Cycle Command soe asec dena runde tate ode necu o e Rec Rb i 72 3 241 Ber TONG aie Gl Oeo Cr cT 72 9 24 T T Canned Cycle Sa ido oo ro etiem eid oo Dou ees He oou dutem eb Dente adds 72 3 24 1 2 Canned circle explanations lessen T9 CA MECICOIIDOI c sida 73 3 24 1 4 Returning point level G98 G9989 si iesiri e ai a dei Ea 74 324 5 Canned cycle cancelation einsa a a a a ENR 74 3 24 1 6 General command format for canned CyCl6 oooccccocnncccccncococonononononononcnnncnnonanos 75 3 24 2 Description for canned cycle nacidas 75 3 24 2 1 High speed Peck Drilling Cycle G73 ooocccccooncccccconcocccooononcoconnononoannncnonanonnnos 75 3 24 2 2 Left handed Tapping C
181. 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 11 2 10 Auxiliary Lock eo Related signal Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC type No State Diagnosis Input Auxiliary lock on the machine panel X19 1 signal Auxiliary lock indicator on the Y18 4 machine panel e Function description Auxiliary lock is valid in Auto MDI or DNC mode 11 2 11 Single Block eo Related signal Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC type No State Diagnosis Input Single block key on the machine X18 6 signal panel Single block indicator on the Y18 7 machine panel e Function description Single block is valid in Auto MDI or DNC mode 11 2 12 Dry Run eo Related signal Pin out C NC No Diagnosis Significance Signal type Dry run key on the machine panel Dry run indicator on the machine panel e Function description 1 Dry run is valid in Auto MDI or DNC mode 2 The state of the dry run cannot be shifted in program execution 432 Appendix 11 2 13 Optional Stop eo Related signal Signal type Significance Pin out PLC C NC No State Diagnosis Optional key on the machine X20 0 Input signal panel Command input Optional command F9 6 Optional indicator on the Y21 7 Output signal machine panel e Function description o o In Auto MDI and DNC mode press sr key
182. 5 The product of F command value mm r and current spindle speed r min is regarded as the command cutting feedrate to control the actual feedrate when the G95 Fxxxx is performed by system The actual cutting feedrate varies with the spindle speed The spindle cutting feed value per rev is specified by G95 Fxxxx it can form even cutting grain on the surface of the workpiece The machine should be installed spindle encoder when the G95 mode is used G94 and G95 are modal G commands in same group one of them is effective in one time G94 is initial modal G command it is defaulted effective when the power is turned on The conversion formula for feed value per rev and per min is as following Fm F xS Fm Feed value per min mm min F Feed value per rev per rev mm r 109 U O Q um 9 3 3 e U A O Q Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual S Spindle speed r min The feedrate value is set by system data parameter No 030 when the power is turned on for the system an F value is invariable after the F command is performed The feedrate is 0 after the FO is executed The F value is invariable when the system is reset or emergency stop The feed override is memorized when the power is turned off Related parameters Data parameter NO 027 Data parameter NO 029 Data parameter NO 030 Data parameter NO 041 Data parameter N0 042 upper speed of each axis cu
183. 5 Q9 N0140 G137 X80 Y50 I70 J60 K8 U5 0 G90 GO X25 Y25 785 Abb o C66 66 15 30 19 ERA UN ded programs CURRENT LOCAL DIR gt In the page save cancel recover copy past delete locate search index and annotate the current program in Edit mode which is shown below 186 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display EDIT _ 5799 T52 HAB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 NO1 788 N999 650 1 G143 G1 G3 X 9999 9999 Y 9999 9999 9999 9999 U 9999 9999 NODOS GI G3 GO X100 Y100 Z100 A100 C100 GO N0020 GOB X75 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 M03 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 5 21 N0050 G98 X52 232 Ybb 789 N0060 G74 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F100 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 X1 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 YbO 785 A75 C45 NO100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 25 W10 7 120 K8 5 09 7 F1600 N0110 G112 120 JO DO N0120 GO X55 Y55 785 A75 C60 N8130 G135 R55 735 170 J60 K8 15 US Q9 N0140 G137 X80 Y50 170 J60 K8 Ub N0150 G90 GO X29 Y25 785 Abb 2 C66 66 15 32 37 Al PRG SEARCH SEARCH COPY SEG PASTE SEG DELETE SEG gt EDIT 59889 TAG HB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 NO8781 N999 650 1 6143 G1 G3 X 9999 9999 Y 9999 9999 9999 9999 U 9999 9999 N0005 G1 G3 GO X100 Y100 7100 A100 C100 Co N0020 GOO X75 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 HO3 O Lo D um Q r O N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 5
184. 50 250 ap 250 d 150 The hole number from 1 to 6 drilling 010 The hole number from 7 to 10 drilling 020 The hole number from 11 to 13 boring 95 hole depth is 50mm T11 T15 T31 Eetum position T 5 200 190 150 m X WZ The values of offset numbers H11 H15 and H 31 are separately set to 200 0 190 0 and 150 0 the program is as following N001 G92 X0 YO ZO The coordinate system is set at the reference point N002 G90 GOO Z250 0 NO03 G43 ZO H11 Plane tool length compensation is performed at the initial 107 G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual A N004 S30 M3 The spindle starts N005 G99 G81 X400 0 Y 350 0 M 1 hole is machined after positioning Z 153 0 R 97 0 F120 0 NO06 Y 550 0 2 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned NOO7 G98 Y 750 0 3 hole is machined after positioning initial plane returned N008 G99 X1200 0 4 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned N009 Y 550 0 5 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned NO10 NO10G98 Y 350 0 3 Y 350 0 6 hole is machined after 6 hole is machined after positioning initial plane returned initial plane returned NO11 Nen X0 YO M5 Leica eie i bereala point return the spindle stops N012 G49 Z250 0 Tool length compensation cancellation N013 G43 Z0 H15 Initial plane tool length compensation N015 G99 G82 X550 0 Y 450 0 7 hole is mach
185. 5147 MODAL INFORMATION GOO GOI G02 G03 G04 00001 N 00799 nm G12 W71 S0792 n X 2 OOO s main o 12345 mm min po MAIN INFORMATION S Y 1 430 r w 9570 2 a MA FED OVRI 42 RAP OYRI 74 Z 3 243 5 5 T PART CNT 475 CUT TIME 00 00 24 10 42 41 assoLure POS amp PRG RELATIVE INTEGRATED FB BODO m min actual feedrate actual traverse speed when the system executes machining 100 mm min programmed feedrate feedrate specified by F when programming Manual feedrate feedrate when manual operation Feedrate override override selected by feedrate override switch Spindle override regulate the spindle s by tuning spindle override directly Part counting part counting adds 1 when M30 M99 in the main program is executed CUT TIME the system counts the time when the automatic run is started time unit is hour minute and second in order The part counting and cut time are memorized at power down the clearing ways for them are shown below 183 SK GIGS CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT 58522 Tid HB ABSOLUTE POS 00001 NO4596 MODAL INFORMATION O 0001 N 04596 X 800 GOO G0O1 GB GOZ GB4 GOS GOG G07 G0S GBS G10 G11 G12 M94 2528 F 328 mm min 12345 mm min MAIN INFORMATION Y Q 470 mm JOG F 774 FED OVRI 5 RAP OVRI 43 Z 3 eo mm SPI OVRI 97 PART CNT 4
186. 60 rapid traverse speed when rapid override is FO upper limit of axes cutting feedrate Start end speed of exponential acceleration amp deceleration in cutting feeding Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of cutting feeding Start end speed of exponential acceleration amp deceleration in MPG Step Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of MPG STEP manual Initial feedrate when power on Acc amp dec time constant in CS axis 357 Ii 5 N et D T le Ii o c T O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Data parameterNe5261 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed Data parameterNe5271 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool retraction Data parameterNe5211 Override value in rigid tapping tool retract Data parameterN9025 Feedrate of DRY run SMZ of bit parameter N9007 for validity of smoothing transition between blocks The larger the acceleration amp deceleration time constant is the slower acceleration amp deceleration is the smaller the machine movement impact and the lower the machining efficiency is And vice versa If acceleration amp deceleration time constants are equal the higher the acceleration amp deceleration start end speed is the faster the acceleration amp deceleration is the bigger the machine movement impact and the higher
187. 69 1 2 U disk is reconnected after disconnection If the U disk program currently pr Te testen mode ts adhe pog 0 300010 0 itisnotfounded that the position is defined byG29_ 3002 0 Not define the highest speed of some gear please check the parameter NO 3741 NO 3744 3003 0 0 Feed speed is too high 3004 0 o Feeding stop because spindle stop 3005 0 0 Spindle speed is too slow in thread cutting 3006 0 0 Spindle direction is not same to the direction defined by command 3007 0 0 opindle speed fluctuation has exceeded the range defined byNO 4900 3008 0 0 spindle mode switching disabled in Cs working 3009 0 La Reference point hadn t been found Don t go back to 2nd or 3rd or 4th reference point 30120 0 TheYexsisovertravelin positive drection controled by software 30130 0 The Z axis is overtravel in positive direconcontolledbysofware 30140 0 The 4th axis is overtrave in positive direction controlled by software 3050 0 The Sth axis is overtravelin positive drection controlled by software 395 e SG5K CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Alarm No nd Alarm Message WAY g TYPE 3016 0 The X axis is overtravel in negative direction controlled by software 3017 0 The Y axis is overtravel in negative direction controlled by software 3018 0 3019 0 3020 0 The 5th axis is overtravel in negative direction controlled by software Co LO 0 30 7 Lo 3021 0 0 T
188. 7 amp 90 270 63 66 QD 64 6 7S 3 135 S m 225 a Lom D 180 5 When compensation sum of the position 60 68 is not 0 a position error occurs The sum is an accumulation of pitch error compensation value per rev the same compensation values must be set at the position 60 and 68 as follows Compensation 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 position number Set compensation 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 value 371 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE MI T e D et O 212 Appendix Appendix 373 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE gt o o D 5 Q x 374 Appendix Appendix 1 Outline Dimension of GSK980MDc 7 I IT TEE e l A N IN J D N E gt AR N ES IL E 7 H
189. 70 tool change motor the 3 time catching tool 1 please check the ATC arm is available and debugging parameter is set correctly when the ATC arm responds nothing to the start signal 2 set the parameter then input M instruction observe Y2 1 in Ladder gt PLC to see whether it Appendix starts the rotation of the ATC arm or not If Y2 1 has an output please check the machine tools electric or the motor of the ATC arm 3 please check whether the in position signals signalX1 0 X1 1 are changing in Ladder gt PLC when the ATC arm cannot be in position or the rotation of it cannot stop Please make sure the electric of the two signals feedbacks normally if both of signals do not change B Reference point setting and machine tool interlock The setting of reference point of the tool change is the key point to tool change If the setting is not correct the ATC arm will strike causing machine damage by this There is a machine tool function in 980MDc system configure That is the Z axis spindle cannot move when the ATC arm is changing tools to avoid the damage of the machine tool The debug setting method 1 set K11 0 to O interlock function invalid 2 move Z axis to a safe position to make sure when the ATC arm is spinning it will not hit the spindle 3 make the ATC arm changing tools implement M68 or M69 4 move Z axis slowly to the ATC arm The hand wheel is recommended 5 configure the equipments the tool change debugging needs M19
190. 785 A45 C36 MO N0030 G98 G82 R75 721 5 P2000 F1200 ipn G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 N0050 G98 X52 232 Y55 789 N0060 G 4 X40 Y20 R65 228 333 F5 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 Xl 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 Y50 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 245 2 s 16 07 24 RENAME SAVE ss DELETE aL NAME SORT TIME SORT gt 5 Calculator page Press to enter the calculator page in the program content page The system can complete some basic counting which is shown below O Lo D um Q r O EDIT 81887 T98 HOB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 N05200 N999 650 1 G143 Gl G3 X 9999 9999 Y 9999 9999 9999 9999 U 9999 9999 NODOS G1 G3 GO X100 Y100 7100 A100 C100 X 5 23 Y 5 86 89 A45 C36 M03 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 05 21 NIN X52 232 Y55 789 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F1005 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 aun 718 9P4 N0080 GO4 X1 5 FEEFUE im N0090 G90 GOB X50 Y50 785 A75 C45 A ALGE N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 245 25 W10 F n m NO110 G112 120 JO DO Y 111213 Ps N0120 GO X55 Y55 785 A75 C60 mia N0130 G135 R55 735 170 J60 K8 W15 U5 Q9 tan yx 0 N0140 G137 X80 Y50 170 J60 K8 U5 N0150 G90 GO X25 Y25 785 A55 5 066 86 aid so 16 23 29 i 1 3 3 Tool Set Macro Variable Coordinate System OFFSET Press to enter the tool compensate interface whic
191. 8 key the cursor will move to the specified program 6 9 Preview a Program PROGRAM In non edit mode press key to enter program preview page In this page program names saved in CNC are displayed in the form of list Max 15 program names can be displayed In one page if programs saved are over 15 is pressed to display programs in other page EDIT 57452 TA2 HAB PROGRAM LOCAL DIRECTORY 00001 N01556 TOTAL 3 SPACE 30 0 M USED 20 0 M IDLE 10 0 M NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00003 3 00001 0 B 2012 03 19 09003 00002 788 B 2011 11 30 G74 G91 X10 Y10 710 R2 F2 M4 00003 55 B 2012 03 19 64 X5 N30 M99 14 32 14 PROGRAM HDI x CONTENT PROGRAM EE CURRENT Loc DIR Program capacity display In top right window storage capacity displays the max capacity of program which can be saved in CNC Used capacity displays the capacity of saved program in CNC system Program number displays 256 Chapter Auto Operation the program number saved in the CNC system Program size displays the size of the currently opened program Program preview selection In top left of the window the name of currently previewed program will be displayed in blue characters on white ground Program size on top left window is the size of currently previewed program Operation functions in program review page The program preview page ha
192. 8 G99 G73 X Y RZ QF LL 75 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Function This kind of cycle performs high speed peck drilling it performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole and eliminating the chips from the hole simultaneously Explanation Refer to the command explanation of canned cycle in Table 3 2 Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed for Q distance 4 Retract d distance in rapid traverse 5 Cutting feed for Q d distance 6 Machine to the Z axis hole bottom by cycling the 4 and 5 7 Return to the start point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse Command Path G73 G96 Return to the G73 G88 Return tothe point initial plane at the rapid traverse R plane atthe rapid traverse Initial level Point R Point R x Wee D Point Point lt Related Explanation 1 This kind of cycle is peck drilling for Q value intermittent feeding along the Z axis direction The Q value should be positive the sign is ineffective even if the negative value is specified If the Q value is not specified then it defaults 0 1mm If a depth to be cut is less than the Q value then cut to the bottom of the hole without tool retraction at the rapid traverse for the first time 2 To remove chips from the hol
193. 9 EX O MN n AN QV db DU jo P CA ZI S SIS eu wey OX po du m Y l S x up A 0 tX AQ PX QQ gt e P s lan 2 L CX Avt A DD Y Re SS one AQ pow t CX D C2 QV CA Ab7 9 tX P Es Eam EM 72 Pa Em S 9 ZX AVC in T P Am m Ch o a o 6 CX Hax 0X s P q E cy ET X e TA L IX Y a E amp N Qs E ST LI WV AUN e o AS bu 0 TA AN Qy eee pui NI FU LE M I CX e He m E eS a e font Es el E gee dal CD AO v Ix 9 TA sa oes o D ApT O 0 CX x x si SS eu TTA L OX So S E sy SS T O E A C e gt N A e AUN 9 0X sH lt EA ST SUIT Y c IX A 9 bead Sy C 0A 0 TA Pox SS A HS ES E MCTO1B 302 gt CMN62 6 X APTA A0 i O AQ O O 0 O Lum amp oO Qo ZC E 2 The enlarged diagram is as follows 5 gt lt Appendix Circuit diagram is as follows 378 Appendix BE wae ag ENIMM Cd EJEA p pde x p EE p pep ip bp mis dra tenis m ca ISAS MAA BRR Un o 6 2 MCTO1B 1 Ea COMM DSU BHD HF r Ek 4 niger E y y EE j bp pb EE iO b EI pep prr el Paja mgr C A A EA EA Cd i A Se b l b b Ls b D p b b b pb b pb e cale olrJoac i r ere er fied Coe Ged H LS ono Tem ep Ja G Pr r i rm AA ue ET CORR DZUEHD FP cC ie LL re ass Pass ed Pi Weakest ziii zem mumalas equals Elige es tg Se SE HaHa TAANA J COMM D2UEHD 44 P D a pa mre ee ae o c c a a E
194. 9 Appendix 9 GSK980MDc amp GSK980MDa Panel Address Differences sseeeesssssss 397 Appendbc10 Analog Spindle FUNCHOM sro or iddte codd ure esi eet Saale i 401 10 1 Analog SDIndle it e te spas care fidos 401 10 1 1 Dual Analog Spindle Control c eet orco a a 402 10 1 2 Single Analog Spindle Contro lirenna 405 A ec c TC m 405 OS M Type Gear SPiN ien a a 408 10 4 PLC Control of Spindle Output isc is 410 10 5 Spindle Orientauon FUNCION sice id 411 10 6 Explanations Ol SOME SIQNANS cit nt 412 TOZ ENCOGEN FADING A 415 irs SIG Mal Classic ato E 415 10 9 Definition of Analog Spindle Signal Line sees 417 Appendix 11 Explanations for Standard Ladder Function oocccccccnncccnnncnonnnnnanonononcnononcnnnnaronononos 419 Ate Address DINO TE p 419 11 2 FUNCION GON A ii ale 422 11 2 1 Spindle Rotation CONTO tdo 422 11 2 2 The ZN SDinale Fotallori CONTO Land lp 424 11 223 Spindle auto gear Si a a enn eel e ate cient ad 426 11 2 4 Spindle Switching Volume Control cccccoocccnccccnccnnoconccnnononcnnnonancnnnonnncnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnonons 427 11 25 Gycle otart anda Feed Holst sabes 429 ra A EE 429 LL FLUID MC AUOM Grenier ct TS 430 11 2 8 BIOCK SKID s stetit es a be iEn eset ut ocium udine sa anions estoit sanos iu e utu sU UR 431 W2 Maciel 431 A OGY isn r toldos ome sedu uc oQd te didi oid 432 XVI CONTENTS Le Beige dolo oj dec PC cR MT T 432 11 2 FD RUN enamine eee rece ducati Des o
195. 925 CUT TIME 00 00 21 10 44 01 Clearing part counting O 1 Press BEEN soft key and the part counting is cleared out in the ABSOLUTE POS E page A CANCEL m 9 2 Press to clear part counting in the ABSOLUTE POS page 5 Clearing time counting 1 Press Be soft key and the part counting is cleared out in the ABSOLUTE POS page CANCEL 47 e 2 Press to clear time counting in the ABSOLUTE POS page S0000 spindle speed feedback by the spindle encoder can be displayed when the spindle encoder is installed TOO current tool number HOO current tool length compensation number 2 RELATIVE POS display page Displayed X Y Z coordinates are the current position relative to the reference point and they are held on when the CNC is turned on To be convenient to operations including toolsetting measuring ect X Y Z coordinates can be cleared or divided into two when the single block stops or the system is in stop status After clearing the current point is the relative reference point When No 540 PPD is set to 1 and G92 sets the absolute coordinates X Y Z coordinates are the same those of the absolute EDIT 58291 T21 HB RELATIVE POS 00001 N07585 MODAL INFORMATION 00001 N0O9970 s i67 2609 X 2 204 eS F 30d mm min 610 G11 12345 mm min MAIN INFORMATION Y 766 057 JOG F 9573 FED OVRI 93 RAP OVRI 58 Z 543 438 an SPI
196. AGEMENT 00002 N00000 5 GSK980MDc be u HA 08001 CNC 3 08002 CNC SYSTEM FILES LT PARAM PAR LA TOFF CMP A 09808 CNC L 3 WOFF WMP A 09801 CNC PROGRAM COMPRA LM 00801 CNC LM 00902 CNC LM 00200 CNC LM 09080 CNC LT 09091 CNC 17 26 24 SELECT SHITCHING rr BACKUP 3 1 Document operation The windows is divided into left and right column the left column displays the system document of system and part program document catalogues when the system has a U disk the right displays document catalogues of the U disk which is shown above At the moment the user can input output the system document output the documents of system to the U disk or input the documents of the U disk into the system CHANGE 1 Press soft key to make the cursor switch between the left column and the right column 2 Press to open and close it when the cursor is on the document 3 Press to move the cursor to the required file press to select the document and there is a tick in front of the selected document when the cursor is on the file at the moment press DATA INPUT to select all documents of the file COPY TO 4 At the moment after the document of system U ESE is pressed to output all selected COPY TO documents to the U disk and so after the documents of the U disk CNC is pressed to input all selected documents of the U disk to the system document catalogue
197. AL INFORMATION GOO GO1 GB GOZ GB4 GOS GOG G07 G08 GBS G10 G11 G12 H93 51915 F 388 mm min 12345 mm min HAIN INFORMATION 761 337 043 449 JOG F 7416 HNDL INC 0 009 RAP OVRI 9 SPI OVRI 25 PART CNT 7077 CUT TIME 00 00 08 11 37 07 ABSOLUTE POS amp PRG seme INTEGRATED 238 Chapter 4 MPG Step Operation 4 2 2 Moving Axis and Direction Selection a E In MPG mode press key to select the corresponding axis The page is as follows Other axes are the same HND 81561 712 HAA RELATIVE POS 00001 N0497 7 MODAL INFORMATION GOO GOI GO2 GOZ G04 O 0001 N 04977 nmaa E 1915 X 8 1 04 x F 388 mm min 12345 mm min HAIN INFORMATION Y 761 337 m JOG F 7416 HNDL INC 0 009 RAP OYRI 9 Z 543 449 7 E PART CNT 7077 CUT TIME 00 00 08 Os a ABSOLUTE POS amp PRG eem INTEGRATED The handwheel feed direction is defined by its rotation direction Generally the handwheel CW is for positive feed and CCW is for negative feed In case of that handwheel CW is for negative feed CCW for positive feed it may exchange the A B signals of the handwheel terminals also you can modify the HWX HWY HWZ HW4 HW5 of the bit parameter No0O 175 4 2 3 Explanation Items 1 The correspondence between the handwheel scale and the machine moving amount is as following table Moving
198. AN 735 Ak Conversion from BCD tol i 2 BIN 7j G65 H41 P i Qj Used for the signal BIN G65 H42 P i Qj exchange to and from Conversion from BIN to PLC 1 FIX Aj Chapter 5 Macro Program i BCD 4j Unconditional branch GOTO Zi G65 H80 P i Q j R k Please note that K is Equals to branch IF i EQ Zj GOTO k G65 H81 P i QZj R k the skip signal in Not equals to branch IF i NE j GOTO Zk G65 H82 P i Q j R k macro statement and Greater than branch IF i GT 4j GOTO Zk G65 H83 P i Q j R k P i is the skip signal in omaller than branch IF zi LT 4j GOTO k G65 H84 P i Q j R k traditional G65H Greater than or equals to IF i GE Zj GOTO k G65 H85 P i Q j R k format branch IF i LE Zj GOTO k G65 H86 P i Q j R k Smaller than or equals to branch S65 HOO PA O P O0 5 3 1 Traditional Format If traditional G65 H format is used for programming only limited operations and jump command can be specified by it The currently used H operation needs at most 3 operands so the corresponding operation can be completed when the needed variables or constants are obtained in a block General format G65 Hm P i Q j RFk m 01 99 means operation command or jump command function A the name of variable that stored the operation result j operand 1 it can be constant k operand 2 it can be constant Meaning Zi 4j o k L Operational sign designated by Hm Example G65 Hm P 100 Q 101 R 102 100
199. CHANGE Note After entering a bit of the parameter press key to skip out of the bit and back to the parameter No Example Set the BIT5 DECZ of the bit parameter No 004 to 1 and the other bits unchanged Move the cursor to CHANGE No 004 by the steps above press pue key to skip to a bit of the parameter the figure is shown below 9 MDI _ 54131 177 HAB D PARAMETER gt BIT PARAMETER 00001 N01061 y NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA o 0001 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 01100000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 00000011 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00911111 Y 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 00000111 7 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00911111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 Y 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 7 01000101 0650 00000000 4 0004 DECS DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX xxx xxx SCH BIT DEC5 signal is 0 low 1 high 17 23 59 err para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P Move the cursor to BIT5 by pressing or key the figure is shown below MDI _ 1589 TBA HAD PARAMETER gt BIT PARAMETER 00001 N04314 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 000
200. CNC 11 2 6 Coolant Control e Related signal Signal Type Symbol Significance Pin out PLC CNC gt No State Diagnosis E Input signal Coolant key signal X21 4 a Coolant start indicator Y23 0 Output signal COOL Coolant output signal CN62 1 YO O M08 Coolant start command signal Command input MO9 Coolant stop command signal e Control parameter Il LI LL Tre RSJG 1 In reset spindle coolant and lubrication output signal are not stopped by the CNC 429 gt o o D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 0 In reset spindle coolant and lubrication output signal are stopped by the CNC e Function description COOL output is invalid after the CNC power on COOL output is valid when M08 command is executed and the coolant is on COOL output is cancelled when MO9 is executed and the coolant is off Note1 In CNC reset RSJG of K10 of the PLC set whether close the coolant output Note 2 There is no corresponding output signal for M09 M08 output is cancelled if the MO9 is executed Note 3 Coolant output is closed when the M30 is executed 11 2 7 Lubrication Control eo Related signals Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC Type No State Diagnosis Lubrication key signal on the X21 6 Input signal machine panel Output Lubrication start indicator Y20 7 signal LUBR Lubrication output signal CN62 2 YO 1 Command M
201. CNC System User Manual GSE Function of the Ladder Diagram Symbol Function Spindle speed position state output signal Cc a X5 2 COIN Spindle positioning is finished X5 3 SPAL opindle alarm signal Spindle CCW rotation Spindle CW rotation 2 3 2 Spindle Zero Signal Except for the PC5 signal other fixed signals of the spindle interface are the same as that of the X Y Z 4th axes the PC5 interface circuit is shown as follows 424V ol QU TAHCIA SO Fig 2 15 Spindle zero signal interface circuit Ii 2 3 3 Linear Axis DASS A dove unt GSESGONDC N15 signal interface Pl DA98B DAO1B drive NT e EC A A ox 15 7 SIGE 5 o oP T le s mop Pes A Ta T ea LL HSEE S hy Metal ell 10 RSP 36 C ale 5 CONF UA Do Metal hell Metal shell Fig 2 16 Connection of spindle interface to drive unit 2 3 4 Connection of Spindle interface and Servo Spindle Please refer to appendix for detailed connection 310 Chapter2 Interface Signals 2 3 5 SVC Signal Explanation The analog spindle interface SVC can output 0 10V voltage its interior signal circuit is shown in Fig 2 17 Fig 2 17 WC signal circuit 2 3 6 Explanations for ALM5 X5 3 When the 5 axis is valid namely it is set to linear axis or rotary axis this signal is taken as alarm signal of the 5 axis Level of alarm signal is set by NO 009 ALM5 When the 5 axis is invalid
202. E LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Serial2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Viae t8 AZ A L GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder 10_TEST_PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V E 777 ist t8 AZ A O Lo D um Q r O SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE THE FILE GSK980MDc Serial LD2 IT IN DELETE CAN CANCEL lt 10 35 23 save ss REMOVE nd gt Press to cancel the deletion or press The ladder which is running cannot be deleted to delete the ladder as follows 223 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GskK MDI sanan TAA HAB LADDER gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00002 N00000 _ NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Series2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc ViE Pc ist 48 RA E VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SIZE 60 3 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 12 02 29 58 lt 10 35 37 SSS M PSI A Move the cursor to GSK980MDc Serial ld2 which does not run and press PLC RUN as follows MDI SAANA TAA HB LADDER gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00002 N00000 LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST PLC Id 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE D ist 8 FZ E 4 3 Run ladder file O Lo D um Q O VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 19 10 52 54 P M LIL ITE
203. E RESUME OPTION 2 CORRESPONDING ITEM OF RESTORING COULD T PARAMETER T PROGRAM T OFFSET NOT BE SELECTED WHEN PITCH COMP PLC PARA FPLC THE FILE DOESN T EX SOURCE PATH luYgsk980ndc backupYuser BACKUP SYSTEM PARAMETERS TO u gsk980mdc backup 09 51 25 DESELECT SELECT mu CANCEL au PERFORM 11 1 Operation Path USB operation of 980MDc can be created and searched in the U disk with its own number Therefore the system with different number is corresponding to different U disk directory If the system has no its own number it is in the advanced operation directory in the U disk gsk980mdc backup Example If the number of system can be founded in the version information page in Diagnosis mode The following content is described in gsk980MDc backup directory O Lo D um Q r O gt Path explanation Path file folder Explanation l NEN Target position for parameter and PLC file backup and restore user Target position for part program file backup and resume File explanation Expended EEUU VEM 00000 09998 Operation level Backu More than 4 level including 4 level Part program More than 4 level including 4 level operation Ladder diagram More than 4 level including 4 level 297 O Lo D um Q r O SK 11 11 CGS CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual More than 3 level including 3 level Resume
204. ESUME AND BAGKUP osados nia di TEA Operation PA o o O 12 Operation MASIUG NOMS si tee Tee Backup Operation Example asco ia psi A Resume Operation Example 25 3 5 0 4 vado a E N A educ E RUE SEE MS e cm Rc Ill Installation CHAPTER INSTALLATION LAYOUT uscar vU ieee e eese bs ista VA GSKISOMDGCOnine Mis RE o m T 1 2 39 990MD6E Instalacion liada 1 2 1 Installation Conditions of the CabiNet ccooccconncccnncccncnnnconcnoncnonaninnnnnnnnnnanonannnnnnnnnnonnns 1 2 2 Protection Methods Against Interference ooncccconnnicicncncncnonnncnonononanononaracnnannnnnnnns XIII C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC User Manual CHAF TER 2 INTERFACE SIGNALS cuna ia 305 2 1 GONNECION to Dive Unit udis Eod oo EIE e d arde 305 2 1 1 Drive Interface Delta 305 2 1 2 Command Pulse and Direction SignNalS ccccocccnnccccnnnncconnnnnconancnnnonanonnnnnannncnnnnnnnnos 305 2o leo NIV MICA ANN SIG zi E a 305 21 4 AXIS Enable Signal ENA vai cde deters ibt obeunt abuse E tnr Oa besten 306 2 150 Pulse Disable Signal SE TM occa eio davit A ds 306 2 1 6 Zero idghal Til O assente omes tsp ama EE Danae nio 306 2 1 7 Conrnecuonio DAVE MIL soi a A PUUCCES 307 2 2 GonnecHoror 4t AXIS oie ionic codes it ec lo DIE 308 2 2 1 4th Axis Interface Definition ios ioa idm Sd Ente iia 308 2 2 2 Connection of 4th Axis Interface as Linear AxiS ooooccccccconncccnccconocccnccnonnnccnncnnnnanccnncnnnnos 308 2 2 3 Connection of 4th Axis Interface as Rotary Ax
205. Fig 4 3 4 6 Spindle Adjustment 4 6 1 Spindle Encoder Encoder with the linear number 100 p r 5000p r is needed to be installed on the machine for threading The linear numberis set by data parameter No 3720 The transmission ratio spindle gear teeth encoder gear teeth between encoder and spindle is 1 255 255 The spindle gear teeth are set by CNC data parameter No 3721 and the encoder gear teeth are set by data parameter No 3722 Synchronous belt transmission should be applied for it no sliding transmission The DGN 011 and DNG 012 of CNC diagnosis messages are used to check the validity of threading signal from the spindle encoder Ii 5 o oP D to le 4 6 2 Spindle Brake After spindle stop is executed proper spindle brake time should be set to stop the spindle promptly in order to enhance the machining efficiency If the brake is employed with energy consumption type too long braking time may damage the motor So the brake time is set by PLC 4 6 3 Switch Volume Control of Spindle Speed When multiple speed motor control is used motor speed control command can be defined by ladder diagram as S Relevant parameter is shown below Bit parameter Ne001 ACS 0 select switching control of spindle speed 4 6 4 Analog Voltage Control for Spindle Speed This function can be obtained by the parameter setting of CNC By interface outputting OV 10V analog voltage to control inverter the stepless shift can be obt
206. From PLC Gear shift treatment 5 Input gear instructions spindle motor M select signal From PLC NC outputs the results of speed change 512 bits codes Output to PLC R120 ROLIO utput to SIND decides the output signal From PLC PLC appoints the input of 12 bits codes From PLC R121 RO11I SIM DL Spindle stop signal From PLC gt o o D 5 Q x Use date parameters Na 373L ar E n adjust D value and output spindle Spindle allow signal output Output to PLC instructions 010 Frequency Converter Spindle motor Machine Part 404 Appendix 10 1 2 Single Analog Spindle Control The following block diagram shows the method of single analog spindle control SSTP 020 6 an 833 S codes S codes BEEN st 1 spindle Single analog spindle control shows as following flow chart T type gear shift type gear shift PLC Part output GR0 GR20 GR30 GR40 ip Output to PLC F34 0 3M type gear shift Switching machinery gear 5 code F22 F25y SF F7 2 Output to PLC ger cum e e m Oo RR C C wat nm d AAA 5 codes in workpiece I I I program 0 59999 signal output Spindle stop signal SSTP 329 65 From PLC Spindle override signal SOVO S0W7 J 630 From PLC ear shift treatment aw Input gear select signal GR l instructions spindle motor GRIKG28 1 2NT type gear shift am From PLC MC outputs the r
207. G83 RHD5 71 5th axis coordinate information is hided 0 5th axis coordinate information isn t hided RTCRG 1 Do not wait for G61 0 to be 1 as executing next program block after rigid tapping cancelled 0 Do wait for G61 0 to be 1 as executing next program block after rigid tapping cancelled RTCRS 1 Rigid tapping proportion of gear setting by CNC automatically 0 Rigid tapping proportion of gear setting by CNC parameter 5 2 1 1 Override value in rigid tapping tool retract 0 override is set to 100 Setting range 0 200 0 override is set to 100 9 uw 9 Tool retract amount in deep hole rigid tapping high speed standard Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm o 2 1 6 opindle move amount per revolution in rigid taping Setting range 1 9999999 Unit 0 001mm Multiplier coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 1 rpm Multiplier coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 2 rpm Multiplier coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 3 rpm Multiplier coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 41 rpm Setting range 132767 Division coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 1 rpm Division coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 2 rpm Division coefficient of rigid taping Division coefficient of rigid taping 349 Ii 5 N e D T em O Ii T esp 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manu
208. I 100 5 N0060 7 22 499 SPI OVRI 100 6 N0070 GOI 7 25 5 F1500 H08 7 N0080 X 22 364 Y26 92 PART CNT J 8 N0090 GO X 21 395 Y27 696 138 699 J 47 379 CUT TIME 00 00 00 10 09 39 ABSOLUTE ros amp Pre RELATIVE INTEGRATED 4 4 Axis Startup The Bit 1 ROSx and BitO ROTx of data parameter No 187 are separately set to use whether the 4 axis and the 5 axis are either the linear axis or rotation axis The parameter settings are shown below RO Ro Coe ooo Linear axis 1 It can be switched between metric and inch 2 All of the coordinate values are linear axis 3 The stored pitch error compensation is linear axis Rotation axis Type A 1 It can not be switched between metric and inch 2 The machine coordinates are cycled based on the setting value of data parameter No 1260 Whether the absolute coordinate and relative coordinate are cycled based upon the data parameter No 188 3 The stored pitch error compensation is rotation axis 4 The movement amount is less than one turn when the reference position G28 G30 is returned 01 0 Ineffective setting forbidden Rotation axis Type B 1 It can not be switched between metric and inch 2 The machine coordinate is linear axis whether the absolute coordinate and relative coordinate are cycled based on the data parameter No 188 3 The stored pitch error compensation is linear axis Note The s
209. K CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GskK EDIT 56718 192 Had PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 N04883 14 34 23 MDI Aided E PROGRAM Programming CURRENT LOCAL DIR gt CALCULATOR l then and a calculator window pops up as follows DATA Or directly press OWP in the program content page and a calculator window pops up 2 Press O Lo D um Q O EDIT 54041 T95 HBA PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 N00836 CALCULATOR AAA AA AA A L A a PO NN IL ctam 1 X SEND G 14 36 01 o e 3 Press corresponding function keys in MDI panel to input digits and execute operation to complete the displayed content in the calculator ALTER INSERT Press B on MDI panel corresponded to P displayed in the calculator to send the calculation result to the program where the cursor is and escape the calculation function 258 Chapter Auto Operation 58354 T87 HAB 00001 NO7262 14 36 45 14 96 45 ner 4 Press to escape the calculation function or press cuc 6 11 Aided Programming Function 6 11 1 Aided Programming Entry m O Lo D Q O When 2831 0 MGEH is set to 0 aided programming function is valid Programs in MDI program page or program content page can be edited by aided programming function in stop state 1 Aided pr
210. LM 10_TEST_PLC 1d2 LM GSK980MDc SCRIPT INI L PLC 1d2 HM I0 TEST IQU 1d2 PROGRAM I I0 TEST PLC 1d2 I 75 00090 CNC LT 00801 CNC LN 00082 CNC I 00280 CNC HA 09800 cnc HM 00001 CNC T 00802 CNC L 09000 CNC LM 09001 CNC L PENDRIVE LP 09001 cnc HO PLC 40X100T02 120314 I dx HA PLC 40X100T02 1203142 Idx 09 19 55 o Press to extend the file The file is in the first line of the directory MDI 50008 TAA HOA DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 00200 N00000 E GSK980MDc E u SYSTEM FILES HA 123 1d2 I 3 PARAM PAR L 2012 03 16 09 30 19 272 ii LT TOFF CHP LA GSK980HC Test LD2 A WOFF WHP LT GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LADDER FILES gsk980mdc backup LTA GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 CT1MDc LTA IQ TEST PLC 1d2 HA enc cf g LA PLC 1 d2 LN comparam cfg PROGRAM LDF ILE LT 00900 CNC I 3 GSK980MDc SeriesEN LT 00901 CNC HA I0 TEST PLC 1d2 LT 00902 CNC LA PLC 1d2 LT 00200 CNC NCPROG 09000 cnc LT 00900 CNC L 09801 cnc LTA 00901 CNC HM 09902 CNC 09 20 06 Press to return the previous catalog of the current file O Lo D um Q O MDI sanan TAA HB DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 00200 N00000 E GSK980MDc E u SYSTEM FILES HA 123 1d2 LD PARAM PAR HM 2012 03 16_09 30 19_272 ji LD TOFF CHP LM GSK980HC_Test LD2 LT HOFF WMP LM GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LADDER FILES amp 5 gsk980mdc backup I GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LM GSK980MDc_CNCSHRES IMG L
211. Low speed zero return Deceleration over Starts to detect zero signal Fig 2 44 4 Machine zero returns process A Select the Machine Zero mode press manual positive or negative zero return direction is set by bit parameter No 13 feed key the corresponding axis will move to the machine zero at a traverse speed Then it touches the tongue and presses down the deceleration switch and moves forward When the tongue detaches the deceleration switch the axis slows 324 Chapter2 Interface Signals down to zero speed then moves reversely and accelerates to a fixed low speed for continuous moving As the tongue touches the deceleration switch for the second time it begins to detect the zero signal It moves on till the tongue detaches the deceleration switch the movement stops immediately Then zero return indicator of the corresponding axis on the panel lights up and machine zero return operation is finished Ii 5 Y e D T le 325 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE MI T e D et O 326 Chapter 3 Parameter CHAPTER 3 PARAMETER In this chapter the CNC bit and data parameters are introduced Various functions can be set by these parameters 3 1 Parameter Description by Sequence The expression of bit parameter is shown as follows Parameter NO BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BITA BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO ACS 1 Analog voltage control of spindle speed 0 Switching contro
212. MPG BM MANUAL DNC x meo ORIENTATION ME 5 STOP F OVERRIDE MST e D e gt e e D JAHTAA o E c Mp eee n SINGLE skip MACHINE Bist tock ory EOT E VUFO PV 2596 f VL 5096 P VL100 S CCW PLUBRICATINGA S OvERRIDE f OVERRIDE O Lo D um Q r O 1 1 Panel Division This GSK980MDc adopts an integrated panel which division is as follows state indicator ooft Key u de m re FP Lib p I NET e T E p p E Ence 175 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR 1 1 1 State Indication machine zero return mr MB ee ee finish indicator CABA lt IRE CRUS System run status indicator 1 1 2 Edit Keypad Tey Reset Key For CNC reset feed output stop etc G Address input Address key amp WW E V L Double address key switching between two sides by A c pressing repeatedly gu Double address key switching between many Sign key l characters by pressing repeatedly O Lo D um Q r O Numerical key For digit input point E Input key For confirmation of parameters offset values input EM EN Output key For start communication output CHANGE For switching of message display For insertion alteration deletion of programs words ALTER in editing is a compound key switching between two functions by pressing repeatedly 176 Chapter 1 Operation Mo
213. N3 G02 X100 R25 The left figure is shown the programmed path and the tool center path If the compensation radius D is changed in N3 for example the D2 is specified in N3 block the value of D2 is not equal to the one of D1 in this case it is similar as b an alarm of the circular arc data error in cutter compensation C may occur 171 GSE GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual U O e o 3 gt 5 e 172 II Operation O Lo D Q O 173 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 174 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display CHAPTER 1 OPERATION MODE and DISPLAY This GSK980MDc system employs an aluminum alloy solid operator panel which exterior is as follows Gr s Dp E ES EDIT 53262 T53 HOA ABSOLUTE POS 00901 NO8260 MODAL INFORMATION e a th Sel E IN GOO GOI G02 G03 G04 0 0001 N 02758 5 MEE o o v e e 618 G11 no 0328 E DATA 1 000 F 1522 mn nin 12345 mm min H P D MAIN INFORMATION BR I B ewe 0 830 oe FED OVRI A J 54 H E RAP OVRI 1 PART CNT T CUT TIME 10 20 57 POSITION PROGRAM ff OFFSET ven SETTING PARAMETER e BSOLUTE POS a Pre RELATIVE INTEGRATED e e a gt o PEN pE Jagg EJ E gt 22 A a s cw f COOLING Ps OVERRIDE lle OVERAIDE GEAR TOOL NO M e e o o o a 9 a E a a o EDIT AUTO MOI AGH
214. NDRIVE L 09001 cnc LA PLC 40X100T82 120314 Idx LM PLC 40X100T02 1203142 Idx PATA SELECT m jolie BACKUP one wears 2 In the above page select ONC UPDATE to enter the system update page After the system update software is selected the IN key is pressed to update the system MDI 50008 TAA HAD DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT gt SYSTEM UPGRADE HELP THIS PAGE IS ONLY ONE UPGRADE OPTI ON SO CANCELLATI ON WILL NOT BE AL LOWED O Lo D um Q p O iv SYSTEM SOFTWARE UPGRADE SYSTEM UPDATE PRESS LIN KEY TO UPDATE CAN KEY CANCEL 09 29 52 NN EA mp qp 296 Chapter 11 Resume and Backup CHAPTER 11 RESUME AND BACKUP Resume and backup page of GSK980MDC is in the file management of setting page After the file management soft key is selected backup resume soft key is selected to enter the following page In the page MDI mode is selected to execute communication between CNC and U disk and the system upgrading operation Its transmission speed is much faster than traditional serial communication speed greatly increases the efficiency of file transmission More over USB is easy to carry to use and it supports hot plugging plug and play at once EDIT 58177 195 HA BACKUP OPTION HELP PARAMETER PROGRAM iv OFFSET I SELECT YOU NEED IT SEI o A EMS PRESS EXECUTE Iv Iv Iv l i RE SOFT KEY TO BACKUP R v LOG ESTOR
215. Note 1 Subscripts of l J and K for indicating the order of argument specification are not written in the actual program Note 2 Argument I J K do not need to be written in orders They will be identified according to the present sequence For example G65 P9010 A1 B2 C3 114 J15 I6 J7 K9 K11 K12 J30 The variables are passed as follows 114544 J15 gt H5 16 427 J7 38 K9I gt H6 K11 gt H9 K12 12 J30 711 Format G65 must be specified before any argument Mixture of argument specifications and Il The CNC internally identifies argument specification and Il If a mixture of argument specification and ll is specified the type of argument specification specified later take precedence U im O e a 9 3 3 e Example 165 POD Al B20 1 33 14 LoS svarlable Fl 1 2 z 21 3 Null 84 3 3 5 Mull 6 Mull 7 4 5 When both 14 and D5 arguments are commanded for variable 7 in this example the later 05 is valid e Modal call G66 Once G66 is issued to specify a modal call a macro is called after a block specifying movement along axes is executed This continues until G67 is issued to cancel a modal call Note The format functions and argument specification of G65 are identical with that of the G65 non modal call Refer to the introduction of G65 for detailed description Modal call nesting Modal calls can be nested by specifying another G66 code during a modal call Explanat
216. ODE 2869 FILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 19 10 33 27 10 33 48 A roca om uss ore UR eme gt 4 2 Copy to CNC 221 GSR C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual COPY TO mE When the system finds the U disk the soft key CNC appears which is shown below MDI sBBBHB TAB HAD LADDER gt FILE LIST gt USB DIRECTORY u 00002 N00000 NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES 123 1d2 GSK980HC Test LL10 04 30 8A4B GSK980HCJUix FH GSK980MDc Series 2011 68 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO TEST IOU Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE D ix 48 FZ E IO TEST PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE F7 ix 8 FZ E VERIFY CODE 2869 FILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 19 10 33 27 COPY TO SELECT A PS f uss oir Ce o mw gt SELECT uM mE When the ladder is copied to CNC PATH is clicked when the path selection is not executed the system displays the current root directory ladder in the U disk to find the ladder path in the U disk After the file list of corresponding ladder is found DF s clicked to display the ladder file of the current file which is shown below MDI SABBA TAA HAA O Lo D um Q O GSK98OHC ist FA GSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder GSK980MDc MDc VA FE ist te AZ A GSK980MDc MDc VA FE ist te AZ A FILE SEE 71 6 K 33 21 s 10 34 26 After a ladder file to be recovered in the
217. OVRI 36 PART CNT 6033 CUT TIME 00 00 17 15 25 18 nee lio ES X CLR Y CLR Z CLR X Y Z clearing 184 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 In RELATIVE POS page press ar to clear X coordinate value press ovum to clear Z CLR Y coordinate value press to clear Z coordinate value 2 Execute clearing by pressing keys on MDI panel A CANCEL In RELATIVE POS page press x till X flashes press and X coordinate value is cleared lt CANCEL In RELATIVE POS page press till Y flashes press and Y coordinate value is cleared E CANCEL In RELATIVE POS page press till X flashes press and Z coordinate value is cleared X Y Z divided into 2 and Z coordinate value is x m In RELATIVE POS page press ES till X flashes press S and X coordinate value is reduced to half In RELATIVE POS page press 8 tl Y flashes press and Y coordinate value is O reduced to half E a o 5 In RELATIVE POS page press till Z flashes press reduced to half 3 INTEGRATED POS display page In POSITION interface press EMEN EM to switch INTEGRATED POS page In the page the system displays simultaneously RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHINE DIST TO GO DIST TO GO can be displayed only in AUTO DNC and MDI mode Displayed machine coordinate value is the current position s coordinate value in machine coordinate system which is created by machine zero return DIST TO GO is
218. Object point from reference point return 1 The command axis direction performs positioning at the intermediate point specified by G28 from point R to B the action is O gt 2 The positioning is performed from intermediate point to specified point from point B to C moving to the intermediate and command point at a rapid feedrate the action is SH Note 1 G29 is specified after G28 if an intermediate point is not specified by any of axes the system alarm will be generated Note 2 It is incremental distance against the intermediate point in G91 coordinate programming 3 13 The 2nd 3rd and 4th Reference Point Return G30 Reference point is a fixed point on the machine By parameters No 1240 No 1243 it can set four reference points in the machine coordinate system 48 Chapter 3 G Command Machine coordinate set by reference point 2 Machine coordinate set by reference point 4 achine coordinate set Machine coordinate by reference point 3 U a O a um o 3 3 e set by reference Machine coordinate origin Format G30P2 X Y_ Z themachine 2nd reference point return P2 can be omitted G30 P3 X Y Z themachine 3rd reference point return G30P4 X Y_ Z_ the machine 4th reference point return Function From the start point after the intermediate point by X Y and Z is reached at a rapid 2nd gra 4i reference points are returned The traverse rate the machine and co
219. PTERS RARAMETE untar ota 327 3 1 Parameter Description by Sequence cooocccccccccccoccncccncnnocononocanononononononcnnnnnnnnonannnonnnnnnenananenas 327 3 2 Parameter Description by Function SEQUENCE ooccccoooncnnccnocconcncnncnnnononennnnnnnnnnnonnrnnnonannennnnanens 343 B22 AXIS GON TO EA c 343 3 2 2 Acceleration amp Deceleration Control scrin a A 345 323 Machine Proteco senna a A O E 346 22 4 I nread EUDncllosss iot ode n Um d a 346 92 2 9 Encoder TADDING errada ins bis 349 SAORI APPIN sereo ETE DLE 349 A EU TENE TRUN 350 XIV CONTENTS 20 EA Ana NISSAN rc ER 350 3 2 9 Precision GOmpeliSatlOPl a idas 351 920 Communication Seting dais 351 3 2 T Machine Zero AcMs 352 2 22 TAOLALY AXIS PON 353 2 19 Inerement SI Dude aad id rd 353 I2 MPEC axis CONO tedio eos Cutie Coetus Umbauten AAA AA 354 3 2 15 M codes calling SUDprOgraMS ccccoonnnccccnnnococoncnonononnnnnononcononnnnnnnononrnnnononrnnconannnnennanons 354 FRAGNATA eet Tuc 354 342 17 Backlash ColITipernsatloEissscenio ue ori duticto cd mu pend ticiaio 354 CHARTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGIN iiec acd sen il d onde sa ento 355 4 1 Emergency Stop and Stroke Limit lessen nnne nnns 355 e Dive UNICS EHIN Gs sedo nitudostioaiu oi ii 355 43 Gear Rao AUS IMM r o dd ie 355 Al DEIVO FEAR St A A A A 355 A o 356 4 4 Acceleration amp deceleration Characteristic AdjuStMONt ooccconncncccccncoccnnconoconononononnncnnnnanonos 357 4 97 Machne Zero Adjustme
220. PUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD 2 DEGRADE PARAMETER OPERATION BACKUP CURRENT PAR MANUFACTORY RESUME STORED PAR MANUFACTORY RESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 12 LEVEL RESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 SERYO 0 11 LEVEL RESUME STORED PAR PRODUCE TEST CAN MODIFY SCRW COMP 8 MACRO PROG PLC 17 30 53 Sn N 5 T Fa em emm mem 284 Chapter 10 Document Management 9 2 1 Entry of Operation Level 1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page move the cursor to the INPUT PASSWORD line 2 Key inthe password an sign added each time inputting a character DATA 3 Press key to finish the inputting and it will enter the corresponding password level The user can press ENS to degrade the higher operation level to the lower but the user must input the password again before degradation Note The length of this GSK980MDc system password corresponds to the operation level which can t be added or decreased by user at will Operation level Password length Initial password 5 digits 12345 4 digits 1234 Example The current CNC level is the 4 level as the following page shows The 3 level password of CNC is 12345 please alter the current level to the 3 level EDIT 52414 T14 HB SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT u PROGRAM SWT ON AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF PARAMETER OPERATION BACKUP CURRENT PA
221. R MANUFACTORY CRESUME STORED PAR MANUFACTORY RESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 12 LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR S SERVO 0 11 LEVEL CRESUME STORED PAR PRODUCE TEST O Lo D um Q r O ON 2 DEGRADE IPUT P WORD Xocoxok CAN MODIFY SCRW COMP amp MACRO PROG PLC IAEA MOL ESE eem DATA Move the cursor to the INPUT PASSWORD line key in 12345 then press the key the CNC prompts Modify parameter and edit program Password passed and the current level is the 3 level The page is as follows 285 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT 54954 725 HB PARAMETER SWT PROGRAM SWT ON NPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER CRESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 1H LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR S SERVO 0 18 LEVEL ON CURRENT LEVEL 3 DEGRADE MODIFY PARAMETER AND EDIT PROGRAM 17 32 31 CNEL Y 3 ME jum d level 3 at 5t or 6 level the Note When current operation authority is lower than or equal to the 3 rd level 0 15 password level is not changed if repower the CNC system If previous level is higher than the 3 d or gnd level it defaults the 3 level O Lo D um Q O 9 2 2 Alteration o
222. R335 NETWORKS R335 7 FA 25 B 168 key can be used to adjust rapid rate in AUTO MDI Dh F3 5 R335 7 F3 2 G19 7 10 06 17 FIND FIND FIND di HOME EH PARAMETER COMMAND NETWORK gt In monitor page the user can view current contact coil ON OFF state timer counter s current value 213 O Lo D um Q O CESK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual When the contact coil is ON it is on the green background when it is OFF the color is the window 0 5 Y25 2 background lt E means contactor X0 5 is ON and means coil Y25 2 is OFF 2 1 Window program view In the monitor page the system can simultaneously monitor four window programs view respectively WIN2 WINS ladder block corresponded to each window by pressing dee at the moment the screen displays the block ladder corresponded to the selected window 2 2 Window block selection WIN2 WINS 1 select the required block window i e respectively press _tevel _ to select the window SELECT 2 press ET to select the window program as follows MDI 50008 TAA HB LADDER gt MONITOR WIN2 Level2 NETWORK K1 1 Cursor returns in auto mode SELECT BLOCK TO WIN 2 ADDRESS SYMBOL Levell Levell R335 Level Level PO sub Pil sub 1 P2 sub02 P3 sub03 d to adjust rapid rate in AUTO MDI Dh P4 sub04 R335 T P5 sub05 P6 sub06
223. S axis 4320 0 operand value too long in macro statement 4380 0 Macro logic operation data error Logic operation operand or results not or 1 150 0 The mirror scale and rotation commands can t be defined with 00 01 07 08 11 12 14 16 22 group instruction in one segment 4510 0 When miror scale or rotation function is valid G92 can t be defined 4820 0 Whenmiror scale or rotation funcion is valid G28 629 630 can t be defined _ 4830 0 When miror scale or rotation function s valid 652 GS0 can t be defined 4840 0 When mirror scale or rotation function is vald G17 G19 cant be defined 4850 0 The miror scale and rotation functions can t be founded if cutter comp C is 39 e GAR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual G Alarm No TYPE CLR Alarm Message WAY g valid 156 0 157 0 158 0 Scale rate can t be 0 159 0 0 When scale or rotation function is valid G50 1 G51 1 can t be defined 160 0 0 G17 must be defined when rotation function will be founded in fixed cycle mode 161 0 When mirror scale or rotation polar function is valid G20 mode or G21 mode can t be changed 162 0 When mirror scale or rotation function is valid G110 G117 G132 G139 G140 G143 can t be defined 165 0 G53 can t be executed in fixed cycle mode 166 0 E G53 can t be executed until machine reference position is set 170 0 0 Cylindrical interpolation can t be defined whe
224. SPLAY FEATURE 4 9 1 3 Parameter Setting By the parameter setting the characteristics of the drive unit and machine can be adjusted Refer to O Installation and Connection about their meanings E Q PARAMETER et Press key to enter the Parameter interface then press key to switch the e parameter page the figure is as follows 2 EDIT 54529 TAG HAD NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA E 0001 0010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 00000000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 0000001 1 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00011111 E 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 00000111 E 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 zu 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 01000101 0650 00000000 000 xx xxx xxx ACS HWL xxx SC xxx BIT Unused 17 20 59 err Para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P A Alteration of bit parameter 1 Byte alteration 1 Turn on the parameter switch 2 Enter the MDI mode 3 Move the cursor to the parameter No to be set Method 1 Press Or key to enter the page containing the parameter to be set press th key to move the cursor to the No of the parameter to be set DATA Method 2 Pr
225. TART S CLEAR CHANGE K Vertical move Display upper and lower part of the graphic Horizontal move Display right and left part of the graphic Scaling Display scaling of current graphic Absolute coordinate Display the absolute coordinate of the program Soft key functions in graph page S Start drawing S is highlighted by pressing S key Display drawing track T Stop drawing T is highlighted by pressing S key t stops drawing R Clear graphic track clear graphic track displayed before K Switch view angle coordinate value can be switched between 0 7 by pressing K key each time J Display graphic in the center that is vertical move and horizontal move are 0 l Scale up the track the graphic is scaled up 2 fold by pressing key once M Scale down the track the graphic is scaled down 2 fold by pressing M key once Direction key move the graph up down left and right D Graph centering and feature J Graph centering display i e vertical translation and horizontal translation are O G Graph feature G displaying a dialog at lower right corner of the following figure and displaying vertical horizontal proportion and movement space The following is an example of graph path 278 Chapter 10 Document Management MDI 97815 198 HAD TRACK DISPLAY 7E 7773 34 300 27 270 3 307 GRAPH FEATURE Y H OFFSET 0 V OFFSET 0 SCALE 100 MOYE DIS 0 ES p a aj CENTER GRAGH S DI
226. TER 6 SCREW PITCH COMPENSATION 6 1 Screw Pitch Compensation OMEN PCOMP 1 Screw pitch error compensation valid 0 Screw pitch error compensation invalid 6 2 Screw Pitch Error Origin A position No which the screw pitch error compensation starts from in the compensation list which is determined from the machine zero is called screw pitch error compensation origin compensation original point Each axis may be set in any position from O to 1023 which is set by data parameter Ne3620 depending on the mechanical requirement Min position number of each axis for pitch error compensation Max position number of each axis for pitch error compensation Screw pitch error compensation position number of each axis machine zero 6 3 Offset Interval 3 6 2 4 Interval of each axis screw pitch error compensation Setting range 1000 999999 Unit 0 001mm Ii 6 4 Compensation Value The axes screw pitch offset values are set in the page of screw pitch parameter Refer to the following table Input range 2550 2550 The offset value is input by diameter with the unit 0 001mm Take X Y Z axes as example OffsetNo X JY 4J Z 5 o e T le 6 5 Cautions for Offset Setting D The setting and modification of screw pitch offset can only be done at the authority of password level 2 and switch on parameter switch Offset is not allowed if the offset interval entered is O After the parameter of scre
227. URCE PA u gsk980mdc backup user BACKUP SYSTEM PARAMETERS TO u gsk980mdc backup 08 56 24 UUUUUIUESSEUITT 0 21 08 56 24 A DESELECT seLecr aL CANCEL aL ou PERFORM System backup page with 2 level operation authority MDI 50808 TAA HAA BACKUP OPTION 1 SELECT YOU NEED ITEMS PRESS EXECU TE SOFT KEY TO BA CKUP RESTORE T PARAMETER T PROGRAM T OFFSET V PITCH COMP SF PLC PARA T PLC r LOG RESUME OPTION 2 CORRESPONDING IT EM OF RESTORING CO ULD NOT BE SELECTE D WHEN THE FILE DO ESN T EX M PARAMETER M PROGRAM OFFSET T PITCH COMP T PLC PARA PLC SOURCE PA u gsk980mdc backup user RESUME DATA PRESS LIN KEY TO RESTORE CAN KEY CANCEL 09 04 10 e M HT SELECT seLecr aL CANCEL aL vn PERFORM System resume page with 3 level operation authority 202 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 3 6 Status parameter data parameter often used parameter and pitch compensation page Press to enter parameter interface including status parameter bit parameter data parameter often used parameter and pitch compensation page which can be viewed by pressing corresponding soft Key 1 Status parameter page In the system page press BIT PARAS to enter parameter setting page as follows EDIT 59814 T96 HAA NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 00
228. UTO MDI and DNC mode the appointed T instruction stands for tool no not the toolpot no 3 when toolpot chooses tool T displaying in the CNC interfaces is not changed but the toolpot is rotating and pre choose the corresponding tool 4 in MANUAL MPG or STEP mode tool magazine CW CCW input valid the toolpot rotates 453 gt o o D 5 Q x GSE 454 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual CW CCW The toolcase plus minus 1 T displaying in the CNC interfaces is not changed 5 when machine is back to O press the tool change key in the panel MDc v the toolpot will rotate to Toolcase No 1 and T displaying in the CNC interfaces is not changed 6 the setting value of data parameter 5026 must be consistent with the number of the toolcases in the toolpot 7 the first time for testing the system should be in the mode of STEP and with no tools If t he positions of the manipulator boosting and tool change are not correct press RESET key im mediately to avoid impacting and tool magazine damage
229. VEL 3 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT sf ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER C RESUME DEFAULT PAR 1 SERYO 18 LEVEL C RESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 SERYO 0 18 LEVEL MODIFY PARAMETER AND EDIT PROGRAM 17 24 39 Imc CLOCK DOC LIST DEGRADE SETTING l ENG Press on the operator panel to enter the system interface and press I SETTING to enter password display page press aeu or INPUT PASSWORD to enter the corresponding setting at last input corresponding operation password to execute the corresponding operation authority The user can modify the level and lower level s password or degrade the current level 1 level 2 level cannot hold after the system is turned off the system enters the 3 level after power on 3 level 5 level can hold after power off and the system recovers the previous operation authority level O Lo D um Q r O 1 Authority level entry Press ES to degrade the operation authority level and the the system displays the current operation authority level in the operation authority level column Press INPUT PASSWORD to input corresponding level s password to enter the level operation authotiry Note Initial password of each operation authority level is shown below Operation authority Initial password 2 Alter password Enter the required
230. XV C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC User Manual Appendix Appendix 1 Outline Dimension of GSK980MDoC seesessssessssseseeennnnenen nennen nnn nns 375 Appendix 2 Outline Dimension of GSK980MDC V eeeesssessssseesee nennen nennen nennen nennt nns 376 Appendix 3 Dimensions of Additional Panel APO ooccccnnccnccnccnnccncnncnnnnnonanonononcnononcnnonanononaronononos 376 Appendix 4 Dimensions for Additional Panel APO 2 oocccoccnccnccnccnccnnccncnnncnnnnononcnononcnnonacononaronononos 377 Appendix 5 Dimensions for Additional Panel APO3 ooocccoccnccnccncccccnncnncnnnnonnnononcnononcncnnacononanonononos 377 Appendix 6 Diagram of I O deconcentrator cccoccncccccnccconnnccnnnnononnnnonannnonannnononnnononnnnnnnrnnonananononos 378 SEN MET odes T 378 62 MO TOT A isa 379 O MOTO Au AP he ene ene ee ee ee ee ee eee ee eer eee 380 Appendix 7 Explanations of Rigid tapping ccccsscccsseccesceceeseceeeecceseeceecsaseeseuseseseecsueessusessaees 381 T Delnionmorpindle Sidral Les n de oS n ue fences 381 7 1 1 CNC connected with spindle servo drive unit directly oococoonncccnccnocncnccncnononnconncnnnnos 381 7 1 2 CNC connected with spindle servo drive unit use deconcentrator 385 7 2 Setting of Spindle Electronic Gear Ratio isset 387 7 9 Related Parameter Selllrig a a 388 Appendix e Alarm MIeSSQgG usiie dan 38
231. XY start up coordinates in XY plane l X axis width of outer rectangle roughing it is more than 0 and its absolute value is done when it is negative J Y axis width of outer rectangle roughing Cit is more than 0 and its absolute value is done when it is negative A X axis width of blank Cit is more than 0 and its absolute value is done when it is negative B Y axis width of blank Cit is more than O and its absolute value is done when it is negative E Allowance in XY plane of outer rectangle roughing Cit is more than 0 and its absolute value is done when it is negative The value set by No 5124 is defaulted when it is not specified W Z axis depth of first cutting is the distance downward from R reference plane and should be more than O its absolute value is done when it is negative when the first cutting depth exceeds groove bottom position directly machining the groove position is done Q Z axis cutting depth increment every time its absolute value is done when it is negative K Cutting width increment in XY plane Cit should be less than tool diameter its absolute value is done when it is negative when K is not specified K is defaulted to tool radius D 93 U a O a um o 3 3 e U A O Q Q 3 3 Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual C X axis cutting amount of first tool infeed it should be more than or equal to tool radius 2 0 when C value is more than 0 the t
232. YO ZO G143 Circular path serial punch in CCW v a Shift Save Exiit e Lo e 2 Other letters shortcut key A J z O Press 2 and the cursor rapidly positions to the valid address B or J as follows 5 EDIT AAAA TAB HAD 1 N00015 G01 X100 Y100 7100 N 00020 F G110 X200 P G143 Y2900 U G Z 200 Y5 Y 20 Be E D L I 20 D2 J H Center K 10 M R R 50 S Q10 T 3 N00025 GOO XO YO 70 Arc radius in arc serial punch 16 03 05 o o E EH Shift Save Exit 3 Input numerical value 1 Move the cursor to B address as follows EDIT SBBBH TAA HAB 1 N00015 G01 X100 Y100 7100 N 00020 F G110 X200 P G143 Y2900 U G 7 200 V5 W 20 c RENE E L I 20 D2 J H Center K 10 H R R 50 S Q10 T 3 N00025 GOO XO YO 70 Arc radius in arc serial punch 16 03 05 EX Shift Save Exit I 2 Press and and then press to input 10 to B as follows 263 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT SANAA TAA HAA 1 N00015 GO1 X100 Y100 7100 N 00020 F G110 X200 P G143 Y200 U G Z 200 V5 Y 20 Bi E C L I 20 D2 J H Center K 10 H R R 50 S Q 10 T 3 N00025 GOO XO YO 70 Arc radius in arc serial punch 16 08 02 7 E y Ee a A 75 4 Deletion DELETE O 1 press key 3 EDIT Saaaa TAA HBB o Aided programming 00100 N00
233. ZD signal output delay time is set by PLC data DTO22 the delay time between spindle stop commands output to spindle brake SPZD signal output The holding time of brake signal is set by PLC data DTO23 spindle brake output time If the current spindle is in the state of CCW CW rotation PLC alarm A0 3 M03 M04 specify the error occurs when M04 or MO3 is executed Note 1 When the CNC external stop or spindle alarm the spindle rotation signal is stopped and SSTP signal is output at the same time Note 2 In CNC reset RSJG of K0010 of the PLC set whether cancel SFR SRV output When RSJG 0 CNC reset to stop SFR SRV output When RSJG 1 CNC reset SFR SRV output state is unchanged Note 3 436 alarm occurs spindle alarm after the APAL signal is detected by the CNC and F35 0 is 1 Note 4 In spindle analog quantity control spindle enable signal is valid when output voltage is greater than O 11 2 2 The 2 spindle rotation control eo Related signals Signal Signal Significance Pin out PLC CNC type symbol No State Diagnosis Spindle CW key of the 2 spindle X21 7 machine panel Input Spindle CCW key of the 2 spindle X21 3 signal machine panel The 2 spindle machine panel stop X21 5 key m SRV2 CCW signal of the 2 spindle CN62 41 Y3 4 s SFR2 signal of the 2 spindle CN6240 Y33 Breaking signal of the gn spindle CN62 42 w 355 3 M73 CW instruction signal of the 2 Instr
234. a mo do rziatci o ge E dies 115 3 30 4 Technical SpecificatiON eot ete reiten iii 115 3 90 5 5Decily a Rigid Tapping ModE stu iesu irme dec eu doo MEO e aem me Ead 116 3 30 6 The Cancellation of Rigid Tapping Mode oooocccccccnoccccncccnnocccnnccnnnaccnnccnnnnncnnncnnnnanccnnnos 117 IIA P UU Em 118 3 90 9 Alarme sS age uus edades edv tee A a 118 3 90 9 Program Example secco disco didas 119 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL FUNCTION of ADDITIONAL AXIS eese 121 A INIECI RIEN TR TUN erc A 121 A2 A A T 121 T 3 AXIS DIS IA e atssttida ias tios dir 121 AAAS AUD Seas ocu ante Nao Remates cutrert dono Mun eua tm ence mendis O 122 4 5 Linear Axis or The Additional AXIS eset nte uisu e tcs 122 4 6 Rotation Axis of The Additional xiS oocccoccccoccnccccnccocncoonnncnnnnonnnonanononnnonannnnnnnnnnaninonnnnnanons 123 4 7 The Zero Return D Of ROUOMAXIS aci 124 48 TM euiiseione 8 2 4c ucc 125 GHAPTER S MAGRO PROGRAM sia i iietoos pides tine RU Dated du to oda is Ioni REL Den E Lieu OO died ond 129 NM Macro Gallina 129 SI lel e ee 133 9 2 NUI Mariable Ss si is 137 IX CGS CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC User Manual 52e O A TE mm 138 29 PUDDING Variable 5i no tonc aiio re DEEP diete ttc pon leido ie i 139 5 24 System Variables icc e A Befoqtbes ciae quotas 141 5 9 Aninmetc and LOGIC Operas ditio ito iE oe Robur d tob de
235. a revolution of the spindle related parameters 5216 or 1260 If 170 is set to 1000 6072360 1000 0 360 ZM Gear teeth of lead screw ZD Gear teeth of motor Calculation formula of spindle servo drive unit Parameter 12 13 of drive unit correspond to the pulse frequency division numerator of position command respectively The calculation formulars for pulse frequency division denominator of position command and gear ratio of drive unit are as follows PxG 4xNxC And pu ANS a 4xC Zu CMD 4x N xC x x x x 360 360 Z CMR P Correspondence between required pulse amounts for motor rotates 360 degrees and CNC end P 360 a G Electronic gear ratio of drive unit G position command pulse frequency division numerator position command pulse frequency division denominator N Set motor rev number to 1 C Wire number of feedback encoder 4 4 Acceleration amp deceleration Characteristic Adjustment Adjust the relative CNC parameters according to the factors such as the drive unit motor characteristics and machine load Data parameter No22 X Y Z Ath 5th axis rapid traverse rate Data parameter N923 linear acceleration amp deceleration time constant of X Y Z 4th 5th axis rapid traverse rate Data parameter N9024 Data parameter N9027 Data parameter Ne030 Data parameter Ne029 Data parameterN9041 feedrate Data parameterN9042 feed Data parameterNe026 Data parameterNe0
236. able or the format of macro is wong 4050 0 Tne divisor in using Macro is not equal to zero 4050 0 The format of ATAN is wrong in using macro 4050 0 The inverse logarithm of LN is wrong 20 4080 0 Tre evolution of negative is forbidden 400 0 ThermutofTANSamfn de 00 0 The operator of ASIN or AGOS is out of range 1 orsi mo 0 The type of variable is wrong or not exists A0 0 The block called by GOTO or M99 is overflow or notexst mao 0 _ M98 or M99 cannot be executed when G66is called mao 0 G65 or G66 must be defined ahead Cro 0 Nuno cantas a result of macro statement meo 0 IK number in 665 666 over 10 moo o Macro program called by P is out of range in G65 G66 42 0 0 The variable only can be read not be writen 42 0 0 The value assigned to system variables in macro statement cannot be mul 4220 0 Por G65 H operation not specified in macro callG6S5 or G66 50 o GH formatiswrong 124 0 0 legal His commanded in G65 4250 0 Proper operands and number are needed inmacro 4250 0 Aarm No specty by G65 H99 beyond range 0 99 4m 0 Operand notinteger in macro statement 42 0 0 Operand not binary in macro statement 4290 0 Radius offset is pre read right macro variable can tbe got 4300 0 Spinde encoder pulse is out of 100 5000 4910 0 Set rotary axis active before using C
237. actor electromagnetism DC coil 24 VD DC relav 24 VD Cables between CNC strong power cabinet Tie up B and A group cables separately o shield B group cables and the further B group cables are from that of C group the better it is Cables between CNC an machine Cables between CNC and servo drive unit Tie up C and A group cables separately o Position feedback cable shield C group cables and the cable distance between Pacion encoder cable C group and B group is at least 10cm with wisted pair cable applied MPG cable Other cables for shield 304 Chapter2 Interface Signals CHAPTER2 INTERFACE SIGNALS 2 1 Connection to Drive Unit 2 1 1 Drive Interface Definition 9 2 DIRn 10 DIRn 4 24V Me 12 VCC 5 ALMn o 13 VCC Aoro signa 7 ENn o 15 GND 8 RDYn ZSDn gt o Axis enable signal os Pulse disable signal Fig 2 1 CN11 CN12 CN13 interface DB15 female 2 1 2 Command Pulse and Direction Signals nCP nCP are command pulse signals nDIR nDIR are command direction signals These two group signals are both difference output AM26L S31 the interior circuit for them is shown in Fig 2 2 nDIE nDIE nDIE nF ncP nP 5 N c D T O Fig 2 2 Interior circuit of command pulse and direction signals 2 1 3 Drive Unit Alarm Signal The low or high level of the drive unit alarm level is set by the CNC bit parameter No 009 BITO BIT4 whose int
238. age control mode the actual spindle speed is specified by the Soouono 4 digit command value the NC outputs the 0 10V analog voltage signal to the spindle servo device or inverter for achieving the stepless speed regulating of the spindle 2 2 1 Spindle Speed Switch Value Control The spindle speed is on switching value control when the BIT4 of bit parameter NO 001 is set to O One block only has one S command The CNC alarm occurs when there are two or more S commands displayed in block When the S command shares the same block with the command word the performance sequence is defined by PLC program For details refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder This GSK980MDc milling machine is used for machining control when the spindle speed switching value is controlled The time sequence and logic for S command should be referred by the manual issued by the machine tool builder The following S command is defined by GSK980MDc standard PLC for reference only Command format S oo LL 00 04 leading zero can be omitted 1 4 gears spindle speed switching value control Command address In spindle speed switching value control mode the FIN signal is returned after the set time is delayed after the code signal of S command is sent to PLC Now the time is called execution time of S code Scodeperforms Delay time Subs sue command word or block performs The S01 S02 S03 and S04 output states are invariable when the CNC is
239. age control of spindle speed 0 Switching volume control of spindle speed Corresponding F address ESCD 0 S code is active in emergency stop 1 S code is inactive in emergency stop DTOO19 S code execution time DT0024 Gear shifting delay time gt o o D 5 Q x e Control logic GEAR1 GEAR4 output are inactive at power on When any code of S01 S02 S03 and S04 is executed the corresponding S signal output is active and held on and the other 3 S signal outputs are cancelled GEAR1 GEARA outputs are cancelled when executing SOO command and only one in GEAR1 GEARA is active 428 Appendix 11 2 5 Cycle Start and Feed Hold eo Related signal Signal Type Symbol Significance Pin out PLC CNC No State Diagnosis ST External cycle start signal CN61 13 X1 4 SP External feed hold signal CN61 2 X0 1 Cycle start key signal X23 0 Input signal Feed hold key signal X22 1 OUT key cycle start signal of F197 1 MDI mode Cycle start indicator of the panel Y20 0 Output signal Feed hold indicator of the panel Y21 0 Command input MOO Feed hold signal F9 7 e Control parameter Corresponding F210 6 F210 5 F address MST 71 External cycle start signal is inactive 0 External cycle start signal is active MSP 1 External feed hold signal is inactive 0 External feed hold signal is active the stop switch is needed or stop is displayed by the
240. ai sudo tees oe tone ee Cee eS Sd iod otro LOO cud ead atc 432 12 13 QOUON Al voe dotada els 433 11 2 14 Stroke Limit and Emergency StOP cccoocccccoconcnncocononnconononnnonononnnonononnnnnnnonnnnnnrennnnnnnons 433 A A 434 11 2 16 Reset and Gursor AM cl red dades 434 lie Ada Ta PP in m AA AA 435 11 2 19 Spmale Exact otras sti 436 29 Extena MEE Cont lost Eidos 436 11 2 20 OS ARS WC cacti ise ees areata LOL EDI E A e OM Deo zo P uM EUE 436 1222 be Oale Gate PUNCHOM siciliana 437 11 2 22 Spindle Releasing clamping Tool cccceeccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeesaangeees 438 11 2 293 Port TOO MAJAZI titi cid 438 11 224 Turet TOON IagazIfie i e Eae ciTe eno ooo ls tl 447 XVII C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC User Manual XVIII Programming O z z i O O ha O GSK GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual U im O a um y 3 3 e Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals CHAPTER1 PROGRAMMING FUNDMENTALS 1 1 Introduction GSK980MDc Milling Machine system is a new generation of CNC system developed by GSK Company As the upgraded version of GSK980MD and GSK980MDa it supports milling boring and drilling cycle It employs 32 bits high capability CPU and very large scale programmable device FPGA applies real time multi task control technology and hardware interpolation technology and is able to perform um level precision motion control and PLC logi
241. ained And the related parameters are needed to be adjusted are Bit parameter Ne001 ACS 1 for selection of spindle speed analog voltage control Data parameter No3731 offset compensation value as spindle speed command voltage is OV Data parameter No3730 offset compensation value as spindle speed command voltage is 10V Data parameter Ne3741 Ne3744 Max speed limit for spindle speed gear 1 4 When CNC power on 360 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging the defaulted gear is 1 for spindle Basic parameters needed to be adjusted for inverter refer to the relevant inverter manual for specific adjustment CCW or CW command mode is selected by frenauency If the speed by programming is not consistent with that detected by the encoder it can be adjusted to be consistent with the actual one by adjusting the data parameter No3741 No3744 Speed adjustment method select the spindle first gear input S9999 code in MDI mode to run the spindle view the spindle speed shown on the right bottom of the screen then reinput the displayed speed value into the parameter No3741 The other spindle gear adjustment is identical with this When entering S9999 code the voltage should be 10V SO is OV If there is an voltage error adjust bit parameter Ne3730 and Ne3731 to correct the voltage offset value corrected by manufacturer usually not needed When the current gear is the max speed if the analog voltage output by CNC is higher than 10V set a smaller
242. al GSE Setting range 1 32767 5 2 6 1 Linear acc amp dec time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms 5 2 7 1 Linear acc amp dec time constant in rigid tapping tool retract Setting range 0 4000 Unit ms 5261 setting value is used when it is set to O 9 9 2 1 Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 1 o0 3 2 2 Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 2 Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 3 Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 4 9 3 7 1 Pulse feed speed of M29 calculating rigid Setting range 0 4095 tap gear ratio Setting range r min 3 2 Tool Function 5 0 2 5 initial tool No Setting of initial tool number must be less than that of max tool number otherwise an alarm occurs Setting range 0 99 5 0 2 6 Max tool No Setting of max tool number must be more than that of initial tool number otherwise an alarm occurs Setting range 0 99 5 0 3 2 The number of PLC D data is corresponding to the number of start tool sheath Setting range 300 999 5 03 3 The number of PLC D data is corresponding to the number of exchanging tool sheath Setting range 300 999 3 2 8 Edit and Display MER 1 After the last block is executed in MDI operation the executed programs are not deleted 0 After the last block is executed in MDI operation the executed programs are deleted MCL 1 The p
243. al liability Gr 4d Bx Tz GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual FOREWORD Dear user We are really grateful for your patronage and purchase of this GSK980MDc Milling CNC system made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd The user manual describes the programming operation installation and connection of this GSK980MDc Turning CNC system Please read it carefully before operation in order to get the safe and effective working Warning A This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel as improper operations may cause accidents Please carefully read this user manual before use Note The power supply installed on in the cabinet is exclusive to GSK S CNC systems The power supply form is forbidden to be used for other purposes Otherwise there may be extreme danger This user manual shall be kept by final user II Notes Notes m Delivery and storage Packing box over 6 layers in pile is unallowed Never climb the packing box neither stand on it nor place heavy objects on it Do not move or drag the product by the cables connected with it Forbid collision or scratch to the panel and displayer Packing box should be protected from damping insolation and raining Open packing box to check Ensure things in packing box are the required ones Ensure the product is not damaged in delivery Ensure the parts in packing box are in accordance to the order Contact us in time
244. ale system dial E before offsetting after offsetting Reference a 1090 26 20000 1992 Aw M 08 MN MON 30 000 30000 29995 252 Actually the machine moves from the point 40 000 to the reference point the screw pitch compensation is 3 7 0 2 2 370 Chapter 6 Screw Pitch Compensation 4 Pitch error compensation of rotary axis When the additional axis is linear or rotary B type the pitch error compensation mode is the same as the linear axis The following example explains the pitch error compensation function when the additional axis is taken as the rotary axis A type No 1260 movement amount of rotary per rev 360 No3624 pitch error compensation interval 45 No3620 pitch error compensation number corresponded to machine zero 60 Set the minimum pitch error compensation position number No 3621 of the rotary axis 50 the maximum pitch error compensation position number No 3622 100 After the above parameters are set the farthest pitch error compensation position number of the rotary axis in the negative direction is equal to compensation position number of reference point The farthest compensation position number in the positive direction is Compensation position number of reference point movement amount per rev compensation position interval 60 360 45 68 Relations between machine coordinates and compensation position number 0 ee TEE qo oS S el 69 Xn 60 db 62 6
245. amount of each handwheel scale Handwheel 0 001 0 0100 0 100 1 000 increment Specified 0 001mm 0 010mm 0 100mm 1 000mm coordinate value 2 he rotation speed of the handwheel should be more than 5 r s if it is over it the scale may be not coincide with the moving amount 3 The handwheel axis selection key is valid only in the MPG mode 239 O Lo D um Q O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 240 Chapter 5 MDI Operation CHAPTER5 MDI OPERATION Note The keys functions of this GSK980MDc machine panel are defined by Ladder please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDc standard PLC programs In MDI mode the operations of parameter setting words input and execution can be performed In MDI mode edited programs can be gained by editing program file O0000 and MDI runs programs used for simple test operations 5 1 Blocks Input Select MDI mode to enter the PRG STATE page to input an block GOO X50 Z100 the steps are as follows O 1 Press Key to enter MDI mode LS Twn T D 2 Press PROGRAM key to enter PRG STATE page o MDI BB384 779 HAA S MDI 00000 INSERT POSITION G88 G29 673 G20 53 G59 ABSOLUTE G16 G67 G98 G04 G47 C78 X 44 750 682 Y 35 63
246. an calls quadruple subprogram namely the other subprogram can be called from the subprogram See Fig 2 3 Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram 01001 0 1002 01003 01004 M98P1002 M98P 1003 M98P1004 M98P1005 Level 1 Level 2 Level3 Le vel 4 Fig 2 3 subprogram nestifications 2 1 6 Macro Program Call M9000 M9999 Format M oooo L 9000 9999 Command function Call the macro program which is corresponded by the command value O9000 09999 Macro program Program 09000 09999 is special space obligated for the machine tool manufacturer for using editing and achieving special function subprogram which is called macro program Two level 15 U im O e um 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK operation authority is needed when editing the program 09000 09999 the user can not modify or run the 2 1 7 Program Stop M00 Format MOO Command function After MOO is executed program run stops Pause appears the cycle start key is pressed to continuously run the program 2 2 Spindle Function The spindle speed is controlled by S command there are two ways to control spindle speed for GSK980MDc Spindle speed switching value control mode the Soo 2 digit command value command is processed by PLC program for exporting the switching value signal to machine so that the step speed change of the spindle is achieved Spindle speed analog volt
247. and Workpiece coordinate system 3 Workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece coordinate system 5 Coordinate system rotation ON Modal G Workpiece coordinate system 6 Coordinate system rotation OFF command Polar coordinate command OFF Modal G Polar coordinate command ON command Programmable image OFF Modal G Programmable image ON command 3 1 1 Modal Non modal and Initial State The G commands can be set to 16 groups such as 00 01 02 03 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 14 16 17and 22 Thereinto G commands of 00 group are non modal G commands that of other G group are modal commands G00 G80 G40 G49 G67 and G94 are initial G commands After the G command is executed the function defined or status is valid until itis changed by other G command where in the same group this kind of command is called modal G command After this G command is performed and before the function defined or status is changed this G command need not be input again when the next block performs this G command After the G command is performed the function defined or status is valid for once The G command word should be input again while every time the G command is performed this kind of command is called non modal G command The modal G command is valid without performing its function or state after the system is powered on this is called initial G command If the G command is not introduced after the power is turned on then the initial G command is
248. are disabled in this cycle but the Q and P values are reserved as the canned cycle modal value For example To perform a fine milling for the finished rough milling rectangle groove with the canned cycle G136 command see the following figure E X 50 Z he initialized plane X Point K plane G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G136 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 180 J50 K30 U10 F800 D1 Perform finish milling inside the rectangle groove at the bottom of a hole in the canned cycle D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point R plane M30 3 24 2 20 Finish milling Cycle Outside the Rectangle G138 G139 Format G138 G98 G99 X Y R Z J D K U F G139 Function The tool performs fine milling outside the rectangle by the specified width and direction it is returned after finishing the fine milling 99 U a O a um o 3 3 e G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Explanation G138 Finish milling cycle outside the rectangle in CCW G139 Finish milling cycle outside the rectangle in CW I The width of rectangle along the X axis range 99999999 99999999xleast input increment J The width of the rectangle along the Y axis range 99999999 99999999xleast input increment D Sequence number of tool radius its value range is indicated as O 32 thereinto the O is default of DO The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified sequence
249. ariable 1 that calls macro programs at a certain moment is different from the 1 at another moment No matter the macro programs are identical or not Therefore when macro program B is called from macro program A like nesting the local variables used in macro A will not be misused in macro B and will not disable the value in macro B Usually the local variables are used to accept the value passed from argument Please refer to Argument Specification for the relationship between arguments and addresses Pay attention that the initial state of local variable is Null before the local variable is defined assigned e Custom macro program nesting and local variable When calling a macro program its nesting level increases by one and correspondingly the level of local variable increases by one as well The relationship between macro program call and local variable is shown as follows Macro Program Macro Program Macro Program Macro Program Main Program Mao level Levels 2 Levels 3 Levels 4 e Explanations 1 1 83 local variables 0 level are provided in the main program 2 When a macro program 1 level is called by G65 the local variable 0 level is stored and local variables 41 433 of the new macro program is prepared The argument replacement is possible the same as 3 138 Chapter 5 Macro Program 3 Each time a macro program 2 3 4 levels are called local variables 1 2 3 levels in each group a
250. as MOVN DECB CMP and other PLC commands Input MOVN and then press P to find MONV commands as follows MDI 58000 TAA HAD LADDER gt MONITOR WIN Level2 00002 N00000 RITI B Pa El xi L CALL NETWORK133 c RB 7 DIFD NETWORK134 F3 1 PAG ais NETWORK135 Pl Pl subprogram of choosing a axis on the handwheel and adjusting mpg step F3 H PI CALL F3 1 A 6 RB 7 FID COMMAND MOYN 10 08 50 10 FIND 5 press HETHORK to view network number of current ladder window For example find network 5 the following figure is shown Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI SBBBB TAA HAD LADDER gt MONITOR WIN2 Level2 00002 N00000 NETWORK16 23 2 indicator of JOG mode F3 2 _ NETWORK17 Y23 5 indicator of MDI mode F3 3 NETWORK18 Y23 5 indicator of AUTO mode E E NETWORK19 Y23 f indicator of EDIT mode FIND NETWORK 15 10 09 06 FIND FIND FIND A HOME END PARAMETER COMMAND NETHORK gt MDI 50008 TAB HAD LADDER gt MONITOR WIN2 Level2 00002 N00000 NETWORK16 Y23 2 indicator of JOG mode F3 2 A gt GI CLL ULLLLLLIILULLLLLLECLLLLLLLLLALHBOBLA A NETWORKI 7 Y23 5 indicator of MDI mode F3 3 NETWORK18 Y23 6 indicator of AUTO mode Edo NETWORK19 Y23 f6 indicator of EDIT mode F3 6 NETWORK2 Y23 4 indicator of REF mode 10 09 28
251. at M30 Function If M30 command is executed in the Auto mode the automatic run is ended after the other commands of current block are executed the system cancels the tool nose radius compensation and the cursor returns to the beginning of the program when the workpieces number is added by one whether the cursor returns to the head of the program is determined by parameters The cursor does not return to the beginning of the program when the BIT4 of parameter No810 is set to 0 when it is set to 1 the cursor returns to the beginning of the program as soon as the program execution is finished Besides the above mentioned functions processed by CNC the functions of code M30 also can be defined by the PLC ladder diagram The function defined by standard ladder diagram can be turn OFF the M03 MO4 or MO8 output signal after the M30 command is executed and meanwhile output MO5 signal 2 1 4 Subprogram Call M98 Format M98 LooooPnuuuu The called subprogram No 0000 9999 The leading zero of subprogram can be omitted when the called times are not input the subprogram No should be 4 digits when the called times is input U im O e um 9 3 3 e Called times 1 9999 calling for once the input can be omitted Function In Auto mode when the M98 is executed the subprogram specified by P is called after the execution of other codes in the current block The subprogram can be performed 9999 times at most M98 can
252. ate parameter The C axis can not be moved in manual mode when the rigid tapping is not cancelled 3 30 5 Specify a Rigid Tapping Mode eo Specify M29 before G74 G84 G84 shows a sample for the following time sequence 116 Chapter 3 G Command M29 E RATP F76 3 ME 1 qa 3 G84 executed Output S command RGTA G61 0 FIN G4 3 The spindle rotation operation E o Specify M29 and G74 G84 at the same block G84 shows a sample for the following time sequence s A RATP F76 3 g Operation 1 l Operation 3 eT i n m LL Buiwmweibolig G84 executed Output S command 4 4 LH poni RN FIN G4 3 The spindle rotation operation The spindle CCW signal SFR e The explanation of time sequence The spindle rotation operation means that the rotation axis is shifted to the position control mode namely the servo spindle is needed to send a switch signal in position mode and check the position mode arrival signal of servo spindle 3 30 6 The Cancellation of Rigid Tapping Mode e The rigid tapping mode is canceled by G80 eo Specify other canned cycles by G codes e The other G codes of group 1 eo CNC resetting The signal descending of F76 3 along the signal with canceling the rigid tapping of PLC if the state RTCRG of parameter No 588 is equal to 1 the system is then performed the next block without waiting for the rigid tapping mode signal which G61 0 is set to 0 When the stat
253. ated parameter NL LUN NAE BUE EE E RON Noo EUR RIN 1 The ang of coordinate system rotation is specified by command G90 or G91 RIN 20 The angle of coordinate system rotation is always an absolute command When the angle of rotation is not specified the angle in coordinate system rotation Setting range 360000 360000 Cunit 0 001deg IS B Example N1 G90 G69 G54 G49 G40 G17 X 50 Y 50 Z30 N2 G68 X70 Y30 R45 N2 G68 R45 N3 G90 G01 X0 YO F800 N4 G91 X100 N5 G02 Y100 R100 N6 G03 X 100 1 50 J 50 N7 G01 Y 100 N8 G90 G69 X 50 Y 50 N9 M30 69 GSK GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Tool path when the command is executed in the brackets M2 D x O Q Q 3 gt Q Center of rotation Tool path after rotation 50 50 Coordinate rotation and cutter compensation C Cutter compensation C can be specified in G68 and G69 mode The rotation plane must consistent with the plane of tool compensation N1 G90 G69 G54 G17 GOO X0 YO N5 G03 Y10 R10 J5 N2 G90 G68 X10 Y10 R 30 N6 G01 X 20 N3 G42 G01 X10 Y10 F800 D1 N7 Y 10 N4 G91 X20 N8 G90 G69 G40 X0 YO Programmed shape before coordinate system rotation Programmed shape after coordinate system rotation Scaling and coordinate system rotation If a coordinate system rotation command is executed in the scaling mode the rotation center will also be scaled but not the rotation angle When a move command is issued the
254. ation and linear interpolation y A B Blocks for circular interpolation and circular interpolation E Inserted chamfering 3 programs 3 To Virtual inflection Note virtual inflection is defined to a subsistent inflection when the chamfering function is not executed 3 29 1 Linear Chamfering Data following the command L is distance from virtual inflection to starting point or end point of chamfering the distance in an arc is a chord length corresponded to an arc segment Command format G IP L_ C G01 G03 IP axis movement command Go IP Fig 20 1 linear chamfering Fig 20 2 linear chamfering of linear to linear of linear to are Fig 20 3 linear chamfering af arc to linear Fig 20 42 linear chamfering of arc to arc 3 29 2 Arc Chamfering Data following the command U is a radius of chamfering arc Command format Go IP U o G01 G03 IP axis movement command Go IP 111 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual mu Fig 20 5 arc chamfering af linear to linear Fig 20 5 arc chamfernng af linear ta arc Fig 20 7 arc chamfering of arc to linear Fig 20 6 arc chamfering of arc ta arc 3 29 3 Limit Plane selection Linear chamfering and arc chamfering are executed in the specified planes G17 G18 G19 and the planes cannot be switched between their chamfering blocks Next block A block with a specified chamfering can follow an interpola
255. ation for other axes are the same as this 361 Ii T e D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Data A dial indicator data at point A Data B dial indicator data at point B Note 1 The backlash offset mode and offset frequency can be set by BDEC and BD8 of bit parameter N9o011 Note 2 Check the machine backlash at regular intervals according to specific conditions to ensure machine precision 4 8 Step MPG Adjustment The MPG key on the panel can be used to select the Step mode or MPG mode which is set by the HWL of bit parameter Ne001 0 0 O0 1 DT HWL 21 MPG mode valid Step mode invalid 0 Step mode valid MPG mode invalid The direction of rotation for handwheel can be adjusted by parameter HWn 1 n axis handwheel cew Cw 0 n axis handwheel ccw cw 4 9 Other Adjustment MST 1 External Cycle Start ST signal invalid 0 External Cycle Start ST signal valid MSP 1 External Dwell SP signal invalid 0 External Stop SP signal valid MOT 1 Not check software limit 0 Check software limit MESP 1 External ESP signal invalid 0 External ESP signal valid 0 1 7 3 AAA LE A ESSE ESCD 1 S code off in emergency stop 0 S code not off in emergency stop 362 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message CHAPTERS DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE 5 1 CNC Diagnosis This diagnosis section is used to check the CNC interface signals and
256. ation is formed by the third axis linear interpolation linkage by which the CNC controls three directions movement for X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis at the same time The instantaneous speed of movement path in a tangential direction is consistent with the F command value so this is called CUTTING FEED or INTERPOLATION The cutting feedrate is supplied by F command which it is disassembled to each interpolation axis according to the programming path when the CNC performs the interpolation command cutting feed Linear interpolation The CNC can control the instantaneous speed in the directions of X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis so the vector resultant speed in these five directions are equal to the F command value C ery Jd d d d d EMEN A f ld d d d d 18 CHAPTER 2 MSTF CODES f eF Jd d d d d d f AA s U ad ed egg gs ze d ef f d d d 0242 F is vector resultant speed for the instantaneous speed in X Y and Z axis directions The dx is instantaneous increment of the X axis the fx is instantaneous speed of X axis The dy is instantaneous increment of Y axis the fy is instantaneous speed of Y axis The dz is instantaneous increment of Z axis the fz is instantaneous speed of Z axis The d4 is instantaneous increment of 4th axis the f4 is instantaneous speed of 4th axis The d5 is instantaneous increment of 5th axis the f5 is instantan
257. ation of cutting off the machine power supply refer to the manual of the machine manufacturer 2 3 Overtravel Protection To avoid the damage of the machine due to the overtravel for X axis Y axis Z axis the A axis the 5 axis the machine must take the measure of overtravel protection 2 3 1 Hardware overtravle protection Install the limit switches on the maximum stroke in each axis X axis Y axis Z axis the 4 axis and the 5 axis positive and negative directions on the machine The connection is done according to the following figure taking an example of 3 axes When it overtravels the limit switch is ON GSK980MDc stops run and alarms 23 O Lo D um Q r O C Essi CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual SK 24V gt gt E E r x cet Qt Y M 1 Overtravel release ER U switch Emergency Ep stop switch When hardware overtravel appears Emergency stop alarm of GSK980MDc occurs Releasing Emergency stop alarm press the overtravel release button move the worktable reversely when the positive overtravel occurs the worktable is moved negatively and vice verse to break away from the travel switch 2 3 2 Software overtravel protection When No 0172 MOT is set to 0 the software limit function is valid Software travel range is set by No045 N2046 and is taken machine coordinates as reference values No 045 is max positive travel of X Y Z 4 5 axis and No 046
258. axis Setting range is 99999999 99999999 which can not be 0 3 18 Programmable Mirror Image G50 1 G51 1 If the shape of a workpiece is symmetrical on an axis a part of the workpiece can be programmed Then machining program of a whole part can be obtained by using mirror image or scaling and subprogram 59 U A O Q Q 3 gt Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Axis of mirror image 50 Y Y Main program N10 GDD GSD N20 M98 P9000 N30 G51 1 X50 0 N40 Mas P9000 N50 G51 1 Y50 0 NED M98 P9000 N70 550 1 X0 Only cancel the mirrarimage of X axis Neo M38 P9000 lt lt lt a m m N90 G50 1 YD Axis af mirror image X 50 BD BD ol Subprogram O8000 G00 G90 X60 0 Y60 0 01 290 0 F100 190 0 60 0 Y60 0 Mog 50 60 30 Format G51 1X Y Z_ Set programmable mirror image s According to G51 1 X Y Z specified mirror image of these blocks are generated from specified symmetry axis G50 1X Y Z Specify corresponding axis to cancel the mirror image of axes G50 1 G51 1are G codes of No 22 which are modal G codes Command function Specify mirror image function for axes G51 1 X Y Z Specify mirror image function for axes put on the axis as a mirror Thereinto X Y Z isan absolute command G50 1 X Y Z Cancel mirror image function for axes If the address of the axis is not specified which indicates no mirror image function is ca
259. axis and C axis When the C axis of parameter No 1022 is set to 5 parallel axis of X axis in this case the command 38 Chapter 3 G Command for circular interpolation is G18Z2 C gt G18Z Xp Xpis the parallel axis for X axis G02 G03Z CR gt G02G03Z Xp R When the C axis of parameter No 1022 is set to 6 parallel axis of Y axis in this case the command for circular interpolation is G19C Z gt 4G19Yp Z Ypis the parallel axis for Y axis G02 G03Z CR gt G02G03Z Yp R e Circular interpolation between the X axis or Y axis and C axis is similar to the above Feedrate The specified federate F mm min in the cylindrical interpolation is the speed of the unfolded cylinder surface which is called linear speed The linear interpolation and circular interpolation is performed with speed F mm min Thereinto F F F c xl ylz Fe In linear and circular interpolation linear velocity mm min of C axis Fxyz In linear and circular interpolation linear velocity mm min of X Y Z axes After interpolation The C axis output linear distance by converting it to the angle of rotary axis That is the relation between output speed w deg min of C axis and F mm min are as follows 1 O a deg min RT Speed restriction The increase of the speed F will make the output speed w of C axis exceeds the upper speed parameter No 027 that is specified by the system so the program speed F should be restricted
260. ay cause over cut or undercut so the part accuracy will be affected So the cutter radius compensation can be used to improve the part accuracy in machining The path of part figure can be shifted by a cutter radius which this method is called B type tool compensation this is a simply method but the movement path of next block can be processed only after a block is performed so the phenomenon as over cutting will be generated at the intersection point of two blocks In order to settle the above issues and eliminate the error the Tool compensation C should be setup When a block is read in the tool compensation C is not performed immediately but the next block is read in again Corresponding movement path is calculated according to the point of intersection of two blocks conjunction vector The tool compensation C performs more accurate compensation in figure because two blocks are read for processing in advance See the Fig 6 1 Cancel the tool radius compensation Fig 6 1 C type cutter radius compensation 6 1 2 Compensation value setting The radius value of each tool should be set before tool compensation C is applied Tool radius compensation value is set in the OFFSET page table 6 1 this page contains tool geometric radius and tool radius wear There into D is the tool compensation value when the bit 1 of bit parameter No 002 is 1 the D is compensation value input by diameter If the bit 1 of bit parameter No 002 is O the D is
261. before power down 6 Press Y to recover the mode before power down 7 Switch to auto mode press cycle start key to execute the block continuously from where it stops last time Operation method 2 Auto SEEK 1 After power on press gt l key in page program content edit execute position operation to the block where the execution stops last time 2 Switch to the pages coordinate amp program machine zero Perform machine zero operation 4 After machine zero is performed press conversion key It prompts at the bottom of the screen Locate to the block automatically where it stops last time It will recover the mode before power down Input Cancel Ensure that tools moving path is in a safe range at this moment Press Input and coordinates start move to locate to the block where it stops last time and recovers the mode before power down 5 Switch to auto mode press cycle start key to execute the block continuously where it stops last time e 7 4 2 Interruption at Power down on DNC Auto Operation Operation method Auto 1 Switch to coordinate program machine zero return after power on 2 Execute machine zero return 3 After machine zero return is finished press conversion key It prompts at the bottom of the screen Locate to the block automatically where it stops last time It will recover the mode before power down Input Cancel Ensure that tools moving path is in a safe ra
262. ber Tool compensation number number alarm 99999999 99999999xleast input Corner radius value ofarc corner increment absolute value of Round off negative number 99999999 99999999xleast input increment absolute value of Round off negative number Distance to unmachined surface in 99999999 99999999xleast input V rapid cut of rough milling command increment absolute value of Round off G110 G111 G134 and G135 negative number First cutting in value in Z 99999999 99999999xleast input Round off direction rough milling command G110 increment absolute value of 29 Corner radius value of rectangle in G134 G139 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK G111 G116 G117 G132 G133 G134 negative number and G135 99999999 99999999xleast input Delay time in G04 s increment absolute value of Round off negative number 99999999 99999999xleast input X axis coordinate value l Round off increment l l 99999999 99999999xleast input Y Y axis coordinate value l Round off increment l l 99999999 99999999xleast input Z axis coordinate value l Round off increment 3 2 Rapid Positioning G00 Format GOO X Y Z l Function X Y and Z axes simultaneously move to end points from start at their rapid traverse rates See Fig 3 1 Two axes move at their respective speeds the short axis arrives at the end firstly the long axis moves the rest of di
263. bit can be changed by pressing or WW the second displays Chinese definitions of some bit of the address number where the cursor is 1 1 X Y F signal In PLC state page press 1 0 STATE to enter the submenu page to view PLC state information data In the page press NT to display state information of each parameter of X Y F At the moment gt press j to switch among X Y F press tt V to view parameters of X Y F G In PLC state page the system displays states of X0000 X0031 YOOOO Y0031 F0000 F0255 which is shown below 211 O Lo D um Q r O CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MOI SeB4B Td5 HAA LADDER gt 1 0 STATE gt X Y F 00001 NOS433 X SIGNAL Y SIGNAL pana anaapgaad E DES DBBaaaad 1 aenaaaaa 1 aananan 1 00000000 2 00000000 2 00000000 2 Q0000000 3 agaeaana 3 0000000 3 OMNNAA 4 00000000 4 00000000 4 00000000 5 B0000000 5 0000000 b 80008008 6 00000000 8 anenaaae 6 00000000 7 Q000OUDU i 00000000 7 U0000000 8 00000080 8 00000000 8 00000000 9 00000000 9
264. bled which can be avoided the coordinate value is overflowed from the rotation axis the coordinate value will be cycled based on the setting value of data parameter No 1260 the movement amount of each axis for the rotation axis When the coordinate cycle function of the additional rotation axis setting is disabled the 123 U im O e a 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK coordinate value may change based on the linear axis the programming command is also same to the one of the linear axis Two kinds of coordinates change are shown below 1 When the coordinate cycle is disabled axis positive ee E ot lo AO 180 I Lei 360 goog The above mentioned may occur 1 The machine coordinate value of rotation axis Type B 2 The absolute coordinate value in data parameter No 188 ROAx 0 absolute coordinate cycle function is disabled 3 The relative coordinate value in data parameter No 188 RRLx 0 relative coordinate cycle function is disabled 2 When the coordinate cycle is enabled U im O e um 9 3 3 e m Loo LL LLL C axis positive 360 I 360 0 360 The above mentioned may occur 1 The machine coordinate value of rotation axis Type A 2 The absolute coordinate value in data parameter No 188 ROAx 1 absolute coordinate cycle function is enabled 3 The relative coordinate value in data parameter No 188 RRLx 1 relative coordinate cy
265. by BitO SCW of bit parameter N2004 in GSK980MDc system SCW 0 indicates that minimum command increment parameter and screw pitch values are in metric units SCW 1 indicates that minimum command increment parameter and screw pitch values are in inches units The setting of this parameter depends on machine tool G code By selecting G20 G21 code it is able to set whether minimum input increment values are in inch or in metric Executing G21 indicates that minimum input increment values are in metric and executing G20 indicates that values are in inch DECn 1 Deceleration signal high level for machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal low level for machine zero return PCMD ABPn 71 Output axis pulse by two right angle intersection phases need restart 0 Output axis pulse by pulse and direction need restart PCMD 1 Axial output wave form is pulse 0 Axial output wave form is square LII LP Ly Ll Square output max output frequency 266KPPS Pulse output max output frequency 266KPPS Pulse width 1yus 000 6 E ZMn 1 Each axise zero return type C 0 Each axise zero return type B SMZ 1 To execute next block till all moving blocks executed 0 For smooth transition between blocks ZCn 1 Deceleration signal DECn and one rotation signal PCn of each axis are in parallel connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal du
266. c SeriesEN LD2 LM I0 TEST PLC 1d2 L PLC 1d2 PROGRAM LM 00900 CNC I 3 00901 CNC LA 00002 CNC LM 00200 CNC I 3 09000 cnc LL 09001 cnc B u LB 123 1d2 LA 2012 03 16 09 30 19 272 ii LM GSK980HC Test LD2 LT GSK980MDc Ser iesEN LD2 HO gsk980mdc backup LT GSK980MDc_CNCSWRES IMG LA GSK980MDc_SCRIPT INI 3 10_TEST_I10U 1d2 Lt I0 TEST PLC 1d2 I 00801 CNC LT 00802 CNC 3 09080 CNC LT 09801 CNC 5 PENDRIVE LD PLC 40X190T02 120314 Idx 7 PLC 40X100102 1203142 Idx e 09 27 52 SELECT rel BACKUP one UPDATE 3 Copy methods from U disk to C disk are the same as the above Note Copy operation cannot be executed below 4 level authority 10 2 3 System update SETTING D In MDI mode the system authority is set to 2 level is pressed to select mc tist and the system pops up the following 295 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual MDI sauna TOA HOG B GSK980MDc B u SYSTEM FILES LA 123 1d2 HI PARAM PAR I 32012 03 16 09 30 19 272 it LD TOFF CMP LD GSK980HC Test LD2 LP HOFF WMP LM GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LADDER FILES E gsk980mdc backup LM GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 LL GSK98 MDc_CNCSWRES IMG I I0 TEST PLC 1d2 LA GSK980MDc SCRIPT INI L PLC 1d2 I 5 I0 TEST IOU 1d2 PROGRAM LA I0 TEST PLC 1d2 LM 00000 CNC LM 08001 CNC LA 00801 CNC LN 09082 CNC LM 00002 CNC LA 09099 CNC LM 00208 CNC LM 09001 CNC I 09080 cnc LD PE
267. c control GSK980MDoc is the optimum choice for upgrading CNC milling machine U im O e a 9 3 3 e Characteristics Five axes control X Y Z 4th and 5th 3 axes linkage optional interpolation precision 1um 0 1um maximum speed 60m min optional axis types linear axis or revolving axis for the 4th and 5th axes CS axis control available for the 4th and 5th axes e Electronic gear ratio 1 32767 1 32767 Screw pitch error compensation backlash compensation tool length compensation tool abrasion compensation and tool nose radius compensation Embedded with PLC can be downloaded to CNC from PC DNC function supports for real time program transmission for machining Be compatible with G commands of GSK980MC GSK928MA GSK980MD GSK980MDc executing the cycle machining including drilling boring circle grooving rectangular grooving full circle rectangular finishing circular truncated cone rectangular roughing linear rectangular continuous drilling supporting spiral interpolation cylinder interpolation and polar coordinate command performing e Spindle encoder tapping and rigid tapping can be detected during tapping cycle so that high precision machining can be performed Supporting metric inch programming with scaling on off programmable image and automatic chamfering function Support statement macro command program macro program call with parameters Supporting multi additional coordinate system and local
268. cision is added when the dwell is performed and then the tool is retracted from the bottom of the hole at rapid traverse Explanation For the command explanation of these canned cycles see the Table 3 2 Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Dwell for P time if it is commanded 5 Returning to the initial point or point R plane according to G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse 582 G48 Return to the 582 5699 Return to the R initial plane at the rapid traverse point plane at the rapid traverse Initial lewel i ua ul Command Path Paint A Paint F Paint A level e CI I d Point Related Explanation 1 They are basically the same as G81 drilling and spot drilling machining it is up after dwell at the bottom of a hole only the dwell time is specified by P the dwell will not be executed if it is not specified and 79 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual the command action is same as that of G81 In the blind hole the accuracy of hole can be improved by the dwell 2 The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value will be reserved as the canned cycle modal value 3 24 2 6 Peck Drilling Cycle G83 Format G98 G99 G83 X Y R Z Q F L Function This cycle performs high speed p
269. cle function is enabled Note 1 Refer to the Section of Installation and connection of the Parameter Explanation of Chapter Three for the parameter setting of additional rotation axis Note 2 When there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration the movement amount of each revolution of the additional rotation axis is expressed with 360 The reverse interval compensation function of rotation axis The reverse interval compensation never changes regardless of the linear axis or rotation axis however the compensation unit of the rotation axis is 0 01 deg and the linear axis is 0 001 mm 4 7 The Zero Return D of Rotation Axis The selection axis has four zero return methods zero return method A B C and D Wherein the zero return methods A B and C are same as the one of the linear axis Only the D is a special zero return method for the rotation axis eo Setting of the zero return method D The method D is only valid to the rotation axis Zero return can be performed for this rotation axis using the mode D after the 4 and the 5 axes are set to rotation axes based on the Bit6 of data parameter No 188 is set to 1 If the 4 and 5 axes are disabled or linear axes then the Bit6 of state parameter No 188 is invalid RRTx 1 The zero return mode of the 5 rotation axis is used the mode D 0 The zero return mode of the 5 rotation axis is used the mode A B and C e The time sequence and process of the zero ret
270. compensation value input by radius The following explanations are all indicated in radius compensation value if not especially pointed out Table 6 1 Display page for CNC cutter radius compensation value m Geometric H gt Wearing H Geometric D Wearing D 001 20 020 0 030 030 5 000 0 020 Gs um ox 155 U e e um 9 3 3 e GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual NO Geometric H Wearing H Geometric D Wearing D 6 1 3 Command format y G17 40 le 3 Gig L J641 a oo E X de E Gig G42 ave le CN 6 1 4 Compensation direction workpiece o e o e Y G42 Cutter radius compensation G41 Cutter radius compensation X Y right along advancing direction n left along advancing direction Tool compensation direction is determined according to the relative position of tool with work piece when the cutter radius compensation is applied See the Fig 6 2 6 1 5 Caution e In initial status CNC is in cutter radius compensation cancellation mode CNC sets cutter radius 156 Chapter Cutter Compensation compensation offset mode when the G41 or G42 command is executed At the beginning of the compensation the CNC reads two blocks in advance the next block is stored in the cutter radius compensation buffer memory when a block is performed When in Single mode
271. control by PLC the following actions are performed 1 set SIND to1 makes control mode change from NC to PLC 2 set the spindle motor speed data computed by PLC into PLC spindle control signalR011 R12l When under the control of PLC spindle motor speed has nothing to do with CNC any signal related to spindle speed instruction signal such as spindle override signal or parameter setting spindle Maximum speed Spindle motor speed instruction select signal SIND G33 7 2 4 spindle speed instruction select signal SIND2 G35 7 eSignal Type PLC NC eSignal Function Used to select the speed of the spindle motor the motor controlled by CNC or by the PLC SIND 1 spindle motor controlled by speed instruction RO1l R121 issued by PLC SIND 0 spindle motor controlled by speed instruction issued by CNC Output the speed 410 Appendix S instruction has appointed O Signal Address G33 G35 S 12 bit code input signal RO11 R12I G32 0 G33 3 2 spindle S 12 bit code input signal RO112 R1212 G34 0 G35 3 eSignal Type PLC NC eSignal Function PLC issues speed instruction value that inputs spindle motor Spindle motor speed is appointed in the form of binary code value from O to 4095 eSignal Address 10 5 Spindle Orientation Function Spindle orientation signal SOR G29 5 When this signal is 1 spindle stops while is 0 spindle is spinning in a certain speed set by data parameter No 3732 No matte
272. cremental commands which is as follows G90 X40 0 Y70 0 or G91 X 60 0 Y40 0 3 26 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting G92 Function The workpiece coordinate system is set by setting the absolute coordinate in current position in the system It is also called floating coordinate system After the workpiece coordinate is set the coordinate value is input in absolute programming in this coordinate system till the new workpiece coordinate system is set by G92 Command explanation G92 which is a non modal G command X The new X axis absolute coordinate of current position Y The new Y axis absolute coordinate of current position Z The new Z axis absolute coordinate of current position Note In G92 command current coordinate value will be not changed if the X Y and Z are not input the program zero is set by the current coordinate value When the X Y or Z is not input the coordinate axis not input keeps on the original set value 3 27 Feed per min G94 Feed per rev G95 Format G94 Fxxxx F0001 F8000 the leading zero can be omitted the feedrate per min is offered mm min Function The cutting feedrate is offered in mm min unit when the G94 is modal G command The G94 can be omitted if the current mode is G94 Format G95 Fxxxx F0 0001 F500 The leading zero can be omitted Command Function The cutting feedrate is offered in mm rev unit when the G95 is modal G command The G95 can be omitted if the current mode is G9
273. ction Tool length Rectangular continuous G44 compensation Boring cycle G140 J direction ING EN G49 Tool length Rectangular continuous a G89 Boring cycle G141 arilling CCW Scaling cancel Absolute programming G142 Arc continuous drilling CW C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK G51 Scaling ON Incremental G143 Arc continuous drilling G91 programming CCW G50 1 Programming G92 Coordinate system image cancel setting Note mark means initial state y O Q l a PLC Codes List 3 Code Function Code Function Code Function gt n ordi OPSE COMAE SET Setting SPE Subprogram end E read contact read Output coil Comparison setting SUBB Binary subtraction POT A espe Alternative output in series Normal closed TMRB Timer Differential up contact in series ANI Normal open contact CODB Binary code aie erential down in parallel transformation po COREG Resetting Binary addition mE Normal closed pog Binary rotational Logical AND contact in parallel control ene Sena piece N MOVN Data copy Parity check parallel hint Bees M DECB Binary decode Program skip numbering END1 i ewer pregram JMPB Subprogram call END Second level op Subprogram NENNEN program end numbering 1 2 Program Execution 1 2 1 Program Execution Sequence The current program can only be run in automatic mode GSK980MDc cannot run more than 1 program at the same time
274. cycle Note No 3720 spindle encoder lines is set to 0 the encoder is not checked to execute holing when G84 is executed 3 24 2 8 Boring Cycle G85 Format G98 G99 G85X Y R Z F L Function After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R the boring is performed from point R to point Z thereafter Cutting feed is performed to return point R plane when the Z point has been reached the bottom of a hole Explanation Command explanation for the canned cycle see the table 3 2 Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Cutting feed to the point R plane 5 Returning to the initial point level if it is G98 81 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q GSK C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Command Path 585 98 Mode for 585 6399 Mode for returning ta initial paint level returning ta the R paint level Y Initial level l l l i P aint Z Related explanation 1 This cycle is used to bore a hole The command motion is basically same as the G81 Drilling Spot drilling cycle the difference is that by the G81 it returns to the point R plane in rapid traverse rate while by the G85 it returns to the point R plane in feedrate when the cutting feed reaches the bottom of a hole 2 The Q and P commands are disabled in this cycle but i
275. cylindrical interpolation mode and only a rotary axis can be set in this mode e The workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 G92 and local coordinate system G52 can not be specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode e Programmable mirror image scaling and coordinate system rotary function can not be specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode e Cancel cylindrical interpolation mode in the following modes 1 G07 1 IPO cancel 2 Reset 3 Program executed Example O0001 G07 1 4 C axis is the parallel axis of Y axis N01 G90 G54 G49 G40 G17 GO X0 YO Z30 CO N02 G01 X5 F800 N08 G19 G07 1 C57 299 N04 G41 D1 G01 Z120 N05 C30 NO6 G02 Z90 C60 R30 N07 G01 Z70 NO8 G03 Z60 C70 R10 N09 G01 C150 N10 G03 Z70 C190 R75 N11 G01 Z110 C230 N12 G02 Z120 C270 R75 N13 G01 C360 N14 G40 Z100 N15 G07 1 CO N16 G90 GOO X10 Y20 Z30 C90 N17 M30 40 Chapter 3 G Command U O Q um 9 3 3 e C 0 30 60 70 150 190 230 270 360 deg The above figure is side stretched out drawing of the cylinder in the above example It can be seen from the figure that when travel amount of rotary axis C axis specified by angle is converted to a distance of a linear axis on the outer surface the interpolation formed by it and another linear axis Z axis can be seen as an interpolation in the plane coordinate system Z X on plane G18 3 7 Programmable Data Input G10 G10 can modify some data value when a program is executed
276. d Note 2 When the P and X are not introduced or they are negative value it means exact stop between the programs to ignore the delay Note 3 The P is effective when the P and X are in the same block Note 4 The operation is held on when feeding during the G04 execution Only the delay time execution is finished can the dwell be done 3 6 Cylindrical Interpolation G07 1 In the cylindrical interpolation the travel amount of rotary axis specified by an angle is converted to a distance of a linear axis on the outer surface in CNC so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with another axis After interpolation convert this distance to the travel amount of the rotary axis Because the side of a cylinder is allowed to use in programming programs for cylindrical cam grooving 37 U O Q um 9 3 3 e U A O Q Q 3 3 Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual can be created very easily idi 360 Format G07 1 IPr Starts the cylindrical interpolation mode cylindrical interpolation is valid G07 1 IPO The cylindrical interpolation mode is cancelled Thereinto IP is the address of rotary axis r is the radius of the cylinder Namely when r 0 interpolation starts r 0 interpolation stops GO07 1is G code of 00 G107 can be used instead of GO7 1 Explanations for plane selection Plane selection is needed in circular interp
277. d 1 0 is assigned to 3 14 Natural logarithm 1 LN J G65 H26 PHI QJ example G65 H26 P 101 Q 102 101 LN 102 Note when the antilogarithm j is zero or smaller otherwise an alarm is issued 15 Exponential function 1 EXP J 146 Chapter 5 Macro Program G65 H27 Pl QJ example G65 H27 P 101 Q 102 101 EXP 102 16 Sine 74 SIN J unit deg G65 H31 P l Q J example G65 H31 P 101 Q 103 101 SIN 103 17 Arcsine Zl ASIN J G65 H32 Pl QJ example G65 H32 P4101 Q103 4101 ASIN 4103 Note 1 When the NAT bit of parameter No 520 is set to 0 the output range is 270 90 When the NAT bit of parameter No 520 is set to 1 the output range is 90 90 Note 2 Arcsine operand J cannot exceed the range 1 1 otherwise an alarm is issued 18 Arccosine Zl COS J unit deg G65 H33 Pl QA example G65 H33 P 101 Q 103 101 COS 103 19 Arccosine 1 ACOS J G65 H34 Pl QA example G65 H34 P 101 Q 103 101 ACOS 103 Note Arccosine operand J cannot exceed the range 1 1 otherwise an alarm is issued 20 Tangent Zl TAN ZJ deg G65 H35 Pl QA example G65 H35 P 101 Q 103 101 TAN 103 Note J cannot be equal to Krr rr 2 K 0 1 2 3 otherwise the result is wrong 21 Arctangent 1 ATAN J K unit deg G65 H36 P i Q J RAK example G65 H36 P 101 Q 103 R3 101 ATAN 103 3 Note When the NAT bit of parameter No 520is s
278. d exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration 20 CHAPTER 2 MSTF CODES Manual feed exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration MPG feed exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration Step feed exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration speed after speed by Acceleration interpolation or deceleration control CNC Pulse signment Acceleration or Drive Axis command interpolation deceleration control control motor Fig 2 9 Po Rapid traverse speed set by data parameter No 022 Ty Rapid traverse acceleration or deceleration time constant set by data parameter Ho 025 Rapid traverse speed Fig 2 10 Curve for rapid traverse Fe Peedrate Feedrate Te acceleration and deceleration time constant for cutting feedrate P qe Data patamerer No 027 No 029 Time Fig 2 11 Curves for cutting and manual feedate When the cutting feed is performed this GSK980MDc adopts exponential rear acceleration or deceleration an arc transition will be formed for the acceleration or deceleration at the meeting point of the path for the adjacent two cutting feed blocks when the BIT5 of the bit parameter No 007 is set to 0 A contour error exists between the actual tool path and the programmed path when the positioning is not enough accurate at the meeting point of the two paths In order to avoid this kind of error the exact stop command G04 can be inserted between the two blocks or the BIT5 of
279. d G Many kinds of operations are specified such as tool movement relative to workpiece coordinate set etc See Table 3 1 for G commands Gnaa L Command value 00 143 leading zero can be omitted Command address The G command words can be classified into 16 groups such as 00 01 02 03 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 14 16 17 and 22 They share the same block except for 01 and 00 groups different groups G commands can be defined at the same block The last G command is valid when two or more same group G commands are introduced at the same block Different G command groups without common parameter command word can be defined at the same block and their functions are simultaneously valid regardless of sequence If the G command or the optional G command other than Table 3 1 is employed alarm occurs Table 3 1 G command word list Command word Group G10 Programmable data input ON Programmable data input OFF GO7 1 Cylinder interpolation Machine zero return Dwell exact stop Return from reference point 2 3 and 4 reference point return Skip function Local coordination system setting Machine coordinate system selection Coordinate system set Macro GOO initial G command 01 Rapid traverse G01 Linear interpolation Circular interpolation CW Circular interpolation CCW Peck drilling cycle Left hand counter tapping cycle Canned cycle cancellation Drilling cycle spot drill cycle Drilling cycle c
280. d by G95 F_ the even cutting line can be formed on the face of workpiece It is necessary to install spindle encoder when the G95 mode is U im O e um 9 3 3 e operated The G94 and G95 are modal G commands at the same group one of them is available only The G94 is initial state G command so it defaults the G94 when the CNC is switched on The following below shows the conversion formula of feed value per rev and feed value per min Fm FrxS There into Fm feed value per minute mm min Fx feed value per revolution mm r S spindle speed r min The feedrate value is set by the CNC Data parameter Ne026 when the CNC is switched on the F value is invariable after the F command is executed The feedrate is O after FO is executed The F value is invariable when CNC is reset or at emergent stop Note In G95 mode the cutting feedrate will be uneven when the spindle speed is less than 1 rev min The following error will exist in the actual feedrate when the spindle speed vibration occurs To guarantee the machine quality it is recommended that the spindle speed selected in machining is not less than the lowest speed of available torque exported by spindle servoor inverter Cutting feed The CNC makes tool movement path and the path linear or circular arc defined by command into consistency The circular interpolation can be performed by two axis in selected plane when it is circular arc the helical interpol
281. d in rigid tapping gear 4 0224 Frequency division coefficient of spindle command in rigid Refer to section 7 3 for detailed setting method 9231 tapping gear 1 Frequency division coefficient of 5232 spindle command in rigid tapping gear 2 Frequency division coefficient of 0233 spindle command in rigid tapping gear 3 Frequency division coefficient of 5234 spindle command in rigid tapping gear 4 rigid tap gear ratio setting method 5261 Acceleration deceleration time The faster tapping speed is the constant in rigid tapping bigger setting time is Acceleration deceleration time When the tapping speed is low constant in tool retraction of rigid below 500 the parameter tapping when set to O time constant setting is not necessary Set 100 200 for feeding is used this parameter at high speed to avoid affecting process in tool retraction 0 Override value in tool retraction of Add sub parameter properly if gt o o D 5 x 5271 5211 rigid tapping the teeth are not required in tool retraction 00 Uy Appendix 1000 1u 10000 wire number of feedback 0 1u encoder of spindle servo drive l l Recommended Significance Adjustment explanation parameter range The bigger the value is the higher the rigidity is The second If the rigidity is too big vibration will occur at the proportional gain of 1500 1800 start and the end The smaller the value is the sp
282. d local coordinate system The machine coordinate system is a fixed coordinate system on the machine it indicates a fixed position of the machine The workpiece coordinate system is a system facilitates workpiece machining in which the reference point on the workpiece is taken as the origin point Local coordinate system is set on workpiece coordinate system to facilitate the programming of some machining programs local coordinate system workpiece G54 workpiece coordinate 1 G58 workpiece coordinate b G55 workpiece coordinate 2 4358 workpiece coordinate 6 machine coordinate system Format G52 IP Set local coordinate system G52 IPO Cancel local coordinate system IP Specify the position of the origin point of the local coordinate system in the current workpiece coordinate system G52 is G code of the group which is a non modal G code 61 DK G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Local coordinate system IP i 5e arkpiece coordinate system 1 O55 SG GST Local coordinate system i55 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q GSs Wrerkpiece coordinate systeme Machine coordinate system origin Reference point Explanations e When the local coordinate is set the following movement specified by absolute mode G90 is coordinate value in local coordinate system The position of the local coordinate system can be changed by specifying new origin point with G52 e I
283. d taping spindle command gear 1 rpm Multiplier coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 2 rpm Multiplier coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 3 rpm Multiplier coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 41 rpm Setting range 1 32 767 Division coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 1 rpm Division coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 2 rpm Division coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 3 rpm Division coefficient of rigid taping spindle command gear 4 rpm Setting range 1 32 767 5 2 6 1 Linear acc amp dec time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms 5 2 7 1 Linear acc amp dec time constant in rigid tapping tool retract Setting range 0 4000 Unit ms 5261 setting value is used when it is set to O Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 1 Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 2 Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 3 Backlash comp of rigid taping spindle command gear 4 Setting range 0 4095 9 3 7 1 Pulse feed speed of M29 calculating rigid tap gear ratio Setting range r min Ii 5 4 1 0 Rotation angle of coordinate rotation without R Setting range 360000 360000 Unit 0 001deg T esp D et O o 4 1 1 If NO 562 XSC is O scale rate is this par without P Setting range 1 99999999 5 4 2 1 If NO 562 XSC is 1 scale rate is th
284. d to gear 4 12 bits code value in gearing type M Setting range 0 4095 M gear shift type B mode speed command of spindle motor 12 bits cade 4095 107 Max clamping speed of spindle motor ES Ihe speed when gear 3 5755 is shifted to gear 4 The speed when gear 2 3752 is shifted to gear 3 Ihe speed when gear 1 is shifted to gear 2 F y WV qp s qp He Min clamping speed F F ds Oe is em ex em eoe SS eS See as No 3135 of spindle motor No 3743 3744 speed command of spindle motor 5 code input w gear 1 52 gear 2 223 gear 3 d Max speed switch point switch point switch point M type gear shift A mode gpeed command of spindle motor 12 bits code 0 r D et O 4095 107 Max clamping speed of spindle motor No 9756 Min clamping speed LII o ot LDL LL LL LLL P m ee a et Na 3735 of spindle motor l l l No 3742 No 3743 l vr xr vr xr No 3741 No 3744 speedcommand of spindle motor 5 code input gear 1 52 gear 2 23 gear 3 21 switch point switch point switch point Max speed T type gear shift 339 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE speed command of spindle motor 12 bits cade ear j zear 4d 40951101 BE S x E A so RII a 7 DU l a 2 r le l I I l l l l l l l l Mo 3741 Ho 3742 Ho 3743 Mo 3744
285. de and Display Cursor moving For cursor moving control keys Page key Page switching in a same interface 1 1 3 Menu Display To enter position interface There are RELATIVE POS ABSOLUTE POS INTEGRATED POS POS amp PRG pages in this interface To enter program interface There are PRG CONTENT PRG STATE PRG LIST PRG PREVIEW 4 pages in this interface To enter TOOL OFFSET interface There are TOOL SET MARRO variables O Lo D um Q r O and coordinate page ALARM To enter alarm interface There are CNC PLC ALARM and ALARM Log pages in this interface To enter Setting interface There are SWITCH PASSWORD SETTING DATE S TIME SETTING G54 G59 GRAGH SET and TRACK pages in this interface To enter DIAGNOSIS interface There are CNC DIAGNOSIS PLC STATE PLC VALUE VERSION MESSAGE interfaces switching between each interfaces by pressing the key repeatedly CNC DIAGNOSIS PLC STATE PLC VALUE interfaces display CNC internal signal state PLC addresses data state message the VERSION MESSAGE interface displays CNC software hardware and PLC version No To enter GRAPH interface including graph parameter graph path interface To enter PLC interface including PLC status ladder monitor PLC data 1 1 4 Machine Panel The keys function in GSK980MDc machine panel is defined by PLC see their function significance in the machine builder s manual The functions of the machine panel keys defin
286. different value between targeted position of block or MDI command and current position The displayed page is shown below AUTO s3163 T14 HAB j j i RELATIVE ABSOLUTE EE X 17 154 X 5 800 A Sul Y 754 097 Y 4 470 mid 7 0 012 7 3 250 F 9079 mm min 12345 mm min MACHINE DIST TO G0 E 6801 X 5 550 X 8 850 FED OVRI 75 RAP OVRI 69 i DAE E SPI OVRI 85 0 011 0 018 PART CNT 9059 CUT TIME 00 00 16 15 27 15 ES X CIR Y CLR Z CIR ES Clearing machine coordinates X CLR oet X Y Z to zero return mode A set No 014 press to clear X coordinate value press Y vam to clear Y coordinate value press zar to clear Z coordinate value 4 POS amp PRG display page In position interface press POS amp PRG to switch to POS amp PRG page The system displays absolute coordinates relative coordinates machine coordinates of the current position as well as 8 blocks of current 185 C GSK CNC GSR GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual program During the program execution the displayed blocks are refreshed dynamically and the cursor is located in the block being executed MDI 57104 TAB HAA POSITION POSITION 00001 NO3357 MODAL INFORMATION GOO GOI G02 G03 C04 amelie ene a Lid G05 G86 C07 COS Gag X 81 554 X 20 950 X 19 200 ue Bn f Y 742 577 Y 16 599 Y 15 360 M21 50397 y 0 040 Z 3 281 7 0 038 F 122 m nin 12345 mm min
287. disconnected and the CNC issues emergency alarm Meanwhile the CNC turns off the enable ENB signal to stop the pulse output Except the functions are processed the other functions can also be defined by the ladder diagram when the emergency alarm is issued 11 2 15 Tri colour Indicator e Related signal Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC types No State Diagnosis CLPY Tri colour indicator yellow CN62 31 Y2 2 Output n CLPG Tri colour indicator green CN62 32 Y2 3 signa CLPR Tri colour indicator red CN62 33 Y2 4 e Function description Yellow indicator normal state non operation non alarm green indicator in automatic running red indicator system alarming 11 2 16 Reset and Cursor Return eo Related signal Signal Symbol Significance PLC C NC types State Diagnosis Input Reset key on the MDI panel X24 0 signal e Control parameter K0010 o ool press 434 Appendix RESB 1 The functions of reset and the cursor return are valid 0 The functions of reset and the cursor return are invalid e Function description When RESB of K10 is set to 1 press reset key X26 0 in Auto mode the system reset and the cursor returns to the beginning 11 2 17 Rigid Tapping e Related signal Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC types No State Diagnosis Input VPO Spindle speed position state output CN15 5 X5 0 signal signal Input M29 Specified signal o
288. dix 10 7 Encoder Tapping Rigid tapping means that in the ordinary tapping canned cycle CNC makes the tapping axis and spindle move synchronously In rigid tapping CNC needs to detect spindle rotation direction signal to make assure the feed direction and the course of working Implementation spindle rotation Z axis feed tapping issue MO5 stop instruction to spindle spindle completely still reverse instruction Z axis retreats cutter to the start spindle stops Thus in order to realize to rigid tapping the corresponding ladder diagram must be worked out to notify CNC the rotation direction of the outside spindle SRVB G74 4 SFRB G74 5 eSignal Type PLC NC eSignal Function Rigid tapping PLC sets G74 4 or G74 5 passes them to NC to notify NC the spindle turning forward or reverse In this way cutting feed can be started when spindle turning forward SRVB 1 when the spindle turning reversely SFRB 1 and when the spindle stops SRVB SFRB both are set to O eNote before rigid tapping PLC must set SRVB or SFRB to note CNC spindle current direction of rotation eSignal Address G74 O SFRB OSRYB O O 10 8 Signal Classification Classified by spindle control Dual analog spindle control including the 1 and 2 spindle control Public signals for both the 1 and the 2 spindles SIMSPL G27 Signals for 1 spindle els G gt D 5 Q x 7 G
289. dle speed B Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3742 Spindle speed C Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3743 opindle speed D Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3744 M type gear shift Type B This gear shift mode allows setting the switching speed of the gears respectively in data parameters 4095 1 011 Vmaz Tmaz3 Spindle motor speed instruction analog voltage instruction Tazz y CUN Tmazi Spindle speed instruction AX Von d095 E xm d I Vrerz 4095 5 code input AS Vel 4095 Bo Ue 4095 Some parameters related to the figure above are as follows Constant VMax spindle motor Maximum restraint speed S12 bit code value that is data parameter NO 3736 Constant Vmin spindle motor minimum restraint speed S12 bit code value that is data parameter NO 3735 VMax 1 from gear 1 switch to the gear 2 the current spindle motor speed S 12 bit code value that is data parameter NO 3751 VMax 2 from gear 2 switch to the gear 3 the current spindle motor speed S 12 bit code value that is data parameter NO 3752 VMax 3 from gear 3 switch to the gear 4 the current spindle motor speed S 12 bit code value that is data parameter NO 3753 Spindle speed A Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3741 gt D 5 Q x o
290. dly traverse to XY plane 2 Rapidly approach point R plane 3 Cut to hole bottom 4 When P is commanded the system pauses within the time P 5 When the spindle orientation is executed the spindle stops at a fixed position 6 The tool reversely traverses the distance Q at the hole bottom 7 Rapidly return to the initial point plane or point R plane with G98 or G99 8 Offset Q distance to XY initial position 9 The spindle rotates clockwise Command path 576 G90 Mode for GTA i588 Mode for returnina to initial plane returning ta EF point plane L spindle cw L ee Point level y A O Q Q 3 3 Q I I I 3 Spinde cw P aint R P aint F o pue i a 4 o Oriented h Oriented spindle st op Ponia zpindle st op I 3 Point 2 Translation Translation gt Related explanations 1 Q value must be positive i e the negative value is commanded the sign is invalid when Q value is not commanded or QO is commanded Q value is defaulted to 0 1mm Q value is modal it can be used in other fixed cycle commands and the Q value cannot be big otherwise the tool retraction operation can hit the workpiece so Q value must be specified to the small 2 Offset direction and axis selection are set by No 584 0 5 8 4 RD1 1 negative tool retraction 0 positive tool retraction RD2 1 Y axis executing tool retraction 0 X axis executing too
291. e um 9 3 3 e 5 3 Arithmetic and Logic Operation e Macro programs in both traditional G65 H format and statement format are compatible with GSK980MDc Users can alternatively select one of them for programming This makes programming more convenient and flexible o Please strictly observe the formats and specifications in the following Arithmetic and Logic Operation table Arithmetic and Logic Operation Function Statement format Traditional G65H format Definition assignment G65 H1 PHi Q j Sum i j k G65 H2 P i Q j R k Logic operation Subtraction i j k G65 H3 P i Q j R k performed on binary Multiplication i j k G65 H4 P i Q j R k numbers bit by bit Division i j k G65 H5 P i Q j R k i j OR k G65 H11 P i Q j R k i j AND k G65 H12 P i Q j R k i j XOR k G65 H13 P i Q j R k Square root 1 SQRT 4j G65 H21 P i Q j Absolute value 1 ABS 4j G65 H22 P i Qj Rounding off 4 ROUND Hi G65 H23 P i Qj Rounding up amp FUP 4 G65 H24P i Qj Rounding down G65 H25 P i Qj Nature logarithm G65 H26 P i Qj Exponential function I LN LA G65 H27 P i Qj amp EXP Aj Sine i SIN Aj G65 H31 P i Q j An angle is specified in Arcsine Hi ASIN 4j 3k 605 H32 Pii Q j degree 90 degrees Cosine i COS Hi G65 H33 P i Qj and 30 minutes is Arccosine Hi ACOS Hi G65 H34 P i Qj represented as 90 5 Tangent G65 H35 P i Qj degree Arctangent HUC TAN E G65 H36 P i Qj R k i AT
292. e Q distance 1 Return to initial plane 12 Offset Q distance to XY initial position 83 U a O a um o 3 3 e g A O Q Q 3 3 Q GSK 3 The spindle rotates CW Command path 3838 return to initial plane 588 return to point R plane dl Spindle exact a EM Spindle 4 14 ratation Citi C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Return to initial plane but remain 56399 mode i i ON Z h Bo rotation CW distance Related explanation 1 Q value must be positive i e the negative value is commanded the sign is invalid when Q value is not commanded or QO is commanded Q value is defaulted to 0 1mm Q value is modal it can be used in other fixed cycle commands and the Q value cannot be big otherwise the tool retraction operation can hit the workpiece so Q value must be specified to the small 2 Offset direction and axis selection are set by No 584 0 5 8 4 ii RD1 1 negative tool retraction 0 positive tool retraction RD2 1 Y axis executing tool retraction 0 X axis executing tool retraction 3 Direction of tool retraction in final boring cycle is determined by positive negative X axis or Y axis 4 G87 executes only G98 returning initial point plane its mode remains after it is specified even if specifying G99 is invalid 4 M commands selection of spindle orientation is determined by No 4960 M commands are set to complete the spi
293. e at the first time and rapid traverse retraction is not performed 2 The command P is disabled in this cycle but its value will be reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 24 2 7 Tapping Cycle G84 Format G98 G99 G84 X Y R Z P F LL Function This cycle is used to machine a thread The tapping is performed by spindle rotating positively when the bottom of a hole has been reached the spindle is retracted in the 80 Chapter 3 G Command reverse direction Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the Table 3 2 There into the F is tooth pitch The value range is 0 001 500 00mm metric 0 06 25400 tooth inch inch Cycle Process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Tapping to the bottom of a hole 4 Spindle stops 5 For dwell time P if it is commanded 6 7 8 U a O a um o 3 3 e 6 Spindle returns to the point R plane in reverse direction 7 Spindle stops for dwell time P if the P is commanded 8 The spindle is rotated in the positive direction 9 Returning to the initial point level if it is G98 Command Path 584 695 Mode for 504 6991 Mode for returning to initial plane returning ta R point plane Initial level Point R level spindle cw J spindle cw E n F Spindle cow Paint Z Related Explanation Please refer to the related explanation for G74 Counter tapping
294. e easily a small value can be set for retraction This allows drilling to be performed efficiently The tool is retracted in rapid feed the retraction amount d is set by parameter No 5114 the default is 1000 unit 0 001mm 3 The command P is disabled but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 24 2 2 Left handed Tapping Cycle G74 Format G98 G99 G74X Y R Z P F L Function This cycle performs left handed tapping In the left handed tapping cycle the spindle rotates clockwise for tapping till the bottom of the hole has been reached then retracts by counter clockwise after dwell Explanation For canned cycle explanation see the Table 3 2 Thereinto the F is indicated for tooth pitch The value range are indicated as 0 001 500 00mm metric 0 06 25400 teeth inch inch 76 Chapter 3 G Command Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Tapping to the bottom of a hole 4 The spindle stops 5 Pause for time P if dwell is specified 6 The spindle rotates CCW and then retracts to point R plane 7 The spindle is stopped pause for time P if dwell is specified 8 Spindle rotates CW 9 Return to the initial plane if it is G98 U a O a um o 3 3 e Command Path 5 4 1596 Mode for 5 4 i598 Mode for returning to initial plane returning ta R paint plane Initial
295. e first power on after switching the system automatically modifies relevant speed parameters and gives an alarm o Increment parameter The unit and range of linear axis speed parameter are codetermined by machine tool type and increment system For example parameter NO 045 X axis software limit Machine tool Increment Linear axis f Linear axis parameter range type system increment unit Metric machine 1 ty S5 IS ty S5 0 001mm 99 999 999 99 999 999 system 0 1u C IS C gt 0 0001 mm 9 999 9999 9 999 9999 Inch machine 1 u CIS B 0 0001inch 9 999 9999 9 999 9999 system 0 14 IS C 0 00001 inch 999 99999 999 99999 As rotary axes are not involved in metric inch interconversion the rotary axis increment parameter unit is determined by increment system types The ranges of rotary axis increment parameters are the same as that of metric machine tool Increment Rotation axis Rotation axis Machine tool type system speed unit parameter range Metric inch machine 1 u IS B gt 0 001deg 0 99999 999 tool system 0 1u CIS C 0 0001 deg 0 9999 9999 Coordinate data G54 G59 The unit of linear axis coordinate data is determined by metric inch input system namely mm for metric system inch for inch system The ranges of linear axis coordinate data are codetermined by metric inch input system and increment system It is the same as command data input ranges Shown as follows CGSN CNC GSK980MDc Mill
296. e mentioned keys In the MANUAL mode press rapid move key L 9 ang EOM EE Parita keys together these keys are valid otherwise they are invalid 4 1 2 Moving Direction Selection Press ex or key once X axis can be moved negatively or positively by a step increment other axes are the same 291 O Lo D um Q O O Lo MD um Q O C GSK CNC GSR GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 4 2 MPG Handwheel Feed Set HWL of the bit parameter No 001 to 1 and press e following HND RELATIVE POS X Y Z 00001 N 4977 O 0001 N 04977 8 104 761 337 543 449 key to enter the MPG mode it displays as 51561 112 HAB MODAL INFORMATION GOO GO1 GB GOZ GB4 GOS GOG G07 G08 GBS G10 G11 G12 M93 1915 F 388 mm min 12345 mm min MAIN INFORMATION JOG F 7416 HNDL INC 0 009 RAP OVRI 9 SPI OVRI 25 PART CNT 7077 CUT TIME 00 00 08 11 37 07 ABSOLUTE POS amp PRG eeiam INTEGRATED Note MPG is or Manual Pulse Generator electronic handwheel or handwheel for short The handwheel figure is as follows 4 2 1 Increment Selection The handwheel figure Press WFO 25 Uv S096 UV1005 Ley to select the move increment the increment will be shown in the page HND RELATIVE POS X Y Z 00001 N 4977 O 0001 N 04977 B 104 51961 112 HBB MOD
297. e offset point 1 corresponds to a point 10 000 positive moving from this reference point and there is a compensation point from this point every 10 000 distance The 127th compensation point is the offset value at position 1270 000 Therefore at compensation point 1 set an compensation value moving from O to 10 000 at offset point 2 set an offset value moving from 10 000 to 20 000 At offset point N set an offset value moving from N 1 x offset clearance to N x offset clearance Ii T esp D et O Above is the example of following offset interval errors Offset clearance Offset value 20 000 30 000 4 Offset Drive unit current Drive unit current Machine Offset parameter command pulses command pulses after coordinate system No ane before offsetting offsetting Reference point 0 000 000 00000 00000 10 000 10000 10007 20 000 002 8 1 6 20000 20001 30 000 30000 30005 w E RA re ee Actually the machine moves from reference point to the point of 30 000 the screw pitch compensation is 7 6 4 5 368 Chapter 6 Screw Pitch Compensation 2Data parameterN23620 screw pitch error origin 60 Ne03624 compensation interval 210 000 Parameter Ne3621 min position number of each axis for pitch error compensation 0 parameterNe3622 max position number of each axis for pitch error compensation 199 When the screw pitch error origin is set to 60 For the positive moving t
298. e parameter No 588 CRG 0 the time sequence is as follows 80 or G code of one group N RATP F76 3 5 A Output S command RGTA 661 0 The spindle rotation operation y The spindle rotation signal When the state parameter No 588 CRG 1 the time sequence is as follows 117 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual P 580 or G code of one group I RATP F76 3 bi Qutput 3 command RGTA 661 0 The spindle rotation operation The spindle rotation signal 3 30 7 F and G Signals RGTAP G61 0 Rigid tapping signal When the M 29 is commanded PMC enters the rigid tapping mode and the signal is then set to 1 to inform the CNC 1 PMC enters the rigid tapping mode 0 PMC does not enter the rigid tapping mode If this signal does not set to 1 after the M29 has been commanded the alarm may occur in the block of G74 G84 RGSPM RGSPP F65 1 0 spindle turning signal When the rigid tapping is performed the signal is informed to the PMC whether the current spindle is CCW positive or CW negative RGSPM 1 spindle CW negative RGSPP 1 spindle CCW positive In rigid tapping these signals are output when the spindle is rotated In the mode of rigid tapping when the spindle is positioned at the hole or stopped at the bottom of the hole or R position these signals are not output In the mode of rigid tapping when the spindle is positioned at the inter locked s
299. e specified radius is the distance between the program point and the origin of the polar coordinate system In relative mode the specified radius is the increment of the current radius of the polar coordinate system Specify angle of polar coordinate system In the absolute mode the specified polar angle is the rotated programmed angle taking the vector which is parallel to the 1 axis as the rotary side and taking the polar point as the rotary center In the relative mode the specified angle is incremental value of the current angle the vector angle from the origin of the workpiece coordinate to the current position The origin of the altered polar coordinate system In the program once the origin of the polar coordinate system is specified it is valid in the polar command If the origin of the polar coordinate system is to be changed the polar coordinate command must be specified again See the following program 43 D x O Q Q 3 gt Q GSK C GSN CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 80 GI Gl6 Polar coordinate command starts Set the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate systern S00 x50 YSU specify a distance of 5limm and an angle of 30 degrees 58 G16 Change the origin of the polar coordinate system and the current position is taken as the origin of the polar coordinate system pueunum 3720791009 Eod 780 Gl C
300. e the specified condition is fulfilled the program from DO to END after WHILE is executed If the specified condition is not fulfilled program execution proceeds to the block after END The same format as the IF statement applies A number after DO and a number after END are identification numbers for specifying the range of execution The number 1 2 and 3 can be used When a number other than 1 2 and 3 is used P S alarm occurs Nesting The identification number 1 to 3 ina DO END loop can be used as many times as desired Note 152 Chapter 5 Macro Program however when a program includes crossing repetition loops overlapped DO ranges P S alarm occurs 3 DO loops can he nested to 1 The identification numbers i a maximum depth of three lew 1 to 3 can be used as many times as required 5 WHILE 1 DO 1 WHILE DO 1 Processing WHILE DO 2 3 END 1 WHILE DO 3 R A Processing 3 WHILE DO 1 5 Processing END 3 END 1 iE e END 1 2 DO ranges cannot overlap 4 Control can be transferred to WHILE DO 1 the outside of a loop Processing WHILE DO 1 WHILE DO 2 IF GOTOn END 1 END 1 Processing Nn END 2 5 Branches cannot be made to a location within a loop IF GOTOn WHILE DO 1 Nn END 1 5
301. e when spindle releasing tool is using or CNC will alarm Forbidden starting spindle releasing clamping tool when spindle is rotating or CNC will alarm gt o o D 5 Q x means that the spindle releases the tool and if release it then the spindle clamps the tool 11 2 23 Pot Tool Magazine Used range This ladder diagram applies to BT40 BT50and other similar logic tools eo Related signals There is a strict interlock relationship between spindle releasing clamping tool function and spindle Manual spindle releasing clamping tool is only can be used by MPG and hand wheel or CNC will alarm Manual releasing clamping tool is active if long pressed Press the releasing tool key not release Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC CNC Type No State Diagnosis 438 Appendix TDEC back to 0 in position detection CN61 1 X0 0 TPCH Cylinder pressure test CN61 3 X0 2 TCOT Tool post counting CN61 5 X0 4 THCH Toolcase horizontally in position CN61 7 X0 6 TVCH Toolcase vertically in position CN61 8 X0 7 THSP ATC arm of pot tool magazine CN61 9 X1 0 stopping detection THGT Check ATC arm of pot tool magazine CN61 10 X1 1 catching in position THZP ATC arm of pot tool magazine CN61 11 X1 2 original point detection JOGT Spindle releasing clamping tool CN61 14 X1 5 Input control signal TRCH Spindle releasing tool in position CN61 16 X1 7 detect TGCH Spindle clamping tool in pos
302. eceiving PC in Ref ounts of 4th pulse from checking PC to receiving PC in Ref 5 Y et T le A A ounts of 5th pulse from checking PC to receiving PC in Ref The pulse counts of spindle encoder 0 1 1 3 The pulse counts of handwheel Note In fixed cycle program N9078 No082 means the current section s start position but not the program segment s start position when power off 5 2 PLC State This part of diagnosis is used to detect the signal state of machine PLC X PLC machine Y CNC gt PLC F PLC CNC G and alarm address A which can t be modified See the relative PLC manual for address F G significance and the signal significance of address A is defined by user himself 5 2 1 X Address Fixed Addresses Ea E p pem jJ 365 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE ESP Emergency stop signal DECX Deceleration signal of X axis NEM NENNEN ION NE NE EARL Lp pP qp LO EOL SKIP Skip signal DECY DEC5 Deceleration signal of Y Z 4th 5th axis Corresponding machine panel keys to X fixed address refer to the addenda 0 2 2 Y Address Fixed Addresses Corresponding machine panel and state indicator to Y fixed address refer to the addenda 5 3 PLC Data The PLC data includes T C DT DC D their significance is defined by user requirement Ii T esp D et O 366 Chapter 6 Screw Pitch Compensation CHAP
303. eck drilling it performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole Explanation The command explanation for canned cycle see the table 3 2 Cycle Process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed for Q distance 4 Retract to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 5 Rapid feed to d distance to the end surface 6 Cutting feed for Q d distance 7 Cycling 4 5 and 6 to the bottom of a hole along Z axis 8 Return to the initial point or point R plane according to the G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse Command Path 583 l G98 Return to the 583 699 Return to the point initial plane at the rapid traverse R plane at the rapid traverse i N N ua a SN Initial level Point R Point R ee r oF a H Point Z Related Explanation 1 Same as G73 after feeding for Q it returns to the point R plane at the rapid traverse firstly and then rapid feeds to d mm to the end surface then cutting feed is applied and the cycle is performed in turn The Q value should be positive even if the negative value is specified and the sign is also disabled Q value 0 001mm is defaulted if Q value is not specified d is set by the parameter No 5115 its default value is 1000 and the unit is 0 001mm If the cutting depth is less than the Q value then cutting to the bottom of a hol
304. ect related plane and perform rotation on it a B The center of rotation Absolute coordinate commands of two axes of X Y and Z axes that correspond to the specified coordinate plane R The positive value of angular displacement indicates CCW rotation The state parameter NO 5410 CRIN determines whether the rotary angle is always an absolute value or specified by a specific G code G90 G91 When R is not defined the value specified by the data parameter NO 5410 is taken as the angular displacement value The minimum input unit of the angular displacement 0 001deg IS B Effective data range of angular displacement 360 000 360 000deg IS B X Angle af rotation R incremental value Angle ofrotation absolute value Co B Center af ratatian Absolute angle If the default initial absolute angle is O degree the first specified absolute angle is equivalent to the 68 Chapter 3 G Command relative angle specified the same value If the figure is rotated to the position of 90 degrees it can be specified by absolute angle or relative angle Because the position that rotates to 90 degrees absolute for the first time and where rotates 90 degrees relative from O degree are the same When the figure has been rotated 90 degrees and then 30 degrees to be rotated rotary angle of 120 degrees should be edited if absolute angle specifying is used that is rotate the figure to 120 degrees from O degree If relative specifyin
305. ed by Z axis movement command in program adds the offset specified by H codes in G43 set in the offset storage or subtracts the offset specified by H code in G44 finally the value calculated is regarded as the end point coordinate The following command is indicated for Z axis move omitting When the offset is positive G43 is for an offset in the positive direction G44 is for an offset in the negative direction It reversely moves when the offset is negative value Specifying the offset U Lm O e um 9 3 3 e An offset number is specified by H code and its corresponding offset adds or subtracts Z axis movement command value in program to get a new Z axis movement command value The offset number is HOO H32 Offset value corresponded with offset number is pre set in the offset storage by using the panel of LCD MDI Setting range for offset is as follows Offset value 9999999 9999999xleast input increment Offset number 00 i e HOO corresponds to the O offset It is disabled to set offset value to HOO Tool length compensation cancellation G49 or HOO can be specified when the tool length compensation is cancelled When two or more axes compensations are cancelled all of the axes compensation will be cancelled if the G49 is applied Compensation value of the vertical axis for currently specified plane is cancelled with HOO After G49 or HOO is specified the system immediately cancels the compensation value Note 1 In
306. ed by standard PLC program are as follows Dwell commanded by program Auto mode DNC MDI mode Feed Hold key 177 t GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Cvcle Start ke Cycle start commanded by Auto mode DNC d program MDI MDI mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Edit mode For adjustment of the feedrate Machine zero mode MPG mode Single Step mode MANUAL mode Feedrate Override keys Auto mode DNC MDI mode Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Machine zero mode Lubricating key For machine lubrication ON OFF MPG mode Single Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode MDI mode Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Spindle For spindle speed adjustment override keys spindle analog control valid uoijeisdoO JI Cooling key For coolant ON OFF Spindle CW Machine zero mode Spindle stop MPG mode Single Step mode MANUAL mode Spindle control keys Spindle CCW Auto mode DNC MDI mode Machine zero mode MANUAL mode MANUAL mode MPG Spindle orientation mode Step mode Machine zero return mode Rapid traverse For rapid traverse feedrate key switching Spindle exact Stop F itive ti f Manual feed as ign Manual Se Machine zero mode Step key ip VP mode MANUAL mode Handwheel l E For X Y Z axis selection in MPG axis selection MPG mode mode key Chapter 1 Keg f Name J 1x1 Wu FO gt Jix1
307. eding is invalid for rough milling command G110 G111 G134 G135 and it feeds by linear type If setting value is more than or equal to 10 it feeds by helical type for rough milling command G110 G111 G134 G135 Rough milling command G110 G111 134 G135 helical feed function Namely for Z axis depth cutting of rough milling command G110 G111 134 G135 the tool feeds not by linear type but by helical type So the workpiece with no groove may be rough milled directly Note 1 when the Z axis cutting depth is less than 10um each time the helical feeding is invalid Note 2 when the tool radius is less than 1mm the helical feeding is also invalid The helical feeding path is shown in follows Tool diameter 2r Tool Helical teeding le ad 9 7sf5aremeter KA Fa m Workpiece y ao et 4 a Di ma D ia Pu Pala Pa ES p E i Tool diameter 2r 5 1 2 4 Remains of G110 G111 G116 G117 G132 G133 G134 G135 Setting range 0 999999 D 2 t 41 Override value in rigid tapping tool retract 0 override is set to 100 Setting range 0 200 0 override is set to 100 o 2 4 3 Tool retract amount in deep hole rigid tapping high speed standard Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm o 2 1 6 Spindle move amount per revolution in rigid taping Setting range 1 9999999 Unit 0 001mm 341 GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Multiplier coefficient of rigi
308. ee e Control logic When CNC is power on the current used spindle is the 1 spindle By M03 M04 CNC controls the 1 spindle CW and CCW By M73 M74 CNC shifts to control outputting of the 2 spindle CW and CCW The shift completed the control logic to current spindle is the same as the spinning spindle gt D 5 Q x For example currently the 2nd spindle is spinning CW or CCW and then if M74 or M73 is executed there will be PLC alarm A0 7 M73 M74specified error Note 1 input S value must be the speed allowed for the certain spindle Note 2 When change the spindle if the spindle to be changed is spinning then you should input M instruction to make the new changed spindle retaining the same direction as before or stop the spindle that will be changed else here will be PLC alarm Appoint wrong spindle rotation Note 3 when CNC emergence or spindle alarm appearing CNC shuts multi spindle rotation output signal at the same time outputs stop signal 425 gt o o D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSE 11 2 3 Spindle aut Related signals GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual o gear shift Signal Signal Significance Pin out PLC CNC type symbol No Status diagnose ASP1 Gear 1 spindle in position signal CN61 7 X0 6 input ASP2 Gear 2 spindle in position signal CN61 8 X0 7 signal ASP3 output Gear 3 spindle in position signal CN61 9 X1 0 ASP4 Gear 4 spindle in position signal CN61
309. eed hold aid value override RENE Enabled Enabled Enabled m Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 3003 DEN Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Note 1 When the power is turned on the value of this variable is 0 Note 2 When feed hold is disabled if the feed hold button is held down the machine stops in the single block stop mode However single block stop operation is not performed when the single block mode is disabled with variable 3003 Note 3 When the feed hold is disabled if the feed hold button is pressed then released the machine does not stop program execution continues and the machine stops at the first block where feed hold is enabled the feed hold lamp is ON 142 Chapter 5 Macro Program Note 4 When feedrate override is disabled an override of 100 is always applied regardless of the setting of the feedrate override Note 5 When exact stop check is disabled no exact stop check is made even in blocks including those which do not perform cutting e Number of machined parts The number of machined parts can be read and written Variable No 3901 Number of machined parts e Modal information Modal information specified in blocks up to the immediately preceding block can be read Variable No Group 1 G00 G01 G02 G03 G73 G74 G80 G81 G82 G83 4001 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 G1
310. eed ring slower the response will be The bigger the value is the faster the response The second integral will be When the value is too big vibration will coefficient of the occur When the value is too small the response speed ring will be slow and steady state error cannot be reduced Appendix 8 Alarm Message Alarm type 0 CNC error 1 CNC warning 2 PLC error 3 PLC warning Clearing ways 0 press RESET key to clear 1 press CANCEL key to clear 2 press RESET key or CANCEL key to clear 3 press RESET key and CANCEL key at the same time to clear 4 only power on reset can clear Alarm No Sen Alarm Message WAY g TYPE 90 0 Emegecysopl On 000 o Partprogram doesn t existor_is failed to be opened 002 0 0 TeGodesiegl 0030 0 Total characters of one command isoutofrange 2 ticharacters are allowed 040 0 WTohpkhvleisovrw 0060 0 The format of block is wrong or the value of block is over ow 0080 0 The centre of a circle that defined with I J K does not suit coordinates 0100 0 One command is commanded repeatedly in the same block 0110 O Too many commands are in one line it cannot exceed 100 0020 0 Thevalueofiecommandis out of range 0130 0 iega value has been commanded when not in analog spinde 014 0 After G codes of 00 group and 01 group have been commanded G codes of 00 group can t be commanded again in the same block
311. eeds of X Y Z axis are set by data parameter No 022 Actual rapid traverse speed No 022 setting value x rapid override Note 2 When the rapid override is FO the rapid traverse rate is set by data parameter No 024 7 1 6 Spindle override adjustment While the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage output in Auto mode it can be adjusted by spindle override d 1 Presssome or some to adjust the spindle override for the spindle speed it can realize 8 level real time override adjustment between 50 12075 h Press the som key each time the feedrate override ascends a level till 120 h Press the sono key each time the rapid override descends a level till 50 Note The actual output analog voltage analog voltage by parameter x spindle override Example When the data parameter No 3741 is set to 9999 execute S9999 command to select the spindle override 70 the actual output analog voltage 10x70 7V 7 2 DNC Running The CNC system has a DNC function by the connection of the DNC communication software with this system the high speed high capacity program can be performed in this system i In Auto mode press the L key it enters the DNC mode Then press the key to start the program DNC machining under the condition that the PC is get ready When DNC runs subprograms can be executed the max built in subprogram is 1 layer When DNC runs macro program does not skip in the main program otherwise an ala
312. efaulted workpiece coordinate system is controlled by SCRD of No 540 Restrictions After G54 1 P must be specified the workpiece coordinate system 1 G54 1 P1 is defaulted when P following G54 1 is not specified in the same block P S alarm occurs when the specified command value in P command exceeds 1 48 When other G commands containing P command in G54 1 G54 is specified P command is shared when they are executed It is shown below G54 1 G04 P1000 or G54 M98 P48 Other notes are the same those of G54 G59 3 23 Coordinate System Rotation G68 G69 The programmed shape can be rotated By using this function rotation command a workpiece can be rotated with a specific angle If the pattern of the workpiece comprising some identical shapes the time required for programming and the length of the program can be reduced by editing a subprogram and calling it with the rotation command of the main program The function is as follows 67 GSK C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Angle of rotation y A O Q Q 3 3 Q Center of rotation A Format G17 G18G68a p R_ Start rotation of a coordinate system G19 Coordinate system rotation mode The coordinate system is rotated G69 Cancel rotation of a coordinate system G68 G69 are G codes of the group 16 which is a modal G code Explanations G17 G18 or G19 Because they only support the rotation on two dimension plane sel
313. effective and the previous block remains modal Cancel all the axis compensations and set HO modal Position to X75 Y75 Z75 Z75 Command Example Tool length compensation 1 2 and 3 hole machining Compensation value E 4MM offset H01 4 0 N1 G91 GOO X120 0 Y80 0 1 N2 G43 Z 32 0 H01 2 N3 G01 Z 21 0 3 N4 G04 P2000 reinando 4 N5 GOO Z21 0 oes 5 IN6 X90 0 Y 50 0 3 aussieht 6 VECINA LP S rr 7 N8 GOO Z41 0 ss 8 N9 X50 0 Y30 0 9 INTO GOLAZO sus icon 10 N11 G04 P2000 fd N12 G00 Z57 0 HOO 12 N13 X 200 0 Y 60 0 13 N14 M30 Z X or Y axis offsets a value at offset storage positively or negatively from the original end position according to the above command Offset axes can be specified with G17 G18 and G19 offset direction can be specified with G43 and G44 Offset No corresponding to the offset is specified by H code 56 Chapter 3 G Command 3 17 Scaling G50 G51 Scaling means programmed figure can be magnified or reduced The dimension specified by X Y Z can be scaled up or down with the same or different rates of magnification The magnification rate can be specified by the program or parameter Y U O Q um 9 3 3 e 0 X As the above figu
314. egative 0 For Y axis move key y is positive Z is negative VALX 71 For X axis move key is positive is negative 0 For X axis move key is positive is negative 01 7 3 SMAL 1 Spindle manual gear shift for S command 0 Spindle auto gear shift for S command ACS 1 Analog voltage control of spindle speed 0 Switching control of spindle speed HWL 1 MPG mode 0 Step mode ISC 1 Increment system IS C 0 0001mm 0 00001 inch 0 Increment system IS B 0 001mm 0 0001inch SGB 1 M type gear shift mode B 0 M type gear shift mode A GST 1 Analog spindle gear shit is M 0 Analog spindle gear shit is T GST 1 Positioning signal is used for gear shift 0 Positioning signal is used for spindle orientation MSI 1 Multi Spindle control function is B type 0 Multi Spindle control function is A type MSEN 2 1 Multi Spindle function is valid 0 Multi Spindle function is invalid 347 Ii 5 N et D T O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 3 0 1 0 Delay time ms of strobe pulse signal SF during M gear shift Setting range 0 1000 unit ms J u2 Q spindle encoder pulses rev Setting range 0 5000 unit p r 0 Not detect spindle encoder in G74 G84 tapping oS Yd 2 Transmission ratio of encoder and spindle gear teeth 3 7 2 2 Transmission ratio of encoder and encoder gear teeth Setting range 1 255 9 f 3
315. elZ selected o xs empo tMemaXioemde 2 x4 emet ExemaXi0ovmde a es eve Beera ee ni pa o _ LH H Smei S I ax O w S 421 gt D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual C CN15 Description Address 1 PL X5 Spindle speed arrival signal X5 2 Spindle orientation COIN l accomplishment signal SPAL Spindle alarm input signal fixed address Y5 0 VP Spindle speed position switch signal CP5 DIR NM X5 0 VPO Spindle DESC MN statement output signal 961 sar _ 5 4 20 NINI alal Aa af AAA Al a a NO NOT NO ep lt O For detail information about panel kevs and panel indicate light address please see to Chapter 5 Diagnosis of Volume 3 gt o o D 5 Q x 11 2 Function Configuration 11 2 1 Spindle Rotation Control eo Related signals Type of Symbol Significance Pin out PLC CNC signal No State Diagnosis Input Machine panel spindle rotates CCW X21 7 signa Machine panel spindle rotates CW X21 3 422 Appendix Machine panel spindle stop key X21 5 SPAL opindle alarm signal CN15 4 X5 3 CN62 4 YO 3 SRV Spindle rotates CCW signal CN15 22 Y52 l CN62 5 YO 4 SFR Spindle rotates CW signal CN15 23 Y5 3 Output SPZD Spindle brake signal CN62 8 YO 7 signal srv2 The 2 spindle CCW output Y3 4 SFR2 The 2 spindle CW
316. em e Press 3 keys together Note Don t cut off the power in the backup and restore operation of the data and no other operation is suggested to be performed before the aforesaid operation is prompted to be finished key if necessary Example to resume the CNC parameters to backup parameters the steps are as follows Turn on the parameter switch and enter the Backup PAR page in MDI mode move the cursor to the place before Resume which is shown below 291 GSR C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER OPERATION Press POWER ON LEVEL SETTING SWITCH SETTING EAS PARAMETER OPERATION m o Lo D Q O Fee m men ome 292 Chapter 10 Document Management CHAPTER 10 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 10 1 Document Management Page SETTING Press to select setting interface press it repeatedly to enter Document Management page as follows EDIT SBABA TAA HAB DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 00200 N00000 d GSK980MDc L3 NO U DISK 4 SYSTEM FILES HI PARAM PAR LA TOFF CMP LTA HOFF WMP PROGRAM LM 08001 CNC L 00902 CNC LM 00208 CNC I 09000 CNC LM 09001 CNC O Lo D um Q r O 08 57 09 SETTING CLOCK DOC LIST The system automatically identifies the U disk after it is connected with the system When it is not identified the system prompts
317. emains unchanged until the power is turned off Format G90 G53 P Explanations IP Tool travel amount is specified by absolute value When a position on a machine coordinate system is specified the tool moves to the position by rapid traverse G53 which is used to select a machine coordinate system is a non modal G code It is valid only in the block that specifies the machine coordinate system The absolute value specifies X Y Z When the tool moves to the specific position for example tool exchange position travel program on the machine coordinate system should be edited by G53 Restrictions e Cancel of the compensation function When the G53 command is specified cancel the radius compensation However the parameter NO 013 determines whether the tool length compensation is cancelled or not eo G53 Specify G53 immediately after power on Since the machine coordinate system must be set before the G53 command is specified manual reference position return or automatic reference position return by the G28 command must be performed after the power on Otherwise P S alarm occurs G53 can not be performed before reference position return e Inthe same block with other G commands 1 In the same block with group 03 G90 G91 G53 G90 and G91 are performed normally and related modal is updated The position command specified by G53 is treated as absolute position 64 Chapter 3 G Command 2 In the same block with tool length compe
318. ement each time from center point to outside 5 The Z axis is retracted to the R reference surface at the rapid traverse rate 6 X and Y axes are positioned to the center at the rapid traverse rate 7 Down to distance V to the end machining surface along Z axis at the rapid traverse rate 8 Cut along Z axis for Q V depth 9 Cycling the operations from 4 8 till the round surface of total depth is finished 10 Return to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command Path 86 Chapter 3 G Command Y LnirLadtzed level mmm umm T 099 U a O a um o 3 3 e A Point Z Related Explanation The P and L are disabled in this cycle but the P value will be reserved as canned cycle modal value For example A round inside groove rough milling is specified in canned cycle G111 see the following Figure 100 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 GOO positioning at the rapid traverse rate G99 G111 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 150 W20 Q10 K10V10 F800 D1 Rough milling cycle inside the round 87 GSK GC Est CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual groove D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Canceling canned cycle returning from the point R plane M30 Note Set the 51222 parameter value to one which is more than 10 by G110 and G111 it feeds helically along Z axis Rough milling machining can be directly performed for non groove workpiece See the following fi
319. emoved after power on again 0 Note 5 Detailed alarm messages and PLC alarms are referred to Appendix and Appendix II LS A I ETS y 2 ALM LOG page press to enter the alarm page press to enter alarm log page e The page records recent history alarm messages including alarm type alarm number alarm time Press y to view alarm log messages The display page is shown below EDIT 53447 TAA HAA ALM TYPE ALM NO NOTE ALARM TIME 17 19 83 a o onm 1 Alarm log sort order the latest alarm log message is located the headmost of the first page and others are arranged orderly There are up to 200 alarm messages When the alarm log exceeds 100 messages the last history log message is cleared 2 Clear history record press _ unux to clear all alarms and prompt messages below 2 level operation permission in the history record display page 3 Clear alarm when many alarms occur simultaneously L4f is pressed once to clear one alarm REBET CANCEL where the cursor is press and simultaneously to clear all alarms in ALM interface 4 Clear warning when many warnings occur simultaneously L or is pressed once to clear one warning where the cursor is press 7 and simultaneously to clear all warns in ALM interface 196 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 3 5 Setting Interface SETTING Press to enter setting interface includi
320. ency stop NEUE MK dn MST 1 External cycle start signal ST invalid 0 External cycle start signal ST valid MSP 1 External stop signal SP invalid 0 External stop signal SP valid with external stop switch connected otherwise CNC shows stop MOT 1 Not detect software stroke limit 0 Detect software stroke limit MESP 1 Emergency stop invalid 0 Emergency stop valid CHPW 1 Real time detection for the stability of voltage isn t performed 0 Real time detection for the stability of voltage is performed 3 0 1 T Reset output time Setting range 16 4080 unit ms 3 2 4 Thread Function 01 7 3 SPD SPFD 1 Cutting feed stops if spindle stops 0 Cutting feed not stop after spindle stop 346 Chapter 3 Parameter SAR 1 Detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting 0 Not detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting THDA 71 Thread machining adopts exponential acceleration and deceleration 0 Thread machining adopts linear acceleration and deceleration VAL5 1 For 5 axis move key is positive is negative 0 For 5 axis move key is positive is negative VALA 1 For 4 axis move key Nis positive Nis negative 0 For 4 axis move key is positive Nis negative VALZ 71 For Z axis move key is positive is negative 0 For Z axis move key is positive fis negative VALY 71 For Y axis move key Z is positive is n
321. ensation point every 10 000 distance The 127th offset point is the compensation at position 670 000 While the compensation point 59 corresponds to a point negative 10 000 moving from reference point Also there is a compensation point every 10 000 The offset point O is the compensation value at 600 000 position Therefore at compensation point N set a compensation value when moving from N 61 x compensation interval to N 60 x compensation interval Above is the example of following compensation interval errors 30 000 20 000 Ii 5 N et D T O Machine Offset Offset Drive unit current Drive unit current coordinat parameter value command pulses command pulses after before offsetting offsetting 30000 29992 20000 20000 19599 10 000 10000 10006 4 e system No mw E E Reference point 0 10 000 E EE 10000 10004 369 C GERK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Actually the machine moves from 30 000 point to the point of 10 000 the screw pitch compensation is 7 7 6 4 4 3Data parameter N93620 screw pitch error origin 255 No3624 compensation interval 210000 Parameter Ne3621 min position number of each axis for pitch error compensation 0 parameterNe3622 max position number of each axis for pitch error compensation 255 When the screw pitch error origin is set to 255 The compensation value for the 1 section is set by the posit
322. ent X or Z Y machine coordinate 4 Tool magazine debugging page Press BIC SET of key to enter the tool magazine debugging page which executes the disc tool magazine debugging the tool sheath number means the tool sheath and the tool number means corresponding tool number in the tool sheath number 194 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI 8000 TAA HB TOOL SET gt ATC SET 02000 NO0006 TOOL SHEA NO T TOOL SHEA NO T TOOL SHEA NO T 000 0 012 12 024 Vea 1 a3 13 025 002 2 14 026 003 3 15 027 004 4 16 028 005 5 17 029 006 6 18 030 007 008 8 20 032 009 9 21 010 10 022 22 011 1 023 23 The tool of number under the pocket number 1 Tool sheath under vertical position ae nnn K A Y Y A too ser MACRO var COORDINATE FIND P Tool sheath number 000 means the tool number of current spindle Y means the tool sheath when the current tool magazine falls down Tool magazine debugging function can be used with the ladder and its debugging is referred to explanations of the ladder 1 3 4 Alarm Interface O Lo D um Q r O ALARM Press key to enter alarm interface including ALM INFOR ALM LOG which contents can be viewed by pressing the corresponding soft function 1 ALM INFOR page CNC and PLC information alarms and prompts are
323. eous speed of 5th axis ef U im O e a 9 3 3 e Circular interpolation helical interpolation Performing the arc interpolation in selected plane the third axis performs linear interpolation so the F value is circular interpolation speed An interpolation of linear and circular arc has the following relation when the linear interpolation speed is f f Rx ma axis length circular arc length Tool path Feedrate along the circle between arc interpolat ion axes is the spected one There are 16 levels feedrate override 0 150 10 per level are offered by NC The actual feedrate series the memory performed or not when the power is turned off and the method of overriding are defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder The function description of GSK980MDc standard PLC ladder diagram is as follows for reference only real time modification for the cutting feedrate The actual cutting feedrate can be adjusted in the range of command speed 0 150 here the feedrate is memorized when the power is turned off How to operate the cutting feedrate adjustment refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION of this manual Related parameter 19 U im O e um 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Data parameter No 027 the upper limit value X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis are same of the cutting feedrate Data parameter No 029
324. ep may occur if rapid traverse speed is too large acceleration amp deceleration time constant is too small acceleration amp deceleration start end speed is too large The suggested parameter setting is shown in follows the electronic gear ratio is 1 1 Data parameter Ne022 lt 5000 Data parameter Ne0232350 Data parameter Ne030 lt 50 Data parameter Ne0292150 Data parameter Ne041 lt 50 Data parameterNe042 gt 150 When AC servo motor drive unit is applied to this system the machining efficiency can be improved by a larger start speed and smaller ACC amp DEC time constant setting If optimum ACC amp DEC characteristics are required the ACC amp DEC time constant may be set to O which can be got by adjusting the AC servo ACC amp DEC parameters The suggested parameter settings are as follows electronic gear ratio is 1 1 Data parameter No022 set higher properly Data parameter Ne023 lt 60 Data parameter Ne030250 Data parameter Ne029 lt 50 Data parameter Ne04 1250 Data parameter No042 lt 50 The parameter settings above are recommended for use refer to the actual conditions of the drive unit motor characteristic and machine load for its proper setting 4 5 Machine Zero Adjustment Adjust the relevant parameters based on the valid level of the connection signal zero return type or 358 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging direction applied DEC5 DECX of the bit parameter Ne004 valid level of deceleration signal as machine zero retu
325. erior circuit is shown in Fig 2 3 Fig 2 3 interior circuit of drive unit alarm signal This input circuit requires that the drive unit transmits signal by the following types in Fig 2 4 305 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Type 1 Type z ALMn ALMA Fig 2 4 Signal types of drive unit 2 1 4 Axis Enable Signal ENn nEN signal output is valid as CNC works normally nEN signal to OV when the drive unit alarm or emergency alarm occurs CNC cuts off nEN signal output nEN signal toOV off The interior interface circuit is shown in Fig 2 5 Uu Baa G rs 344 T ENn IT SERES uu TAHCi4ISO a ULN2803 Fig 2 5 interior interface circuit for axis enable signal 2 1 5 Pulse Disable Signal SETn nSET signal is used to control servo input disable which can enhance the anti disturbance capability between CNC and drive unit This signal is at low level if there is pulse output from CNC high resistance if not The interior interface circuit of it is shown in Fig 2 6 Ii 5 o oP T le LN2803 Fig 2 6 Interior interface circuit for pulse disable signal 2 1 6 Zero Signal nPC The one rotation or approach switch signal is taken as zero signal for machine zero return Its interior connection circuit is shown in Fig 2 7 14HC14 50 Fig 2 7 Zero signal circuit 306 Chapter2 Interface Signals Note nPC signal uses 24V level a The connection for NPN Hall elements
326. ervo control unit has two control modes for the control of the spindle motor e When NC is at the speed control mode for the control of the spindle the spindle servo control unit can receive a speed command issued from NC to control the rotation speed of spindle motor e When NC is at the contour control mode for the control of the spindle the spindle servo drive unit also can receive a position command issued from NC to control the motor operates to a specified position 125 U im O e a 9 3 3 e G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual contou control mode Speed command Analog voltage Position command Position pulse speed control made Position control mode opindle servo controller U im O a um y 3 3 e spindle motor Set Cs contour control axis In the 980MDc system only the additional axis the 4 or the 5 axis can be set to a Cs contour control axis But two Cs axes can not be set at the same time Before the Cs axis setting is valid this axis must be set to a rotation axis Otherwise Cs axis setting is invalid o 1 8 7 IS1X IS0X RCSX ROSX ROTX RCSx 1 The CS axis function is enabled 0 The CS axis function is disabled ROSx ROTx Set the type of the axis Linear Type A Type B Invalid axis rotation axis rotation axis AA EUN Aso MES ECO O IE The switch between spindle speed control and CS contour control B The NC switching of
327. ess address key Pa key in parameter No then press key 4 Key in the new parameter value 279 GSR C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual DATA 5 Press pial key the parameter value is entered and displayed 6 For security the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF after all parameters setting is finished Example oet BIT5 DECZ of the bit parameter No 004 to 1 and the other bits unchanged Move the cursor to No 004 key in 01100000 by sequence in the prompt line the figure is as follows MDI 8164 T89 HAB 00001 N08828 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0001 00010000 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 01100000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 00000011 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00011111 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 000001 11 yd 00000000 0588 00000000 O 001 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 3 0011 00000000 01000101 0601 00000000 e 0012 00000001 CERA 01000101 0650 00000000 e 0004 DECS DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX xxx xxx SCH 2 BIT DEC5 signal is 0 low 1 high EZAT er para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P DATA Press LU key to finish the
328. esults of speed change 512 bits codes R120 ROlOJ F36 0 F37 3 Output to PLC SIND G33 7 decides the output signal From PLC PLC appointed the inputting of S 12 E i A URINE From PLC bit code R 121L R011 6G32 0 33 3 SIND L gt Ko E Use data parameters No 3730 and Na 373I to uE inar 5 adjust D value and output spindle Spindle allow signal Output to PLC e instructions Ov ENB F14 output A Machine Part 10 2 T Type gear shift eS code SF signal output 405 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE The control function of analog spindle in CNC turns S instruction values into binary coding and then outputs them to PLC F22 F25 SF not outputted eGear shift method The maximum speed of the spindle corresponding to each gear stage in the 1 spindle is decided by CNC data parameter And the gear stage select signal is 2 bit coding signal GR1 GR2 The maximum speed of the spindle corresponding to each gear stage in the 2 spindle is decided by CNC data parameter too but gear stage decided by GR21 GR22 The relationship between signal and gear stage is as follows GR2 G28 2 GR1 G28 1 gear stage Maximum spindle speed nn umen n emen o 1 data parameterNO 3741 ot o t to meme S1 1 3 data parameterNO 3743 ee data parameterNO 3741 S2 data n 3744 For the same S instruction but at different gear stage output analog voltages and S instructions have linear re
329. et the tapping when the rigid tapping is performed but the G74 G84 can be not be reset o Dwell The dwell is disabled e Working G84 G74 is only valid in Auto or MDI mode e Manual feed The rigid tapping can not used for manual feed e Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is added till position to the point R e Cutter compensation Cutter compensation is ignored in canned cycle o Axis switching The Z axis tapping can only be performed in rigid mode e S code If the command speed is more than the maximum speed the alarm may occur e M29 Specify an axis movement code between M29 and G84 G74 causes alarm e P Q If they are specified in non drilling block If they are specified in a block that does not perform drilling they are not stored as modal data When QO is specified the peck rigid tapping cycle is not performed Specify them in tapping block they are stored as modal data when the tapping command is retracted either Q modal did it eo Cancellation Do not specify a group 01 G code and G84 G74 in the same block e ACs contour control is used with rigid tapping at the same time CS axis selects a speed mode or position mode which is determined by CON G27 7 but the system is rigid tapping mode regardless of the value of CON After the rigid tapping is cancelled the rotation axis is either CS axis or common one which is determined by st
330. et to 0 the output range is 0 360 When the NAT bit of parameter No 520 is set to 1 the output range is 180 180 22 Conversion from BCD to BIN Zl BIN J G65 H41 PZI QJ example G65 H41 P 101 Q 102 101 BIN 102 23 Conversion from BIN to BCD Zl BCD J G65 H42 P I QJ example G65 H42 P 101 Q 102 101 BCD 102 24 Unconditional branch G65 H80 Pn Pn sequence number example G65 H80 P120 Go to N120 block 25 Equal to conditional branch G65 H81 Q I R J Pn Pn sequence number can be variable example G65 H81 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 equals to 102 branch to N1000 block or execute in order 26 Not equal to conditional branch G65 H82 QI R J Pn Pn sequence number can be variable example G65 H82 101 102 C1000 When 101 does not equal to 102 branch to N1000 block or execute in order 27 Greater than conditional branch 147 U im O e a 9 3 3 e GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual G65 H83 Q I R J Pn Pn sequence number variable example G65 H83 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is greater than 102 branch to N1000 block when 101342102 execute in order 28 Smaller than conditional branch G65 H84 QI R J Pn Pn sequence number variable example G65 H84 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is smaller than 102 branch to N1000 block or execute in order 29 Greater than or equals to conditional branch G65 H85 Q i R J Pn Pn sequence numbe
331. f rigid tapping command VP Spindle speed position shift signal CN15 20 Y5 0 TAP Rigid tapping signal CN15 21 Y5 1 Output CN15 22 Y5 2 SRV Spindle CCW signal CN62 4 YO 3 CN15 23 Y5 3 CN62 5 YO 4 SFR Spindle CW e Function description When M29 is being executed VP signal is output and the servo spindle is shifted from speed to the position After the shifting servo spindle sends the VOP signal and the signal is received by the PLC to set G61 0 to 1 then M29 is executed Y5 1 and G61 0 are sent out at the same time the sequence is as follows B 23 ke ETAP FTE 3 ECTAP G61 03 A no A mmu FIN 64 35 a Postion shitting of the servo spindle 4 The action of the spindle rotation In the execution of M29 if the signal VPO X5 0 is not detected at the time set by DT15 the alarm A0 2 M29 is executed overtime VPO X5 0 is not detected will be issued 435 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 11 2 18 Spindle Exact Stop eo Related signal Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC CNC type No State Diagnosis m Exact stop key on the panel X25 7 anal COIN Completion signal of the spindle CN15 8 X5 2 positioning uw STAO Start signal of the spindle positioning CN62 37 Y3 0 sana Indicator signal of the spindle exact Y21 3 stop Input M19 Command of the spindle exact stop command e Function description The sp
332. f the Password Steps for password alteration 1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page enter the password by the methods in Section 9 3 2 2 Move the cursor to the ALTER PASSWORD line DATA 3 Key in the new password and press key 4 The CNC system prompts PLEASE INPUT USER PASSWORD AGAIN the page is as follows 54104 Tid HAD EDIT SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT ON CURRENT LEVEL 3 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER RESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 1H LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 SERYO 0 13 LEVEL MODIFY PARAMETER AND EDIT PROGRAM 17 32 52 ume om wus foor DATA 5 After reinputting the password press key if the two passwords input are identical CNC prompts PASSWORD UPDATED So the password alteration is successful 286 Chapter 10 Document Management SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER OPERATION 17 34 07 EJ w usr Hw 6 If the two passwords input are not identical CNC prompts PASSWORD CHECKOUT ERROR the page is as follows m e o oO D Q o SHITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING EE PARAMETER OPERATION FsHe sm eun eoe 9 2 3 Lower Level Set Lower of the operation level is used to enter a lower level from a higher
333. fined according to specified X Y coordinates and J value in a program and the serial punching cycle is performed according to the punch mode canned cycle command Note 2 The command value of maximum punching number A and B at each side is 9999 the command is disabled when it is negative The decimal part will be rounded off if the command is decimal if the A or B is not specified then 0 is a default Note 3 The rectangle is defined by the current start point the end of the 1st side and the length of the 2nd side the default is current start point if the end of 1st side is not specified the alarm will be generated if the length namely the J is not specified of 2nd side is not specified Note 4 The returned levels are all R point plane in serial punching the corresponding plane will be retracted according to G98 G99 specified in a block when the last hole is performed Note 5 Canned cycles such as G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G136 G137 G138 and G139 have no serial punching functions Note 6 The command words G140 G141 A B and J are only effective in current block The alarm will be generated if the G140 and G141 are specified without the canned cycle punching The A B and K will be ignored if A B and K are specified instead of the G140 or G141 3 24 3 3 Arc Serial Punching G142 G143 Format G142 G98 G99 Gx X Y R Z B L J C F G143 Function Serial punching is performed according to the specified punchi
334. for X Z Y A 5 axes 0 The direction of zero return is positive for X Z Y 4 5 axes Low speed of machine zero return of each axis mm min High speed of machine zero return of each axis mm min ach axis machine zero offset 0 001 Date parameter ach machine coordinate of the 1st reference point 0 001mm ach machine coordinate of the 2st reference point 0 001mm ach machine coordinate of the 3st reference point 0 001mm Each machine coordinate of the 4st reference point 0 001mm e Signal connection The interior wiring circuit of deceleration signal is shown as follows Machine CNC DECn Fig 2 35 Ii Y et 2 T O e Machine zero return type B by regarding servo motor one rotation signal as zero signal DIts sketch map is shown as follows Direction of returning to machine zero ne A Travel switch Tongue fixed on the machine carriage 28 For nDEC signal Fig 2 36 2 The circuit of deceleration signal for three axes 320 Chapter2 Interface Signals DEC YDEC ZDEC Control unit Fig 2 37 8 Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis of the bit parameter No 006 ZCn n X Y Z 4th of bit parameter No 007 and the DECn of the bit parameter No 004 are all set to O the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown as follows
335. for the second time the zero signal is valid and the movement stops The indicator for zero return on the panel lights up e Machine zero return type C as servo motor one rotation signal taken as zero signal D Its sketch map is shown below 222 Chapter2 Interface Signals Machine zero return direction ge e a Travel switch Connect to 24 V Connect to nDEC signal gt 25mm Tongue fixed on the machine slider Fig 2 41 2 Circuit of the deceleration signal XDFEC System side YDEC DEC c Control unit Fig 2 42 3 Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is Xx Y z 4 gn axis of the bit parameter No 006 are all set for 1 ZCn n is Xx Y 2 4 axis of the bit parameter No 007 are all set for 0 the DECn of the bit parameter No 004 is set for 0 and z the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown in fy follows D 5 5 nDEC nFC High speed zero retum Zero return ver Low speed zero reum pe F Ju Begins to detect zero signal Fig 2 43 4 Machine zero returns process A Select the Machine Zero mode press manual positive or negative zero return direction set by bit parameter No13 feed key the corresponding axis will move to the machine zero at a traverse speed Then it touches the tongue and presses down the deceleration switch and moves forward When the tongue de
336. forms cutting feed If the G01 is not specified in the abovementioned program N0010 but GOO the GOO performs rapid positioning for N0030 74 Chapter 3 G Command When both command G80 and commands GOO G01 G02 and G03 are specified in block actions are performed by the latter GOO G01 G02 and G03 For example N0010 G01 XO YO ZO F800 The modal command is G01 before entering the canned cycle N0020 G81 X10 Y10 R5 Z 50 Entering canned cycle N0030 GOO G80 X100 Y100 Z100 The GOO performs positioning at the rapid rate and the modal command GOO is saved Note The cutting feedrate by F command is still held on even if the canned cycle is cancelled U O e um 9 3 3 e 3 24 1 6 General command format for canned cycle Once the hole machining data is specified in the canned cycle it is held until the canned cycle is cancelled So the hole machining data should be outright specified at the beginning of the canned cycle only the modified data is specified in the following canned cycle The general command format of canned cycle G X Y R Z Q P F L All commands for canned cycle are listed in above mentioned format But it is not needed to specify the above mentioned format in each canned cycle For example the canned cycle can be performed as long as the G command hole machining and any of X Y Z and R are specified additionally Q or P is not available in some canned cycle G command hole machining
337. frequency the data ranges may vary due to different increment system Increment system Command data input ranges u 99999 999 99999 999 mm Met t G21 etric input G21 90999 999 99999 999 deg Inch input G20 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch 1u IS B Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals p 9999808 9999990 deg u 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm Met t G21 etric input G21 0999 9999 9999 9999 deg 999 99999 999 99999 inch Inch t G20 999 9999 999 9999 deg 1 3 4 Data Ranges and Unit of Increment System Speed parameter Machine tool types decide the units of linear axes speed i e mm min for metric machine system is 0 1inch min for inch machine system The range of linear axis speed parameter is codetermined by machine tool type and increment system For example data parameter NO 027 upper limit of cutting feedrate Machine tool Increment Linear axis Rotary axis Parameter range l type system speed unit speed unit Metric machine 1 p IS B ax ep m Hes 10 60000 mm min system 0 1u CIS C 10 6000 deg min Inch machine 1 4 CIS B 5 60000 j 0 1inch min system 0 1u CIS C bes 56000 0 As rotary axes are not involved in metric inch EL ND the rotation speed unit is always 0 1u CIS C U im O e a 9 3 3 e deg min The switch between different increment systems may cause the excess of permitted running speed set by data parameter Therefore at th
338. g carriage will rush through the block which may influence the zero return precision because of the insufficient deceleration distance Usually there are 2 types of machine zero return connection 1 The connection to AC servo motor schematic diagram of using a travel switch and a servo motor one rotation signal separately Machine zero return direction Travel switch 24V 25mm nDEC signal Tongue fixed on the machine slider Fig 4 2 By this connection type when the deceleration switch is released in machine zero return the one rotation signal of encoder should be avoided to be at a critical point after the travel switch is released In order to improve the zero return precision it should be ensured the motor reaches the one rotation signal of encoder after it rotates for half circle And the moving distance for motor half circle rotation is the motor gear teeth 2xlead screw gear teeth 2 The connection to stepper motor the schematic diagram of using a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal 359 Ii 5 N e 2 T O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Machine zero retum direction gt gt ae Metal inductive block fixed on the machine slider a PNP NC proximity switch In figure usually L1 z 1 5 2 To 24 V width of the proximity switch L2 the width of the proximity switch nDEC and nPC signals To OV connected together
339. g is used angle of rotation should be edited as 30 degrees that is rotates 30 degrees from 90 degrees to achieve the same effect with the other way Explanations Plane selection Plane selecting code G17 gG19 can not be specified in the coordinate system rotation mode Center of rotation When a B are not programmed the tool position current position of block G68 is assumed as the center of rotation Angle of rotation When angle of rotation R command is not specified the value specified in parameter NO 187 is assumed as the angle Rotation cancellation The G code G69 used to cancel coordinate system rotation mode can be specified in a block where another command is specified Limitations Commands related to the coordinate system In coordinate system rotation mode G codes G28 G29 G30 etc related to reference position return and those related to coordinate system G52 to G59 G92 can not be specified These G codes should not U O Q um 9 3 3 e be specified in coordinate system rotation mode otherwise alarm occurs Radius compensation C mode In radius compensation C mode coordinate rotation mode can not set to be valid First cancel the radius compensation if it is necessary to specify Rotation center command Rotation center must be specified by absolute value in coordinate system rotation mode The rotation center of the relative command is assumed as the absolute command Rel
340. g the current block End point the position after performing of the current block X the end point absolute coordinate of X axis for G90 the incremental value of X axis against current point for G91 Y the absolute coordinate of Y axis at the end for G90 the incremental value of Y axis against current point for G91 Z the absolute coordinate of Z axis at the end for G90 the incremental value of Z axis against current point for G91 F Cutting feedrate 3 1 4 Address Definition Usage of the address in system is as follows Roundi Adesso Fawn vawerange ou 26 Decimal part omitted Punching number of 1 and 3rd side for 0 9999 Absolute value for rectangle serial punch G140 G141 negative 99999999 99999999x ti t A Ath 5th axis axis name address PES increment 9999999 99999999 xleast input increment absolute value of Round off Width of outer rectangular roughing milling G132 G133 in X direction negative number Chapter 3 G Command Punching number of 2nd and 4th id ber ddog ibsel te vae of Decimal for rectangle serial part punch G140 G141 negative pumper omitted Radius for arc serialy punch 99999999 99999999xabsolute G142 143 value of negative number 99999999 99999999xabsolute 4th 5th axis axis name address l Round off value of negative number Decimal Punching number for arc serially 0 9999 absolute value for ee h G142 143 i ERA avs omit
341. ge control with a deconcentrator products connected Wiring diagram 22 SRV Y5 2 22 CCW 2 SFR Y5 3 23 Metal shell is connected to shielding rio ens 19 SON re x e sa re x52 e con 12 SVC GND 12 PULS 1890s jew eut Z NIdGZ G 1 NO 01 32euuo2 L LOLON Joe 05s ej Eeul9J eut l Z NIdGZ CL 0 Joeuuo gt o o D 5 Q x 386 Appendix 7 2 Setting of Spindle Electronic Gear Ratio Calculation formula of CNC CMR _ 8 Zu CMD a Z a 5 x x MP Z CMR CMR Multiplier coefficient of spindle command CMD Frequency division coefficient of spindle command Q Pulse volume motor rotation angle for a pulse 6 Min input command unit of CNC 0 001 0 01 or 0 0001 this value corresponds to the travel amount of a revolution of the spindle related parameters 5216 When 5216 is set to 1000 0 360 1000 0 360 ZM Gear teeth of lead screw ZD Gear teeth of motor Calculation formula of spindle servo drive unit Parameter 12 13 of drive unit correspond to the pulse frequency division numerator of position command respectively The calculation formulas for pulse frequency division denominator of position command and gear ratio of drive unit are as follows PxG 4xNxC And E IUOS NOME AMNIS om Z MD MS STET P 360 360 Z CMR G P Correspondence between required pulse amounts for motor rotates 360 degrees and CNC end P 360 0u G Electronic gear ratio of drive
342. ge 16 4080 unit ms Ii i N et T le 9 0 2 0 Serial communication baudrate Setting range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 unit bit s 3 2 1 6 Block No increment for block No auto insertion Setting range 1 100 3 4 1 0 Arc radius error limit Setting range 0 1000 Unit 0 001mm On arc code G02 G03 if error exceeds the difference excuting limit between initial point radius and end point radius alarm will be issued 3 6 2 0 Screw pitch error compensation position number of each axis machine zero Setting range 0 1023 3 6 2 1 Min position number of each axis for pitch error compensation Setting range 0 1023 S 0 2 2 Max position number of each axis for pitch error compensation 337 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Setting range 0 1023 6 2 4 Interval of each axis screw pitch error compensation Setting range 1000 999999 Unit 0 001mm 7 2 0 spindle encoder pulses rev C2 O Setting range 0 5000 unit p r 0 Not detect spindle encoder in G74 G84 tapping 2 1 Transmission ratio of encoder and spindle gear teeth 3 7 2 2 Transmission ratio of encoder and encoder gear teeth Setting range 1 255 O 3 7 3 0 Voltage offset value when spindle max speed analog voltage 10V output Setting range 2000 2000 unit mV 3 7 3 1 Voltage compensation for OV analog voltage output Setti
343. gram state page press En to enter insertion or macro edit state In macro editing mode special symbols can be input are T T gt lt 7 8 T Above symbols are frequently used for macro edit Difference between put eoacial Automatic space Process of character O pore two states symbols In program editing insert Program switch duplication Special symbols Insertion state blank automatically to and deletion can be done can not be separate words by pressing O inputted Blank can not be inserted Only input character O Special symbols Macro edit state automatically can be inputted 6 1 5 Deletion of a Character 231 O Lo D um Q O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Steps 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode DELETE 2 Press key to delete the character before the cursor press key to delete the character where the cursor locates 6 1 6 Modification of a Character Cancel or delete the character and re enter new ones 6 1 7 Deletion of a Single Block This function is only applied to the block with a block No N command which is at the head of a line and followed by blocks which are divided by space Steps 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode PROGRAM EER 2 Press CIENT to enter PRG CONTENT page and press 5E amp to delete the current bock 6 1 8 Deletion of Blocks Steps 1 Select
344. gure for helical cutting path U im le Q m Too diameter zr Q 3 3 Q 3 24 2 14 Fine milling Cycle Inside Full Circle G112 G113 Format G112 G98 G99 X Y R Z J D F G113 Function A fine milling inside the full circle is finished with the specified radius value and direction the tool is retracted after the fine milling Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the table 3 2 G112 Fine milling cycle inside the full circle in CCW G113 Fine milling cycle inside the full circle in CW I Fine milling circle radius the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm the absolute value is taken when it is negative J Fine milling distance from start point to the center point the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm the absolute value is taken when it is negative D Sequence number of tool radius the value range is indicated as 0 32 the O is default of DO The current tool radius value is taken according to the specified sequence number Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point P level at the rapid traverse rate 3 Feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1 5 Perform the full circle interpolation by the path of arc 2 and arc 3 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial point level or point R plane accordi
345. h includes OFFSET amp WEAR MACRO SYSTEM VARIABLE Press corresponding keys to view displayed content of each pages Mii key is a compound key Press it once from other display page to enter the tool offset page and press it again to enter the macro variable page 1 Tool set page In tool compensate interface press memo to enter tool offset management page ress 5 to display No 001 No 032 offset as shown 191 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual sk EDIT 54810 748 HAA COORDINATES NO GEO H GEO D E co ota 0 000 _ERELATAVE 01 WEAR 0 000 0 000 LO GEO 0 000 0 000 WEAR 0 000 0 000 Y 765 577 z GEO 0 000 0 000 T WEAR 0 000 0 000 i GEO 0 000 0 000 HEAR 0 000 0 000 E m GEO 0 000 0 000 WEAR 0 000 0 000 X 3 000 GEO 0 000 0 000 06 2 HEAR 0 000 0 000 i Du 3 GEO 0 000 0 000 7 3 245 y HEAR 0 000 0 0007 Input key O Lo D um Q O 2 Macro variable page In tool compensate interface press mew to the macro variable management page as follows 16 25 07 Tool amp wear input methods absolute input relative input and automatic measure input Absolute input first move the cursor to the required position directly input the digit and then press Relative input first move the cursor to the required position directly input the digit and then press Change Macro key The position value
346. hange the origin of the polar coordinate system and zero point of the workpiece coordinate system is taken as the origin of the polar coordinate system 15 Cancel the polar coordinate command Of course the polar coordinate command mode is cancelled by G15 and then is specified again by G16 and the new polar position is set Axes commands that are not considered as polar coordinate commands In the polar coordinate mode the following specified axes are not considered as the polar coordinate command Moreover the axes other than the first and the second axes on the selected plane are not considered as the polar coordinate command CREME the local coordinate system cot evel the workpiece coordinate nidis RE dim Return to the reference point G65 G66 Call macro program G51 1 G50 1 Programmable mirror image G51 G50 G68 G69 Coordinate system rotation Limitations e In the polar coordinate mode specify a radius for circular interpolation or helical cutting G02 G03 with R e Inthe polar coordinate mode no chamfer function can be specified Cylinder interpolation mode cannot be specified in polar coordinate mode Cancel the polar coordinate mode o Specify G15 Reset e Program execution finished Example Bolt hole circle machining The zero point of the work coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system Ne The XY plane is selected 1 onn
347. he X axis is overtravel in positive direction controlled by G114 0 EN 5 NN 0 The Z axis is overtravel in negative direction controlled by software The 4th axis is overtravel in negative direction controlled by software 3022 0 3023 0 3024 0 3025 0 3026 0 The X axis is overtravel in negative direction controlled by G116 303 0 0 The Y axis is overtravel in negative crection controled by G116 3080 0 The Z axis is overtravel in negative drecton controled by G116 30290 0 The th axis is overtravel in negative direction controlled by GT46 30900 0 The Sth axis is overtravelin negative direcion contraled by G116 Coso 0 Xasdersntrady O OO 3o 0 Yaxsdierisnorealy 3030 0 Zaxsdiersnorealy 340 0 mis dente notready O 30350 0 Bhexsdivrisnotrealy 390 4 ONC emergency stop fai repowe 3549 0 The time of sending X impulse to FPGA is overtime repower operate after finishing return zero 3550 0 4 The time of sending Y impulse to FPGA is overtime repower operate after finishing return zero 3551 0 4 The time of sending Z impulse to FPGA is overtime repower operate after finishing return zero 3552 0 4 The time of sending 4th impulse to FPGA is overtime repower operate after finishing return zero 3553 0 4 The time of sending 5th impulse to FPGA is overtime repower operate after finishing return zero 396 The Y axis is overtravel in positive direction contr
348. he Y axis direction J center point coordinate Y Y coordinate of circle arc start point its value 99999999 99999999xleast input increment K is the difference between the center point and circle start point in the Z axis direction K center point coordinate Z Z coordinate of circle start point its value 99999999 99999999xleast input increment Note When I J and K are for whole circle that they have signs according to the direction And they are positive values when l J and K share the same directions with X Y and Z axes otherwise they are negative ones Item Specified content Command Meaning di 5 Rotating recton direction ov G90 mode Two axes of X Y and Z E X x a End point hip Bed 691 mode mode Two axes of X Y and Z Distance from start to end points 33 U O Q um 9 3 3 e g A O Q Q 3 3 Q GSE C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual X axis distance from start point to the center point with sign Distance from start point Y axis distance from start point to the to circle center point center point with sign Z axis distance from start point to the center point with sign Arc radius Arc radius Clockwise and Counterclockwise are defined when XY plane ZX plane YZ plane is viewed in the positive to negative direction of the Z axis Y axis X axis in the Cartesian coordinate system see the following
349. he alteration The page is shown below Chapter 10 Document Management PARAMETER gt DATA PARAMETER 5000 5000 5000 5000 A 0 2S rr oe eco mor Example 2 Set the X axis value of the pitch data No 000 to 12 set the value of Z axis to 30 Move the cursor to pitch data No 000 by the steps above key in 12 by sequence in the cue line the figure is as follows o Le D Q O PARAMETER gt SCREW PITCH COMPENSATION 00001 N01035 m m oo ME lt 17 28 54 i 00001 N06962 I mm lt lt bit eat ES i moie i 283 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual DATA In the same way key in 30 by sequence in the prompt line press key to finish the alteration The page is shown below EDIT 58438 TOS HAB PARAMETER gt SCREW PITCH COMPENSATION 00001 NO1986 AXIS X AXIS Y AXIS Z NO VALUE NO VALUE NO 2 0000 12 0200 ol 0400 30 0001 0 0201 0 0401 0 0002 0 0202 0 0402 0 0003 0 0203 0 0403 0 0004 0 0204 0 0404 0 0005 0 0205 0 0405 0 0006 0 0206 0 0406 0 0007 0 0207 0 0407 0 0008 0 0208 0 0408 0 0009 0 0209 0 0409 0 0010 0 0210 0 0410 0 0011 0 0211 0 0411 0 0012 0 0212 0 0412 0 0013 omj 8213 omj 0413 07 17 29 59 BIT PARA DATA PARA OFTEN USED
350. he compensation value for the 1 section is set by the position Ne0061 in the compensation table The compensation value for the ome section is set by the position Ne0062 in the compensation table The compensation value for the Nth is set by position Ne0060 N in the compensation table For the negative moving the 1 section error compensation is set by position Ne0060 in the compensation table the 2 section by position No059 The Nth section error compensation is set by position Ne0060 N in the compensation table By taking the machine zero as the reference point the screw pitch error origin moves from the positive coordinate system of machine zero to compensate the corresponding position No 0061 in the compensation table and from the negative coordinate system to compensate the position No 0060 Therefore the screw pitch compensation can be done when moving in the positive or the negative coordinate system of machine zero 08 59 60 61 127 Setting Cc c point 4 lt NC UE i a l 40 7 23581 36 4 1 Machine coordinate Pe 3 system 8955 9 9 A A 40 000 20 000 10 000 0 10 000 670 000 q Reference point The position No 0060 in the screw pitch error compensation parameters corresponds to the reference point 60 compensation point 61 to a point positive10 000 moving from origin So there is a comp
351. he required parameter serial number and then press to position the cursor to the parameter As the following figure the cursor is No 0001 the user presses the DATA numerical key to input 8 digit 2 decimal numerical value presses to confirm the setting completion when the input value is less than 8 digit O is added to the high order position 203 O Lo D um Q r O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR MDI 58705 T32 HAA NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 0001 1001 0013 00000000 0520 00000001 0002 00000010 0014 00011111 0528 00000001 0003 00100000 0172 00100000 0540 10000100 0004 00000000 0173 00000000 0542 00000001 0005 10000000 0174 00000000 0551 00000011 0006 00000000 0175 00000000 0562 00000000 0007 00000000 0187 X 00000000 0582 00000010 0008 00011111 ce 00000000 0584 00000000 0009 000001 11 gt j 00000000 0588 00000000 0010 00011111 0188 X 01000101 0600 00000000 0011 00000000 01000101 0601 00000000 0012 00000001 m 01000101 0650 00000000 0001 xx xxx xxx ACS HWL xxx SC xxx BIT Unused 09 15 45 err para DATA PARA OFTEN USED PITCH COMP FIND P The system sets bit parameters according to their bit 1 In PARAMETER setting page press ___ a tt l V to select the required parameter to set O Lo D um Q O CHANGE P l 2 Press iii to enter bit parameter
352. he same coordinate of two adjacent point in the machining track has led to no ee eee e o r 254 0 Superposition of the centre and start point of the arc has led to no effective C EN RE REM 255 0 Superposition of the centre and end point of the arc has led to no effective C tool p compensation 256 0 That arc radius beng less than tool nose radius has led to noneffective tool IN IO RR RR 297 0 Error programming led to no point of intersection between two arcs with the A mem oce 258 0 Error programming G02 G03 is commanded in establishing the C tool Manel Bl roam mc 259 0 Error programming G02 G03 is commanded in cancelling the C tool pro mme 260 0 Over cutting has been found in the interference checking for the C tool EN EP RN 261 0 Error programming led to no point of with intersection between the line and arc LP 2 erem eren 262 0 Error programming led to no point of intersection between the arc and line with gt the current tool in C tool compensation C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Alarm CLR No WAY Alarm Message TYPE 263 0 264 0 271 0 212 0 tool offset buffer overflow for too many non move commands Cutter compensation C can t be canceled in G02 or G03 mode corner length is too long or too short Chamfering plane error N N O O 274 0 277 0 278 0 279 0 280 0 281 0 Searched target program number exceeds 9999 x20 0 Faito have the system fle initialized C2030 0 Falto open the
353. hed on The output analog voltage value is invariable Unless the cutting feed in constant linear speed control and the absolute value of X axis absolute coordinate value are changed after the S command is executed The analog voltage output is OV when the command SO is executed And the analog voltage output value is invariable when the CNC is reset or at emergent stop The parameter related to spindle speed analog voltage control Data parameter No3731 the output voltage offset for spindle top speed the output analog voltage is OV Data parameter N93730 the voltage offset for the zero spindle speed the output analog voltage is 10V Data parameter No3741 No3744 The top speed for spindle 1 4 shifts the output analog voltage is 10V 2 2 3 Spindle Override The spindle actual speed can be modified by using spindle override when the spindle speed analog voltage control is effective the actual speed modified by spindle override is limited by the top speed of current spindle shift and also it is controlled by the lowest spindle limitation value and the top spindle limitation value in constant linear speed control mode This NC offers 8 level spindle override 50 120 the change is 10 per level The actual level and the modification mode of the spindle override is defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder when attempting to use it The following description is GSK980MDc standard PLC ladder diagra
354. hining adopts exponential acceleration and deceleration 0 Thread machining adopts linear acceleration and deceleration VAL5 1 For 5 axis move key is positive gt is negative 0 For 5 axis move key is positive is negative VALA 1 For 4 axis move key Mis positive Nis negative 0 For 4 axis move key is positive N is negative VALZ 71 For Z axis move key is positive is negative 0 For Z axis move key is positive fis negative VALY 1 For Y axis move key is positive is negative 0 For Y axis move key y is positive Z is negative VALX 71 For X axis move key is positive is negative 0 For X axis move key is positive is negative 0 1 7 5 HPF HPF 1 When speed of handwheel exceeds the max speed set in Para 43 the exceeded handwheel pulses are not neglected 0 When speed of handwheel exceeds the max speed set in Para 43 the exceeded handwheel pulses are neglected 332 Chapter 3 Parameter HWnz1 Coordinate is increscent when the MPG in ccw 0 Coordinate is increscent when the MPG in cw 7 1 8 7 RCSn 71 4th 5th Cs function is valid power on 0 4th 5th Cs function is invalid power on Note Only when the rotary axis function is valid ROT4 1 can the RCS4 be set valid ROSx ROTx Set the type of 4th 5th Linear Rotary A Rotary eva ES p TP nox A pj E IS1x ISOx Selecte increment system of 4th 5th IS0x Incremen
355. ial conditions gt Set the number of tool magazine Set the Max tool No the total toolcase numbers in the current machine tool magazine To change the initial tool No the ladder diagram needed to be altered so do not mend the parameter unless really necessary gt TOOL MAGAZINE parameter setting 5032 Initial tool case number corresponding to sequence of D NEN 5033 Tool No placing tool change position corresponding to Eu The parameters above are suitable for the current standard ladder diagram setting If want to change the ladder diagram you have to set the parameters above parameters setting for CNC calling subroutine OFFSET 4 soft key then enter into ATC SET soft key If O ATC SET key is dark please make sure that parameter G176 7is 1 if not the ladder diagram parameter should be set pot or turret valid The standard ladder diagram should have this function If do not have this function please make sure the ladder diagram is correct In TOOL MAGAZINE the functions and interfaces are as follows 1 when the tools is mixed adjust the tool No in current spindle 44 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 2 when the tools are mixed adjust the toolcase No by parameter D409 The operations like this CHANGE press key and do not release till arrive at where needed by moving the up and down keys In this way the sequence of fallen toolcase No can be adjusted 3 If
356. id feed Rectang groove external fine milling CW Generally a canned cycle consists of a sequence of the following operations see the right figure Operation 1 Positioning of axis X and Y Operation 2 Rapid traverse to pont F plane Operation 3 Hale machining peration 4 Operation at the bottom of hole Operation 5 Retraction to point E plane Operation B Rapid traverse to the initial Point 3 24 1 3 G90 G91 Operation 1 lt otart and end points R es e Operation 7 3 Rapid traverse feedrate Cutting feed Operation Operation E Operation 4 0 The data mode corresponded with G90 and G91 are different The point R plane and the absolute position machined at the bottom of the hole are specified by R and Z values when the command is G 90 The specified R value is the distance relative to the initial plane and the Z value is the distance relative to the R point plane when the command is G91 See the following figure 73 U O Q um 9 3 3 e y A O Q Q 3 gt Q GSK C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual G 90 Absolute command 1 G91 fincremental command lf I ele wa a T l Point R plane R Point R Point afat the bottom ofhaoale Z Absolute Point Z p alatiye Fig 3 46 Absolute and incremental commands for canned cycle 3 24 1 4 Returning po
357. ided ee PROGRAM E AS uas oi gt 4 Press key to setup the new program EDIT 0947 T36 HAD PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 N09558 14 19 21 MDI Aided IE PROGRAM IRI CURRENT URL orr gt 248 Chapter Auto Operation 5 Orderly input part programs according to their compiled sequence When one character is input the screen displays it the compound key is to complete the alteration input by pressing it repetitively When EOB one block is input completedly is pressed to execute the next line 6 Other blocks can be input by step 5 above 6 1 3 Searching a character 1 Scanning To scan the character one by one by cursor 2 rosy Press LY key to enter the Edit mode then press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page 1 pres Do the cursor shifts a line upward if the number of the column where the cursor locates 4 7 is over the total columns of the previous line the cursor moves to the previous block end at sign set D hey is pressed 2 res V key the cursor shifts a line downward if the number of the column where the cursor locates is over the total columns of the next line the cursor moves to the next block end at sign after the I key is pressed 3 Press key the cursor shifts a column to the right if the cursor locates at the line end it moves to the head of the next block O Lo D um Q r O 4 Press key the cu
358. ied at address P is called Argument data can be passed to the custom macro program Format G65P L argument Explanation P number of the program to be called U im O e um 9 3 3 e L repetition count 1 by default 1 to 9999 can be specified Argument Data passed to the macro Its value is assigned to the corresponding local variables Program Data argument Custom macro Data argument assigned to 00001 09010 G90 GO X50 Y50 gt e G01 G42 Xe T 2 F 500 GU 2 AL EA local variables 1 and 2 G65 P9010 450 B20 L3 4 1 He zm W99 Argument specification two types of argument specification are available Argument specification it uses letter other than G L O N and P once each In repeated specification the last one prevails Argument specification Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable number number number 4 5 Note Addresses that need not to be specified can be omitted Local variables corresponding to an omitted address are set to null Argument specification Il Uses A B C and li Ji Ki i is 1 10 and automatically decides the argument specification type according to the letters and the sequence Uses A B C once each and uses J and K up to ten times Eris specification Address Variable number Ka H2 A E C la d4 Ks la Jo Ka y c3 cC i 130 Chapter 5 Macro Program
359. if the product type is inconsistent with the order there is short of accessories or product damage in delivery gm Connection Only qualified persons can connect the system or check the connection The system must be earthed its resistance must be less than 4 O and the ground wire cannot be replaced by zero wire Connection must be correct and firm to avoid the product to be damaged or other unexpected result Connect with surge diode in the specified direction to avoid the damage to the system owitch off power supply before pulling out plug or opening electric cabinet m Troubleshooting owitch off power supply before troubleshooting or changing components Troubleshoot and then startup the system when there is short circuit or overload Do not switch on or off it frequently and an interval is 1 minute at least after the system is powered on again M Gr 4d Bx Tz GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual IV Announcement This manual describes various items as much as possible However operations allowable or unallowable can not be explained one by one due to so many possibilities that may involve with so the contents that are not specially stated in this manual shall be considered to be unavailable Warning Please read this user manual and a manual from machine builder completely before installation programming and operation do operate the system and machine according to user manuals otherwise it may damage the
360. igns two states When editing spaces Press O to switch copy Insert state are automatically added delete programs Special signs cannot be input to identify the words ds Macro editing space are not Input as a letter O Special signs can be state automatically added input eo Explanations 1 Angular unit The angular units of function SIN COS ASIN ACOS TAN and ATAN are degree For example 90 30 means 90 5 degree 2 ARCSIN i ASIN j 148 Chapter 5 Macro Program i the solution ranges are as indicated below when the NAT bit of parameter No 520 is set to 0 270 90 when the NAT bit of parameter No 520 is set to 1 90 90 ii when the j is beyond the range of 1 to 1 P S alarm is issued iii a constant can be used instead of the j variable 3 ARCCOS i ACOS j i the solution ranges from 180 0 ii when the j is beyond the range of 1 to 1 P S alarm is issued iii a constant can be used instead of the j variable ES A O Q Q gt Q 4 ARCTAN Zi ATAN Zj Zk i Specify the lengths of two sides and separate them by a slash The solution ranges are as follows When the NAT bit of parameter No 520 is set to 0 0 360 Example when 41 ATAN 1 1 is specified 1 225 When the NAT bit of parameter No 520 is set to 1 180 180 Example when 1 ATAN 1 1 is specified 1 135 ii A constant can be used instead of the j
361. indle positioning function is realizable in the speed mode of the servo spindle The spindle rotary output is cancelled in the spindle exact stop The spindle exact stop id cancelled in the spindle rotary output After the spindle positioning signal STAO is output the alarm A0 4 COIN X5 2 is detected overtime in spindle positioning will be issued if the completion signal COIN is not detected at the time set by DT14 11 2 19 External MPG Control e Related signal Signal Significance Pin out C NC types No Diagnosis External MPG X axis selection CN31 5 External MPG Y axis selection CN31 6 m Input EHDZ External MPG Z axis selection CN31 8 X6 2 Ke 9 signal EMPO External MPG increment x1 CN31 9 X6 3 ol x EMP1 External MPG increment x10 CN31 22 X6 4 EMP2 External MPG incrementx100 CN3123 X6 5 e Function description The standard ladder diagram supports external MPG of 3 axis X Y Z PSG 100 05E L ZSSY2080 external MPG can be matched Please refer to the related data for the wiring of the MPG 11 2 20 Cs Axis Switching eo Related signals 436 Appendix Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC CNC type No State Diagnosis Input VPO Spindle speed output signal of CN15 5 X5 0 signal position state Output VP Spindle speed position switch signal CN15 20 Y5 0 signal M14 CS axis switches from the speed to Control the position command M15 CS axis switches from the p
362. ined so the alarm is then generated circular arc data error in cutter compensation C b The example for a non circle may occur Tool center path P2 Programmed path NO Program example NO G90 GOO X 50 Y 50 Z50 N1 G01 G41 X0 YO D1 F800 N2 G02 X50 R25 The P1 and P2 are the transit point of tool compensation as the left figure shown wherein the u r is 170 Chapter Cutter Compensation compensation radius This is a normal treatment mode for the straight line to circular arc Path when two points are the same one Path in normal treatment mode esame path N27 7 r y N1 Pe U im O e a 9 3 3 e The alarm may occur in terms of the following program NO G90 GOO X0 YO ZO N1 G01 G41 X0 YO D1 F800 without moving originally start N2 G02 X50 R25 Because the N1 block does not a movement namely it equals to the two same points The transit points P1 and P2 are performed based on the treatment of two same points The path of two same points so the circular arc path cut by this transit point obviously differs from the actual path to be machined in this case the circular arc data error in cutter compensation C may alarm c In the calculation of arc cutter compensation C this alarm may issue if the compensation radius D is modified Tool center path G41 Programmed path NO Program example NO G90 GOO X 50 Y 50 Z25 N1 G01 G41 XO YO D1 F800 N2 G02 X50 R25
363. ined after positioning point R plane Z 130 0 R 97 0 P30 F70 returned N017 G99 X1050 0 9 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned N018 G98 Y 450 0 10 hole is machined after positioning initial plane returned N019 GOO XO YO M5 Reference point return the spindle stops NO20 G49 Z250 0 Tool length compensation cancellation NO21 G43 ZO H31 Tool length compensation at initial plane NO22 S10 M3 opindle starts N023 G85 G99 X800 0 Y 350 0 11 hole is machined after positioning point R plane Z 153 0 R47 0 F50 returned NO24 G91 Y 200 0 12 and 13 are machined after positioning point R plane Y 200 0 returned N025 G00 G90 X0 YO M5 Reference point return the spindle stops NO26 G49 ZO Tool length compensation cancellation NO27 M30 Program stops 3 25 Absolute and Incremental Commands G90 and G91 E O e Q 9 3 3 e Format G90 Absolute command G91 Incremental command Function There are two kinds of modes for commanding axis offset one is absolute command the other is incremental command The absolute command is programmed by coordinate value of the terminal position by the axis movement The incremental command is directly programmed by the movement value of the 108 Chapter 3 G Command axis They are separately specified by G90 and G91 commands Example start point A 40 0 100 0 The above movement is programmed by absolute and in
364. ing please check in Ladder gt PLC that X5 2 signal is in position If it is not in position please check the machine tools electric or connections to the servo spindle 3 if the orient position is not exact please set the parameter corresponding to the servo spindle For details please see to the operations of the servo spindle B Start the motor of ATC arm Before debugging and starting the motor of ATC arm whether the spindle is in the safe position or spindle is in the tool change position should be made sure If the spindle is not in the safe position ATC arm will hit against it and be damaged If there is a tool in the spindle first implement spindle orientation function and make sure that the orientation can make ATC arm accomplishes clamping the tool or the tool will be damaged The system has a protection mechanism when the ATC arm is started 1 to let spindle orientate and back to NO 2 reference position to debug please set parameter K11 2 to 0 2 if the current toolcase is fallen to ensure the tools will not drop to debug set K11 4 to 1 3 the ATC arm changes the tool and is back to situ and if the spindle releasing clamping tool detection needed to debug please set K11 3 to 1 Conditions permitting the parameters cannot be changed but if they changed during the debugging please reset them later During the debugging input M68 tool change motor the 1 time catching tool M69 tool change motor the 2 time catching tool M
365. ing please observe X2 0 or X1 7 in Ladder gt PLC is in position or not If not please check the machine tools electric B Auto spindle releasing clamping tool When test the degree of tightness of the spindle please make sure that there is no tool in spindle to avoid tool damage In AUTO or MDI mode and spindle stopped spinning input M54 spindle releasing tool or M55 spindle clamping tool function then press CYCLE START key If the following situations happen 1 illeage M code alarming please check K11 5 parameter is open or not 2 if the releasing or clamping command has been input but there is no output about the tightness Please observe Y2 0 outputted or not in Ladder gt PLC If it is outputted please check the machine tools electric and whether the motor controlling spindle releasing clamping tool is started or not 3 if there is an overtime alarm when releasing clamping tool please observe X2 0 or X1 7 in Ladder gt PLC is in position or not If not please check the machine tools electric B Toolcase falling and rising Start toolcase falling or raising please make sure that the toolpot ends spinning or there may be gt D 5 Q x 443 gt o o D 5 Q x GSE 444 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual a danger The system has a control of this condition so when toolcase spinning the falling or rising action cannot achieve M65 toolcase falls M66 toolcase raises If it is
366. ing 3 level ON OFFE level level setting 4 level ON OFF setting Note in the operation bar means the operation sequence between two keys means the two keys are executed simultaneously Example E means the user firstly presses and then press owca means the user simultaneously press the two keys Parameter switch Program switch Automatic serial number OFF LJ MAP El E O Lo D um Q m O 229 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 230 Chapter 2 Power ON OFF and Safety Protection CHAPTER2 POWER ON POWER OFF and SAFETY PROTECTION 2 1 Power on Before GSK980MDc powers on the followings should be confirmed 1 The machine is normal 2 The power supply and the voltage comply with the requirements 3 The connection is right and fixed After GSK980MDc is turned the window is shown below O Lo D um Q r O Then GSK98MDc self detects and initializes After the system completes the self detection and the initialization the position page relative coordinate is displayed 2 2 Power off Before power off they should be confirmed 1 X axis Y axis Z axis the 4 axis the 5 axis of CNC stops 2 The miscellaneous function switches off such as the spindle and the water pump etc 3 Firstly cut off CNC power supply and then cut off machine power supply Note 2 About the oper
367. ing CNC System User Manual Increment system Linear axis coordinate data range ds Ye ees 1620 99999 999 99999 999 mm GSK Inch input G20 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch Au asc Metric input G21 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm i Inch input G20 099 99999 999 99999 inch As rotary axis is not involve in metric inch interconversion the unit of rotary axis coordinate data is deg The ranges of rotary axis coordinate data is the same as linear axis coordinate data ranges in metric system e Tool compensation data The unit of tool compensation data is determined by metric inch input system namely mm for metric input inch for inch input The range of tool compensation data is limited as 9999999 determined by inch input system and increment system It is smaller than command data Shown as follows Increment Tool compensation Tool compensation Input type system data unit data range Metric input tN ISB CIS B 39999999 999 G21 0 14 CIS EI x EE 9999 Metric input ty IS B CIS B 999 9999 G21 0 1p CIS Mz 99 99999 o Screw pitch error compensation data The unit and range of linear axis screw pitch error compensation data is codetermined by machine tool type and increment system Shown as following table U im O e um 9 3 3 e Linear axis screw pitch Linear axis screw pitch Machine tool Increment l error compensation data error compensation data type system yP y unit Me
368. ing clamping tool is started or not 4 when there is an overtime alarm when releasing clamping tool please observe X2 0 or X1 7 in Ladder gt PLC is in position or not If not please check the machine tools electric 5 when there is a releasing clamping tool key in system panel please open there switch of K12 0 parameter The release clamp tool keys in system panel and in machine should not be used at the same time for only one of them is valid to avoid disoperation B Auto spindle releasing clamping tool Please make sure there is no tool in spindle when test the degree of tightness of the spindle to avoid tool damage In AUTO or MDI mode when the spindle is still input M54 spindle releasing tool or M55 spindle clamping tool function press CYCLE START key When the spindle does not work out 1 when illegal M code alarm exists please make sure K11 5 parameter is open 2 when after being inputted the releasing clamping tool has no output please observe Y2 0 has an output or not in Ladder gt PLC If it do has please check the machine tools electric and make sure the motor starts the spindle releasing clamping tool or not 3 when there is an overtime alarm when releasing clamping tool please observe X2 0 or X1 7 in Ladder gt PLC is in position or not If not please check the machine tools electric B Spindle orientation accomplishment In MDI or AUTO mode starting M19 stands for spindle orientation accomplished When M19 can
369. int level G98 G99 Tool can be returned to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 and G99 during returning See the following figure Fig 3 47 Normally the initial hole machining is used by G99 the last machining is used with G98 The initial level will not be changed when the hole machining is done by G99 396 return to initial level j 5399 return to point E level ee le we Initial lewel E PR AS I l l l Point R Fig 3 47 Levels for initial and point R Note The initial point level is an absolute position for hole machining axis direction which is indicated from the canned cycle cancellation to start The middle hole returning to initial plane or plane R is determined by No 582 BRCH when the system executes continuous drilling holes 3 24 1 5 Canned cycle cancellation There are two ways for canned cycle cancel are listed below 1 Canceling the canned cycle with the G80 2 The canned cycle is cancelled by the G00 G01 G02 and G03 command in group 01 1 When the canned cycle is cancelled by the command G80 if the G00 G01 G02 and G03 of the 01 group are not specified then the reserved modal command G00 or G01 performs motion before using canned cycle For example N0010 G01 XO YO ZO F800 The modal command is G01 before entering the canned cycle N0020 G81 X10 Y10 R5 Z 50 Entering canned cycle N0030 G80 X100 Y100 Z100 The modal G01 command reserved before canned cycle per
370. internal running state and it can not be modified 5 1 1 Signal Diagnosis from Machine to CNC 0 0 0 O0 ESP DECS DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX CN616 CN6134 CN6133 CN61 12 CN61 32 CN61 4 p won Pol f ws e e address XDEC YDEC ZDEC DEC4 DEC5 Deceleration signal of X Y Z 4th 5th axes machine zero ESP Emergency signal TATTOO IES IS ES GA p LC fixed X3 5 address SKIP Skip signal 5 1 2 Axes Moving State and Data Diagnosis Signal of CNC ENX ENS The singnal that X Y Z 4th 5th axis is enabled Ii SETX SET5 axis pulse prohibited signal 5 N et D T le DROX DRO5 Output of X Y Z 4th 5th axis moving direction TDRX TDR5 Direction of X Y Z Ath 5th axis moving path 1 positive O negative 0 0 0 8 PCX PC5 Zero point signal of X Y Z 4th 5th axis 7 0 0 9 ALMX ALM5 ALam signal of X Y Z 4th 5th axis Handwheel speed data pindle feedback data Spindle feedback data 0 0 1 3 Prima spindle analog voltage output 363 Ii uonejejsu C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 0 0 4 6 Secondary spindle analog voltage output 5 1 3 MDI Panel Keys Diagnosis DGN 016 DGN 022 are the diagnosis messages of MDI keypad keys When pressing a key in the operation panel the corresponding bit displays 1 and O after releasing this key If it displays reversely it means there is
371. ion 1 In the specified G66 block only argument is passed and macro modal call will not be executed 2 Macro modal call can only be executed in the blocks with GOO G01 G02 and G03 3 No macro program can be called in a block which contains a code such as miscellaneous function that does not involve movement along an axis 4 G65 and G66 should not be specified at the same time 5 Multiple macro programs cannot be called in G66 block 6 As with G65 G66 should be specified prior to arguments and P e Sample program gt G65 call bolt hole circle Create a macro program for machining holes on a circle The radius is start angle is A holes interval is B holes number is H the center of the circle is X Y Commands can be specified in either the absolute or incremental mode To drill in the clockwise direction specify a negative value for B 131 G EsSsIN CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual radius I U im O e um 9 3 3 e Format G65 P9100 Xx Yy Zz Rr li Aa Bb Hh X X coordinate of center point absolute or incremental 24 Y Y coordinate of center point absolute or incremental 25 Z Hole depth 226 R Coordinates of an rapid approaching point 18 F Cutting feedrate 9 I Circle radius 4 A Drilling start angle 1 B Incremental angle clockwise when negative value is specified 2 H Number of holes 11 Macro call 00002 G90 G00 X0 YO Z100 G65 P9100 X100 Y50 R30
372. ion Ne0255 in the compensation table the compensation value for the 2 section is set by the position No0254 in the compensation table and the compensation value for the Nth section is set by the position N90256 N in the compensation table The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of screw pitch error origin lt begins to compensate the position No255 in the compensation table from the machine zero So the screw pitch error compensation can only be done in the negative moving of the machine zero coordinate system x 204 259 254 255 Setting C l ont mM T aoe UA 0 9 5 0 Machine p coordinate oo system om 30 000 20 000 10000 c Reference point The compensation point 254 corresponds to a point moving 10 000 in negative direction from the reference point There is a compensation point every 10 000 distance Therefore set an offset value moving from 0 to 10 000 at compensation point 255 set an offset value moving from 10 000 to 20 000 at offset point 254 At compensation point N set an offset value moving from N 256 x compensation interval to N 255 x compensation interval The above is the example of following compensation interval errors Ii A D 9 Compensation interval Compensation value Machine l Drive unit current Drive unit current Compensation Compensation command pulses command pulses coordinate SEN
373. ion coefficient data parameter No16 355 Ii T esp D et O C GERK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Q Pulse volume motor rotation angle for a pulse L Lead mm O Min input command unit of CNC 0 001 mm or 0 0001mm ZM Gear teeth of lead screw ZD Gear teeth of motor If the electronic gear ratio numerator is greater than the denominator the allowed CNC max speed will decrease For example the data parameter Ne015 CMRZ 2 Ne016 CMDZ 1 the allowed Z axis max speed is 8000mm min If the electronic gear ratio numerator is not equal to the denominator the CNC positioning precision will decrease For example when the data parameter Ne015 CMRZ 1 and Ne016 CMDZ 5 the pulse is not output as the input increment is 0 004 but a pulse is output if the input increment is up to 0 005 In order to ensure the CNC positioning precision and match with digit servo with electronic gear ratio function it is suggested that the CNC electronic gear ratio is set to 1 1 or the electronic gear ratio calculated is set to the digital servo When machining with the step drive choose the drive unit with the step division function as far as possible and properly select mechanical transmission ratio The 1 1 electronic gear ratio should be ensured to avoid too large difference between the numerator and the denominator of the CNC gear ratio Calculation formula of drive unit Parameter 12 13
374. ion signal high level for machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal low level for machine zero return 3 2 17 Backlash compensation CPF7 CPFO CPF7 Setting values of backlash compensation pulse frequency Set frequency 2 xCPF7 2 xCPF6 2 xCPF5 2 xCPF4 2 xCPF3 2 xCPF2 2 xCPF1 CPFO Kpps BDEC BDEC 1 Backlash compensation type B the compensation data are output by ascending type and the set frequency is invalid 0 Backlash compensation type A the compensation data are output by the set frequency by bit parameter No 010 or 1 8 of it BD8 1 Backlash compensation is done by the 1 8 of the set frequency 0 Backlash compensation is done by the set frequency ZNIK 1 Direction keys locked during zero return homing continues to end by pressing direction key Once 0 Direction keys unlocked but should be held on during zero return 0 0 3 4 Each axis backlash offset Setting range 0 2000 Unit 0 001mm 354 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging CHAPTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGING The trial run methods and steps at initial power on for this GSK980MDc are described in this chapter The corresponding operation can be performed after the debugging by the following steps 4 1 Emergency Stop and Stroke Limit This GSK980MDc system has software limit function it is suggested that the stroke limit switches are fixed in the positive or negative axes for hardware limit The connection is shown in follows The cha
375. ion time constant in manual feed 2 4 3 MPG Step Feed MPG feed This GSK980MDc can move positively or negatively in X Y Z 4th or 5th axis by current increment in the MPG mode Only one of the axis can be moved at one time Step feed This GSK 980MDc can move positively or negatively for X Y Z 4th or 5th axis by current increment in the Step mode One of the axis can be moved only at one time Only one mode is effective for the MPG or step mode at one time it is up to Bit3 of CNC bit parameter No 001 This NC offers 4 steps 0 001mm 0 01mm 0 1mm and 1mm MPG STEP increment The actual MPG STEP increment series the selection of increment and current effective axis or the like are defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder Related parameter Data parameterNo 041 for initial or terminal speed of exponential acceleration or deceleration in manual feed Data parameter No 042 for exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant of manual feed 2 4 4 Automatic Acceleration or Deceleration This GSK980MDc performs automatically acceleration or deceleration in order to achieve the smooth transition of the speed at the beginning of the axis movement or before the movement stops this will diminish the impact when the movement is start or stop This GSK980MDc adopts kinds of acceleration or deceleration as follows Rapid traverse linear type front acceleration or deceleration Cutting fee
376. is ooocccccoooncccccoooconconancnnnonanonnnonanoncnnnnnnnnos 309 2 9 Connection Or spi die PO di do 309 2 3 1 Demno orolga sss Ada 309 29 2 pinale Zero SIGMA orante tz 310 PACEME A E Pe Cd TN EN 310 2 3 4 Connection of Spindle interface and Servo Spindle eeeseseeessssse 310 23 90 96 SIgral EXD AtTallOl isaac Dieli bofodiss 311 2 9 5 EXPlanations 1ObALMS X 5 8 omic Gs Sesto E a deca 311 24 CONNECTION to opindle Encode ouis ost Moa uso eaa iii 311 2 4 1 Spindle Encoder Interface Definition cccooonccccconnonccconnoncnconnonconannononnannncnonannnnnss 311 242 ighal EX DIAN ALON sedet qo dicssa Save da teat toute sto deve autos euadere gute A 311 2 4 3 Connection of Spindle Encoder Interface ooccccccocccnccconccnnoconccnnononcnnnnnnncnnnnnanennnos 312 25 Conneclomnto THandwLheel 2 5 4 Desc te treu aiii 312 2 5 1Handwheel Interface Definition ssec 312 252 SIGMA EX DIAN Neira add lince 313 2 6 Connection of GSKISOMDOTO PG iioii i 313 2 6 1 Communication Interface DefinitiON oooccccccocncnccconnnnnonancnncnnanonnnnnanonnnnnanoncnnnananeos 313 2 6 2 Communication Interface Connection occcccoccccnccconncncononcnnnnnoncnnnonancnnnnnancnnnnnannnnnnnanonnss 313 2 7 Connection of Power Interface uea a 314 ANE oo 314 SN 316 232 OUIDUP Igel iie a e 317 As 318 CHA
377. is Control Logic ABPn 71 Output axis pulse by two right angle intersection phases need restart Ii 5 N e D T le 0 Output axis pulse by pulse and direction need restart PCMD 1 Axial output wave form is pulse 0 Axial output wave form is square 0 0 0 8 DIRn 1 Direction signal DIR is high level as each axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as each axis moves negatively 7 0 0 9 ALMn 1 each axis low level alarm signal 0 each axis high level alarm signal 0 0 1 9 CMRx each axis multiplier coefficient 343 Ii T e D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Setting range 1 32767 0 0 1 6 CMDx each axis frequency division coefficient Setting range 1 32767 7 77 3 SPD SPFD 1 Cutting feed stops if spindle stops 0 Cutting feed not stop after spindle stop SAR 1 Detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting 0 Not detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting THDA 71 Thread machining adopts exponential acceleration and deceleration 0 Thread machining adopts linear acceleration and deceleration VAL5 1 For 5 axis move key is positive is negative 0 For 5 axis move key is positive is negative VALA 71 For 4 axis move key Mis positive Nis negative 0 For 4 axis move key is positive is negative For Z axis move key is positive is negative For
378. is fixed address 419 GER CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK External toolpot back to zero BT40 pot turret en oa reme e a emm pt toolpot back put D MEE Co NK forward input m E ME NM Skip signal Hn fixed address address ar LTZP Z positive er EN 28 Suspens ion Description CN62 Symbol address E Dep oe pem 1 3 wr ee i OO sm soinae owroiston As A 8 Yor sPzb Spindle brake signal o vu eeu sorae mecrancager2 a e gt o o D 5 Q x GEN opindle mechanical gear 4 Y1 4 THOR Toolcase vertical toolpot forward output TVER toolcase horizontal toolpot BT40pot turret back ee Y2 0 TROT spindle releasing clamping BT40 potiturret tool output 420 Appendix Y2 1 Disk tools tool changer arm 30 THOT BT40 pot output motor CLPY Trkcolourindicator yellow CLPG Tricolour indicator green CLPR Tri colour indicator red 34 Y2 5 Total air valve in turret tool TPOU i Turret tools magazine output AAA a STAO Spindle directed output signal 38 TON E E Po 39 Ya2 E E Poo 40 Y3 3 The 2 spindle SFR2 The 2 spindle CW output P control 41 Y3 4 The 2 spindle SRV2 The 2 spindle CCW output j control v The 2 spindle SPZD2 The 2 spindle braking control PLC CN31 Symob Description Note EN Address 8 Xi EHDY External hand wheel Y selected 8 X amp 2 EHDZ Exemalhandwhe
379. is not changed 5 when M69 is implemented the tool No of the current tool in the spindle will change with tool in current toolcase and then update the display of the current tool 6 the setting value of data parameter 5026 must be consistent with the numbers of the toolcase in the toolpot 7 overall debugging the first time for testing the system should be in the mode of STEP and with no tools During the test please press RESET immediately when find the ATC arm after back to the reference point changing tools in not correct position where will crush the system Then reset the reference point of tool change to avoid machine damage 11 2 24 Turret Tool Magazine eo Related signals 447 gt D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE HE EA type State Diagnosis Spindl ing clamping tool JOGT bs aie al CN61 14 X15 turret control TRCH Spindle releasing oe in position CN61 16 x17 T detection input Spindle clamping tool in position Signal TECH i CN61 29 X2 0 turret detection Spindle orientation accomplishment turret COIN nett CN15 08 X5 2 output Toolpot motor spinning CCW signal Spindle releasing clamping tool Y2 0 o Related parameter Pair Hare E E APCH 1 Don t test the cylinder pressure is too low or not 0 Test the cylinder pressure is too low or not REFP z1 actions of manipulator to detect the reference point and spindle orientation signal
380. is par Setting range 99999999 99999999 moreover it isn t zero 6 0 4 4 Call starting codes of M code of the subprogram Setting range 3 8999 6 0 4 5 Call the starting program No of a subprogram through M code Setting range 0 9999 6 0 4 6 The quantity of M code of the called subprogram Setting range 0 8000 When specify several subprograms call based on the M code at one time set by data parameters No6044 No6045 No6046 This call is invalid when the data parameter is set to O 342 Chapter 3 Parameter Example When data parameters Ne6044 2000 Ne6045 300 Ne6046 100 are set M2000 O300 M2001 O301 M2002 O302 M2099 O399 Specify the subprogram call of the above listed 100 groups Note 1 If the system satisfies the following conditions the calls based on this setting are invalid The value exceed the data scope is set in parameter 2 When No6045 N26046 1 gt 9999 2 M execution explanations Set called M range Execution result M00 M01 M02 M29 M30 M98 M99 The system executes basic M function instead of M calling M9000 M9999 Call a macro program and the called program number is the command value of M code Other M codes ae system FARGUES M calling subprograms instead of basic M function 8 0 1 0 Setting the PLC control axis DI DO channel 1 4 of each axis Setting range 0 4 When set to 0 the channel is invalid 3 2 Parameter Description by Function Sequence 3 2 1 Ax
381. is valid 0 4th or 5th rel coor cycle func is invalid RABx 1 4th or 5th rotates according to symbol direction 0 4th or 5th rotates according to nearby rotation ROAx 1 4th or 5th abs coor cycle func is valid 0 4th or 5th abs coor cycle func is invalid 3 2 13 Increment system 0 o t1 ACS 1 Analog voltage control of spindle speed 0 Switching control of spindle speed HWL 1 MPG mode 0 Step mode ISC 1 Increment system IS C 0 0001mm 0 00001 inch 0 Increment system IS B 0 001mm 0 0001inch 353 Ii 5 Y e D T le Ii T e 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 3 2 14 PLC axis control 0 6 5 0 PLA 1 PLC axis control is valid 0 PLC axis control is invalid PRPD 1 PLC axis rapidly uses input value 0 PLC axis rapidly uses input parameter 8 0 1 0 Setting the PLC control axis DI DO channel 1 4 of each axis Setting range 0 4 When set to O the channel is invalid 3 2 15 M codes calling subprograms 6 0 4 4 Call starting codes of M code of the subprogram Setting range 3 8999 6 0 4 5 Call the starting program No of a subprogram through M code Setting range 0 9999 6 0 4 6 The quantity of M code of the called subprogram Setting range 0 8000 3 2 16 Metric and Inch DECS SCW 1 Inch output inch system valid after repower 0 Metric output metric system valid after repower DECn 1 Decelerat
382. ition CN61 29 X2 0 detect THOV Motor controlling ATC arm of pot tool CN61 30 X2 1 magazine overloaded TTOV ATC arm motor overloaded CN61 31 X2 2 TZIN Back to 0 control signal CN61 35 X2 6 TCWI Toolpot CW input CN61 38 X3 1 TCCWI Toolpot CCW input CN61 39 X3 2 Panel change tool key X22 0 spindle releasing clamping tool control THOR toolcase vertical output CN62 13 Y1 4 TVER toolcase horizontal output CN62 14 Y1 5 Output TCW Toolpot motor CW CN62 15 Y1 6 fal TCCW Toolpot motor CCW CN62 16 Y 1 7 TROT releasing tool output CN62 29 Y2 0 THOT ATC arm output motor CN62 30 Y2 1 Tool change indicator Y19 0 o Related parameter TTCM 1 when ATC arm is in situ close the axis feed signal 0 when ATC arm is not in situ do not close the axis feed signal APCH 1 Don t need to test cylinder pressure is too low or not 0 Test the cylinder pressure is too low or not REFP 1 Detect reference point of ATC arm action and spindle orientation signal 0 Do not detect reference point of ATC arm action and spindle orientation signal TDLC 1 Do not detect whether spindle releasing tool or not when tool changing 0 Detect whether spindle releasing tool or not when tool changing 439 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE YDDL 1 Detect whether toolcase is fallen or not when toolpot spinning 0 No detecting whether toolcase is fallen or not when toolpot spinning ELDH 1
383. itional Axes in IS A Increment SySteM cooonccnccccccnncccnccnnccnnconnononcnnnononcnnnonannnnnonancnnnos 12 ORMAPTER 2 MSTEGODES uti a iUSua teats 13 2 1 M Codes Miscellaneous FUNCION uei eise Deer aue In enu Cena geec see ta tire reat otio tuu enean du dU 13 2 NA zqebolaceeriiutn c Ra 13 2 1 2 Rigid Tapping Designation M29 ccccccsecccseeecseeecceeeceeseeceusecsueeceueecsueessaseseueessaeesseess 13 2 Wu MONON AUN M 3O ai RC Dp 14 2 124 S bprogram Gall MIE vecina ill 14 2 1 5 Helturn rom subprogrami MIO issus oceiepu e ecu So EE PE Ras tre dio eed e UE epe EA 14 2 1 6 Macro Program Call M9000 M999 89 coccccccnoccncccccccnncccoccnnncnoccnnononcnnnononnnnnononcnononannnnnonaness 15 2 1 7 Program SII tits 16 2 2 SPINS FUNCION NETS NL 16 2 2 1 Spindle Speed Switch Value Control esses 16 2 2 2 Spindle Speed Analog Voltage Control cccccccccnncccoccnnccconcnnononcnonononcnnnononcnnnonancnnnonanons 16 2 2299 pdle OVE MGS Mee EP 17 2 3 TOOL FUNCION suos ut uetus rd dido 17 O et I HE 17 2 4 1 Cutting Feed G94 G95 F command occccccccccnncccoccnnccnoccnnnnonncnnononcnnnononnnnnnnnannnnnnnannnnnnnanos 17 242 Manual A undo irc Mi tacca cuta tegi ien E inca graue dieu 20 24 3 MPG SID ESO is cte Erection O a e 20 2 4 4 Automatic Acceleration or Deceleration oonccconcccccncconnncncncnnnnononcnnnnnnnonrnnnnnnonnnnoncnonnnos 20 CHAPTER SG COMMAND 00 S 23 eco A 23 3 1 1 Modal Non
384. ke the indicator go out and the rapid traverse is invalid it enters the Manual feed mode Note 1 Before machine zero return the validity of manual rapid traverse is set by the ISOT of the bit parameter No 012 Uv Note 2 In Edit or MPG mode LY key is invalid 225 O Lo D um Q F O O Lo D um Q r O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR 3 2 Feedrate Override Adjustment 3 2 1 Manual Feedrate Override Adjustment MW 96 4 F OVERRIDE W00 F OVERRIDE Mo In Manual mode the addition or reduction key in OVERRIDE can be pressed to modify the Manual feedrate override and the override has 16 levels The relation of the feedrate override and the feedrate is as the following table Feedrate override 95 Feedrate mm min 0 2 0 3 2 3 5 0 10 20 30 40 1 9 50 12 6 20 70 32 80 50 e 79 Note There is about 2 fluctuating error for the data in the table 3 2 2 Manual Rapid Override Adjustment roa ruao Tixo Tuxt000 In the manual rapid traverse WF Ves w50 w10 can be pressed also by VWF 25 faxo DET key with the respective override FO 25 50 10096 to modify the Manual rapid override and there are 4 gears of FO 25 50 100 for the override FO is set by data parameter No 024 3 2 3 Spindle Override Adjustment In Manual mode if the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage output the spindle speed may be adjusted
385. l Fal Fian Faai Ead ja Fani Eal ji Eni Ean Fal Fan E a z47 lou Eu for en Cei 3 JTA CONH DCUEH D 4 PD das COMNDSIERD 4 F Ex d N 00000000000 3 ox co o e o I 3 Ha to J2 cn15 2 Neeeococcccccccce N J1 gt cN1 y Ss A J3 gt cn21 Las LA EN Y Circuit diagram is as follows 379 gt D 5 Q x 84 IK 1 IK 1 M0 3 GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GR CNC he ec Le GE Fe be oe Lz Oz Gil El zl gl CRHz1 ce tod Uhr d Hd DAd 0 0 Zd On kr PD AT PD ETE HO E THIS J1B CH1 CO FF eb LF E se LE qe GE FE DEN ee LE de JIC CH1 SPINOLE 2 ar GE PE er Dh LE Oe Bl sl Ll al 2l Pl J cui m SPINDLE OUTPUT a LT aj i c a ac ue gm Pm os I Gaa EL O py El CON 01 H ma TF We am FP al c a en FHSS x 51 d SPINDLE INPUT Js E d JHJ 6 3 MCTO5 1 MCTO5 consists of MCTO1B and MCTO1B WW aun p A DA All VA DD d CAL A Xx ESPA EX YS i Pe calle a Za y DA XA 44 T XA CDA E UC Da V IY AI E Ny KN LS CN M Sr SY ay J p DA d AT E EIA KJ K VA IS bd ANN x a
386. l Point Z Related Explanation The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value is reserved as the canned cycle modal value 3 24 2 12 Boring Cycle G89 Format G98 G99 G89 X Y R Z P F L Function This cycle is used to bore a hole normally This cycle performs a dwell at the bottom of the hole the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole at the rapid traverse rate Explanation For the command explanation of the canned cycle see the table 3 2 Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 For dwell time P if the P is specified 5 Cutting feed to the point R plane 6 Returning to the initial point level if it is G98 Command Path G89 G98 Mode for G89 G99 Mode for returning to initial plane returning to the point R plane Sa a u a 2t Initial level Point R level Point R Point R dwell Point Z Point Z Related Explanation 85 D x O Q Q 3 gt Q GSK C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 1 G89 Boring cycle is basically same as the G85 a dwell is applied at the bottom of a hole Dwell time is specified by P if it is not specified the dwell is not applied the command operation is same to the G85 2 The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal val
387. l of spindle speed HWL 1 MPG mode 0 Step mode ISC 1 Increment system IS C 0 0001mm 0 00001 inch 0 Increment system IS B 0 001mm 0 0001 inch 0 0 0 2 SUP 1 Tool movement of cutter compensation c in start up and cancel is B type 0 Tool movement of cutter compensation c in start up and cancel is A type A type mode output vertical compensation vector at the next block after start up or at the cancelled previous block as follows Tool center pathitoo nose center path Ii y 641 Programmed path j A B type mode output compensation vector and intersection point vector being vertical with start up block cancelled block as follows 5 N et D T le Tool center pathitoa nose center path Programmed path Wp NRC 1 Tool nose radius compensation valid 0 Tool nose radius compensation invalid D R 1 Tool offset D is diameter value 0 Tool offset D is radius value 327 Ii T ep 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 0 0 0 3 iid PCOMP 21 Screw pitch error compensation valid 0 Screw pitch error compensation invalid DECS SCW 1 Inch output inch system valid after repower 0 Metric output metric system valid after repower The functions of metric and inch system There are two kinds of input and output units for CNC numerical control system metric unit millimeter mm and English unit inch Output increment unit is set
388. l retraction 3 Direction of tool retraction in final boring cycle is determined by positive negative X axis or Y axis 4 M commands selection of spindle orientation is determined by No 4960 M commands are set to complete the spindle orientation according to the current ladder 3 24 2 4 Drilling Cycle Spot Drilling Cycle G81 Format G98 G99 G81 X Y R Z F L Function This cycle is used for normal drilling Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole in rapid traverse Explanation For the command explanation of canned cycle see the Table 3 2 Cycle Process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level position at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of the hole 4 Returning to the initial point or point R plane at rapid traverse according to the G98 or G99 Command Path 78 Chapter 3 G Command 58 15950 Return to the 501 6991 Return to the R initial plane at the rapid traverse point plane at the rapid traverse Initial level Point R level U a O a um o 3 3 e A UL EA Point Z Related Explanation The command Q or P is disabled in this cycle but its value will be saved as canned cycle modal value 3 24 2 5 Drilling Cycle Counter Boring Cycle G82 Format G98 G99 G82 X Y R Z P F_ L Function Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole Hole depth pre
389. l value depending on the specified G code G90 or G91 Main program O2200 02100 302 G69 G17 XO YO G91 G68 XI YU R45 G90 G42 GOL ZU Y 10s GOl F200 HOL G90 W98 P2100 X4 142 1108 P2100 1100 AU Y 7 071 G40 Nits POFZ200 G90 00 20 YU WIS Wiggs U a O a um o 3 3 e D A O Q Q 3 gt Q G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Programme d path When offset 15 applied T Note Because the radius compensation setting and canceling of the above program are done in the subprogram the whole workpiece will be over cut if B type tool starting and retraction of radius compensation C mode is used In order to compensate the whole rotated workpiece figure with radius compensation function when the above program is in execution please set state parameter NO 002 SUP to 0 otherwise above mentioned effects will not be achieved 3 24 Compound Cycle Command 3 24 1 Brief for Canned Cycle Generally the canned cycle is a machining movement completion from one block with G function to the completion of multi block specified Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs With a canned cycle a frequently used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G function without canned cycles multiple blocks are needed and canned cycles can shorten the program to save memory 3 24 1 1 Canned cycle list Operation at the 6 i
390. ladder file list is selected the following figure arises MDI 50000 TAA HAA LADDER gt FILE LIST gt USB DIRECTORY u 00002 N00000 NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES 123 1d2 GSK980HC Test L 10 04 30 8A4B GSK980HCJU ix FH GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder IO TEST IOU Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE 773 i18 FZ E IO TEST PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE 773 ist 8 FZ E FILE GSK980MDc SeriesEN LD2 ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE THE FILE IN OVERWRITE CAN CANCEL s 10 34 43 A Juenom eeom o e gt 222 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display DATA Press to cancel the prompt line and suspend the copy operation Press E to remove the ladder which name is the same that of one in the U disk which is shown below MDI sBBBB TUB HAB LADDER gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00002 N00000 NAME LADDER VERSION NOTES GSK980MDc Serial2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VERE tb AZ A GSK980MDc Series 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc Y Standard Ladder IO_TEST_PLC Id2 2011 08 12 GSK980MDc MDc VE 773 ist 8 FZ E VERIFY CODE 2869 PILE SIZE 71 6 K MODIFIED TIME 2012 03 12 02 29 58 s 10 34 56 ic O PLC RUN gt 4 3 Delete ladder file Move the cursor to the ladder 5 PLC Id2 press save nid and the system prompt whether to delete the prompt as follows MDI sa00a TAA HAD LADDER gt FILE LIST gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00002 N00000 NAM
391. lanation G01 which is modal G command X Y Z 99999999 99999999xleast input increment X Y and Z axes which one of them can be omitted or all of them can be omitted When one of them is omitted it means that the coordinate value of start and end points are consistent The start and end points share the same position when they are omitted at the same time F command value is vector resultant speed of instantaneous rates in X Y and Z axes directions the actual feedrate is the product of override and F command value F command value is invariable after it is performed till the new one is executed The following G command with F command word uses the same function The value range is indicated as follows Command function G94 mm min G95 mm rev 1715000 0 500 Command path figure The linear interpolation is performed from point O to point A GO1XaYQG Zy Ff 3 U O Q um 9 3 3 e GSK C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual O is start point A is end point U A O Q Q 3 3 Q L 4a p y Fig 3 3 The feedrate specified by F is the tool movement speed along the line The speed of each axis is as follows Speed in X axis direction F xf Speed in Y axis direction F Pd Speed in Z axis direction F tx f Note The F initial default value is set by data parameter No 026 when the power is turned on 3 4 Arc and Helical Interpolation G02 G03
392. lationship as follows Gear l Gear 2 Gear 3 Gear gt o o D 5 Q x 5 al sg000 MO 3741 NO 3742 HO 3743 HO 3744 Assume data parameter S1 NO 3741 1000 NO 3742 2000 NO 374324000 NO 3744 5000 When spindle speed S 800 G28 1 0 G28 2 0 at gear 1 406 Appendix TELE TUNE 1000 G28 1 1 G28 2 0 at gear 2 v2 y19 4y 2000 G28 1 0 G28 2 1 at gear 3 U3 ou x10 22V 00 G28 1 1 G28 2 1 at gear 4 UA adn x10 21 6V 00 Output voltage value gt instruction value Of 11 Maximum speed at current gear eS 12 bit code R120 R010 F36 F37 R1202 R0102 F236 F237 output Through the gear shift treatment NC computes the spindle speed for every gear stage that is S 12 bit code signal R120 R010 0 4095 R1202 R0102 0 4095 outputs to spindle frequency converter and PLC The relationship between 10V voltage and S 12 bit code is as follow o ld bit code RIZO ROIO ls 2 LOW UV Identified output of S 12 bit code That whether S 12 bit code data R12 O R01 O R12 O 2 R01 O 2 computed by NC or 12 bit code input signal spindle motor speed instruction signalR 121 R011 R1212 R0112 appointed by PLC is used to identify the 1 2 spindle speed instructions decided by SIND SIND2signal G33 7 G35 7 When spindle speed outputted by PLC is chosen then spindle speed instructions are set by 12 bit code input signal evoltage offset After spindle speed instruction S 12 bit
393. le programs in CNC system a program can be selected by the following 4 methods 6 4 1 Search Method 1 Select Edit mode 2 Press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page 3 Press address key and key in the program No EJ 4 Press O or key the searched program will be displayed Note In Step 4 if the program does not exist a new program will be created by CNC system after EOB key is pressed 6 4 2 Scanning method 1 Select Edit or Auto mode 2 Press key to enter the PRG DISPLAY page 3 Press address key o 254 Chapter Auto Operation 4 Press LO or f key to display the next or previous program 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 to display the saved programs one by one 6 4 3 Soft Function Key Search 1 Select Edit or Auto mode PROGRAM Poe PL 2 Press ON and select PRG SEARCH 5 3 Input a program number following the address O EOB 4 Press Or 508 and the screen displays the searched program Note In Step 4 if the program does not exist a new program will be created by CNC system after EOB key is pressed 6 4 4 Select File by Using File List E 1 In local directory page Cin Edit or Auto mode as follows n EDIT 57452 182 HOA 9 PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00001 N01556 D TOTAL 3 SPACE 30 0 M USED 20 0 M IDLE 10 0 M e NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00003 9 00001 6 B 2012 03 19 00003 00002 788 B 2011 11 30 G74 G91 X10 Y10 710 R2 F2 M4 00003 55 B
394. le tapping can be performed by the peck rigid tapping High speed peck rigid tapping When the RTPCP of state parameter No 588 is set to 1 the high speed peck rigid tapping cycle is selected After positioning along the X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R then position to the place where specifies by C From point R cutting is performed with depth Q depth of cut for each cutting feed then the tool is retracted by distance d the retraction speed can be overridden When point Z has been reached the spindle is stopped and then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction The tool retracts to the point R the spindle stops If it is G98 state rapidly move to the initial position the Figure is shown below G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 i d back distance P d back distance U Initial level Initial level Spindle Spindle i orientation Point R orientation Point R Jn Jm A Q Point Z Standard peck rigid tapping When the RTPCP of state parameter No 588 is set to 1 the standard peck rigid tapping cycle is selected After positioning along the X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R then position to the place where specifies by C From point R cutting is performed with depth Q depth of cut for each cutting feed then the tool is retracted by distance d the retraction speed can be overridden The position is performed from
395. lection D Q10 T G18 7X plane selection 4 3 N00025 GOO XO YO 70 ENE Q O EDIT suada TAA HAA 1 N00015 GO X100 Y100 7100 G command function N 00020 F G140 Rectangle path serial punch in G110 X200 P CH 6 14 Y 200 U G141 Rectangle path serial punch in 7 200 V5 CCH W 20 G142 Circular path serial punch in CW B E G143 Circular path serial punch in C L CCH I 20 D2 J H K 10 H R 50 S Q10 T 3 N00025 GOO XO YO ZO 15 14 58 rrr ee FLT Shift Save Exit 3 Press ELM or press E and the cursor switches to G command menu as follows 261 GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual O Lo D um Q O 262 EDIT Saaaa TAA HAA Aided programming 00100 N00004 1 N800015 GO X100 Y100 7100 G command funct ion N 00020 F G110 X200 P G15 Polar coordinate command cancel c NM Y 200 U G16 Polar coordinate command mode Z 200 V5 G17 XY plane selection A 20 G18 7X plane selection B E G19 YZ plane selection C L G110 Round groove inner rough mill I 20 D2 CCW J H G111 Round groove inner rough mill K 10 H CH gt id 3 BUD NOISE Q 10 T cycle in CCW 3 N00025 GOB XO YO 70 CA ISTE a Finich VEN 15 15 16 ooo EEE A a a 4 Atthe moment execute G command menu including page up page down cursor up cursor down Move the cursor to G143 as follows EDIT SANAA TAA HAA
396. lection of the polar coordinate command G17 G18 or G19 G9n G90 specifies the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system from which a radius is measured G91 specifies the current position as the origin of the polar coordinate system from which a radius is measured IP Specify the addresses and values of selected plane for the polar coordinate system The first axis Radius of the polar coordinate The second axis Angle of the polar coordinate Corresponding axis for radius and angle of the polar coordinate on each plane The first axis radius The second axis angle The polar coordinate commands G15 G16 are G code of No 17 2 G15 is the initial state when the system power on Cancel the polar coordinate command after the program is finished or reset parameter NO 528 RSTP 1 3 Absolute command or incremental command G90 G91 can be used in polar coordinate radius and angle 4 when the polar coordinate radius is specified with the negative value it is taken as the positive to execute when the specified angle is positive the polar coordinate rotates counterclockwise of the 1st axis s 42 Chapter 3 G Command positive direction in the currently selected plane and when it is negative the polar coordinate rotates clockwise Set the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system When the polar coordinate command mode
397. less than 180 The arc radius which is less than 180 is specified by the positive value the arc radius which is more than 180 is specified by the negative value The radius is either positive or negative when the arc command is equal to 180 Example Arc less than 180 G91 G02 X60 0 Y20 0 R50 0 F300 0 Arc 0 more than 180 G91 G02 X60 0 Y20 0 R 50 0 F300 0 if a NS Start poen A R50 Example for the programming 35 GSK GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual D x O Q Q 3 gt Q To program the above paths using the absolute mode and incremental mode respectively 1 Absolute mode G92 X200 0 Y40 0 ZO G90 G03 X140 0 Y100 0 I 60 0 F300 0 G02 X120 0 Y60 0 l 50 0 Or G92 X200 0 Y40 0 ZO G90 G03 X140 0 Y100 0 R60 0 F300 0 G02 X120 0 Y60 0 R50 0 2 Incremental mode G91 G03 X 60 0 Y60 0 l 60 0 F300 0 G02 X 20 0 Y 40 0 1 50 0 Or G91 G03 X 60 0 Y60 0 R60 0 F300 0 G02 X 20 0 Y 40 0 R50 0 The feedrate of circular interpolation is specified by F command it is the speed of the tool along the arc tangent direction Note 1 10 JO and KO can be omitted but it is very necessary to input one of the addresses I J K or R or the system alarm is generated Note 2 The X Y and Z can be omitted simultaneously when the end and start points share same position When the center point is specified by address I J and K it is a 360 arc G021 F
398. leve Point R level Spindle co i p CC H F spindle cw Related Explanation 1 The F is tapping modal value the last tapping F value is taken when it is omitted or alarm will be generated if it does not exist 2 The metric or inch of the F value is determined by G20 metric or G21 inch 3 The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value will be reserved as canned cycle modal value Note When No 3720 spindle encoder s line or resolution is set to 0 the drilling hole is done by G74 without checking the encoder 3 24 2 3 Finish Boring Cycle G76 Command format G76X Y Z RQP FL X Y Positioning data of hole Z Hole depth Incremental value specifies distance between point R plane to the hole or absolute value commands coordinate values of hole bottom Incremental value specifies distance between point R plane to the hole or absolute value commands coordinate values of hole bottom Q Offset value of hole bottom P Pause time of hole bottom F Cutting feedrate L L means the quantity of hole from starting to the point set by G76 L means the times of drilling hole cycle at the current position A T1 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Command function Fine boring cycle is used to bore precise holes The tool leaves the workpiece when arriving at the hole bottom which avoid smooth of workpiece surface influenced by tool trace and reduces to damage the tool Cycle process 1 Rapi
399. licable DAPO3 or DAY series servo spindles products connected Cable usage Wiring diagram DAP03 DAY series spindle servo drive SERE 2 Le ssa as cw Us ens 24 soN ov 35 CoM T NI MEAE ria vemos SVC GND EA A Dis 35 SIGN ros 19 zour GND a Zour 7 come Metal shell is connected to shielding ayoos ejeui eut Z NIdGZ GLNO 0 JOOUUOD E N 5 IE jexoos ejeuigj eui e NIdbb LND 01 j29uu02 U UJ O U U D 3 D D o O O el D SUII E NIdGL LZNO O IE ZU TIE gt o o D 5 Q x 382 Appendix Signal line of the spindle Cable number 00 785l CNC spindle rigid tapping including speed position and speed position Applicable Cable usage l control with GS series economic servo products spindles connected Wiring diagram GS series economic spindle servo drive SRV Y5 2 22 rat TaP ys 1 6 GAIN 33 39 come I gt M lt ALM5 VPO X5 0 10 PSTO dl O 0 da jexoos ejeur eui e Nidy NO 01 j2euuo2 12 COIN SVC VCMD SVC GND VCMD ayoos ejeui aull ZNIdSGZ GLNO 0 JOOUUOD ULS ce 2 c 7 DR amp c pire 46 PC5 PAO 19 ome mo 39 Metal shell is connected to shielding IGN IGN AO AO BO yo9uUuOy 00 D 3 gt Y Le f E O 5 5 o a x ZO SUII E NIdGL LZNO O KN 5 6
400. listed in the same window y which can be distinguished by alarm number Press to roll the table line by line press ae to roll the table page by page The page is displayed as follows EDIT _ 4823 T33 HAB ALARM gt INFORMATION 00001 N04484 CNC ALM 1 CNC WARN NO PLC ALM NO PLC WARN NO ALM TYPE ALM NO 17 17 04 When an alarm or warn occurs upper of the page separately displays types and quantity of current alarm or warn which is shown below 195 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR CNC ALH 1 CNC WARN NO PLC ALM NO PLC WARN NO When PLC alarms or prompts an address information is displayed with black background in the information line CNC alarms or prompts the causes and troubleshooting are displayed with black background in the information line Remove alarm al is pressed to remove the alarm and some alarms are referred to causes and troubleshooting Note 1 When PLC alarms or prompts an address information is displayed with black background in the information line Note 2 CNC alarms or prompts the causes and troubleshooting are displayed with black background in the information line Note 3 No 0 No 3999 are CNC alarm numbers No 4000 No 4999 are CNC warning numbers No 5000 No 7999 are PLC alarm numbers and No 8000 No 9999 are PLC warning numbers Note 4 When parameters which is valid after power on are modified alarm can be r
401. lue can be modified after entering the parameter interface See details in Il Operation Chapter 9 5 4 Data Modification In the PRG STATE page before the inputted words will be executed if there is an error in inputted words press to cancel highlight state then program segment can be modified It may press key to clear all the words then input the correct words for example Z1000 will be inputted to replace Z100 in Section 5 1 of this chapter the steps are as follow L key the page is as follows MDI MDILOO000 INSERT GOO X50 Y5O 7100 1 press 58784 THB HAA MODAL INFORMATION POSITION 603 620 628 G30 G38 G69 ABSOLUTE G41 G88 G53 G13 G04 G62 X 37 450 663 Y 29 790 F12345 HO HOG L1 2025 DOQ T02 Z 3 314 11 57 37 PROGRAM Aided CONTENT roy mum CURRENT LOCAL DIR 242 Chapter 5 MDI Operation key the page is as follows MDI 00000 INSERT GOO X50 Y50 MODAL INFORMATION POSITION OE ee sem 5 0 by sequence the page is as follows AU 3 Press E 1 MDI 00000 INSERT GOO X50 Y50 71000 MODAL INFORMATION POSITION 4 At last press MDI O00000 POSITION MODAL INFORMATION 12 04 05 243 o Lo D Q O CESK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 5 5 Multi Line Program Running in MDI Mode 1 In MDI mode input multi line programs by EOB
402. m function for reference only The spindle override defined by QGSK980MDc standard PLC ladder diagram has 8 levels The spindle actual real time speed can be adjusted by using the spindle override key in the command speed range of 50960 12096 the spindle override will be memorized when the power is turned off Refer to the OPERATION of this manual for modification operation of the spindle override 2 3 Tool Function GSK980MDc tool function is controlled by ladder and compiling ladder can logic controlling dial tool magazine and turret tool magazine 2 4 Feeding Function 2 4 1 Cutting Feed G94 G95 F command Format G94F F0001 F8000 leading zero can be omitted for feedrate per minute mm min Command function The cutting feedrate is specified by mm min G94 is modal G command If the current mode is G94 that it needs no G94 any more 17 U e ta um 9 3 3 e GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK Format G95F_ F0 0001 F500 leading zero can be omitted Command function The cutting feedrate is offered by the unit of mm rev G95 is modal G command The G95 command can be omitted if the current mode is G95 When the CNC performs G95 F_ the cutting feedrate is controlled by feedrate command based on the multiplication of F command value mm rev and current spindle speed rev min The actual feedrate varies with the spindle speed The spindle cutting feedrate per revolution is specifie
403. m initial point level to the point R plane is short and it is necessary to machine serially or sometimes the spindle can not reach the specified speed before the hole machining operation for delaying the time the dwell block by G04 is inserted into each hole machining which is shown as follows Insert the dwell wait for the spindle speed reaches to the normal value I I I I I I I I pr a I I I I I ha ii L 1 y ur er a e e e eS SS o e U G86X Y ZR F G04 P For dwell time P without hole machining X Y The next hole is machined GOAP For dwell time P without hole machining X Y The next hole is machined G04 P For dwell time P without hole machining Sometimes this issue will not be considered according to different machine tool refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder 4 As stated above the canned cycle can also be cancelled only when G00 G03 codes are read So there are two cases expresses for 0 3 oo for canned cycle code will be shown when they share the same block with the canned cycle G code G Gau X Y Z R Q P F K For canned cycle Goo GF X Y Z R Q P F K The X Y and Z axes are moved by G the R P Q and K are disabled the F is stored The principle which the last G code is effective when G codes of same group share the same block is met by cases above 5 When the canned cycle and miscellaneous func
404. m will be generated For details refer to the following explanation c about arc data error in C type cutter radius compensation e When the end point for the programming arc is not on the arc When the end point for the programming arc is not on the arc the tool stops and the alarm information shows end point is not on the arc Two same points in the starting is shown an example Na Programmed path Tool center path N1 NO P1 NO G90 G00 X 50 Y 50 N1 G91 G1 G41 X0 YO D1 F800 without moving N2 G90 X0 YO N3 X50 N2 N3 Programmed path Tool center path P2 P1 NO The above mentioned program may occur the two same points when starting and the compensation may not perform The transit point P1 between NO and N1 and the transit point P2 between N1 and N2 are shared a same point NO G90 GOO X 50 Y 50 N1 G1 641 XO YO D1 F800 N2 G91 X0 YO without moving N3 X50 The last two same points may occur when starting at the last program in the case of the compensation has been performed The section without moving which is regarded as the movement approximates to the zero so it is necessary to maintain the compensation amount The transit point between N1 and N2 is P1 and the transit point between N2 and N3 is P2 P1 and P2 are shared a same point In the same way in the compensation mode if the two same points may occur the compensation value will be maintained in the retraction
405. me set by DT33 if gear shift is not completed then perform alarm A1 0 If gear shift is completed delaying for a time set by parameter DT32 gear shift time 2 then CNC outputs analog voltage set by parameterNO101 NO104 according to the current gear stage That gear shift process is completed Note 1 only the number of spindle revolutions is in the analog voltage control is the spindle auto gear shift function valid Note 2 if spindle function is invalid perform M41 M44 alarm Note 3 It needs checking in position signal that spindle gear shift function takes actions After having checked in position signal the gear shift function can complete gt D 5 Q x 11 2 4 Spindle Switching Volume Control e Related signal 427 C GERK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Signal Symbol Significance Pin out PLC C NC Type No State Diagnosis GEAR1 Spindle mechanical gear signal 1 CN62 9 Y1 0 Output GEAR2 Spindle mechanical gear signal 2 CN62 10 Y1 1 signal GEAR 3 Spindle mechanical gear signal 3 CN62 11 Y1 2 GEAR 4 Spindle mechanical gear signal 4 CN62 12 Y1 3 S01 Spindle gear signal 1 command signal S02 Spindle gear signal 2 command signal Command S03 Spindle gear signal 3 command signal Input S04 Spindle gear signal 4 command signal S00 Spindle gear signal cancel command signal e Control parameter o pas o op i F200 4 F address ACS 1 Analog volt
406. mmand word P2 can be omitted when the machine 2nd reference point is returned Explanation G30 which is a non modal G command X Xaxis coordinate for intermediate point Y Y axis coordinate for intermediate point Z Z axis coordinate for intermediate point One of the command address X Y and Z or all of them can be omitted see the following figure Command Fucton Machine nth reference point return for X axis Y and Z axes in the G30 Pn X original position G30 Pn Y Z Machine n reference point return for Y and Z axes X axis in the original position G30 3 axes in the original position the next block continued th X Y and Z axes return to the machine n reference point G30Pn X Y Z simultaneously Note 1 nis 2 3 or 4 in above table rd th ner and 4 reference points return Note 2 Deceleration and zero signals check are not needed when 2 3 is performed Command action process see the following figure an instance of machine 2 d reference point return 1 Positioning to intermediate point of the specified axis from current position at a rapid traverse rate from point A to point B 49 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q GSK C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 2 Positioning to the 2nd reference position set by data parameter No 1241 at the setting speed by data parameter No 31 from point B to point R2 3 When the reference point returns if the machine i
407. modal and Initial State seem Hmmm 25 312 m Ice A A ake neues A T 25 3 1 3 Related Den Nissan AAA 26 EE A A Em 26 3 2 Fal OSIMIOMIING GO UTER 30 33 Linear Interpolaton GO tata a o o que ola n asumen aco 31 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC User Manual 3 4 Arc and Helical Interpolation G02 GOB ccooooccnccncccnnccccccnncononnnncononnnnconononnnononennnnnonennnnnanennnnnaness 32 2S Dwell GOS mmm E 37 3 6 Gylindrical Interpolation GOZ esas dida 37 o Programmable Data Input G10 se i isa 41 9 7 1 Modifying Tool Compensation Data isis 41 3 7 2 Modifying a Workingpiece Coordinate SySteM ooooccccccncocccocccononoccnnconnnanccnncnnnanccnnccnnananons 41 3 7 3 Modifying an Additional Workpiece Coordinate System cccooccccccccnnccoconocononononcnnonanononos 42 3 8 Polar Coordinate Command G15 G16 errira a a a 42 3 9 Plane Selection Command G17 G18 and GlO ocooccnccncnncnncnncnncnncncnnncnnnnnnnnonconnonnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnns 45 3 10 Conversion of Inch and Metric G20 and G21 ocoooccncnnccnccnncnnccncnnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnrononorononnnnnonnnennnnnos 45 3 11 Reference Point RetUr O28 itio ipo ii Scias nus sau deUetas 46 3 Te netulmudrom helerenes POMO ia 47 3 13 The 2nd 3rd and 4th Reference Point Return G30 eee Hmm 48 8 14 SKID FUNCION Go I TT 50 3 15 Tool Nose Radius Compensation C G40 G41 and G42 coooccnccccnnccccnnccccnnnccnonocononnnnnanonononos 51 3 16 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 G
408. mode the similar start mode is divided into the previous two 169 U im O e a 9 3 3 e C GSN CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK same points and the last two same points e The alarm and corresponding explanation of Circular arc data error in cutter compensation C a The example of this alarm may occur in a circle Program example NO G90 GOO X 50 Y 50 Z50 N1 G01 G42 X0 YO D1 F800 N2 G02 150 N3 G91 G01 X 50 Y 50 N2 U im O e um 9 3 3 e Programmed path G42 Tool center path The transit point between straight line N1 and circular arc N2 is P1 the transit point between circular N2 and straight line N3 is P2 and the compensation radius is r in this case the circular after tool compensation is more than 360 The path after N9 block is inserted ded path XQ Tool center qf path after N9 block is not inserted After a block N9 G91 GO XO YO without moving is inserted between N1 and N2 in the above mentioned program the circular data error in cutter compensation C may alarm Because the point after N9 inserted which is equal to the one of N1 namely they are regarded as two same points The transit point P1 is performed treating the two same points the position of P1 is obviously differ from the above one which does not insert the N9 block So the cut circular arc path by this transit point is absolutely differing from the path to be mach
409. n chamfering function cannot be specified Circle corner data err Searched target program does not exist Appendix Alarm No in Alarm Message WAY g TYPE 2050 0 0 Parameter files open fail Use factory parameters 2051 0 0 Parameter load error Use factory parameters 2052 0 0 Data check error Reset area Operate after zero return 2053 0 EJ Data check error value reset and operate after zero return 2054 0 The modify parameter modify active by repowering 2055 0 Please switch on after finishing upgrading the system 2056 0 Working ladder is changed please switch on 2057 0 o Start with FLASH Confirm program 2058 0 Recovering backup parameter is complete Power on 2059 0 Upgrade par by serial port power on 2060 0 The current increment system has changed power on 2061 0 The increment system of 4th or 5th can t lower than the current increment system 2062 0 u Speed parameter is over permitted parameter range 2063 0 Speed parameter is over permitted parameter range The related parameter has mnt mmm mia men 2064 0 Without analog spindle control Parameters about Multi spindle can t be IN 2065 0 EN Writing data of ladder is wrong Refresh the working ladder 2066 0 O Initial tool number set by the user is greater than the Max tool number 2067 0 0 Max stroke set by the user exceeds the system permissible range 2068 0 Set position number of screw compensation error modify parameter No 3620 II ee 20
410. n GOO mode is founded 171 0 When cylindrical interpolation will be executed only one rotation axis paralleling Rotation angle is out of range 360 360 Result of calculation is above the Max amount to basic axis can t be set 172 0 Until cutter comp c has been canceled cylindrical interpolation can be founded or canceled 173 0 EN In current plane rotation axis of cylindrical interpolation is wrong 174 0 EN Under cylindrical interpolation illegal G code is defined 175 0 0 Under cylindrical interpolation mirror scale or rotation command is defined 176 0 When cylindrical interpolation or polar interpolation is valid radius of circle must Ki dll be defined with R 177 0 When cylindrical interpolation is valid tool length compensation can t be Kol EE rada 178 0 When cylindrical interpolation is valid basic axis paralleling to rotation can t be defined 179 0 0 In G95 mode cylindrical interpolation can t be executed 180 0 0 Cancelling axis of cylindrical interpolation is wrong 1810 0 Cylindrical interpolation will be founded again 185 0 EN When polar coordinate function is valid corner function can t be founded 186 0 In polar coordinate command mode G17 G19 cannot be specified to change planes 187 0 La In polar coordinate command mode G54 G59 cannot be specified to change planes 390 0 Kinmedenedor 3 0 5 limtdfmd aora 0 l1veitosmil OOOO 2080 0
411. n be selected by G54 G59 Explanation X New X axis absolute coordinate in current position 65 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q GSK C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Y New Y axis absolute coordinate in current position Z New Z axis absolute coordinate in current position These six workpiece coordinates are set by the distances workpiece zero offset from machine zero to each coordinate system origin Workpiece zero offse Machine zero Examples N10 G55 G90 GOO X100 0 Z20 0 N20 G56 X80 5 Z25 5 Rapidly positioning to workpiece coordinate system 3 X 80 5 Z 25 5 from workpiece coordinate system 2 X 100 0 Z 20 0 For example if N20 block is G91 it is incremental movement The absolute coordinates automatically become the coordinates in coordinate system G56 20 5 25 5 H20 131 M Mi X2 Z2 Heo 6390 100 205 coa The absolute position for the figure is coordinate value under the current coordinate system Note Workpiece coordinate systems 1 6 is set up as soon as machine zero return is executed after power on When the system is restarted the coordinate system is the one set by parameter No 540 SCRD o Whether the relative position varies with coordinate system depends on status parameter No540 PPD when PPD 0 it changes when PPD 1 it does not change e When the workpiece coordinate system function is determined usuall
412. n order to specify the origin of the machining program and the offset value of the workpiece origin replace command G92 by specifying command G52 e Make the origin of the local coordinate consistent with the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system to cancel the local coordinate system and specify the value in workpiece coordinate system e When a G52 is specified local coordinate system is valid before another G52 command is specified It is not move when G52 command is being specified Example Set local coordinate system in a single workpiece coordinate system N1 G28 X0 YO ZO N2 G90 G54 G00 X100 Y 100 250 N3 G92 X0 YO N4 G00 X50 Y50 N5 G52 X100 Y100 LI N6 G00 X0 YO N7 G01 X50 F100 N8 Y50 N9 G52 X0 YO N10 G00 XO YO N11 M30 Current position 0 01 wr Local coordinale system NS amp ganarated fram Ghz M4 Mea workpiece coordina syesem NA i generated from C52 The local coordinate system is set by G54 coordinate system in the block N5 It is cancelled in the block N9 whose cancelled coordinate system is consistent with that set by G92 of block N3 Set local coordinate system in multiple worikpiece coordinate systems 62 Chapter 3 G Command N1 G28 XO YO ZO N2 G90 G54 GOO XO YO Local coordinate system N5 is generated fram 52 N3 G52 X50 Y50 N4 M98 P1234 N5 G90 G55 G00 X0 YO N6 M98 P1234 N7 G90 G54 GOO XO YO 01234 Subprogram N8 G00 XO YO si Jj E a A N9 G01 X50 Nucia coo
413. n start toolpot rotating 3 if the above measures are all taken but still the toolpot cannot rotate Please check up in ladder gt PLC when start toolpot protestation to see Y 1 6 or Y 1 7 has an output or not If anyone of them has an output and the toolpot is still please check the machine tools electric starts the toolpot rotation function or not 4 when start toolpot rotation the toolpot only moves a tool distance every time and only rotates in gt o o D 5 Q x one direction 5 there is no key in 980MDc V panel If other keys needed to be set the ladder diagram should be altered B Manual spindle releasing clamping tool Please make sure there is no tool in spindle when test the degree of tightness of the spindle to avoid tool damage 450 Appendix In the mode of MPG STEP or MANUAL press the release clamp tool key in the machine spindle Press and do not release which means asking spindle to release the tool air pressure outputted Release the key means asking spindle to clamp the tool When the releasing clamping tool does not Work 1 make sure K11 5 spindle releasing clamping tool parameter set to1 2 when spindle clamping tool observe X1 5 is changing or not in Ladder gt PLC If it is not changed check the machine tools electric 3 if X1 5 changed please observe Y2 0 has an output or not in Ladder gt PLC If it do has check the machine tools electric and the motor controlling spindle releas
414. namely scaling is done before the calculation of tool compensation see the following figure 58 Chapter 3 G Command U a O le um Q Cutter compensation values are not scaled E le e Invalid scaling 1 In canned cycle moving scaling of cut in value Q Z and retraction value d are invalid 2 In manual operation the travel distance can not be increased by using scaling function e Commands related to reference position return and coordinate system In scaling mode the G codes G28 G30 etc returned to the reference point and G codes G92 G54 G59 etc of command coordinate system can not be specified If these G codes must be specified specify them after the scaling function is cancelled eo Position display Position display indicates the coordinate value after scaling Related parameters e 7 T 7 Sz SLY SOK SCLX SCLY SCLZ 1 X Y Z Scaling is valid 0 X Y Z Scaling is invalid XSC 1 Axes are scaled up or down at different magnification rate If the rate is a negative value mirror image is formed 0 Axes are scaled up or down at the same magnification rate SCLVSAME Axes are scaled up or down at the same magnification rate SCLVSAME If P is not specified set values with defaulted magnification rate setting range is 199999999 SCLVX Magnification rate of X axis SCLVY Magnification rate of Y axis SCLVZ Magnification rate of Z axis SCLVX SCLVY SCLVZ Set magnification rate for X Y Z
415. ncelled Explanations 1 Some commands are interchanged when a mirror image to the plane is specified e GO02 GO03 of circular commands are interchanged eo G41 G42 of cutter compensation commands are interchanged e CW and CCW directions of rotation are interchanged 2 This function is not effective for 4 and 5 axes 3 In canned cycle the depth of Z are not proceeded with the mirror image Limitations e In programmable mirror image G codes related to reference return G27 G28 G29 G30 etc and those for changing the coordinate system G52 G59 G92 etc can not be specified If any of these G codes is necessary specify it only after canceling the programmable mirror image mode eo Processing proceeds from program mirror image to scaling and coordinate rotation The commands should be specified in order for cancellation in the reverse order G50 1 and G51 1 can not be specified in scaling and rotation mode Modal display of scaling 60 Chapter 3 G Command AUTO Saada TAA HAA RELATIVE POS 00003 NOOA MODAL INFORMATION O 0003 NOOGOOUA 000 St 1037 X 0 000 5 Y 0 00O i2 U a O a um o 3 3 e 3 19 Setting Local Coordinate System G52 When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system the subprogram of the workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 can be set for easy program Sub coordinate system is called local coordinate system Machine coordinate system workpiece coordinate system an
416. nd outer side will be employed in the following explanations When an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified by move commands for two blocks is over or equal to 180 it is referred to as inner side When the angle is between 0 and 180 it is referred to as outer side Programmed path Workpiece Workpiece Programmed path a 180 6 2 2 Tool movement in start up There are 3 steps should be performed for cutter radius compensation establishment performing and cancellation The tool movement performed from offset cancellation mode to G41 or G42 command establishment is called tool compensation establishment also called start up Note For S L and C labeled in the following figures if not especially described they should be regarded as the following meaning S Single block stop point L Linear 158 Chapter Cutter Compensation C Circular arc a Tool movement along an inner side of a corner a2180 2 Linear to circular 1 Linear to linear z Programmed path a L U im O e a 9 3 3 e Tool center path Programmed C path Tool center path Fig 6 4b Linear to circular start up Fig 6 4a Linear to linear start up from from inner side inner side b Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 gt a290 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to linear Fig 6 5a Linear to linear start up outside Tool ce
417. ndle or the 2 spindle SIND signal both set to 1 SIND signal decides which to control the spindle PLC or CNC Frame multi spindle control type B SIND G33 7 SSTP1 G27 3 Ist spindle SIND2 G35 7 SSTP2 G27 4 2nd spindle Flow chart of dual analog spindle A type control T type gear shift NC Part PLC Part 5 codes in workpiece program S0 S9999 5 code SF signal output Output to PLC Spindle stop signal SSTP From PLC ipic m SIND signal decides output signal From PLC Spindle select signal SWS SWSI From PLC From PLC Input gear select signal 4 From PLC NC outputs the results of speed change 512 bits codes Dutput to PLC R120 R010 gt ee ee ce SIND 1 PLC appoints the input of 812 From PLC E bits code EM From PLC X Spindle stop signal USE dat parimeters Noa 730 and No 3731 to i adjust D value and output spindle Spindle allow signal output Output to PLC requenc M aching D converter 403 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Note When multi spindle A type function is chosen the functions in the dotted line boxes are invalid for the 2 spindle Flow chart of dual analog spindle B type control T type gear shift NC Part PLC Pan 5 codes in workpiece program 50 59999 S code SF signal output Output to PLC Spindle stop signal SSTP From PLC Spindle select i SWS2 SWS5L From PLC Spindle override signal 500 5047
418. ndle orientation according to the current ladder 3 24 2 11Boring Cycle G88 Format G98 G99 G88 X Y R Z P F L 7 Function A dwell is performed at the bottom of a hole the spindle is stopping If the manual operation is applied now tool can be removed manually It is better to retract the tool safely from the hole regardless of any kind of manual operation It is rapidly retracted to point R or initial plane when the automatic operation is performed again the spindle is stopped and G88 is finished Explanation For the command explanation of the canned cycle see the table 3 2 Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of hole 4 The spindle is stopped 5 P time is delayed if it is specified 6 Manual operation will be performed if the dwell is executed 7 Restoring the automatic mode retracting to initial point or point R plane according to the G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse rate 84 Chapter 3 G Command 8 The spindle rotates positively Command Path G88 G98 Mode for G88 G99 Mode for returning to initial plane returning to the point R plane Spindle ccw U a O a um o 3 3 e Spindle ccw gt amp Initial level j Point R Point R oin O Point R level MPG feedrate P MPG feedrate Spindle stop Spindle stop after dwell Point Z after dwel
419. near corner is less than 1 degree inside movement d When it is exceptional There is no intersection Alarm occus and When the tool radius value tool stops is small there is an When the compensation value is large d intersection for the arc A AR p compensation when the When the compensation value is small 4 L radius is bigger the AO intersection may not exist Programmed path EE EE the tool stops at the end of previous block and then the alarm occurs Center of arc B Center nf arc A Fig 6 11 Exceptional Thereis no intersection after the path offset Offset path with the compensation direction changed in compensation mode The compensation direction can be changed in special occasion but it cannot be changed at the beginning and the following block There are no inner side and outer side for the full compensation 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to Circular 3 Tool nose center path Programmed C Tool nose center path Pre L 5 path Fig 6 13a Linear to linear compensation Fig 6 13b Linear to circular compensation direction changed direction changed 3 Circular to linear 4 Circular to Circular 162 Chapter Cutter Compensation edo Tool nose center path odo Tool nose center path AS C a d E E r i a E C c U o Programmed path S Pro ed path E 3 Pig 6 1c Circular to linear Fig 6 13d Circular to circular 3 compensation direction changed c
420. ng CNC setting system time and file management page which can be viewed by pressing corresponding soft keys 1 Setting interface In setting interface press ses to enter CNC setting page EDIT 54698 194 HEB SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT amp OFF CURRENT LEVEL Q0 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT ON INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION C BACKUP CURRENT PAR MANUFACTORY CRESUME STORED PAR MANUFACTORY RESUME DEFAULT PAR T SERVO 1H LEVEL CRESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR 3 SERYO 0 19 LEVEL CRESUME STORED PAR PRODUCE TEST O Lo D um Q r O PRESS KEY L TO TURNON PRESS KEY W TO TURNOFF 1 21 54 Im CLOCK DOC LIST ON OFF 1 Switch setting display ON OFF of PARAMETER SWT PROGRAM SWT AUTO SEGMENT PARAMETER SWT modify parameters when the parameter switch is ON prohibit modifying parameters when it is OFF PROGRAM SWT edit programs when the program switch is ON prohibit editing programs when it is OFF AUTO SEGMENT the system automatically creates the block number in the course of editing programs when AUTO SEGMENT is ON the block number cannot be automatically created but is input by hand when it is OFF In the page use U and D keys on MDI panel to switch the switch status 2 Parameter operation backup and resume current parameters of CNC BACKUP PAR user
421. ng number on specified arc Explanation G142 Punching in CW G143 Punching in CCW Gxx Punching type G73 G74 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 X Y End point coordinate for the arc it is fixed for G17 plane R R plane position Z Hole depth 103 U O Q um 9 3 3 e y A O Q Q 3 3 Q GC GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK B Radius of arc when a negative value is specified it is major arc J The circle center and radius are calculated by or J when the R value is not specified C Number of punching F Cutting feedrate Related parameter status parameter No 0582 RPTK 1 hole positioning of continuous drilling is executed by cutting path GO1 0 hole positioning of continuous drilling is executed by rapid traverse path GOO BRCH 71 return plane of continuous drilling is selected by G98 G99 0 return plane of continuous drilling is selected by G99 For example G91 G142 G81 X100 R50 Z 50 C4 start point End pomt Example 2 when drilling 7 holes in full circle the start points and end points are coordinate origins and the radius is 50 hole depth is 50 00001 G00 G90 X0 YO ZO G17 G98 G142 G82 150 JO R 10 Z 50 C7 F3000 M30 Note 1 When starting point and end point are the same one in the continuous drilling and I J are used to program the full circle drilling is executed Note 2 Canned cycle G110 G111 G1
422. ng range 1000 1000 unit mV 3 7 3 2 Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift or spindle speed of spindle orientation rpm Setting range 0 4095 Min clamping speed of spindle motor 12 bits code value in gearing type M Max clamping speed of spindle motor 12 bits code value in gearing type M Setting range 0 4095 No 3735 setting value speed command af spindle motor 12 bits code LED umm rima iiem mima ma me mni tiis e A Max clamping speed 7T of spindle motor Se A SS SS SS eS SS po ii m No 3736 Lond i Q esla Load i O I I I I I I i I I I I I I I i I I Min clamping speed LLL LL LL LL LL Le 1 ee No 3735 of spindle motor P a i l I AU i i zpeed command of spindle motor 5 code input 3 7 4 O0 Delay of spindle speed in position signal detection Setting range 0 4080 unit ms Max spindle speed of 1 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 2 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 3 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 4 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Setting range 10 9999 unit r min 338 Chapter 3 Parameter Spindle motor speed when gear 1 is shifted to gear 2 12 bits code value in gearing type M Spindle motor speed when gear 2 is shifted to gear 3 12 bits code value in gearing type M Spindle motor speed when gear 3 is shifte
423. ng to G98 or G99 Sa N e e a a Command Path 88 Chapter 3 G Command Pi he center of a IL The center of p circle circle U a O a um o 3 3 e he starting position Che starting position Related Explanation The commands Q P and L are disabled in this cycle but the Q and P value will be reserved as the canned cycle modal value For example Fine mill a finished rough milling round groove by the canned cycle G112 command see the following figure a he center of a circle The starting position LOO i G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G112 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 150 J10 F800 D1 Start canned cycle fine milling cycle inside the circle at the bottom of a hole D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point P level M30 3 24 2 15 Fine milling Cycle Outside Circle G114 G115 Format G114 G98 G99 X Y R Z J D Fs G115 Function A fine milling outside the full circle is performed by the specified radius value and the direction and the tool is retracted after the fine milling is finished Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the table 3 2 G114 Finish milling cycle for outside circle in CCW G115 Finish milling cycle for outside circle in CW 89 CiGSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual I Afine milling circle radius value range 99999999 99999999xleast command increment the absolute value
424. nge at this moment Press Input and coordinates start move to locates to the block where it stops last time and recovers the mode before power down 4 Switch to the highlighted block when DNC CNC power down 5 Search for the interrupted block in DNC transmission software then press RESET key on panel to continue DNC software transmission Press cycle start key to continue execution 212 Chapter Auto Operation Note When a called subprogram runs in DNC mode with power down DNC power down resume function is invalid after power on But the program of main program in DNC mode can be viewed in DNC program page when power down poa La O Lo D Q O 273 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 274 Chapter 8 Machine Zero Return Operation CHAPTER8 MACHINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION 8 1 Machine Zero The machine coordinate system is a basic coordinate system for CNC coordinate calculation It is an inherent coordinate system of the machine The origin of the machine coordinate system is called machine zero or machine reference point It is defined by the zero return switches fixed on the machine Usually the switch is fixed on the positive max Strokes of X Y Z axes Note the mechanical zero is called machine zero 8 2 Machine Zero Return Steps 1 Press key it enters the Machine zero mode the bottom line of the screen page sho
425. nly M code 4113 Read only 84113 44115 Sequence number H4114 T only Program number 4115 mee only S code 4119 mum 44119 24120 ENTER EU 3 only 1 5 axes block end point workpiece 00 onan aoc m 36 Chapter 5 Macro Program coordinate system tool only compensation value not included 1 5 axes current position machine 5021 5025 coordinate system tool 9999 999 9999 999 compensation value included Read 1 5 axes the current position workpiece coordinate system contain tool compensation value Read 55041 5045 9999 999 9999 999 U im O Q um 9 3 3 e 1 5 axes skip signal position Read 9999 999 9999 999 5061 5065 workpiece coordinate system tool compensation value included h i 5081 5085 1 9 axes tool length compensation cese 999 9999 999 variable value current execution value only kpi R 45201 5205 1 2 axes external workpiece zero 9999 999 9999 999 ead point offset value write 5991 5225 1 5 axes G54 workpiece zero point 9999 999 9999 999 Read offset value write m s z R 45241 5245 1 5 axes G55 workpiece zero point I TETTA ead offset value write m s z R 45261 5265 1 5 axes G56 workpiece zero point Jod sedes ead offset value write 5981 5285 1 5 axes G5 workpiece zero point 9999 999 9999 999 Read offset value write 5301 5305 1 5 axes G58 workpiece zero point 9999 099 9999 999 Read offset value write 5321 5325
426. nnnnnonnnncnnncnonnns 158 6 2 2 TOOL MOVementin SII UD e curs abbas estos ive pecu oM ui ERE 158 5 2 3 1001 movement IM ONSET MOJE stone sooo doeuad s uod cn coit ide 160 6 2 4 Tool operation in offset cancellation MONE ooooooconcccccccccnnccnnconnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncrnnnnnnnns 164 6 2 5 Interference CA E tva cauias uou eq doce puab enletruded indus 165 6 2 6 Command of compensation vector cancel temporarily oooccccccnnnccconnconannconanonononos 167 SEM EXCODUONANCaS Sia is 168 II Operation CHAPTER 1 OPERATION MODE and DISPLAY saveurs as 175 dd TalelbiVISiObsmeiscisio te aia cio uc 175 14d State Indicators 176 ee relie CV DAC irene 176 LS Men Isola siii A id 177 CONTENTS LEES IVS Racine ona opio 177 1 2 Sumimary er Operation Mode lt a e 180 to DISPO o 180 IPC ROSMON ISC recon 183 koe o A ae ibt ume oa unas duque heo A A 186 1 3 3 Tool Set Macro Variable Coordinate SySteM ccccoccccccocicccononoconnnocnnnnonononononcncnnnoos 191 1 94 io AO ducet Got Lies duo Ghee sabe qv ocobe dcc aa 195 DEC ONE S ute EEUU 197 1 3 6 parameter and pitch compensation page essere 203 1 3 Diagnosis Internac meto ts 207 1 3 0 Graphic InteMace sita science colada neri ter 209 EPA SEE 211 Ur COMMON Opera OMS escri 226 CHAPTER 2 POWER ON POWER OFF and SAFETY PROTECTION eene 231 2 AROWEFON mr 231 PA OWEN Metallic ld 231 2 9
427. not be performed in MDI or an alarm will occur Note U command specifying arc chamfering cannot be with M98 in the same block The linear chamfering is invalid when it and M98 are in the same block and it is taken as the cycle times of calling subprograms 2 1 5 Return from Subprogram M99 Format M99 Poooo The block No 0000 9999 when return to main program is executed the leading zero can be omitted Function in subprogram as the other commands of current block are executed the block specified by P is performed continuously when the main program is returned The next block is performed continuously by calling current subprogram of M98 command when returning to the main program because of the P is not given If the main program is ended by using the M99 namely the current program is not called by other programs for execution the current program will be run circularly So the M99 command is disabled in MDI Example Fig 2 1 shows that the execution route of the subprogram is called the P command within M99 Fig 2 2 shows that the execution route of the subprogram is called the P command is not in M99 14 CHAPTER 2 MSTF CODES U e e um 9 3 3 e O 0001 I O 1006 G92 X100 Z100 G90 G1 X50 Z50 M3 SI G91 X100 Z200 GO X0 ZO F X30 Z 15 F250 GI X200 Z200 F200 M98 P 1006 GO X100 Z100 Return M3 S0 M30 Mainprogram Fig 2 2 Subprogram This GSK980MDc c
428. not light up It is shown in Fig 2 33 Tdv CNG Machine UL N2303 output Ii Fig 2 33 output ta drive filament indicator e To drive inductive load relay etc To use ULN2803 output to drive an inductive load it requires to connect a freewheeling diode near the coil to protect output circuit and deduce interference It is shown in Fig 2 34 TV T esp D et O CNC Machine ULN2503 output Fig z 34 output ta drive an inductive load 2 9 Machine Zero o Relative signal ERA X axis deceleration signal PCX X axis zero signal od Y axis deceleration signal PCY Y axis zero signal 318 Chapter2 Interface Signals DESC Z axis deceleration signal PCZ Z axis zero signal DECA 4 axis deceleration signal PC4 4 axis zero signal poe Pcs 5 axis zero signal pecs peca pecz pecv Tex Corresponding BENZ 34 CN61 33 CN61 12 ICN61 32 cali 4 pin out C 0 E Es qms pus es Ws PR I I F9 pa pe po px LLL LL LL LLL LLL pin out o Bit parameter e CNC diagnosis ATT Ta A A Tx ZMn 1 n axis machine zero return type C 0 n axis machine zero return type B n X Y Z 4 5 ZCn 1 The deceleration signal DECn and one rotation signal PCn of X axis are in parallel connection during machine zero return a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal 0 The deceleration signal DECn and
429. not work out 1 make sure Y3 0 has an output in Ladder gt PLC If there is an output please check the servo spindle is accomplishing the spindle orientation 2 when there is an alarm when spindle orientating please check in Ladder gt PLC that X5 2 signal is in position If it is not in position please check the machine tools electric or connections to the servo spindle 3 when the orient position is not exact please set the parameter corresponding to the servo spindle For details please see to the operations of the servo spindle B Reference point setting There are two reference points needed to be set in 980MDc turret tool magazine that is the 2nd reference point and the 3rd reference point data parameter No 1241an data parameter NO 1242 The main aim of setting these two reference points is that G28 is not needed to impact the zero block every time When the distance of the travel is long enough the spindle moves to not higher than the block of the toolpot That the 3rd reference point is set at a safe and not block hitting position when the tools are changed is suggested When the distance of the travel is not long enough then there is no need to set the 3rd reference point In this situation the 3rd reference point is O the machine zero To set the 2nd reference point first raise the spindle to safe place push the manipulator to the right and move the Z axis slowly to the place where the manipulator can reach by hand wheel or in
430. nsation and tool radius compensation G53 is performed normally and cancel the tool length compensation and tool radius compensation 3 G53 and the group 01 in the same block When it is in the same block with group 01 G command P S alarm occurs eo Processing in the canned cycle When canned cycle is valid P S alarm will occur after G53 is specified G53 can not be specified if the canned cycle is valid Coordinate display After the CNC system is powered on and returned to the reference point a machine coordinate system is set immediately whose coordinate values are set by parameter NO 1240 U a O a um o 3 3 e Machine coordinate system Machine zero point Setting point of G53 Example Relative coordinate Absolute Machine X Y Z coordinate X Y Z coordinate X Y Z Initial position 110 110 110 40 40 40 120 120 120 G53 X25 Y25 Z25 35 35 35 185 185 185 25 25 25 GO X0 YO ZO 150 150 150 000 160 160 160 G1 X40 Y40 Z40 110 110 110 40 40 40 120 120 120 3 21 Workpiece Coordinate System G54 G59 Format G54X Y Z Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55X Y Z Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56X Y Z Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57X Y Z 5 Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58X Y Z Workpiece coordinate system 5 G59X Y Z Workpiece coordinate system 6 Function There are 6 workpiece coordinate systems for machine tool regardless of the G92 any of coordinate system ca
431. nt and spindle ON OFF cooling ON OFF Lubrication ON OFF spindle jog manual tool change can be performed e DNC mode In this mode the program is run by DNC mode 1 3 Display Interface GSK980MDc has 9 function keys including POS PRG SET etc on its edit keyboard Each function key corresponds to one interface which has many pages and operation soft keys The following introduces the page switch relationship between operation input and soft key and concrete operation methods 180 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display PROGRAM POSITION ABSOULUTE PART CLR TIME CLR POS amp PRG RELATIVE X CLR gm CLR Z CLR INTEGRATED X CLR Y CLR Z CLR TOOL SET PUB VAR MACRO VAR LOCAL VAR SYS VAR FIND COORDINATE COFFSET CD PROGRAM CONTENT PRG SEARCII SEARCII COPY SEG ES SEG DELETE SEG UNDO REDO SAVE SEEK EDIT NOTES MDI PROGRAM CLEAR ALL UNDO REDO COPY SEG PASTE SEG DELETE SEG AIDED PROGRAMMI XG 34 SHIFT SAVE EXIT CURRENT J LOCAL DIR OPEN NEWROPEN DELETE COPY TO U DISK FIND RENAME SAVE AS DELETE ALL NAME SORT TIME SORT LADDLTURY COORDINATE CLEAR ALL INPUT MACH COORD CALM LOG J INFOR 2 181 O Lo D um Q r O GSR C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual SETTINC CXC SETTING NT REI
432. nt s 358 4 6 SPINGIE AGIUSIMEN sta ii 360 4 01 Sp iNdle ENCON uu 360 4 5 2 DIhdle Bru lA 360 4 6 3 Switch Volume Control of Spindle Speed ooccccccocccnccccoccnncconccnnononnnnnnnoncnononancnnnonanens 360 4 6 4 Analog Voltage Control for Spindle Speed ooocccccccoconcccncccnoooccnncnonancnnncnononnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnos 360 LM disce REI LLL 361 zs Sten MPG Pire dA Mei E E aaa 362 4 9 Other PS A A ie nee ios curd added ioes eiu cu ena Ee ees EErE 362 CHAPTER S DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE cuicos 363 li GIN G2 lo alo e E E OO DE 363 5 1 1 Signal Diagnosis from Machine to ONC occcococccnncnnnonoconnnnnnancnnncnnnnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnss 363 5 1 2 Axes Moving State and Data Diagnosis Signal of CNC seeeesesseeeeesse 363 5 1 9 MIDI Panel Kays DIAGNOSIS setae a EO Dee a qum eden is Du bine vus date auet 364 S Eo Ren TS Intemal Slate 364 A IPM RI HC x Ex 365 5 2 dX Address Fixed Addresses ni cio eios a 365 5 2 2 Y Address Fixed Addresses dales 366 Do TE Dale astutia Ee ise idt coa petat ren Ce to efc ftti 366 CHAPTER 6 SCREW PIT CH COMPENSATION iidis sonat oec doa erede oe eut ettet di 367 o T Serew PiteliQCompernsaliQl ses a neue at 367 6 2 SCrew PIICMIEMOr OA MN a vie eoe e eade e i ena Sawa vested ti 367 6 5 OIset Mt valeria ds 367 624 Compensation Valle died 367 shes Cautions Tor Ofelia 367 6 6 Examples of Offset Parameters SettidQ ooooccccccccooonnconccnonannonnnononannnnnnonnnannnnnononanrnnncnnnnnnenns 368
433. nter path Programmed path Fig 6 5b Linear to circular Start up outside c Tool movement along the outer side of a corner at an actuate angle a lt 90 1 Linear to Linear 2 Linear to circular 3 L Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Fig 6 6a Linear to linear start up from outer side Fig 6 6h Linear to circular start up from outer side d Tool movement along the outside linear to linear at an acute angle less than 1 degree a3 1 159 GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual U im O e um 9 3 3 e Fig 6 7 Linear to linear the corner is less than 1 degree start up from outer side 6 2 3 Tool movement in offset mode The mode after setting the cutter radius compensation and before canceling the cutter radius compensation is called offset mode o Offset path of invariable compensation direction in compensation mode a Tool traversing inside along corner 22180 2 Linear to circular a 1 Linear to linear Q Programmed path fou Programmed path Tool center nose path p Fig a Linear to linear inside movement l mE Fig 6 86 Linear to circular inside movement 3 Circular to linear 4 Circular to circular a4 Programmed path C C i Programmed path Tool nose center path Fig c Circular to linear inside movement Fig d Circular to circular inside movement b Move along the outer of obtuse angle corner 180 gt a290 1 Linear to
434. nuous drilling RPTH 1 Hole locating is cutting path in circle and rectangle continuous drilling 0 Hole locating is rapid path in circle and rectangle continuous drilling BRCH 1 Plane returning is selected by G98 and G99 in continuous drilling 334 Chapter 3 Parameter 0 Plane returning is selected by G99 in continuous drilling 0 5 8 4 RD2 1 Retraction in Y axis direction of G76 G87 0 Retraction in X axis direction of G76 G87 RD1 71 Retraction in Y axis direction of G76 G87 0 Retraction in X axis direction of G76 G87 ME ONE ONE RTORI 71 M29 is executed Spindle need to return zero 0 M29 is executed Spindle need not to return zero RTPCP 1 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle G73 0 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle G83 RHD5 71 5th axis coordinate information is hided 0 5th axis coordinate information isn t hided RTCRG 1 Do not wait for G61 0 to be 1 as executing next program block after rigid tapping cancelled 0 Do wait for G61 0 to be 1 as executing next program block after rigid tapping cancelled RTCRS 1 Rigid tapping proportion of gear setting by CNC automatically 0 Rigid tapping proportion of gear setting by CNC parameter 0 6 0 0 SGB 1 M type gear shift mode B 0 M type gear shift mode A Ii GST 1 Analog spindle gear shit is M 5 N et D T le 0 Analog spindle gear shit is T GST 1
435. o mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode MDI mode DNC Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode 179 uonelado Il O Lo D um Q r O GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR lond To enter DNC mode by DNC DNC mode key To enter DNC mode pressing this key in Auto DNC mode 1 2 Summary of Operation Mode There are 7 modes that include Edit Auto DNC MDI Machine zero Step MPG Manual modes in this GSK980MDc e Edit mode In this mode the operation of part program setting up deletion and modification can be performed e Auto mode In this mode the program is executed automatically e MDI mode In this mode the operation of parameter input command blocks input and execution can be performed e Machine zero mode In this mode the operation of X Y Z 4 5 axis machine zero return can be performed separately e MPG Step mode In the Step MPG feed mode the moving is performed by an increment selected by CNC system e Manual mode In this mode the operation of Manual feed Manual Rapid feedrate override adjustment Rapid override adjustme
436. o connect it to a 220V AC power in using The interface definition of GSK980MDc CN1 is shown below E AC 220V q S cs 24V a GSK PB2 GND B 12 E P 12v 194V GND a co sy POWER SUPPLY CNI Fig 2 27 connection of power interface 2 8 1 0 Interface Definition CN61 is the interface of DB44 male socket 3 line which definition is as follows T esp D et O CN61 interface in out No Address Symbol 17 20 Suspension Suspension 25 28 1 X00 a External soea hold signal 3 E a S 6 os es Exemaemegenystpsgna 7 pe 0 8 pm spe 314 Chapter2 Interface Signals CN61 interface Pin outNo Address Symbol A Bo pa st tamal ot san igal ACI 1 LLL X1 6 16 X1 7 39 po 39 X SS 5 pe mo M o me A agna of the 4 axis deceleration a xis DE0S Sorat fine Sacs dacleralon 8 pu 1 E 1 ao 39 pat O 359 a2 m pe p X3 4 X35 SKIP Skip signal CN62 is the interface of DB44 female socket 3 line which definition is as follows CN62 interface Temm Symbol Description P ower Power OV terminal interface 24V Power Power 24V terminal interface Nu p o Wa S C e eS EE E O EN A LLL I A Be MO E AN IO eRR LL L I E A _ O_OE_ 315 Ii 5 o e D J le Ii
437. o machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 00 7 3 AH MZRn 71 Machine zero return in negative each axis 0 Machine zero return in positive each axis CALH 71 Length offset not cancelled in reference point return 0 Length offset cancelled in reference point return DECS SCW 1 Inch output inch system valid after repower 0 Metric output metric system valid after repower DECn 1 Deceleration signal high level for machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal low level for machine zero return 352 Chapter 3 Parameter Each axis machine coordinate of 1 reference point Each axis machine coordinate of 2 reference point Each axis machine coordinate of 3 reference point Each axis machine coordinate of 4 reference point Setting range 99999999 99999999 0 001mm 1 2 4 6 Each axis machine zero offset Setting range 99999 99999 Unit 0 001mm 3 2 12 Rotary Axis Function 0 0 6 0 Acc amp dec time constant of CS axis Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms 1 2 6 0 Movement per rotation of each axis Setting range 360000 360000 Unit 0 001deg 0 1 8 7 RCSn 71 4th 5th Cs function is valid power on 0 4th 5th Cs function is invalid power on 0 1 8 8 RRIx 71 Zero mode D is used on 4th or 5th rotary axis 0 Zero mode A B C are used on 4th or 5th rotary axis RRLx 1 4th or 5th rel coor cycle func
438. of Round off center point negative number 99999999 99999999xleast input G114 G115 distance from start point to increment absolute value of Round off circle negative number 99999999 99999999xleast input G134 G139 width of rectangle in Y increment absolute value of Round off direction negative number 99999999 99999999xleast input G140 G141 length of 2nd side of increment absolute value of Round off rectangle negative number Distance from arc start point to the center point in Z direction increment G110 G111 G116 G117 G132 G133 G1 99999999 99999999xleast input 34 6135 cutting increment in XY plane increment absolute value of Round off each time negative number direction negative number g A O Q Q 3 3 Q G136 G139 distance from start 99999999 99999999xleast input point to rectangle side in X axis increment absolute value of Round off 99999999 99999999xleast input G50 G51 scale Round off increment K must not be O 99999999 99999999xleast input increment absolute value of Round off negative number 99999999 99999999xleast input The length of linear chamfering Decimal Punching number for linear serial punch use together with the canned increment absolute value of part cycle punch negative number omitted Decimal Tool life management tool life value O 999999 part omitted Decimal Cycle times of M98 call subprog
439. of drive unit correspond to the pulse frequency division numerator of position command respectively The calculation formular for pulse frequency division denominator of position command and gear ratio of drive unit are as follows PxG 4xNxC And Qu NO itc uu NOD M CMD p 3600 L Z CMR P Correspondence between required pulse amount for motor rotates 360 degrees and CNC end P 360 a G electronic gear ratio of drive unit G position command pulse frequency division numerator position command pulse frequency division denominator N Set motor rev number to 1 C Wire number of feedback encoder Example When matching GSK980MDc with DA98B set command multiplier coefficient and command frequency division coefficient to 1 respectively Wire number of feedback encoder is 2500p r and the minimum input command unit of GSK980MDc is 0 001mm When the motor and the lead are connected directly the gear ratio of the drive unit is as follows _AxCx0 Zu CMD _ 4x 2500 x 0 001 L Z CMR L 1 1 10 SS E EE 11 L 4 3 2 Servo Spindle Calculation formula of CNC CMR E Ly CMD Ol A 356 PNE Z CMR Chapter 4 Machine Debugging CMR command multiplier coefficient of the spindle CMD command frequency division coefficient of the spindle Q Pulse volume motor rotation angle for a pulse Min input command unit of CNC output angle corresponding to a pulse 0 001 0 01 0 0001 This value corresponds to the travel amount of
440. ogram hole machining GOO X50 Y65 position to h1 call macro program hole machining M09 non movement code does not call macro program G00 X0 Y23 5 position to h1 call macro program hole machining G67 cancel macro program modal call G00 X150 Y20 positioning return M30 Called macro program O9201 machining process G81 G98 R 1 Z 2 F 3 M99 5 2 Variables An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric value for example G01 and X100 0 With a custom macro program numerical value can be specified directly or using variables for example G 101 X 102 When variables are used the variable value can be changed by programs or using operation on the MDI panel o Representation and using methods of variables Differ from argument data variables are considered as the carrier of data for example 1 101 are variables A100 B200 are arguments Data of arguments A100 B200 should be transferred to variable 1 and 2 When using or programming macro programs numerical value can be specified directly such as G01 X100 or using variables such as G 01 X407 When variables are used the variable value can be changed by programs or using operation on the panel The address value of a macro body can be specified by variables The variable value can be set by the
441. ogram for specifying the code function please refer to the manual issued by machine tool manufacturer One block only has one M code The CNC alarm occurs when two or more M codes are existed in one block Table 2 1 M code table for program execution End of Run Rigid tapping designation End of Run Return from the subprogram the program will be repeatedl executed If the code M99 is used for main program ending namel the current program is not called by other programs M9000 M9999 Call macro program Program No is larger than 9000 2 1 1 End of Program M02 Format MO2 Function The MO2 code is executed in the Auto mode The automatic run is ended after the other codes of current block are executed the cursor stops in the block in which the MO2 is located and does not return to the head of the program If the program is to be executed again the cursor should return to the beginning of the program Besides the above mentioned functions processed by CNC the functions of code MO2 also can be defined by the PLC ladder diagram The function defined by standard ladder diagram can be the current input state of CNC is not change after the code M02 is executed 2 1 2 Rigid Tapping Designation M29 Format M29 Function In auto mode after the execution of M29 the G74 G84 that followed is processed as rigid tapping codes 13 C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK 2 1 3 End of Run M30 Form
442. ogramming entry in program content page PROGRAM PROGRAM 1 Press and then press ONTENT soft to enter into program content page o 2 2 Press to switch to Edit mode 3 Move the cursor by direction key to the block which is needed to edit as follows EDIT 52531 TBO HHB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT 00001 N09860 1 14 37 19 MDI Aided E PROGRAM Programming CURRENT LOCAL DIR gt Aided 4 Press Prograratnel to enter into aided program page as follows 259 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Aided Programming G110 Round groove inner rough mill in CCH 5 After programs in aided programming page are edited is pressed to save the edited programs to the place where the cursor is in the program content page 2 Aided programming in MDI programming page PROGRAM 1 Press E and then press to enter into MDI program page m o Lo D Q O to switch to MDI mode as follows 2 Press MDI O0000 INSERT MODAL INFORMATION J POSITION 14 57 02 3 Press ERORA to enter into aided programming page a s follows Aided Programming 00001 N00048 G00 Rapid positioning E GOI Linear interpolation G02 Circular and helical interpolation clockwise G03 Circular and helical interpolation counterclockwise G04 Dwell G07 1 Cylindrical interpolation G15 Polar coo
443. olation tool nose radius compensation and automatic chamfer The following table shows the planes of G code selection Sdededpand Xp Ye Ze Xp Yp plane Zp Xp plane parallel axis parallel axis parallel axis Ye plane Specify rotary axis as a parallel axis of X Y Z by parameter No 1022 Specify G code selection plane and now the rotary axis is regarded as a specified linear axis for the plane For example when rotary axis is parallel to the axis of X Xp Y plane should be specified by G17 This plane is determined by rotary axis and Y axis For cylindrical interpolation only a rotary axis can be set Parallel axes for different planes are listed as follows basic coordinate system X Y cylindrical coordinate system C Y Zlrotary a E 617 Gla axis is the parallel ic axis of X C RE cylindrical coordinate system X C ZUrotary CM axis is the parallel Gl gt lt axis of Y X cylindrical coordinate system X Y Clrotary axis is the parallel axis of 7 Note The above are the plane of X displaying which can not be specified If it is specified P S alarm occurs Related explanations for circular interpolation In cylindrical interpolation mode circular interpolation is possible with the rotary axis and another linear axis The unit for rotary axis is not degrees but millimeters for metric input or inches for inch input e Circular interpolation between the Z
444. olled by G114 The Z axis is overtravel in positive direction controlled by G114 The 4th axis is overtravel in positive direction controlled by G114 The 5th axis is overtravel in positive direction controlled by G114 a e A gt Appendix Alarm Message WAY g BEEN power on 230 0 LowWolofstfleemr 2904 0 0 Load worm patch file error 2905 0 0 Load workpiece coordinate file error 2906 0 0 Startup ladder error please make sure the ladder is exist and correct 2909 0 4 CNC refuse to work because the time of stopping has been arrivedicontact your supplier please 2910 1 Resume the metric standard parameter of servo 1u already 2911 1 Resume the metric standard parameter of servo 0 1u already 2912 1 Resume the inch standard parameter of servo 1u already 2913 1 Resume the inch standard parameter of servo 0 1u already 2999 0 0 Can t find the message to alarm Please update the resource file Appendix 9 GSK980MDc amp GSK980MDa Panel Address Differences GSK980MDa GSK980MDa V GSK980MDc GSK980MDc V Y acd X24 0 2 f X backt ae O Zero Y22 7 light Y backt e O Zero Y22 6 light Z backt d O Zero Y22 5 light A back dine Y22 4 zero light gt Le D D 3 th 5 back to lt Y21 2 zero light o X18 6 SINGLE Y18 7 SED X18 7 SKIP Y18 6 z X19 0 ince Y18 5 ck MST X19 1 M E T LOCK Y 18 4 397 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Man
445. ompensation direction changed 5 e 5 When there is no intersection if the compensation is normally performed When changing the offset direction from block A to block B using G41 and G42 if the intersection of the offset path is not required create the vector vertical to block B at the start point of block B i Linear to linear 5 L cw cw cw c c c c c E d Pd r Programmed path 42 t 641 r y L Tool center path 222222222 222 e L 5 Programmed path AA G41 Tool center path x alc ee A o L Fig 6 14a Linear to linear there is no intersection Compensation direction changed ii Linear to circular Programmed path GAZ ii Gdl L La A Tool nose center path gi O Fig 6 14h Linear to circular there is no intersection Compensation direction changed 163 GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK iii Circular to circular U c S O L D e ee E Tool center path C42 Programme d path El Saas oa G02 G41 G42 Fig 14c Circular to circular there is no intersection Compensation direction changed 6 2 4 Tool operation in offset cancellation mode When the G40 command is employed in block in compensation mode the CNC enters the compensation cancellation mode This is called compensation cancellation The circular arc command G02 and G03 can not be employed when the cutter radius compensation C is cancelled If they are commanded alarm is generated and the operation
446. on 255 compensation points per axis compensation amount of each point 0 255mm Tool compensation 32 groups tool length compensation tool wear compensation cutter compensation C Special M commands redefinition unallowed M02 M29 M30 M98 M99 M9000 M9999 Other M oo commands are defined or disposed by PLC program M commands defined by standard PLC program MOO M03 M04 M05 M08 MOS M10 M11 M32 M33 tool number TO1 T32 32 numbers at most manual tool change or auto tool change selected by the parameters auto tool change sequence set by PLC program Speed switching value control S oo command is defined or disposed by PLC program the standard PLC programs S1 S2 S3 and S4 directly output The output Spindle speed of 91 52 S3 and S4 are closed by SO control Speed analog voltage control the spindle speed per minute commanded by S codes output 0 10V voltage to spindle converter spindle stepless speed changing supports 4 spindle mechanical gears 9 kinds of basic commands 23 kinds of function commands 2 level PLC program involving up to 5000 steps 2us processing time for each step 8ms refresh cycle for the first level program Ladder diagram edit software and communication software downloadable Integrated machine panel 44 points input key 44 points output LED Basic l O 41 points input 36 points output Displayer 800x600 lattice 8 4 wide screen multi color LCD Display modes Chinese English Rus
447. on the alarm is released CNC resets The circuit connection method is referred to Section 2 2 1 Note 1 Before releasing the emergency stop alarm confirm the trouble is resolved Note 2 Before power on and off press the emergence stop button to reduce the electric shock of the equipment Note 3 After releasing the emergence stop alarm return to the reference position again to ensure the precision of the coordinate position when the machine zero is not installed on the machine the machine zero return cannot be executed Note 4 When No 0172 MESP is set to 0 the external emergence stop is valid 2 4 3 Feed hold During the machine running press D to stop the running temporarily Pay attention to that during the thread cutting or the cycle command running even press the button the running can t stop immediately 292 Chapter 2 Power ON OFF and Safety Protection 2 4 4 Cutting off power supply During the machine running in the dangerous situation or emergency the machine power supply can be cut immediately to avoid the accidence But pay attention to that the coordinate displayed by CNC can t comply with its actual position after cutting off power supply so it requires returning to the reference position again O Lo D um Q m O 233 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 234 Chapter 3 Manual Operation CHAPTER3 MANUAL OPERATION N
448. ool executes infeed in positive X direction the workpiece is at positive starting point When it is less than 0 the tool executes infeed in negative X direction the workpiece is at negative starting point U Corner arc radius Omitting it means no corner arc transition its absolute value is done when it is negative D serial number of tool radius range 0 32 DO is defaulted to be 0 The current tool radius value is taken out according to the given serial number Cycle process 1 Rapidly position to starting point XY plane 2 Rapidly approach downward point R plane 3 Rapidly approach downward the distance W 4 X axis firstly executes tool infeed amount C linear 1 is the path to execute the linear interpolation infeed JExecute full circle interpolation based on the path arc 2 6 Mill the rectangle its length is 1 2E width J 2E from outer to inner in an increment of K value every time 7 Mill arc angle of the rectangle 8 Z axis rapidly positions to R reference plane 9 Rapidly position to starting point XY plane 10 Z axis rapidly approaches the distance unmachined distance Q 11 Execute the above operation step 4 9 till the circle surface its total cutting depth is Z is machined completed 12 Return to initial point plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 13 Return to XY starting point 7 LA Starting Initial plane Q I A n Point Ab d 94 Chapter 3 G Command e
449. ooncnccconncoccccnnnnnonnnnnncnonanononnnos CHAPTER 8 MACHINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION ccccccccsseseeceeesceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeess NM edin PA i mee TETTE 9 2 Machine Zero Return Steps ue dx A A A eut eee aes CHAPTER 9 DATA SETTING BACKUP and RESTORE ccccccccesseeeeceeceseeeeeessensseeeessceeseeers A T cC ETIN NE SESS eines MI 9 1 2 Cirabhic SelllliQge testi oom Eme tet abut oe tote EA Eistekcesa nae sas in eodeni ueri eod ga Parameter SOLD isa 9 2 The Password Setting and Alteration rodin rii teenin et A a 3929 Entry or Operation Leve rc ode ll oett 9 2 2 Alteration of the Pass WO A A E aa 9 2 9 Lower Level DO Lissotiansiesi s 9 3 Operations with Different Operation AuthorltiesS ooocccnccconncnncconncnnononnnnonnannnnnnnannnnnnnanonoss 9 31 Operation Of Communicator ees 93 2 ONG Operation decer en Ete e 93 39 Operatiohr or Ple EISE dieto Eon sii 93 4 Backup Resume Oper alll ON 5 iui dit Us 9 4 Parameter Operation siete cede aid elec eat tee o a e da il CHAPTER 10 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT ccccccccceesescceeceeeeeceeseaseeeeeeesseeeseeeeeseeaeeeess 10 1 Document Management Page cccccssccccseecceeeccseecceseeceusecsucecsaeeceueecseeeeseessseseeseeeesseeeseas 10 2 Often Used File Operation Function Introduction occccoccccccccnnococononononononononnncnnnnanononos 102 1 File extension and TelUf Mision 102 2 iod sio 1022 32 OY SIC Updated CHAPTER d1 R
450. operation authority or more 1 I O state interface Press vo STATE to enter PLC state page as follows MDI 52489 174 HAD LADDER gt 1 0 STATE gt X Y F 00001 N02176 X SIGNAL Y SIGNAL F SIGNAL 0 00000000 0 00000000 1 00000000 1 00000000 1 00000000 2 00000000 2 00000000 2 3 00000000 3 00000000 3 4 00000000 4 00000000 4 00000000 5 00000000 5 00000000 5 00000000 6 00000000 6 00000000 6 00000000 7 00000000 7 00000000 7 00000000 8 00000000 8 00000000 8 9 00000000 9 00000000 9 1 00000000 1 00000000 1 00000000 11 00000000 11 00000000 11 00000000 X0000 kkk xxx ESP xxx DECX kkk kkk ox BITO 09 48 27 170 stare PLC DATA MONITOR FILE LIST CHANGE The screen display notes of each parameter which can be viewed bild is pressed to view detailed notes of each data of each parameter FINDIP Press AAA to position the cursor to the required parameter position to search The search can be executed in the whole page and the parameter name and parameter number must be correctly input and the system prompts there is no found when the only parameter number is input Press to view signal states of PLC addresses In PLC state page there are two lines to display contents the first displays English abbreviations of all bits of address number where the current gt cursor is and address
451. operation level and press ALTER PASSWORD to alter the current authority register password 2 System clock page In Setting interface press Mito enter the system clock page 199 CSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual 00001 N06588 CLOCK THU FRI SAT SUN MON TUE WED 20 27 28 29 1 y 3 REPRE pu 1 2012 03 16 17 26 08 17 26 07 SR TIL 2 1 Change system clock Press to enter modification mode press a El to switch the required Year Month Hour Minute Second press it again to escape the mode With the lower operation authority than 2 level the user cannot modify the past time but the following time For example the current time is 2010 01 01 08 00 00 the user cannot modify it into 2009 01 01 08 00 00 or 2010 01 01 07 00 00 With the operation authority more than 2 level the user has no the limit When the system has stopping data not including the machine stopping the user cannot modify the clock EDIT 52423 T32 HOD 00001 N06588 O Lo D um Q O CLOCK SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 29 2 3 9 23 2012 03 16 17 26 08 17 26 07 M 3 Document management page In Setting interface press to enter file management display page as follows 200 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display MDI s BBB TAA HAB DOCUMENT MAN
452. osition to the speed e Function description When the function of rotary axis CS is valid the speed mode can be switched to the position mode by executing M14 and the position mode can be switched to the speed mode by executing M15 The spindle rotary output is cancelled by executing M14 M15 to switch When the speed mode of CS axis is switched to the position mode alarm A1 5 will be issued if the state output signal VPO is not received at the time set by DT29 11 2 21 Safe Gate Function eo Related signals Signal Signal Significance Pin out PLC CNC type symbol No State Diagnosis input SAGT oafe gate open close feedback CN61 15 X1 6 signal signal e Related parameters NEN EE SENE NE SDR 1 safe gate function is valid 0 safe gate function is invalid SPB 1 SAGT is connected with 24V and safe gate is closed 0 SAGT is disconnected with 24V and safe gate is closed SGSP 1 Open the safe gate in the running and do not shut spindle and coolant gt D 5 Q x 0 Open the safe gate in the running and shut spindle and cooling e Function description 980MDc standard ladder diagram offers safe gate function And if safe gate parameter K14 0 setting is active open the safe gate the CNC will remind that safe gate is not closed yet In auto mode press CYCLE START if the safe gate is not closed then the CNC will promote alarm safe gate is not closed yet forbidden auto running If
453. ote The keys functions of this 980MDc machine panel are defined by Ladder Diagram please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDc standard PLC programs a key it enters Manual mode In this mode the manual feed spindle control override adjustment operations can be performed 3 1 Coordinate Axis Moving In Manual mode the coordinate axis can be moved manually for feeding and rapid traverse 3 1 1 Manual Feed 2 2 A E UL x RAPID S Ep Press feed axis and axis direction key in the direction selection area ES v ED the corresponding axis may be moved positively or negatively and the axis stops moving if releasing these two keys and the direction selection keys of X Y Z 4th 5th axes can be hold on at a time to make the 5 axes to move simultaneously 3 1 2 Manual rapid traverse E E Y lt a lt a vu O nf ES v ED till the rapid First press key in the feed axis and direction selection area traverse indicator in the State area lights up The corresponding axis can be rapidly moved positively or negatively by pressing direction selection key and the axis stops moving if releasing the key and the direction selection keys of X Y Z Ath 5th axes can be hold on at a time to make the 5 axes to move simultaneously ATAT ut In Manual rapid mode press 8 key to ma
454. ould be specified otherwise an alarm will occur e Inthe canned cycle G codes G40 G41 G42 codes are disabled 52 Chapter 3 G Command Cl 700 1300 U a O a um o 3 3 e P5 900 1150 650R 6 C2 1550 1550 i Y r P2 250 900 p3 450 900 P7 1150 900 X P4 500 1150 P4 950 900 1150 550 P9 700 650 250 550 P8 F Cy Fi Y axis 0 D Q Start Example Block 1 is named start the compensation cancellation mode becomes compensation mode by G41 in this block At the end of this block tool center is compensated in the direction that tool radius is vertical to next program path From P1 to P2 Tool compensation value is specified with DO7 so set the compensation number to 7 then the G41is indicated with tool path compensation left After the compensation begins tool path compensation performs automatically when creating the workpiece as P1 P2 P8 gt P9 gt P1 NOO G92 X0 YO ZO NO1 G90 G17 GOO G41 D7 X250 0 Y550 0 The compensation value should be pre set with compensation number NO2 G01 Y900 0 F150 NO3 X450 0 NO4 G03 X500 0 Y1150 0 R650 0 N05 G02 X900 0 R 250 0 NO6 G03 X950 0 Y900 0 R650 0 NO7 G01 X1150 0 NO8 Y550 0 N09 X700 0 Y650 0 N10 X250 0 Y550 0 N11 G00 G40 XO YO 53 U A O Q Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK 3
455. ounter bore cycle Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle 23 U a O a um o 3 3 e 00 CO CO 00 NI O g A O Q Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK 24 GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Drilling cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle G89 Boring cycle G111 Circular groove inner roughing CCW G114 Outer finishing CW G115 outer finishing CCW G117 Outer roughing CW G132 Rectangular roughing CCW G133 Rectangular roughing CW a ae G136 Rectangle groove inner finishing CW Ssn S XY plane selection Modal G 0188 G19 ZX ZXplneseletion selection command YZ plane selection i Feedperrevolio per revolution E IN cc inch input Modal powe down memorize Data metric input G40 neat cena oscar gt Sanat Tool nose radius compensation cancellation G41 07 Modal G command Tool nose radius compensation left Tool nose radius compensation right Tool length offset in direction Modal G command Tool length offset in direction BR gt O N Tool length offset cancellation G98 ee G command Return to initial plane in canned cycle Modal G re etn NT Chapter 3 G Command or Seang ON G67 initial G command EN Macro program call Modal G G66 Cancel macro program call command Workpiece coordinate system 1 Additional workpiece coordinate system Modal G Workpiece coordinate system 2 comm
456. output in the table above are described without considering the metric inch system and rotation axes 1 4 1 Additional Axes in Current Increment System When IS B or IS C is selected the speed and range of additional axes are the same as what described in 1 3 1 4 2 Additional Axes in IS A Increment System When IS A is selected the maximum speed of additional axes can reach 100 times of that of IS B and IS C The relevant data and parameters ranges are the same as that of the current basic axes increment system Refer to section 1 3 12 CHAPTER 2 MSTF CODES CHAPTER2 MSTF CODES 2 1 M Codes Miscellaneous Function U The M codes are composed by code address M and 1 2 or 4 digits after the codes M is used for i controlling the program execution or outputting M code to PLC S M oooo 3 L Codes value 00 99 9000 9999 leading zero can be omitted 2 To Address M98 M99 and M9000 M9999 are independently processed by CNC and the M codes are not output to PLC The function of M29 is fixed namely to output M codes to PLC The MO2 and M30 are defined as program END codes by NC meanwhile it also outputs M codes to PLC for the I O control spindle OFF cooling OFF control etc The PLC program can not change the meaning of the above mentioned codes when the M98 M99 and M9000 M9999 are regarded as program CALL codes and the M02 and M30 are regarded as program END codes The codes of other M codes are all output to PLC pr
457. ove is taken as the machining position Q The cutting incremental value each time along Z axis V Distance to the end machining surface which is more than 0 when the rapid traverse is executed U Corner arc radius if it is omitted that is no corner arc transition is not shown E Allowance of rectangle groove rough in XY plane Cit should be more than 0 its absolute value is done when it is negative The value set by No 5142 is done when it is not specified D Sequence number of tool radius its value range is indicated as 0 32 thereunto the O is default of DO The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified sequence number y A O Q Q 3 gt Q Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 W distance depth is cut downwards by cutting feedrate 4 Mill a rectangle face helically by K increment each time from center point to outside 5 R reference surface is retracted along the Z axis at the rapid traverse rate 6 The center of rectangle is positioned along the X and Y axes at the rapid traverse rate 7 Down to distance V to the end machining surface along Z axis at the rapid traverse rate 8 Cut along Z axis for Q V depth 9 Cycling the operation from 4 8 till the surface of total cutting is performed 10 Return to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 11 Re
458. oves to the intermediate point and then return to the reference position ZPn F094 becomes 1 after the reference position return is executed The operation of Cs contour control axis Manual Automatic If the Cs contour control axis has been returned to the reference position the operation of Cs axis is same as the common NC axis In the spindle speed control the Cs contour control axis can not be performed Otherwise the U im O e a 9 3 3 e system alarms So in the spindle speed control mode it is not permitted the manual operation of Cs by the PLC ladder diagram The signal shift of spindle contour control CON G027 7 Type Signal input Function This signal is used for shifting between spindle speed control mode and Cs contour control mode When this signal is set to 1 the spindle is shifted to the Cs contour control mode from speed control mode When this signal is set to 0 the Cs contour control mode comes back to the speed control mode The signal shift end of spindle contour control FSCSL F044 1 Type Signal output Function This signal indicates that the controlled axis has been controlled under the Cs contour Output condition Spindle speed control mode gt 0 Cs contour control mode gt 1 CNC and spindle servo control unit The signal shift relationship of the spindle working opindle servo controller he signal input of User shifts and inputs or the spindle working Time se
459. part program C00 0 Faltosaea partprogram 20050 0 Faltocreatea patprgrm 20060 0 Wega command has been inputted 20070 0 Memory capacity isntenough 20080 0 Program number is outofrange 20090 0 ilegal edt the macro program 3000 0 Faltoopenlkdder 3040 0 The software version of ladder chart isnot suited 30020 0 The frst grade program ofladder_chartis too ong 3030 0 CMCisfaledto communicate with keyboard 2014 0 A memory malfunction appears please have a inspection or power on over again 3050 0 DNC com faut check hardware and baucrate 3060 0 pammeerflesafal aora 0 fisemmut 30080 0 Axis output servo interfaces cannot be the same 30090 0 fe pointer error in program loading 20 00 0 file pointer positioning error in program loading 3 10 0 le reading eror in program loading 3 20 0 prgrmlconemr 20 30 0 rato axis active needed as using Cs contour contol 3 40 0 ais names cant be identic 20250 0 208 axes acive together disabled Pls modify parameter 3960 0 ONO fe deleton fal xoxo 0 USBreadand write eroriconnectit again ET O TA 3 90 TN 20900 0 Program loading failure along block exceeding 255 characters exists 394 Chamfering point is not on the specified line Chamfering point is not on the specified arc opecified chamfering length is not within the range In helical interpolatio
460. pindle speed A Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3742 opindle speed A Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3743 Spindle speed A Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3744 409 gt o o D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE When executing S code sequence chart related as follows Do not switch the gear select signal Read the block of the code Turn to next block of the program Spindle speed instruction output In this case do not output SF signal and when new value spindle speed instruction outputted it will automatically transfer to implement the next block Do switch the gear select signal Read the block of the S code Tum to next block of the program Gear select signal GR10 GR40 SF FIN Spindle speed instruction output oy FYL To switch gear select signal firstly CNC outputs gear select signal then after a time TMF set by data parameter No 3010 outputs SF signal Repeatedly after another same TMF CNC outputs new spindle speed instruction PLC changes the gear at the moment receiving the SF signal after finished then sending accomplishment signal FIN SF changes with FIN just the way S code output The rest signals are same with related signals in single analog spindle 10 4 PLC Control of Spindle Output In the spindle speed
461. pitch error compensation Setting range 1000 999999 Unit 0 001mm 3 2 10 Communication Setting 3 0 2 0 Serial communication baudrate Setting range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 unit bit s 351 Ii 5 Y e D T le Ii T esp 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 3 2 11 Machine Zero Return ZCn 1 Deceleration signal DECn and one rotation signal PCn of each axis are in parallel connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal DECn and one rotation signal PCn of each axis are connected independently independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return 0 0 3 1 High speed of each axis machine zero return Setting range 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 03 2 Low speed of each axis machine zero return Setting range 10 1000 Unit mm min ZNIK 71 Direction keys locked during zero return homing continues to end by pressing direction key once 0 Direction keys unlocked but should be held on during zero return 7 0 0 6 ZMn 1 Each axis zero return type C 0 Each axis zero return type B ZRSn 71 There are machine zero point in each axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in each axis it returns t
462. point R to a distance d from the end of the last cutting which is where cutting is restarted and the cutting feed is performed When point Z has been reached the spindle is stopped then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction The tool retracts to the point R the spindle stops If it is G98 state rapidly move to the initial position the Figure is shown below 114 Chapter 3 G Command G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 Y d cutting start dist i eset ts etu i d cutting start distance Initial level Spindle orientation Spindle orientation Point R U O Q Q 3 3 Q jet td Y Initial level ET 1 Explanations When tapping feed is performing the speed override can not be adjusted when the retraction is performed the speed override value is set by data parameter No 5211 when the data parameter No 5211 is set to 0 the override value is fixed as 100 The linear acceleration or deceleration constant value in tapping feed is set by data parameter No 5261 the linear acceleration or deceleration constant in retraction is set by data parameter No 5271 if the No 5271 is set to 0 the acceleration or deceleration constant in retraction is then set by data parameter No 5261 and the retraction distance d is set by data parameter No 5213 3 30 3 Address Explanation S ified mic Address Command address explanation content Specify
463. position by X Y and Z at the rapid traverse rate Explanation X The absolute coordinate of aim point in X axis is indicated by G90 the aim point increment against the mid point in X axis is indicated by G91 Y The absolute coordinate of aim point in Y axis is indicated by G90 the aim point increment against the mid point in Y axis is indicated by G91 Z The absolute coordinate of aim point in Z axis is indicated by G90 the aim point increment against the mid point in Z axis is indicated by G91 One of the command address X Y and Z or all of them can be omitted see the following figure Command Function O X Y and Z axes are in the original position the next block continued G29 X Only X axis performs the command returning from the reference point C Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK G29 Y Only Y axis performs the command returning from the reference point G29 Z Only Z axis performs the command returning from the reference point G29 X Z Only X and Z axes perform the command returning from the reference point G29 X_ Y Only X and Y axes perform the command returning from the reference point G29 Y Z Only Y and Z axes perform the command returning from the reference point G29 X Y Z X YandZ perform the command returning from the reference point U A O Q Q 3 3 Q Process for command action R Reference point LA A Start point H y L PF m e ORO C
464. pot is back in position that do toolpot can back to zero position otherwise not 2 When the toolpot wants back to zero position the CNC will detect X0 0 signal If this signal turns one circle and the toolpot keeping spinning and cannot find O point please check the zero signal in machine tools electric is correct or not 3 After the toolpot back to zero point the target and current toolcases data will be all set to1 indicating that the current toolcase No O is 1 If the data corresponding to the toolpot is not 1 please check machine tools electric is correct or not 4 there is no key in 980MDc V panel If other keys needed to be set the ladder diagram should be altered B Autotoolpot rotation Input M60 into the MDI or AUTO mode to ensure safety please move the clamping axis Z axis to the 3 reference point otherwise M60 will not complete the rotation In debugging when start M60 to rotate toolpot please set K12 1 parameter to 1 for safety setting this parameter is not recommended In the situation that both of Z axis is moved to the 3 reference and the parameter is set but still the toolpot cannot rotate 1 please make sure the tool magazine parameter K11 6 and K11 7 set in turret tool magazine valid 2 after inputting the instruction and starting the program make sure that D408 and D409 are the same in Ladder gt PLC data gt D setting If they are same please input a T instruction different from D408 the
465. put G21 switches each other the offset should be suited to the reset of the input unit 3 11 Reference Point Return G28 Format G28 X Y Z Function The middle point position specified by X Y and Z is reached from the start point at the rapid traverse rate then it returns to the reference point Explanation G28 is a non modal G command X The absolute coordinate of middle point in X axis is indicated by G90 the middle point increment against current point in X axis is indicated by G91 Y The absolute coordinate of middle point in Y axis is indicated by G90 the middle point increment against current point in Y axis is indicated by G91 Z The absolute coordinate of middle point in Z axis is indicated by G90 the middle point increment against current point in Z axis is indicated by G91 One of the command addresses X Y and Z or all of them can be omitted as follows Process for command action See the figure 3 10 1 Positioning from current position to intermediate point of command axis at the rapid traverse rate From point A to B 2 Positioning to the reference point from intermediate point at the rapid traverse rate From point B to R 3 If the machine tool is unlocked the zero return indicator lights up when the reference point return is finished 46 Chapter 3 G Command R Reference point 4 A Start point OM _ a E S 3 ag a B Intermediate point S Fig 3 10 3 gt Q Note
466. quence figure 127 U im O e um 9 3 3 e GSK CGSN CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Input shif by the User The spindle servo work at ihe position made The signal input af spindle serva working The spindle servo shifts in working mode The signal output of spindle servo working The spindle servo shifts in working mode CON GOZAN FSCSL FO44 1 lt gt MC spindle control made switch MC spindle control made switch Relative parameter 128 0 6 0 The acceleration deceleration time constant of CS axis Resolution range 10 4000 Unit ms Chapter 5 Macro Program CHAPTER5 MACRO PROGRAM GSK980MDc provides macro programs which is similar to high level language Variable assignment arithmetic operation logical judgment and conditional branch can be realized through custom macro program It is in favor of the programming for special parts lessens the complex operation and simplifies the custom program Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms However macro program allows variable assignment arithmetic operation logical judgment and conditional branch which makes it easier to program the same machining process U im O e a 9 3 3 e Macro program body COSP9011A10155 10 and 5 respectively call macra w pro ram and define variables 1 variables 1 and 4 can be and 4 Sa used to replace the unknown Cr V
467. r variable example G65 H85 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is greater than or equals to 102 branch to N1000 block or execute in order 30 Smaller than or equals to conditional branch G65 H86 Q I R J Pn Pn sequence number variable example G65 H86 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is smaller than or equals to 102 branch to N1000 block or execute in order 31 P S alarm issued G65 H99 Pn Pn sequence number variable alarm No n 600 example G65 H99 P15 P S custom alarm 615 is issued U im O e um 9 3 3 e 5 3 2 Macro Statement The operations listed in Arithmetic and Logic Operation table can be executed in program The expressions right to the operator contain constants and or variables that consisting of functions and operators The variables j and k in the expression can be assigned as constants The left variable the first variable can be assigned by expression The macro statement is more intuitive convienent and flexible It can perform compound operation and multinesting Sometimes a macro statement is equal to several tranditional G65H macro programs General format Please refer the statement format in the Arithmetic and Logic Operation table for editing macro statement e Macro program editing ALTER In program editing mode or MID mode by pressing key macro editing state can be switched or inserted Differences of Automatic space Processing of letter O Input of special s
468. r LOCAL var SYS YAR FIND P 2 Local variable O E EDIT 6876 T46 HBH a 00001 NO9097 m NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA S 1 13 25 2 14 3 15 27 4 16 28 7 gt 6 18 30 7 19 Ea 8 20 32 9 1 33 10 22 EE u 23 12 24 0001 Memory data set 0 after power on PUB VAR Locat var SYS VAR FIND P 3 System variable EDIT 85385 TOS HAA OFT gt MACRO SYSTEM VARIABLE 00001 N03260 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 1000 xxxxxxxx 1012 1107 1001 xxxxxxxx 1013 1108 1002 1014 1109 1003 1015 1110 1004 1032 1111 1805 1180 1112 1008 ne 1113 1007 1102 1114 1008 1103 1115 1009 1104 1132 1010 1105 1133 1011 1106 2001 1000 Read G54 0 s value 16 32 50 E see eit PUB VAR LOCAL VAR svs var FIND P 3 Coordinate system setting page Press to the coordinate system setting page 193 O Lo D um Q O GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR MDI 58788 22 HAB OFFSET WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM 00001 N02433 EXT OFFSET G54 COORD G55 COORD ABSOLUTE X X 0 000 X 0 000 X 42 850 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 34 110 7 0 000 Z 0 000 7 0 000 Z 3 324 G56 COORD G57 COORD G58 COORD MACHINE X 0 000 X 0 000 X 0 000 X 1
469. r cannot switch pages and move the cursor lock the screen when the diagnosis keyboard is needed to avoid switching pages FIND P Press to execute the search according to diagnosis number 2 CNC version page CNC DIAGNOSIS Press VERSION or press repeatedly to enter CNC version information page The page displays CNC current software hardware system ID and PLC version information as follows MDI SBB8B TAA HAD PRODUCT GSK980MDc LADDER FILE GSK98 MDc SeriesEN LD2 SH VER V 3 01 LADDER DESIGN GSK CHINA HM VER V3 01 003 LADDER VER 2011 08 12 BOOT VER V2 8t VERIFY CODE 2869 SYSTEM ID CTIMDc CREATED DATE 2012 03 12 02 29 58 PLC VER PLC N3 LAST DATE 2012 03 12 02 29 58 NOTE PLC STATE RUN eSK980MDc MDc V Standard Ladder CUR CYCLE 16 MIN CYCLE 16 MAX CYCLE 16 s 09 27 09 eh y 4 A osmosis version 0 0 208 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 3 8 Graphic interface GRAPH Press to enter graph interface including graph parameter and graph track page 1 Graph parameter In graph parameter page the user can input boundary values of canvas and coordinate system of graph track display and the input numerical value is memorized after power off which is shown below
470. r how is the gear state spindle will rotate at a certain speed so in the mechanical spindle positioning it can be used to rotate into the brake and pin and so on In M series spindle motor can be made rotating in a certain speed by setting data parameter NO 3732 in which situation because the rotating speed is constant in the gear switch devices it can be used to gear shift When spindle stop signal SSTP is 1 spindle orientation signal SOR is invalid When bit parameter GST is 0 SOR signal is used for spindle orientation of which speed is decided by data parameter3732 while gear stage select signal does not change For instance if at the SOR signa turns to 1 while the speed data parameter 3732 set is not in the range of the low speed gear due to gear stage signal is not alter CNC will compute the corresponding speed still according to high speed gear curve When bit parameter GST is 1 SOR signal is used for control the motor speed The output instruction has no connection with gear stage set suitable spindle motor speed to control gear shift Input instructions NL N18 NL Mrs l miscellaneous function treatmern Stop commands Location detect Spindle stop signal Spindle orientation signal i Max 7 ms MN En Max Ors Output to spindle instructions Actuating signal Spindle speed Ad F L LPE a BL Certain 3peed sex by dara parameter 3732 gt
471. r the user User s safety responsibility The user should study and train the system safety operation master the safety operation content The user should be responsible for the danger caused by increasing changing or modifying the CNC system the accessories by itself he user should be responsible for the danger because of the mistaken operation regulation maintenance installation and storage VI CONTENTS I Programming CHAPTER PROGRAMMING FUNDMENUITALES 4 5 2 una seat Tu tad a ouo qo soa Pepe UD a ume he ctetur eique 3 LP IB pido oo E 3 Liz it MOOK AIM gm CC AMI aM ERE T E UEM 6 1 2 1 Program Exec tion SegUENCE sererai oe rero he ie aaa excu aun coke xo unge astu pR uS 6 1 2 2 Word Execution Sequence within BIOCK ccoooonccccconncncccoonnncononcnnnonononncnnononncnnonennnnnos 7 1 3 Basic Axes Increment SY Mic id 7 1 3 1 Speed OL INGCFEMENT SY SISINS estais 8 3 2 UNIT or Inerermiert SYSTEMS sauce uis ies yone A ipei ea oda deeds 8 1 3 3 Data Ranges of Increment Syster sisariensa a aa aN 8 1 3 4 Data Ranges and Unit of Increment System ccccccnccnccccncnnccnnnnnnnonnnnnncononnnncononennnnnonennnnnos 9 1 3 5 The Units and Ranges of Program Address Values ccccoccncccccncoconononononononcnnonanonos 11 1 4 Additional Axes Increment Systemi visi aE eme kosten Rosendo aee 11 1 4 1 Additional Axes in Current Increment System eese eene nnns 12 1 4 2 Add
472. ram 1 9999 pall O em M miscellaneous function 9 lem 9000 9999 piis M code e call m UNE Decimal alarm Tool BEEN tool life unit Decimal O or other number a time non 0 time alarm O Program number Program number 0 9999 28 Chapter 3 G Command 99999999 99999999xleast input increment Decimal Delay time in G04 ms Dua Negative number means exact alarm stop S Decimal U What kind of number reference returned gai O in G30 par e omitted 9 E l Decimal E Skip sequence or alarm number in G65 0 9999 alarm 2 i Decimal M98 subprogram call times program 0 09999999 ecima name alarm sequence number of M99 subprogram Decimal 0 9999 return alarm l Decimal G54 1 additional workpiece system P n 1 48 alarm 99999999 99999999xleast input G50 G51 scale Round off increment p must not be O Specifying G73 and G83 cut in value 99999999 99999999xleast input Round off per time increment 999999999 Decimal Th f ion i e value of operation in G65 999999999 99999999 99999999xleast input Radius value of arc l Round off increment R plane value of canned cycle 99999999 99999999xleast input Round off command increment 99999999 99999999xleast input Decimal The value of operation in G65 P increment alarm Decimal Analog spindle 0 9999 poll alarm l Decimal Shift spindle alarm Decimal Number of tool 0 32 parameter set value alarm Decimal Tool compensation num
473. rations can be executed including opening open amp new deletion copying to CNC search rename save as all deletion arranging names arranging time which are shown below AUTOsxs 50008 TOO HOO PROGRAM gt USB DIRECTORY u 00001 N00000 TOTAL 4 u NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00001 00001 855 B 2012 03 16 00001 HULER HHLA 588383 98 OMDCEE FF CATH 00002 321 B 2012 03 16 E EsH 5TH LZESED 09000 330 B 2012 03 16 N0005 GOO X100 ue 7100 A100 C100 09001 203 B 2012 03 18 N6010 Gl7 G90 G54 G49 GO X50 Y50 750 A 50 C50 HB N0020 GOB X 5 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 MO 3 N0030 G98 G82 R75 721 5 P2000 F1200 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 05 21 N0050 G98 X52 232 Y55 799 N0060 G 4 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F5 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 X1 5 N0090 G90 GOO X50 Y50 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 2 s 16 03 09 A OPEN NEWROPEN DELETE CEL a SELECT pin gt 190 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display AUTOss s BBB TOA HAD PROGRAM gt USB DIRECTORY u 00001 N00000 TOTAL 4 NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00001 00001 855 B 2012 03 16 00001 HL EK FEAL A AD es 980 MDC T FS 4TH 00002 821 B 2012 03 16 Bee4h 5TH 2e4h 09000 330 B 2012 03 16 N0005 GOO X100 We Z100 A100 C100 09001 203 B 2012 03 16 N0010 G17 G96 G54 G49 GO X50 Y50 750 A 50 C56 HO N0020 GOB X75 23 Y75 86
474. raverse speed when rapid override is FO Setting range 6 4000 Unit mm min Ii 7 esp 2 D et O 0 02 5 Feedrate of dry run Setting range 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 02 6 Initial value of cutting feedrate when power on Setting range 10 15000 Unit mm min 0 02 7 Axes top feedrate of cutting Setting range 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 02 8 Threading axes start speed Setting range 6 8000 Unit mm min 0 02 9 Time constant of cutting feed Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms 330 Chapter 3 Parameter 0 0 3 0 Acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in cutting feed Setting range 0 8000 Unit mm min 0 0 3 1 High speed of each axis machine zero return Setting range 10 60000 Unit mm min 0 03 2 Low speed of each axis machine zero return Setting range 10 1000 Unit mm min 0 0 3 4 Each axis backlash offset Setting range 0 2000 Unit 0 001mm 0 0 4 1 Start speed in manual feed mm min Setting range 0 8000 Unit mm min 0 0 4 2 Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of manual feed Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms 0 0 4 3 Max rapid traverse speed of the handwheel of each axis Setting range 10 60000 When No 175 7 is set to O pulse exceeding No 43 setting speed is ignored and so the speed cannot Ii exceed No 43 setting value When No 175 7 is set to 1 pulse exceeding No 4
475. rdinado sysserm N10 Y50 M99 Multiple local coordinate systems in the workpiece coordinate system N1 G28 X0 YO ZO A N2 G90 G54 G00 X0 YO i fins N3 M98 P1234 758 NNI N4 G52 X100 Y 100 4 Local EN IN ERI MB is N5 M98 P1234 i A generated from G52 N6 G52 X200 Y200 K fu N7 M98 P1234 150 NIE N8 G52 X0 YO E E pool new N4 is N8 G91 G52 X 200 Y 200 Lin A TP ETA n O1234 Subprogram 50 i 4 N2 God coordinate system N11 G00 XO YO J N12 G01 X50 D 4 HI 150 HY 25 WxI N1 3 Y 50 Cur at position N14 X0 YO M99 The local coordinate system generated from the N8 block in the brackets is consistent with the workpiece coordinate G54 which is the same with the result after N8 block is cancelled in the local coordinate system Notes When the parameter No 542 ZCL is set to 1 the local coordinate system of the axis is cancelled in the process of reference return G52 a0 ais the axis return to the reference point e The workpiece coordinate system and the machine coordinate system are not changed by setting the local coordinate system e Parameter setting determines whether cancel the local coordinate system after reset When the parameter No 542 RLC is set to 1 all local coordinate systems of the workpiece coordinate system are cancelled e When the workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying command G92 the local coordinate 63 U a O a um o 3 3 e v E O e y 3 3
476. rdinate command cancel G16 Polar coordinate command mode G17 XY plane selection G18 7X plane selection 14 57 41 o 4 After programs are edited in aided programming page is pressed to save the edited 260 Chapter Auto Operation programs to the place where the cursor is in MDI input box 6 11 2 Edit The blue letter is valid and it can execute the edit input numerical value and cursor position but the grey letter is invalid and it cannot execute the edit input numerical value and cursor position 1 G command menu 1 Move the cursor to G address input place by direction key or press to position to G address input place When G address has no input numerical value G command menu is popped up 15 12 59 6 070 A A RAT 2 Input 14 at G address and the right G command menu automatically selects the input numerical value to matched G command to display as follows as follows EDIT SaB00 TAA HAA Aided programming 00100 N00004 1 N00015 G01 X100 Y100 7100 G command function N 00020 F G00 Rapid positioning G110 X200 P GOI Linear interpolation c NNI Y 200 U G02 Circular and helical 7 200 5 interpolation clockwise A W 20 G03 Circular and helical B E interpolation counterclockwise C L G04 Dwel l I 20 D2 G07 1 Cylindrical interpolation u J H G15 Polar coordinate command cancel K 10 M G16 Polar coordinate command mode R 50 Gl XY plane se
477. re PO is the scaling center P1P2P3P4 scales to P1P2 P3 P4 Format Scale up or down along all axes at the same magnification rate Format Significance of command G51 X Y Z P Scaling start XY Z Absolute command for cente Scaling is valid coordinate value of scaling Scaling mode P Scaling rate Scaling cancel Scale up or down along all axes at a different magnification rate Format Significance of command X Y Z Absolute command for cente Scaling is valid coordinate value of scaling Scaling mode J K Scaling rate for X axis Y axis Z Scaling cancel axis respectively G50 G51 are G code of No 11 it is a modal G code The unit of scaling is 0 001 State parameter SCLX SXLY SCLZ No 562 are used to set whether the scaling function of each axis is valid Explanations e Scale up or down along all axes at the same magnification rate When state parameter XSC No 562 is set to 0 if P is specified on the block G51 the scaling is specified by P otherwise the value set by data parameter will be taken as the magnification rate e Scale up or down along all axes at a separate scaling When state parameter XSC No 562 is set to 1 and each axis is scaled up or down at a different scale the rate is specified by I J K on the block G51 If I J K are not specified on the block the rate is determined by data parameter SCLVX SCLVY and SCLVZ No 5421 When a negative scale is specified mirror image is applied
478. re G54 G55 read all 16 bits of a System Signal at one time G54 G55 input 0 1 processed by voe S G54 G55 wri ll 16 bits of PLC 234 Ie 54 write a Its of a Read signal at one time write Store G56 G59 write all 32 bits of a signal at one time Tool h i Read SYSE ool length compensation wear 9999 999 9999999 ea variable write Tool length compensation 9999 999 9999 999 135 1032 1100 1115 1132 1133 2001 2032 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EY ite 482401 4 2432 Cutter compensation wear 9999 999 9999 999 ho 82601 12632 Cutter compensation wear 9999 999 9999 999 write Automatic operation control 3003 0 1 2 3 ad 0 7 83003 83004 Automatic operation control 4 3004 LAN Write me The number of machined parts 9 99999999 G00 G01 G02 G03 G73 G74 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 G110 G111 G112 U E O e 9 3 3 e modal G code Read 4001 group only G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 4002 4003 ony G90 G91 4003 modal G code group Read DATOS eee a G94 G95 4005 modal G code group Read ee a 4005 4007 G20 G21 4006 G code group ies G40 G41 G42 4007 modal G code group T only 4008 G43 G44 G49 modal G code group Read 8 only 44010 G98 G99 modal G code group Read 10 only 484014 G54 G59 modal G code group Read 14 only only 2 R only o
479. re stored and new local variables 2 3 4 levels are prepared 4 When M99 return from macro programs is commanded the local variables 0 1 2 3 levels stored in 2 3 are recovered in the state as they are stored 5 2 3 Public Variable Public variable is the global variable defined within the system It can be used in any program That is to say 4101 used in a macro program is the same as the one used in another macro program Therefore the arithmetic operation result of public variable 101 in a program can be used in another program In the system there is no special regulation for using public variables 100 199 is the variable group without power off memory function 22500 2999 is the variable group with power off memory function i e data are stored after power off e Public macro variable adding notes With 3 level or more than privilege the user can compile note files on PC according to some note format when the system stops and the compiled notes are transitted to corresponding public variables via U disk which is shown below 1 Tool offset page is shown below U O a um y 3 3 e EDIT SBBBH TAA HAB OFT gt MACRO PUBLIC VARIABLE 00216 1615101915 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 100 112 124 101 113 125 102 114 126 103 115 127 104 116 128 105 117 129 106 118 130 107 119 131 108 120 132 109 121 133 110 127 1
480. real time tuning Cutting feedrate maximum 15000mm min feed per min or 500mm r feed per rotation Feedrate override 0 150 sixteen level real time tuning e e GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Manual feedrate 0 1260mm min sixteen level real time tuning MPG feed 0 001 0 010 0 100 1 000mm four gears Acceleration deceleration type S type for rapid traverse exponential type for cutting feed Automatic chamfering 82 kinds of G codes G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G11 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G28 G29 G30 G31 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G49 G50 G51 G50 1 651 1 G52 G53 G54 1 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G65 G66 G67 G73 G74 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G98 G99 G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G116 G117 G132 6133 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 G140 G141 G142 G143 31 kinds of arithmetic logical operations and skip can be achieved by macro command G65 Macro statement command eg IF WHILE GOTO Operation Seven operation modes EDIT AUTO MDI DNC MACHINE ZERO MPG STEP mode and MANUAL Tapping function lead 0 001 500mm or 0 06 25400 pitch inch Encoder tapping settable line number of encoder 0 or100p r 5000p r no detect for spindle encoder when the line number is set to 0 Rigid tapping by rotary axis Drive ratio between encoder and spindle 1 255 1 255 Backlash compensation 0 2 000mm Pitch error compensati
481. rence point G28 If G28 is specified in compensation mode the compensation will be cancelled at an intermediate position The compensation mode is automatically restored after the reference point is returned 167 C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual SK 48 Intermediate position F Programmed Tool center Reference p Tm path path Fig 5 23 Temporarily cancel compensation vector by 78 U im O a um y 3 3 e Gia Intermediate position Programmed Tool center Reference paint path path Fig 6 44 529 temporarily cancel compensation vector If the canned cycle command is specified in compensation mode the compensation will be temporarily cancelled in the canned cycle operation 1 The compensation mode is automatically restored after the canned cycle is terminated 6 2 7 Exceptional case e When the inner corner machining is less than tool radius When the inner corner machining is less than tool radius the inner offset of a tool will cause over cut The tool stops and alarm occurs after moving at the beginning or at the corner in previous block But if the switch of Single block is ON the tool will be stopped at the end of the previous block e When a groove less than the tool diameter is machined When the tool center moves opposite to the direction of programmed path the over cutting will be generated by the cutter radius compensation Tool stops and alarm appears after moving at
482. reset The S1 S4 commands are ineffective output when the CNC is switched on An arbitrary command is performed from S01 S02 S03 and S04 the corresponding S signal output is effective and held on at the same time the other 3 S signal output are cancelled The S1 S4 output are cancelled when performing the SOO command only one of S1 S4 is effective in the meantime 2 2 2 Spindle Speed Analog Voltage Control The spindle speed is analog voltage control when the BIT4 of current bit parameter is set to 1 16 CHAPTER 2 MSTF CODES 0000 9999 leading zero can be omitted spindle speed analog voltage control Command address Command function The CNC outputs 0 10V analog voltage to control the spindle servo or inverter for achieving the stepless speed regulating of the spindle when the spindle speed is set The S command value is not memorized when the power is turned off and then the parameter recovers to O when the power is turned on The CNC owns four mechanical spindle shifts function Counting the corresponding analog voltage value specified by the speed based upon the current set value corresponding to data parameter No3741 No3744 of the top speed output analog voltage is 10V of the spindle shift when the S command is performed then output the voltage value to spindle servo or inverter so that the consistency of actual speed and required speed of the spindle are controlled The analog voltage output is OV when the CNC is switc
483. ring machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal DECn and one rotation signal PCn of each axis are connected independently independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine 328 Chapter 3 Parameter zero return DIRn 71 Direction signal DIR is high level as each axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as each axis moves negatively 0 0 0 9 ALMn 1 each axis low level alarm signal 0 each axis high level alarm signal CPFO CPF7 Setting values of backlash compensation pulse frequency Set frequency 2 xCPF7 2 xCPF6 2 xCPF5 2 xCPF4 2 xCPF3 2 xCPF2 2 xCPF1 CPFO Kpps BDEC 1 Backlash compensation type B the compensation data are output by ascending type and the set frequency is invalid 0 Backlash compensation type A the compensation data are output by the set frequency by bit parameter No 010 or 1 8 of it BD8 1 Backlash compensation is done by the 1 8 of the set frequency 0 Backlash compensation is done by the set frequency Ii ZNIK 1 Direction keys locked during zero return homing continues to end by pressing direction key once 0 Direction keys unlocked but should be held on during zero return 0 0 1 2 ISOT 1 Prior to machine zero return after power on manual rapid traverse valid 5 N et D T le 0 Prior to machine zero return after power on manual rapid traverse invalid SOT 1
484. rive unit CN14 4th axis 15 core DB female socket for connecting 4th axis drive unit CN21 coder 15 core DB female socket for connecting encoder CN51 inverter 9 core DB male socket for connecting pc RS232 interface CN15 5th axis 4 spindle port 25 core DB male socket for connecting inverter amp 5th axis CN31 handwheel 26 core 3 line female socket for connecting handwheel CN62 output44 core 3 lines female socket for sending the signal of CNC to machine CN61 input 44 core 3 line male socket for sending the signal of machine to CNC GSK980MDoc Installation Installation Conditions of the Cabinet The dust cooling liquid and organic resolution should be effectively prevented from entering the cabinet The designed distance between the CNC back cover and the cabinet should be not less than 20cm the inside and outside temperature difference of the cabinet should be no les than 10 C temperature rises when the cabinet inside temperature rises Fans should be fixed in the cabinet to ventilate it The panel should be installed in a place where the coolant can t splash The external electrical interference should be taken into consideration in cabinet design to prevent it from transferring to CNC system Protection Methods Against Interference order to ensure the CNC stable working the anti interference technology such as electromagnetic radiation shielding impact current absorbing power mixed wave filtering 303 Ii
485. rm occurs Cannot execute program skip in DNC mode Please refer to the DNC communication software for details 7 3 Running State 7 3 1 A Single Block Execution When the system first executes a program it may select Single block mode to execute the program to avoid the programming errors In Auto mode the methods for turning on single are as follows Q 2 Press the wt key to make the single block indicator in State area to light up it means that the single block function has been selected 270 Chapter Auto Operation In Single block mode when the current block execution is finished the CNC system stops if next block is to be executed it needs to press the A key Note Even at the mid point the single block stops in G28 G29 G30 commands 7 3 2 Dry Run Before the program is to be executed in order to avoid the programming errors it may select the Dry run mode to check the program And the machine runs by a constant speed other than the speed specified by the program In Auto mode the method for turning on the Dry run switch are as follows ap Press Y key to make the dry run indicator in State area to light up it means that the dry run function is selected The speed specified by the program is invalid in dry run and actual feedrate is set by the data parameter No 25 7 3 3 Machine lock n In Auto mode the ways to make machine lock function valid are as follows 9 D 2 3 gt Press the
486. rn ZM5 ZMX of the bit parameter N2006 return and initial backlash direction of X Y Z 4th 5th axes machine zeroes at deceleration ZC4 ZCX of the bit parameter No007 it is able to set whether an approach switch taken as both deceleration and zero signals when X Y Z 4th axes return to machine zero point ZNLK of the bit parameter N2011 for direction keys lock when performing zero return ZRS5 ZRSX of the bit parameter N2014 for deceleration and zero signals detection of X Y Z axes in machine zero return MZR5 MZRX of the bit parameter N913 for positive or negative zero turn of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Data parameter N2032 low speed of X Y Z 4th 5th axes in machine zero return Data parameter N2031 high speed of X Y Z 4th 5th axes in machine zero return RRTx of bit parameter Ne188 set the machine zero return type of the 4th and the 5th axis separately Machine zero return can be done after the validity of overtravel limit switch is confirmed Machine zero return types A B C can be selected for basic axes X Y Z Machine zero return types A B C D can be selected for additional axes 4th 5th The machine zero is usually fixed at the max travel point and the effective stoke of the zero return touch block should be more than 25mm to ensure a sufficient deceleration distance for accurate zero return The more rapid the machine zero return is the longer the zero return touch block should be Or the movin
487. rograms edited in MDI operation are deleted by the reset operation 0 The programs edited in MDI operation are not deleted by the reset operation MKP 1 In MDI operation when M02 or M30 is executed the edited MDI programs are not deleted 0 In MDI operation when M02 or M30 is executed the edited MDI programs are deleted 350 Chapter 3 Parameter M30R 71 Cursor return after executing M30 in Auto mode 0 Cursor don t return after executing M30 in Auto mode 0 8 0 0 L2 L1 LO Interface language selection PROD 1 Rel coord don t with comp 0 Rel coord with comp DISP 1 Enter absolute page after power on 0 Enter relative page after power on 0 8 3 0 KEY1 71 Prog switch ON after power on 0 Prog switch OFF after power on MGEH 1 Aided programming function is shielded 0 Aided programming function is unshielded 3 2 1 6 Block No increment for block No auto insertion Setting range 1 100 3 2 9 Precision Compensation 0 0 0 3 PCOMP z1 Screw pitch error compensation valid 0 Screw pitch error compensation invalid 3 6 2 0 Screw pitch error compensation position number of each axis machine zero Setting range 0 1023 3 6 2 1 Min position number of each axis for pitch error compensation Setting range 0 1023 3 6 2 2 Max position number of each axis for pitch error compensation Setting range 0 1023 3 6 2 4 Interval of each axis screw
488. rred to as rounding down to an integer Be particular careful when handling negative numbers Example Suppose that 1 1 2 2 1 2 When 3 FUP 1 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 1 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FUP 2 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 2 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 5 3 3 Priority of Operations 1 Function 2 Operation such as multiplication and division AND 3 Operation such as addition and subtraction OR XOR xample 3 1282 33 SIN 4 O Eland 3 indicate the order of operations 5 3 4 Bracket Nesting Brackets are used to change the order of operations Brackets can be used to multinesting Note that the square bracket is used to enclose an expression the round bracket is used in notes When the priority is not defined it is advised to use square bracket to enclose 5 4 Branch and Repetition In a program the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement Three types of branch and repetition operations are used 1 GOTO statement unconditional branch 2 IF statement conditional branch IF THEN 3 WHILE statement repetition WHILE 150 Chapter 5 Macro Program 5 4 1 Unconditional Branch GO TO statement Go to the block with sequence number n when a sequence number out the range of 1 99999 is specified an alarm is raised A sequence number can also be specified using an e
489. rsor shifts a column to the left if the cursor locates at the line head it moves to the end of the next block 5 Press key to page upward the cursor moves to the 1 line and the 1 column of the previous page if it pages to the head of the program the cursor moves to the 2 line and 1 column 6 Press key to page downward the cursor moves to the 1 line and 1 column of the next page if it pages to the end of the program the cursor moves to the last line and 1 column of the program 2 Searching To search for the specified character upward or downward from the cursor current location The steps of searching are as follows 3 1 Press key to enter Edit mode PROGRAM 2 Press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page Mis FIND P 3 Press __GONTENT key to enter program page press to input the required content as follows 249 O Lo D um Q O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSR s dud T06 HBB 00001 N051 4 ERA pam SUE PRG SEARCH eee COPY SEG PASTE sec PELETE 4 Press E key EN or a by the location relation between the character to be searched and the character where the cursor locates it displays as follows EDIT 58259 159 HAA PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT x 00001 N04101 GOO G17 G54 G90 GOO XO YO ZO ok WM l 14 23 45 A PR SEARCH peg COPY SEG paste see
490. rt is designed for X Y Z axes Fig 4 1 So the MESP of bit parameter No 172 should be set to O And the CNC diagnostic message ESP can monitor the state of emergency stop input signal In Manual orMPG mode slowly move the axes to test the validity of stroke limit switch correctness of alarm display validity of overtravel release button When the overtravel occurs or Emergency Stop button is pressed emergency stop alarm will be issued by CNC system The alarm can be cancelled by pressing down the Overtravel button and moving reversely 4 2 Drive Unit Setting Set BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 009 according to alarm logic level of drive unit The BIT4 Ii 5 N c D T O BITO of bit parameter No 009 for our drive unit are all set for 1 If the machine moving direction is not consistent with the moving command modify the BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 008 BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 175 BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 174 4 3 Gear Ratio Adjustment 4 3 1 Servo Feed Axis The data parameter N2015 Ne016 can be modified for electronic gear ratio adjustment to meet the different mechanical transmission ratio if the machine travel distance is not consistent with the displacement distance displayed by CNC coordinate Calculation formula of CNC CMR x vie CMD L Zj a X 360 x 360 Ly y CMD L Lp CMR CMR command multiplier coefficient data parameter No15 CMD command frequency divis
491. ry step above has been finished correctly that can the overall program debugging of tool change be taking in MDI or AUTO mode Program Main program O0001 O0001 Tool change main program T01 M6 call subroutine by M instructions other than M98 TO5 M6 M30 Tool change subroutine O9000 O9000 N1 501 4003 Isave G9091 N2 IF 1000EQ1 GOTO 17 if the target tool of the tool change is the current one then skip to the next E N3 G91 G30 ZO back to the 2nd reference point zi N4 M19 Ispindle orientation accomplished N5 1100 1 back to the reference point and spindle orientation accomplished N6 M65 toolpot boosting to the right N7 M54 tool releasing N8 G30 ZO P3 back to the 3rd reference point N9 1100 0 laway from the 2nd reference point N10 M60 star toolpot rotation N11 G30 ZO P2 back to the 2nd reference point N12 M55 tool clamping N13 1100 1 notify to back to the 2nd reference point N14 M66 toolpot boosting to the left 452 Appendix N15 M61 ftool changes completed and update the tool message N16 1100 0 clear sign N17 G 501 recover the value of G9091 M99 B Exception Handling Handle the chaos tools in toolpot When the current toolcase is in the right position for tool falling then open the switch of the parameter in the MDI mode and just input the current toolcase No into D409 to adjust B Related alarm and retractions Alarm Alarm No Alarm message In
492. s renamed Ladder diagram PLC resume and backup Ladder diagram backup Copy all ladder diagrams ldx file of the current system to U gsk980MDc_backup user of the U disk memory unit If the above mentioned file does not exist set up a new one If the file exists this file will be overwritten by the new one Resume ladder diagram Copy parameter files from the U disk memory unit U gsk980MDc_backup user to the CNC system to resume the ladder diagram Resume operation cannot be done if the above mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is renamed Note Repower the CNC system after the ladder diagram restore is successful Resume operation To convenient to the user resuming backup file in different directory the user can select the resume directory gsk980MDc backup Note The user can select the resume page which only lists file directory of its directory name including MD 3 Backup Operation Example 1 Backup log take an example of log 2 Press BACKUP to enter the page and the user can execute the following operations including canceling the selection all selection and so on 3 In MDI mode press IN to select the log and then press OUT to execute backup to successfully backup the log to the U disk When the backup fails the system prompts the fail as follows 208 Chapter 11 Resume and Backup EDIT 88823 104 HBB BACKUP OPTION HELP M PARAMETER M PROGRAM F OFFSET
493. s operation functions open new amp open delete find rename save as delete all name rank rank time and so on which are shown below EDIT 51926 177 HAA PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00001 N00910 TOTAL 3 SPACE 30 0 M USED 20 0 M IDLE 10 0 M NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00003 3 00001 0 B 2012 03 19 00003 00002 788 B 2011 11 39 G74 G91 X10 Y10 710 R2 F2 M4 00003 55 B 2012 03 19 64 X5 00003 55 B 2012 03 1 M30 M99 O Lo D um Q r O ES EN NEW amp OPEN EE ERR 14 1 OPEN operation In Edit or Auto mode pressing wm can open the program where the current cursor is 2 NEW amp OPEN operation In Edit or Auto mode press senos to key in a program and then press the input key When the keyed program exists the program is opened when it does not exist in Edit mode the operation can create a program 3 DELETE DEL operation DELETE In Edit mode press wu and the system prompts whether to delete the program where the current cursor is Press Input key to delete it and press Cancel key to cancel deletion 4 FIND P Select MOM to key in the program required to find press the key Input and the cursor moves the program which is required to find 6 10 Calculator Function PROGRAM 1 Press to enter program content page In the page the screen displays at lower right corner which is shown below 257 C GS
494. s rotation axis the least incremental of the rotation axis is 0 01 degree so the 3 digit of the decimal is displayed in unit If it is set to a linear axis the display is same as the basis three axes X Y or Z When the 4 axis is set to a linear axis the 5 is set to a rotation axis the axis is displayed at the interface of related coordinate and coordinate amp program EDIT 50099 TAB HAB RELATIVE POS 00216 NOQ000 MODAL INFORMATION G17 G90 G15 G69 G21 G40 G49 G94 G98 G50 GOO 50 1 000 S 000 lu O00 MAIN INFORMATION JOG F 1260 FED OVRI 150 O00 mm RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 100 s O00 deg PART CNT o CUT TIHE 00 00 00 10 13 22 ABSOLUTE POS amp PRG revavive INTEGRATED O gt N lt x GGGG 121 U e e um 9 3 3 e G EsSsIN CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual EDIT Saaaa TAA HAA POSITION 00216 N00000 MODAL INFORMATION RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHINE 617 G90 G15 G69 G21 X 0 000 X 0 000 X 0 000 640 G49 G94 G98 G50 GOO G50 1 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 G54 Y Z 0 000 0 000 Z 0 000 430 50000 re A 0 000 0 000 0 000 Q a F mm min e p 0 000 t 0 000 0 000 100 me Ri E PROGRAM MAIN INFORMATION 1 JOG F 1260 a E FED OVRI ae Co 3 N0040 G54 GOO G90 X 26 92 Y22 364 3000 H03 4 N0050 722 5 RAP OVR
495. s rounded to the minimum input increment unit However such error is not accumulative Restrictions e The cylindrical interpolation command can not be specified in MDI mode otherwise alarm occurs 39 U O Q um 9 3 3 e D x O Q Q 3 gt Q GC GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual CL T d e Inthe cylindrical interpolation mode arc radius is specified by the address R but not specified by I J K otherwise alarm occurs e In the cylindrical interpolation mode positioning operation GOO cannot be specified including the commands that produce rapid traverse such as G28 G53 and canned cycle G73 G89 Before positioning is specified the cylindrical interpolation mode must be cancelled Cylindrical interpolation G07 1 can not be performed in the positioning mode GOO To determine rotary axis of interpolation a plane must be selected before entering the cylindrical interpolation mode The plane can not be switched after entering the cylindrical interpolation mode Tool length compensation must be specified before cylindrical interpolation The function of tool length compensation can not be performed in cylindrical interpolation The cylindrical interpolation command can not be specified simultaneously in the block where the length compensation command is specified otherwise alarm occurs e The validity of the cylindrical interpolation can not be specified repeatedly in the
496. s the variable is null i e undefined The mark indicates the variable value overflows of the range but the internal stored data may not overflow 2 The value of public variables 100 199 500 999 can be displayed on macro variable page U im O e um 9 3 3 e or be assigned directly by inputting data on the page EDIT SBBBB TAA HAB OFT gt MACRO PUBLIC VARIABLE 00216 N00000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 100 i 112 124 101 113 125 102 114 126 103 115 127 104 116 128 105 117 129 106 118 130 107 119 131 108 120 132 109 121 133 110 122 134 111 123 135 0100 Memory data set 0 after power on 10 29 20 M L ATL pus var LOCAL var SYS YAR FIND P 3 The value of local variables 1 33 and system variables do not have display screen A value of local variable or system variable can be displayed by assigning the value to public variables EDIT SBOBB8 TAB HAA OFT gt MACRO LOCAL VARIABLE 00216 515151616 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 1 13 25 2 14 26 3 15 27 4 16 28 5 17 29 6 18 30 7 19 31 8 20 32 9 21 33 10 22 11 23 12 24 0001 Memory data set 0 after power on 10 29 28 PUB VAR Locat var SYS YAR FIND P 134 Chapter 5 Macro Program
497. s unlocked the Bit O and Bit 1 of the reference point returning end signal F96 ZPn are HIGH of Intermediate B X Z X rt point A Machine 2 reference point R2 o Note 1 After returning the machine reference point by manual or the G28 command is performed the machine 2nd gr and 4th reference point return function can be employed only or the 9nd gr and 4th operation of G30 command the system alarm will be generated Note 2 From point A to B or from point B to R2 the 2 axes are moved at their separately rate so the path is not straight line possibly Note 3 After machine 2nd 3rd and 4th reference point returned by the G30 command the system tool length compensation cancellation is defined by bit 7 of the parameter No 13 Note 4 The 2nd 3rd and 4th reference point operation of G30 command can not be executed if the zero switch is not installed on the machine tool Note 5 The workpiece coordinate system is set after the machine 2nd 3rd and 4th reference point are returned reference point 3 14 Skip Function G31 As G01 linear interpolation is performed if an external SKIP signal is valid during execution of this command execution of this command is interrupted and the next block is executed The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from the machine for example in grinding It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece Format G31
498. se 1 treated as interference There is no interference actually but program direction in block B is opposite to the cutter radius compensation path The cutter stops and the alarm occurs 2 The groove depth less than compensation value 166 Chapter Cutter Compensation Programmed path Tool center path A U im O e a 9 3 3 e Fig 6 21 Exceptional case 4 treated as interference There is no interference actually but program direction in block B is opposite to the cutter radius compensation path The cutter stops and the alarm occurs 6 2 6 Command of compensation vector cancel temporarily If the following commands G92 G28 G29 coordinate command selection G54 G59 and canned cycle are specified in compensation mode the compensation vector is temporarily cancelled and then automatically restored after these commands are executed Now the temporary compensation vector cancellation is different to the compensation cancellation mode tool is moved to the specified point by compensation vector cancellation from the intersection And the tool moves to the intersection directly when the compensation mode restores Coordinate system setting command G92 and coordinate system selection command G54 G59 Programmed path N7 G92 block Fig 6 22 Temporary compensation vector by G92 Note SS is indicated as the point stopped for twice in Single block mode e Automatic return to the refe
499. se No initial value O D410 tool No in spindle default O D411 430tool No 1 20 initial value is 1 20 respectively 2 C address C21 manual toolpot zero counter C22 auto tool changing counter gt o o D 5 Q x 440 Appendix C23 auto tool changing counter e Pre tool chosen function When running the program input T instruction to change tools Toolpot will search for the target tool case at meantime the T auxiliary function ends The program continues to be executed After calli ng M6the tool change macro program if the toolpot don t stops please wait till it stops before the toolcase operations The working efficiency can be enhanced by shorting the tool change time w hen in the programming the toolpot rotation accomplished before M6 calling the macro program e g The setting completed tool change macro program P9001can be called by M6 no need by M98 B TOOL MAGAZINE During debugging the tool magazine press key select T10 toolpot rotates and the system executes the next block of the program G01 X10 Y10 program running G00 XO YO M6 tool change change the tool in spindle into Tool No 10 Debug instructions Parameters debugging gt Set K11 7 K11 6 valid for pot tool magazine gt Set K11 5 valid for spindle releasing clamping tool function gt Other parameters K11 K12 stay the same and change them until needed when debugging After debugging recover the parameters to init
500. sfully the program is automatically saved to the program content page as follows EDIT SAAAA TAA HAD PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00200 INSERT 00200 N00004 O Lo D um Q O 1 G40 2 N00015 G01 X100 Y100 Z100 3 N00020 G73 G143 X200 Y200 7200 BO R50 Q10 4 N00025 GOB XO YO ZO 5 N00030 M30 16 50 26 o Ha 1 Es Eni de programs CURRENT LOCAL oir gt Notes 1 When the mode is switched the edited programs cannot be saved and the system automatically exits the aided programming page 2 The aided programming function does not support the macro program edit 3 The edited programs executes decoding when they are saved When the programs do not meet programming rules there are prompts to modify them and the correct programs can be saved 4 G commands can be read orderly and the last one is valid when there are many G commands in the same group 266 Chapter Auto Operation CHAPTER7 AUTO OPERATION Note The keys functions of this GSK980MDc machine panel are defined by Ladder please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the GSK980MDc standard PLC programs 7 1 Auto Run 7 1 1 Selection of a Program To Be Run 1 Search method 1 Select the Edit or Auto mode PROGRAM 2 Press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page 3
501. sian Spanish display selected by parameters machining path displayable Capacity 40MB for up to 40000 part programs custom macro program call 4 nesting levels of subprogram Edit modes full screen editing absolute incremental programming CNC system upgrade USB Part programs reading in USB G Code GSK U im O e um 9 3 3 e Macro command Tapping Precision compensation M command T command PLC function Display interface Program edit Bidirectional files transfer between CNC and USB including programs parameters PLC backup and recovery Chapter 1 Captor 1 Programming Fundmentals oa Fundmentals Clock Clock display Clock date and week display date and week Clock date and week display Bidirectional transfer between CNC and PC CNC and CNC involving programs involving programs Serial i parameters tool compensation data download and upgrade of system software Communication and PLC program serial ports Matching drive AC servo or step drive device by using the pulse direction signal input A AA or unit DY3 A AA G Code Table Positioning rapid Workpiece coordinate 204 Feed rot traverse system 1 Linear interpolation G55 Mi G95 Feed per rotation system 2 Circular helical Workpiece coordinate Return to initial plane in interpolation CW system 3 canned cycle Circular helical l ROPE G03 interpolation G57 Workpiece coordinate
502. sition of next block Example G31 G90 X200 0 F100 X300 0 Y100 0 y Move ment without SKIP signal 200 0 0 Actual movement 190 9 SKIP signal input point aN Movement without SKIP signal 200 0 0 100 0 200 0 300 0 3 15 Tool Nose Radius Compensation C G40 G41 and G42 Format Gl 41 G18 D 19 G42 Functions Tool nose radius compensation function To cancel or perform the tool radius compensation vector by using the commands G40 G41 and G42 They are combined with the commands G00 G01 G02 and G03 for specifying a mode which can be confirmed the compensation vector value direction and the direction of tool movement 51 D x O Q Q 3 gt Q GSK GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Tool radius compensation cancellation Tool radius left compensation Tool radius right compensation G41 or G42 drives the system into compensation mode G40 cancels the system compensation mode Explanation e Compensation plane The compensation plane can be confirmed based upon plane selection command the tool compensation C is calculated in this plane Plane selection Plane compensation o G18 Z X plane CE eo Compensation value D code This system can be set for 32 compensation values at most Two digits specified by D code in the program is called serial number of compensation value the compensation value should be set by
503. so only one program can be performed at a time The cursor is ahead of the first block when a program is opened and can be moved in EDIT mode In automatic mode when the machine is in stop state the cycle start signal A key on the panel or external cycle start signal enables the program to be run from the block where the cursor is located Usually blocks are executed in sequence programmed in advanced Program stops running till MO2 or M30 is executed The cursor moves along with program execution The program execution sequence or state will be changed in following conditions e Program running stops when Lr key or the Emergency Stop button is pressed Program running stops when the CNC alarm or PLC alarm occurs e When the system is switched in EDIT or MDI mode program stops running after the current block is executed After switching to automatic mode again when key on the panel is pressed or external cycle start signal is ON the program runs from the block where the cursor is located e If the operation mode is switched to MANUAL MPG STEP MACHINE ZERO RETURN mode when the program is running the execution dwells after switching to automatic mode again when A key on the panel is pressed or external cycle start signal is ON the program runs from where it stops Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals The execution dwells when Ed key is pressed or external pause signal is cut off program starts running from where it stops when E ke
504. spindle releasing clamping tool function is valid 0 spindle releasing clamping tool function is invalid HILT1 HILT2 parameter set as follows BT40tool Turret tool Tool magazine Tool magazine magazine magazine function invalid function invalid 00 1 o3 f o 9 1 ATA o I8 ELDC 1 MDc Vertical panel releasing clamping tool key is valid 0 MDc external releasing clamping tool key is valid CCWT 1 Delay detection of toolpot counting reversely 0 No delay detection of toolpot counting reversely Data parameter Original tool No Max tool No Original toolcase corresponding to D address No in PLC Tool No placing tool change position corresponding to sequence of D address Call the initiate M code of the subroutine Call the initiate program No 0 9999 corresponding to M code Allow number of M code calling subroutine 0 8000 0 this function invalid e M function instructions M54 spindle tool releasing M55 spindle tool clamping M65 toolcase falling down M66 toolcase rising up M68 ATC arm catching tools motor controlling tool changing starts for the first time M69 ATC arm changing tools motor controlling tool changing starts for the second time M70 ATC arm back to situ place motor controlling tool changing starts for the third time M19 spindle orienting e PMC Data Sheet 1 D addresses One byte binary number D408 is the target toolcase No initial value O D409 is the current toolca
505. stance independently and their resultant paths are possibly not linear Explanation G00 which is initial G command X Y Z 99999999 99999999xleast input increment X Y and Z axes one of them can be omitted or all of them can be omitted When one of them is omitted it means that the coordinate value of start and end points are same The start and end points share the same position when they are omitted at the same time Command path figure Tool positions at the rapid traverse rate independently for each axis Usually the tool path is not linear Start point Non linear interpolation position End point Fig 3 1 X Y and Z axes are separately set by the system data parameter No 022 at their rapid traverse rate the actual traverse rate can be modified by the rapid override keys on the machine panel opeed in dry run mode is limited by values set each axis s max rapid traverse speed parameter No 022 The rapid traverse acceleration or deceleration time constant of X Y and Z axes are set by the system data parameter No 023 Example tool traverses from point A to point B See Fig 3 2 30 Chapter 3 G Command Tool Point A 40 350 80 Fig 3 2 G90 GO X120 Y253 Z30 absolute coordinate programming G91 GO X160 Y 97 Z 50 relative coordinate programming 3 3 Linear Interpolation G01 Format GO1X Y ZF Function Movement path is a straight line from start to end points Exp
506. sts all machining programs To be convenient to search a program for user the system displays the first 16 blocks where the current cursor is on the right which is shown below EDIT SABaa TAA HOA PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00001 N00006 TOTAL 9 SPACE 40 0 M USED 8 7 M IDLE 31 3 M NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 02000 2 00001 855 B 2012 05 29 44 NIO G90 GOO XO YO Z0 00002 821 B 2012 05 29 N20 M98 P9010 L4 01111 193 B 2012 07 31 N30 M9010 N35 M98 P3000 L2 4 f 03000 298 2012 07 31 G e er 09000 330 B 2012 05 29 N50 G04 X5 09001 240 B 2012 07 31 N60 M30 09002 0 B 2012 07 31 N100 09010 09010 24 B 2012 07 31 G91 GOI X10 Y10 Z10 N200 M99 PROGRAM MDI ided CONTENT PROGRAM Programming orange font and before it is uploaded to the position display page and can be executed such as O0001 In the local directory page the following operations can be executed including opening open amp new 14 19 20 con Jia The top status information display area displays the system s run mode and status the below displays total programs of the current system total capacity of all programs and free space The list displays program list each program size of current system and recent modifying date Programs with blue background is a program selected by the current cursor such as O2000 Program with O Lo D um Q r O deletion cop
507. system machine workpiece and even injure the operator Cautions e Functions technical indexes described in this user manual are only for the system Actual functions and technical performance of machine tool with this CNC system are determined by machine builder s design so refer to its user manual The system is employed with integrated machine control panel and the keys on machine control panel are defined by PLC program Functions of keys in this user manual are for standard PLC program Please notice it Refer to user manual from machine manufacturer about functions and meanings of keys on machine control panel All specification and designs are subject to change without further notice Summary I Programming GSK980MDc CNC Technical Specification Product Type Command and Program Format II Operation GSK980MDc CNC Operation Use II Installation and Connection GSK980MDc CNC Installation Connection and Setting Appendix CNC Ladder Function Allocation Alarm Message Table Gr 4d Bx Tz GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Safety Responsibility Manufacturer s safety responsibility The manufacturer should be responsible for the cleared or the controlled safety in the design and the structure of the CNC system and the accessories The manufacturer should be responsible for the CNC system and the accessories The manufacturer should be responsible for the message and the suggestion fo
508. system will issue alarms and errors will happen when tools are changed B Related signals Alarm Alarm No Alarm message Interlock logic address X5 2 A0 4 detect the overtime of Overtime check of spindle orientation P COIN X5 2 when spindle stop orientating E orientating zi X0 2 A1 1 Cylinder low pressure Cannot change tools correctly when in low pressure A1 2 too long rotation time for the Avoid the damage of toolpot when toolpot spinning X2 2 A1 3 Toolpot motor overload Toolpot overloaded and stop operations on tool magazine X0 6 A1 4 Toolcase must be horizontally in Avoid damage of the toolpot position when the toolpot is rotating X2 1 A1 5 the ATC arm motor overloaded Motor overloaded and stop operations on tool magazine 446 Appendix X1 7 A2 0 overtime detection for releasing releasing tool is not in position and tool alarm releasing tool time is too long X2 0 A2 1 overtime detection for clamping clamping tool is not in position and tool alarm clamping tool time is too long X1 7 A2 2 Cannot make spindle spinning Cannot spinning when the spindle is when releasing tool releasing tool X1 5 A2 3 J No spindle releasing clamping tool No spindle releasing clamping tool when the spindle is spinning when the spindle is spinning X0 7 A4 0 Toolcase of pot tool magazine Have not detected the fallen falling overtime please check accomplishment signal toolcase falling
509. t System of 4TH 0 O Same to the X Y Z 0 1 pea 1 9 e 0 1 8 38 RRIx 1 Zero mode D is used on 4th or 5th rotary axis 0 Zero mode A B C are used on 4th or 5th rotary axis RRLx 1 4th or 5th rel coor cycle func is valid 0 4th or 5th rel coor cycle func is invalid RABx 1 4th or 5th rotates according to symbol direction 0 4th or 5th rotates according to nearby rotation ROAx 1 4th or 5th abs coor cycle func is valid 0 4th or 5th abs coor cycle func is invalid Note 1 Parameter ROAx is valid for only rotary axis ROTx 1 Note 2 Only parameter ROAx 71 is RABx valid Note 3 Only parameter ROAx 71 is RRLx valid 0 5 2 0 NAT 1 Define the range of user macro program asin 90 0 atan 180 180 0 Define the range of user macro program asin 90 270 atan 0 360 RDRN 1 GOO rapid traverse speed federate xdry run speed 0 GOO speed rapid override x rapid tranverse speed 0 5 2 8 RSTP 1 Polar coordinate is canceled after cnc is reseted 0 Polar coordinate isn t canceled after cnc is reseted MEE AR SCRD_ jRSCD PPD SCRD 71 Coordinate system holding on at power down 333 Ii 5 N et D T le Ii T ep 2 D et O C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 0 Coordinate system not holding on at power down G54 coordinate system is set after power on RSCD 1 G54 coordinate system when
510. t equal to GT or gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to 2 LT or lt Less than lt Less than or equal to lt Example IF 3 lt gt 2 GOTO 2 it means if 3 is not equal to 2 branch to N2 block IF 101 gt 7 22 THEN 101 SIN30 it means if 101 is greater than 7 22 the expression after THEN is executed i e assign Sin 30 to 101 Sample program The sample program below finds the sum of number 1 to 10 151 U im O e um 9 3 3 e C GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Egit O9500 1110120 Initial value of the variable to hold the sum 1110271 initial value of the variable as an addend N1 IF 102 GT 10 GOTO 2 Branch to N2 when the addend is greater than 10 101 101 102 calculation to find the sum 102 102 1 Next addend Branch to N1 End of program Sum of number 1 to 10 5 4 4 Logical Expression A macro program logical expression is composed of conditional expression or a single expression and the expression obeys its operation rules Logical express outputs 0 or 1 after operation Outputting 1 means the logic expression is truth O means is not truth An alarm occurs when logic operation is not O or 1 Operator 980MDc logical operation uses AND amp amp OR logical operation outputting result is 0 or 1 which means the logical expression to be truth or not The following explains their uses of the two logic operators Expressiont 1 1
511. taches the deceleration switch the axis slows down 323 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE to zero then moves reversely and accelerates to a fixed low speed for continuous moving B As the tongue touches the deceleration switch for the second time it moves on till the tongue detaches the deceleration switch And it begins to detect the zero signals If the zero signal level changes the movement stops Then zero return indicator of the corresponding axis on the panel lights up and machine zero operation is finished e Machine zero return type C as an proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero signals D Its sketch map is shown below y Machine zero return direction o Travel switch Connect to 24V Tongue fixed on Connect to nDEC signal the machinae slider Fig 2 44 2 Circuit of the deceleration signal See details in Section 2 1 6 of this chapter Ii 3 Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis of the bit parameter No 006 and ZCn n is X Y Z 4 axis of the bit parameter No 007 are all set to 1 the DECn of the bit parameter No 004 is set to O the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown in follows npec rec _ Y et 2 T O Starts deceleration High speed Pl Zero retum Y Reverse d Zero return over a Pu
512. tart of the function of the Cs axis the Bit 5 digits RCSx of the state parameter No 187 can be set whether the function of Cs axis is enabled when the rotation axis is enabled ROTx 1 4 5 Linear Axis of The Additional Axis When the additional axes the 4 and the 5 axes are set to linear axes its functions are same as the basis three axes Realizable operation 122 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis 1 Rapid traverse Positioning G90 91 GOO X Y Z A 2 Cutting feed 690 91 G01 X Y Z A F 3 Skip function G90 91 G31 X Y Z A F 4 Reference position return 28 29 30 X Y Z A F 5 G92 coordinate setting G92 X Y Z A 6 Manual Step MPG feed Manual machine zero return Note When there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration the axis names of additional linear axes are expressed with A Explanations 1 When the additional linear axis rapidly moves or performs it can be simultaneously specified with any axes of X Y and Z Each axis may rapidly move at its customized speed 2 When the additional linear axis is performed the cutting feed G01 or used a skip function G31 it can be simultaneously specified with any axes of X Y and Z in this case the linear axis does not has an individual feedrate F but depend on each axis specified at a same time which it is started or ended together with the specified each axis namely the additional axis is shared with the basis three axis linkage
513. te txt which is shown below e macronote txt 9 Zd DE S00 3 E To 3 Note format ID note Example ID1 note 1 ID2 note 2 For example 100 101 500 501 its note file is shown below OS oe ER 0 188 nunber of gear teeth 181 the number of machined parts 588 numnber of cycles 581 try cutting tooth number 4 3 Thereinto up to 80 Chinese or 160 English characters can be edited the symbol and are edited in English 5 2 4 System Variables System variables are used to read and write CNC internal data such as tool length compensation value tool nose radius compensation value Some system variables can only be read System variables are the basis of automatic control and general purpose machining program development e Interface signal The macro variable corresponding to interface signal is the exchange signal between PLC and custom macro program Variable No 41000 2101 A 16 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a custom macro 5 Used to read signal bit by bit 1032 A 16 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a custom macro Used to read al 16 bits of a signal at one time 1100 111 A 16 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a custom macro 5 Used to read and write signal bit by bit H1132 A 16 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a custom macro Used to read and write all 16 bits of a signal at one time 1133 A 32 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a custom macro
514. ted 99999999 99999999xleast input 4th 5th axis axis name address i Round off increment First tool infeed distance of outer 99909999 99999999 T east inpu G116 G117 rectangle G132 G133 E Round off increment e VI VIT 3l eT oy P roughing milling in X direction l Decimal Tool radius offset number 0 32 alarm Machining allowance in G110 G111 G116 G117 G132 G133 G134 G135 Decimal G94 feed per minute 0 15000 efficiency G95 feed per rotation 0 0001 500 Tooth pitch in G74 G84 ERE e unit G21 mm r G20 inch r ound o Decimal alarm Decimal Length offset number 0 32 alarm G command in system Decimal Operation command in G65 alarm Distance from arc start point to center 09999999 99999999xleast input point in l Round off a Increment X direction 99999999 99999999xleast input i Round off G110 G115 radius value of circle fien E ii negative number l l 99999999 99999999xleast input G134 G139 width of rectangle in X l i increment absolute value of Round off direction negative number G74 G84 inch screw unit tooth inch dais Round off Absolute value for negative Distance from arc start point to center l e 99999999 99999999xleast input point in Round off e increment Y direction 27 IK CNC SIGSR CNC amp GSK980MDcMilling CNC System User Manual 99999999 99999999xleast input G112 G113 distance from start point to increment absolute value
515. terlock logic address X5 2 A0 4 J detect the overtime of COIN X5 2 Overtime check of spindle orientation when spindle orientating stop orientating X0 2 A1 1 Cylinder low pressure Cannot change tools correctly when in low pressure A1 2 too long rotation time for the Avoid the damage of toolpot when toolpot spinning X2 2 A1 3 Toolpot motor overload Toolpot overloaded and stop operations on tool magazine X0 6 A1 6 When turret tool magazine starts Avoid damage of the toolpot toolpot rotating Z axis is not away from the 2nd reference point X1 7 A2 0 overtime detection for releasing releasing tool not in position and ee am omnia X2 0 A2 1 overtime detection for clamping clamping tool not in position and bild Ed EN X1 7 A2 2 Cannot make spindle spinning The spindle cannot rotate when releasing Bill ud id X0 7 A4 5 No spindle releasing clamping tool The spindle cannot rotate when when the spindle is spinning releasing clamping tool Toolcase of pot tool magazine Have not detected toolpot forward in falling overtime please check position signal and overtime 2s accomplishment signal X0 7 E X0 6 A4 6 Toolcase of pot tool magazine Have not detected toolpot backward in o raising overtime please check position signal and overtime 7 accomplishment signal X0 6 B Note 1 T displaying in the CNC interfaces stands for the tool No of the current tool used by the spindle not the toolpot No of the current toolpot 2 in A
516. tes e PMC Data Sheet 1 D addresses One byte binary number D409 is the current toolcase No initial value O D408 is the target toolcase No initial value O 2 Caddress C21 manual toolpot zero counter e Debug description Y C22 auto tool changing counter C23 auto tool changing counter Parameters debugging Set K11 7 K11 6 valid for pot tool magazine Set K11 5 valid for spindle releasing clamping tool function Other parameters K11 K12 stay the same and change them until needed when debugging After debugging recover the parameters to initial conditions Set the number of tool magazine 5025 Initial tool No 5026 Max tool No Set the Max tool No the total toolcase number in the current machine tool magazine To change the initial tool No the ladder diagram needed to be altered so do not mend the gt D 5 Q x 449 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE parameter unless really necessary gt parameters setting for CNC calling subroutine 6044 6 The setting completed tool change macro program P9001can be called by M6 no need by M98 B Toolpot back to 0 operations It is only in back to reference point mode do the toolpot back to zero position can be implemented So when execute this function please make sure whether the zero signals exist or not CNC cannot implement this function without a zero signal 1 only when the tool
517. the command is disabled even if these data are specified they are regarded as modal data memories only Table 3 22 Command explanations for canned cycle Specifvi pectyng Address Explanation for command address content Hole machining Hole position x y opecifying the hole position with the absolute and incremental value data l control is same with GOO position Unit mm The distance from initial point level to point R plane is specified by using the incremental value or specifying the coordinate value of the point R by absolute value Unit mm G Refer to the canned cycle list Hole depth the distance from R point to the bottom of a hole is specified by using the incremental value or specifying the coordinate value of the hole bottom by absolute value Unit mm Specifying each cut in in G73 and G83 or translational value in G76 and G87 Unit mm Specifying the dwell at the bottom of a hole Relation of time and the numerical specified are same with G04 Unit ms machining L to XY coordinate position The cutting feedrate is specified tooth pitch is indicated in G74 and G84 A part of command of canned cycle such as G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 and G139 are explained in the following chapters or sections Machining cycle for L holes is performed from start start position of block 3 24 2 Description for canned cycle 3 24 2 1 High speed Peck Drilling Cycle G73 Format G9
518. the file or list from overwriting or replacing please copy and save it separately gt It forbids doing any other operation in advance operation Once operation is performed it can not be interrupted until it is finished gt If the file to be saved or resume is large operation time will be long Please wait gt Pull out the U disk if abnormal conditions occur then connect it again if neccessary 299 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE O Lo D um Q ee O 300 II Installation 5 Y et T e O 301 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE MI T e D et O 302 Chapter 1 Installation Layout CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION LAYOUT 1 1 GSK980MDc Connection Interface and PB2 power box of GSK980MDc GSK980MDc V UC Co C C e C C C e Hy GN 1 Ov 1 2 MPG Chi 1 2 o 3 9 5 o ie o 7n o 5 Y GNi3 GCHMi2 CHM11 CNi4d cnet Ay AXIS z AXIS Y AXIS X AXIS 4 ENCODER ui CNS1 ONG CN15 e INPUT OUTPUT axis 5 PI MILE e CHS CH1 COM PORT POWER SUPPLY T Fig 1 1 GSK980MDc back cover interface layout Interface Explanation 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 space Power box GSK PB2 for 5V 24V 12V 12V GND power supply CN11 X axis 15 core DB female socket for connecting X axis drive unit CN12 Y axis 15 core DB female socket for connecting Y axis drive unit CN13 Z axis 15 core DB female socket for connecting Z axis d
519. the machining efficiency is and vice versa The principle for acceleration amp deceleration characteristicadjustment is to properly reduce the acceleration amp deceleration time constant and increase the acceleration amp deceleration start end speed to improve the machining efficiency on the condition that there is no alarm motor out of step and obvious machine impact If the acceleration amp deceleration time constant is set too small and the start end speed is set too large it is easily to cause drive unit alarm motor out of step or machine vibration When the bit parameter Ne007 BIT3 SMZ 71 the feedrate drops to the start speed of the acceleration amp deceleration at the cutting path intersection then it accelerates to the specified speed of the adjacent block to obtain an accurate positioning at the path intersection but this will reduce the machining efficiency When SMZ 0 the adjacent cutting path transits smoothly by the acceleration amp deceleration The feedrate does not always drop to the start soeed when the previous path is finished and a circular transition non accurate positioning will be formed at the path intersection The machining surface by this path transition has a good finish and a higher machining efficiency When the stepper motor drive unit is applied the SMZ of the bit parameter Ne007 should be set to 1 to avoid the out of step When the stepper motor drive unit is applied to this system the out of st
520. the toolcase No and tool No is not consistent you can adjust them at real time If there are some tools No are the same in toolcase sequence TOOL MAGAZINE will alarm that Tool No inputted is reduplicated with the other please adjust it again MDI SBBAA TAA HAA TOOL SHEA NO T TOOL SHEA NO T i TOOL SHEA NO T 0 012 12 024 24 yo IM o 13 025 25 002 2 014 14 026 26 003 3 o5 15 027 27 004 4 016 16 028 28 005 5 017 17 029 29 006 6 018 18 030 30 007 7 em 19 031 31 008 8 020 20 032 32 009 9 on 21 010 10 022 22 011 11 023 23 AE oe nic MEDIEN i KiY E YA too ser MACRO var COORDINATE FIND P B Toolpot zero position It is only in back to reference point mode do the toolpot back to zero position can be implemented So when execute this function please make sure whether zero signal exists or not CNC cannot implement this function without a zero signal 1 only when the toolcase is risen up that do toolpot can back to zero position otherwise not 2 if the toolpot wants back to zero position the CNC will detect X0 0 signal If this signal turns one circle and the toolpot keeping spinning and cannot find O point please check the zero signal in machine tools electric is correct or not 3 After the toolpot back to zero point the target and current toolcase data will be all set to1
521. tion are specified at the same block The M and MF codes are delivered at the beginning of positioning see the operation 1 The next hole machining can be performed till the ending signal FIN occurs 6 When the canned cycle is applied if the tool compensation C is current state the tool compensation information C is then temporarily cancelled and saved the tool compensation C status is restored when the canned cycle is cancelled 7 If the tool length offset commands G43 G44 and G49 are specified in a canned cycle block Then the offset is performed when the point R plane is positioned operation 2 The tool length offset commands are disabled after the canned cycle is entered till it is cancelled 8 The cautions for the operation of canned cycle 105 U O Q um 9 3 3 e G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual a Single block When the canned cycle operation is performed by using the single block mode normally it is separately stopped at the terminal of the movements 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 in the Fig 13 1 A And the single block is somewhat different according to corresponding canned cycle action at the bottom of a hole For example the single block is stopped when the dwell is applied The operation at the bottom of the hole for fine milling and rough milling are divided into multiple single stop So it is necessary to startup for several times to machine a hole in a single block b Feed hold
522. tion block G01 G02 G03 and can also follow some non movement commands including G04 G90 G91 G94 G95 G98 G99 FMST and non movement commands which block numbers are N it can command up to 10 blocks among which M commands do not include M02 M30 M98 M99 M9000 M9999 P S alarm occurs when the next block includes other commands except for the above commands Excessive motion range P S alarm occurs when the inserted chamfering length or arc radius is too big or exceeds the specified length in a program Polar coordinate command Chamfering function cannot be specified when the system is in polar coordinate command mode Others the blocks following coordinate change G92 G54 G59 or reference point return G28 G30 cannot execute the chamfering Note When a chamfering is specified an alarm occurs when L and U are specified in the same block 3 30 Rigid Tapping The right handed tapping cycle G84 and left handed tapping cycle G74 may be performed in standard mode or rigid tapping mode In standard mode the spindle is rotated and stopped along with a movement along the tapping axis using miscellaneous functions MO3 rotating the spindle clockwise M04 rotating the spindle counterclockwise and MO5 stopping the spindle to perform tapping In rigid mode tapping is performed by controlling the spindle motor as if it were a servo motor and by interpolating between the tapping axis and spindle When tapping is performed in rigid mode
523. tion instructions which are corresponding to speed range of the 4 gears pre set via data parameter to spindle motor At meantime it outputs current gear select signals as well as SF The meaning of gear select signal is as follows GR10 F34 3 GR10 F34 2 GR20 F34 1 GR10 F34 0 Selective gear stage O Y e 0 T9 JS 7 gear 2 gear 3 To spindle motor analog spindle output speed instructions like this as to analog voltage 0 10V output to analog voltage signal SVC M type gear shift has two types to choose set by bit parameter SGB SGB gear shift types 0 M type gear shift Type A 1 M type gear shift Type B The following are examples of the two gear shift M type gear shift Type A spindle motor speed instruction analog voltage instruction 4095 n av A A E o ir o E P il xc C ae Cc er LUI gt GRIO GR20 Gea GRAD E V j Fd 20 7 5 m ax E ee E a a a gt Vmin i i Spindle speed instruction AX Vmin 4085 Bo Vine f4085 Cone 1095 DX Vmax 4095 S code input AX Veal 4055 As to the data in the image above descriptions as follows Constant VMax spindle motor Maximum restraint speed S12 bit code value that is data parameter NO 3736 408 Appendix Constant Vmin spindle motor minimum restraint speed S12 bit code value that is data parameter NO 3735 opindle speed A Maximum speed when instruction voltage is10V that is data parameter NO 3741 Spin
524. tions CNC elects the gear based on the range of every gear that set by the data parameters previously and outputs GR40 GR30 GR2O orGR10 to PMC to inform PMC of the chosen gear shift gear 4 not included according to gear select signals What is more CNC outputs the corresponding chosen output till the gear select signal outputted gear speed When M Type shifts gears the dual analog spindle is taken into consideration When gear shifts needed are less than 4 then speed corresponding to the 10V of data parameter of the non used gear shift is set to O T Type for M series and T series When machine decides to use which gear it sends GR1 GR2 to gear select signal to input gear shift number there four gear shifts CNC implements outputting the corresponding spindle speed the gear shift inputted 401 gt D 5 Q x gt o o D 5 Q x C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE When T type changes a shift you can set the dual analog spindle as well No matter M type mode or T type mode all decided by bit parameter GTT GTT select spindle gear shift mode 0 T type 1 M type 10 1 1 Dual Analog Spindle Control When choose the T type gear shift function two analog spindles can be controlled One S code can be used to instruct any one of them Which spindle to choose decided by PLC signal and both of them have the gear shift function S code as the speed instructions is transferred to the
525. top machine lock or Z axis ignorance states the spindle does not regard as a stop state in this case these signals are output These signals are only enabled in rigid tapping and they are all set to O in the normal spindle control mode RTAP F76 3 Rigid tapping process signal This signal informs PMC which has been in the mode of rigid tapping or not The CNC is in the mode of rigid tapping currently when the signal is set to 1 This signal can be locked M29 PLC has been commanded the rigid tapping mode the PMC is then treated with the corresponding logic and this signal can be replaced the lock of M29 even so the FIN signal of M29 is not ignored still 3 30 8 Alarm Message Alarm No Display Content Explanation 218 Fail to specify the tool pitch F value in G74 or G84 Fail to specify F value 230 The spindle feed can not be performed due to the S value is 0 or S code does not specify S value is O 231 S value exceeds the maximum spindle speed S value exceeds the setting value of data allowed with rigid tapping parameter 086 232 Other axis movement codes are specified Specify a axis movement between M29 between M29 and G74 G84 and G74 G84 234 Specify M29 repeatedly Specify M29 or it is consecutively 233 61 0 signal is abnormal in rigid tapping mode Rigid tapping signal G61 0 is not 1 during performing in G74 G84 specified more than twice in rigid tapping 118 Chapter 3 G Command 3 3
526. tric tool 1p CIS B 0 001mm 255 255 machine system 0 1y IS C 0 0001mm 2550 2550 Inch tool machine 1 u CIS B 0 0001inch 255 255 system 0 14 CIS C 0 00001inch 2550 2550 Rotary axes are not involved in metric inch conversion The unit of rotary axes screw pitch error compensation is determined by increment system The range is the same as that of the metric machine tool Rotary axis screw pitch error compensation range Metric inch 1u CIS B 0 001deg 0 255 Machine tool Increment Rotary axis screw pitch system system error compensation unit 0 1p CIS C 0 0001 deg e Graphic setting data The maximum and minimum data ranges of X Y Z set by graph is in accordance with the command data ranges 10 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals Increment system Graphic setting X Y Z ranges 1 u 1S B Metric input G21 99999 999 99999 999 mm Inch input G20 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch Oty s c Metricinput 621 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm Inch input G20 999 99999 999 99999 inch y le 1 3 5 The Units and Ranges of Program Address Values S e Definition and ranges of the pitch E Code 1 p IS B 0 1u IS C Unit El Input in metric 0 001 500 000 0 0001 500 00 mm pitch lead 0 06 25400 0 06 2540 Pitch lead inch G21 F 0 0001 50 00 0 00001 50 0 inch pitch lead Inch input G20 4 0 06 2540 0 06 254 Pitch lead inch o SpeedF definition G94 feed per minute
527. ts value is reserved as the canned cycle modal value 3 24 2 9 Boring Cycle G86 Format G98 G99 G86 X Y R Z F L Function After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to R point and the boring is performed from point R to point Z The tool is retracted in rapid traverse and spindle is rotated positively when the spindle is stopped at the bottom of the hole Explanation For command explanation for canned cycle see the table 3 2 Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 The spindle stops 5 Returning to the initial point or point R plane at rapid traverse according to the G98 or G99 6 The spindle is rotated in the positive direction Command Path 82 Chapter 3 G Command 58b 1396 Mode for 58b 88 Mode for returning ta initial paint level returning ta the F paint level Spindle C CW EU Initial level Initial leve Paint R level l l l Spindle C CY l l l l l l l l l i x b Spindle stops Point Z Spinde stops Point C Related explanation 1 This cycle is used to be bore a hole The command operation is basically same with G81 only spindle rotation status is different After cut feeds to the bottom of a hole the MO5 is executed spindle stops then the point R plane is retracted at the rapid traverse the MO3 is
528. tting feed X Y Z acceleration deceleration time constant of cutting feed initial speed of cutting feed s acceleration deceleration initial speed in MPG Step feed mode acceleration deceleration time constant in MPG Step Manual feed mode Note The cutting feedrate becomes uneven when the spindle speed is less than 1 rev min in G95 mode the actual feedrate has following error when the spindle speed fluctuates In order to guarantee the machining quality it is recommended that the spindle speed can not be lower than spindle servo or the lowest speed of effective torque introduced by inverter during machining 3 28 G98 G99 Format G98 G99 Function G98 Tool returns to the initial plane when the hole machining is returning G99 Tool returns to the point R plane when the hole machining is returning Explanation Modal G command G98 return to initial level G99 return to point R level 28 Jae Initial level Initial level Point R Refer to the explanation for canned cycle command 3 29 Chamfering Function C chamfering function is to insert a linearity or an arc between two contours to ensure the tool smoothly 110 Chapter 3 G Command transits from a contour to another A block for chamfering transition can insert the following blocks B Blocks for linear interpolation and linear interpolation Blocks for linear interpolation and circular interpolation H W Blocks for circular interpol
529. turn to XY hole positioning position Command Path The initialized plane a e in l 96 Chapter 3 G Command U O Q Q 3 3 Q Related Explanation The commands P and L are disabled in this cycle but the P value is reserved as canned cycle modal value For example An inside rectangle groove rough milling is specified by G134 in canned cycle see the following figure Y j 7 The initialized plane o0 La OL G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G134 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 170 J50 W20 Q10 K5 V10 U10 F800 D1 Groove rough milling cycle inside rectangle is performed D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point R plane M30 97 D x O Q Q 3 gt Q GSK GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual Note If the parameter value of 5122 is set for more than 10 the helical cutting feed along the Z axis will be performed by G110 and G111 So the workpiece without groove can be machined by rough milling directly The helical feeding path is as follows 3 24 2 19 Rectangle Groove Inner Fine milling Cycle G136 G137 Format G136 G98 G99 X Y R Z J D K U F G137 Function The tool performs fine milling inside the rectangle with the specified width and direction it is returned after finishing the fine milling Explanation For command
530. tutae 144 ete RETE PS 145 5 92 Macro State Med ad a iade 148 533 Prony or Opera Sii A o eden qnae dita duae eum e aU ena 150 5 94 Bracket NOS IN Ositos 150 cR dissensio TT T eem 150 5 4 1 Unconditional Branch GO TO statement cccccccssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeesseaees 151 5 4 2 Conditional Branch IF statement sees nennen nennen 151 54 3 Cohditlonal EXDIeSSIOD ss iat adi ds 151 94A Jogical BXDIOSSIOR udi oodd is 152 5 4 5Bepebltiom WHILE Statement sspe i aeo Anos N 152 5 5 Macro Statement and NC stateMent ccccscccccecccsessseceeceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeessaceeeeeessaeseeeeessaaseeeess 153 5 5 1 Macro programming and Registering occccoonccccncnnccnncncnnncoconncononnconnnncnnnnnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnos 153 A M X HET 153 CHAPTERS CUTTER COMPENSATION spas o 155 6 1 Application for Cutter Radius Compensation cccsseeeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeessaeaeeeeeessagees 155 Sed eet A POP o oo ee eR Sc eee ee 155 6 1 2 Compensation Value Seting siio ia Mahe Quin oup eed eder coude 155 61 39 Command Miel unici 156 6 1 4 Compensation directiOn s uu cosa eaux A eee Cives ecd ned 156 AA E e 156 6 6Example Or applicalOM as cia bahend Son anen Soemedea asaeeensiteed 157 6 2 Offset Path Explanation for Cutter Radius COMpensatiON cccoooonncnncccnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnancnnncnonons 158 6 2 1 Conception for inner side or outer SId8 oocccccccoconccnncconnncnnnncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnn
531. two blocks are read after the end point of the 1 block is performed it is stopped Two blocks are read in advance in successive performance So there are a block being performed and two blocks behind it in CNC e The cutter radius compensation value can not be a negative normally the wearing value is negative negative value indicates for wearing eo Instead of G02 or G03 the setting or cancellation of cutter radius compensation can be commanded only by using GOO or G01 or the alarm occurs e CNC will cancel Tool compensation C mode when you press RESET key Corresponding offset should be specified while the G40 G41 or G42 is specified in the block or the alarm occurs e When cutter radius compensation is employed in main program and subprogram the CNC should cancel compensation mode before calling or exiting sub program namely before M98 or M99 is performed or the alarm occurs e Cancel the compensation mode temporarily when G54 59 G28 31 and canned cycle command are executed Restore the cutter radius compensation mode when the above commands are finished U e e um 9 3 3 e 6 1 6 Example for application The parts are machined in the coordinate system in Fig 6 3 The tool compensation number DO7 is employed tool geometric radius is 2mm and the tool radius wearing is O acm LL N5 l h C3 150 1150 E i C2 1550 1550 650 A AA a X i Dre
532. ual key GSK980MDa GSK980MDa V GSK980MDc GSK980MDc V X19 2 Y18 3 X20 0 Y21 7 X19 4 Y19 7 X19 5 Y19 6 X19 6 Y19 5 X19 7 Y21 5 X23 0 Y20 0 X22 7 Y21 0 X20 2 Y19 3 AN ORNL aft e 50 Puao A100 gt o o D 5 Q x 398 Appendix GSK980MDa GSK980MDa V GSK980MDc GSK980MDc V X18 3 Y23 4 X18 4 Y23 3 X18 5 MANUAL Y23 2 Ima X19 3 Y22 0 E A X23 3 Y24 0 X23 2 Y 22 1 X21 4 Y23 0 X21 6 Y20 7 J mS Hs e TT ER E COOLING X22 0 Y19 0 M ill Sor xipuaddy p t 5 OVERRIDE FAST OVERRIDE C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK980MDa GSK980MDa V GSK980MDc GSK980MDc V OVERRIDE M e5 I X22 3 F OVERRIDE Y20 4 IDO F OVERRIDE ERA Wao wi T RETRACTION Gear Tool No see charts Address 125 Tool Gear o gt o o D 5 Q x Note 1 x means no key or lamp like this exists 2 GSK980MDa MDa V Y axis MPG select address is X21 0 GSK980MDc MDc V Y axis MPG select address is X20 4 400 Appendix Appendix 10 Analog Spindle Function The spindle is classified into mechanical spindle and analog spindle according to the way how CNC control the spindle To mechanical spindle CNC controls its speed by inputting the switch values which are changed from S codes into the spindle to analog spindle CNC changes S codes into
533. uction M74 CW instruction signal of the us input spindle fr ot M75 Stop instruction signal of the ge Note for the 1 spindle relative signals please see to spindle rotation control description e Parameter control 424 Appendix DT0021 Duration of the implement of M code DT0022 The delay time for the spindle from stop to brake output Spindle braking output time dms pp EMS 0 Multi spindle function is invalid 1 Multi spindle function is valid eo Description for multi spindles function S code appoints the speed of the spindle and if the corresponding signal for a spindle does not pass through then the spindle will continue rotating at the former speed In this way the CNC can realize multi spindles spinning at different speed at the same time e Description for multi spindles gt multi spindles function is valid only in the analog voltage control mode M03 M04 Sunanu shift to the 1 spindle and spindle spinning CW and CCW M73 M74 Sauna shift to the 2 spindle and spindle spinning CW and CCW M05 M75 stop the 1 spindle the 2 spinning CW and CCW In operation panel the CCW key light spindle stop key light and CW key light only reflect the 1 spindle rotational states not the 2 spindle V NW V V e Sequence chart The 2 spindle The 1 spin dle The 1 spindle Spin dle shift 1103 1104 AAA ee pe E The lst spindle rotation et a a wama 0 O OM nanoo ooo Y ooo M75 E o aa The 2nd spindle rotation O
534. ue 3 24 2 13 Groove Rough Milling Inside the Round G110 G111 Format G110 G98 G99 X Y R Z L W Q K V D_E G111 Function From the beginning of the center point arc interpolations are performed helically till the round groove of programming dimension has been machined Explanation For command explanation of the canned cycle see the table 3 2 G110 Groove rough milling inside the round in CCW G111 Groove rough milling inside the round in CW I lis radius inside the round groove it should be more than the radius of current tool W The firstly cutting depth is from the R reference level to the undersurface along the Z axis direction it should be more than 0 The first cutting position is over the bottom of the groove then bottom position is regarded as machining position Q The cutting incremental value each time along Z axis direction K The width increment of cut inside XY plane it should be less than the tool radius and more than 0 V The distance to the end machining plane at the rapid traverse it should be more than O when cutting D Tool radius serial number the value range is 0 32 O is the default of DO The current tool radius is determined by the specified serial number Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cut W depth downwards in cutting feedrate 4 Mill a round face with radius helically by K incr
535. ull circle The circle is 0 when using R G02 R_ not move It is recommended that programming uses R In order to guarantee the start and end points of the arc are consistent with the specified value the system will move by counting R again according to the selected plane when programming using the I J and K After calculation the radius difference cannot exceed the permissive value set by No 3410 Note 3 The error between the actual tool feedrate and the specified feedrate is 2 or less The command speed is movement speed after tool radius offset along the arc Note 4 The R is effective when address I J and K are commanded with the R but the I J and K are disabled at one time 36 Chapter 3 G Command Note 5 The axis not exists is specified on the set plane the alarm occurs Note 6 If the radius difference between start and end points exceeds the permitted value by parameter No 3410 a P S alarm occurs 3 5 Dwell G04 Format G04 P or G04 X Function Axes stop the current G command mode and the data status are invariable after delaying time specified the next block will be executed Explanation G04 which is a non modal G command G04 delay time is specified by command words P X See the following figure table for time unit of P and X command value TN Unit 0 001 s S Valid range 0 9999999 0 9999 999 Note 1 X can be specified by the decimal but P not or the alarm will be generate
536. unching in CW G141 Punching in CCW Gxx Punching type G73 G74 G81 G83 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 X Y End coordinate of the first rectangle side R R plane position Z Hole depth A The punching number on the 1 and 3 side B The punching number on the 2 and 4 side J The length of the 2 side F Cutting feedrate Related parameter status parameter No 0582 RPTK 1 hole positioning of continuous drilling is executed by cutting path G01 0 hole positioning of continuous drilling is executed by rapid traverse path GOO BRCH 71 return plane of continuous drilling is selected by G98 G99 0 return plane of continuous drilling is selected by G99 For example The end point coordinate of the rectangle first side is X90 Y40 the length of the 2 side is 20mm as for the rectangle path punching The punching holes are machined by G81 to punch 3 holes at 1 and 3 side each other punch 2 holes at 2 and 4 side each other the hole depth is 25mm 102 Chapter 3 G Command End point at the 1 side start point And End point H Its programming is as follows G90 G17 GO X0 YO Z25 M03 G140 G81 X90 Y40 R5 Z 25 A3 B2 J20 F800 G80 GO X100 Y100 M05 M30 There are 10 holes such as A1 A3 B4 B5 A6 A8 B9 and B10 to be machined as in above figure Note 1 If the G140 or G144 is specified in the canned cycle it is indicated that the rectangle serial punching will be performed The rectangle data are de
537. unit G position command pulse frequency division numerator position command pulse frequency division denominator N Set motor rev number to 1 gt D 5 Q x C Wire number of feedback encoder In order to enhance the machining accuracy the gear ratio of spindle servo drive is usually set to 1 1 namely G 1 in the above formula and the evolving process is as follows 4x C 5 Z3 CMD CMR 4xC 5 Ls XxX O X X XO X 360 Z CMR CMD 360 Ze In order to match with DAPO3 C 1024 spindle connects to the motor Zy Zp 1 and it is suggested that the data parameter 5216 of CNC is set to 1000 Now the incremental system of the 5 axis is 0 001 387 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE If the incremental system of the 5 axis is 0 0001 the recommended value of this parameter is 10000 360 namely 7 1000 CMR 4x1024 e 360 1_5312 CMD 360 1000 1 125 Therefore data parameter 5221 is set to 512 and 5231 is set to 125 7 3 Related Parameter Setting The parameters relating to rigid tapping is as follows Data Significance of the parameter Adjustment Recommended parameter explanation range 5221 Multiplier coefficient of spindle command in rigid tapping gear 1 5222 Multiplier coefficient of spindle command in rigid tapping gear 2 Multiplier coefficient of spindle 5223 M command in rigid tapping gear 3 Multiplier coefficient of spindle comman
538. urn mode D 124 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis The process of zero return 1 Select the machine zero return mode and press the manual positive feed key the corresponding axis moves toward the zero point at the rapid traverse rate 2 When the one turn signal PC of servo axis is carried out the system is decelerated to the zero return low speed in this case check the trailing edge of PC signal 3 The system continuously and forward operates in the zero return low speed 4 When the system meets one turn signal PC of servo axis again the movement stops simultaneously the corresponding indicator of zero return end on operator panel goes on The machine zero return operation ends In this case check the rising edge of PC signal 4 8 The Function of Cs Axis General The spindle is treated as the servo feed axis to rotate and position by the position movement command Run speed is degree min it can be interpolated together with other feed axes to machine a contour curve Increment system the least input increment 0 01deg The least command increment 0 01deg Explanation NC has two control modes for the spindle e Spindle speed control mode The spindle speed can be controlled by the speed command Namely analog voltage e Spindle contour control mode It is also called CS contour control The spindle position can be controlled by the position command Namely position pulse So NC is required the spindle s
539. us compensation is set up chamfering cannot be specified Cono 0 Tefommatofamotation is wrong 0420 0 602 603 604 631 G92 6142 G143 can t be in a block with 643 644 649 H O30 0 Resutof macro isoutofrange 0440 o G66 cant be defined with 00 01 group instruction in one segment 0450 0 GOT cant be defined with G43 644 G49 H in one segment 0460 0 GS2cantbe defined with G43 G44 G49 H in one segment 047 0 0 Blocks without movement commands between chamfers exceeds 10 Ines 0500 o Program skip cannot be executed in DNC operation 0920 0 Specification for cycle times of M98 Subprogram Callis incorect 093 0 M98 subprogram call or instructions L and U cannot be specified simultaneously with chamfering 094 0 0 Sub Program can t call main program 095 0 Program 00000 cannot be called when calling a subprogram or subprogram number not input or subprogram number illegal 390 Appendix Alarm in i ah Alarm Message a WAY J TYPE 0550 o Nesting fold number of subprogram has exceeded Coro 0 Themain programis caled 0090 0 Macro cannot be called or M98 and M99 cannot be commanded in offset 400 0 SKWGOTODOEND dsbediTNRofset 400 0 The format of macros wrong 4020 0 The label of DO or END is not 1 2 or 3 in using macro 4050 0 ThefomatofDOorENDemorinusngmago 4040 0 The bracket of macro is not suit
540. ut off If the Emergency button is released the alarm is cancelled and CNC system enters into reset mode 4 By Mode switching When the Auto mode is switched to the Machine zero MPG Step the current block dwells 268 Chapter Auto Operation immediately when the Auto mode is switched to the Edit MDI mode the dwell is not displayed till the current block is executed Note 1 Ensure that the fault has been resolved before canceling the emergency alarm Note 2 The electric shock to the device may be decreased by pressing the Emergency button before power on and off Note 3 The Machine zero return operation should be performed again after the emergency alarm is cancelled to ensure the coordinate correctness but this operation is unallowed if there is no machine zero in the machine Note 4 Only the BIT3 MESP of the bit parameter No 0172 is set to 0 could the external emergency stop be valid 7 1 4 Auto Run From an Arbitrary Block 2 poco 1 Press 8 key to enter the Edit mode press key to enter the Program PROGRAM interface or press key several times to select the PRG CONTENT page 2 Move the cursor to the block to be executed for example move the cursor to the 4 line head if it executes from the 4 line EDIT 58813 T41 HOB PROGRAM gt LOCAL PROGRAM 00001 INSERT x 00001 N00351 G90 G54 G80 G40 2 A N00015 GOI X100 Y100 7100 3 N00025 GOB XO YO Z0 17 13 20 eee ES
541. ute angle less than 1 degree linear to linear a 1 area eer o Tool center path Fig l amp Linear to linear the included angle less than degree outside offset cancellation 6 2 5 Interference check Tool over cutting is called interference The interference check function can check tool over cutting in advance This interference check is performed even if the over cutting does not occur However all interference can not be checked by this function 1 Conditions for the interference 1 The direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths 2 In addition to the condition above the angle between the start point and end point of the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point of the programmed path in circular machining more than 180 degrees Example Linear machining 165 GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSK Tool center path The directions of these two paths are different 18307 U im O a um y 3 3 e Tool center path Programmed path A The directions of taro paths are different 180 Pig 6 196 Machining interference 2 2 If there is no interference actually but it is treated as interference 1 The groove depth less than the compensation value Tool center path Programmed path Fig 6 20 Exceptional ca
542. uted and value of current coordinate system is changed and the absolute 41 D A O Q Q 3 gt Q GSK GC Esta CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual coordinate system is immediately change 3 7 3 Modifying an Additional Workpiece Coordinate System Command format G10 L20 Pn IP modify an additional workpiece coordinate system n 1 48 IP_ setting values of axis address and workpiece origin offset distance When G09 is executed IP value is a setting value of corresponding coordinate system When G91 is executed the specified value of setting value IP of current coordinate system is a setting value of a new coordinate system Corresponding coordinate system s value of default axis does not change When P is defaulted a coordinate system is not set which is taken an alarm An alarm occurs when the specified P is beyond 0 48 An alarm occurs when the specified coordinate data is beyond the above range When a program is executed and value of current coordinate system is changed and the absolute coordinate system is immediately change 3 8 Polar Coordinate Command G15 G16 The coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates radius and angle Format G9o G1o G16 Start the polar coordinate mode G00 IP_ Polar coordinate command 15 ins Cancel the polar coordinate mode Command descriptions G16 Start the polar coordinate command G15 Cancel the polar coordinate command G1au Plane se
543. vVOVertravel Prol CO il Ocio ceda 231 2 3 1 Hardware overtravle protectiON ccooocccconccconocconnccocncnonnnonnnconnnnonnnnonnnnonannnnannnnnnnnnns 231 2 3 2 Software overtravel protection occcccconncococonnnocononnnnconononnnononnnnononnnnnnnonnnnnonancnnnnnaness 232 24 Emergence ODOLaAllOl asma n ee ascent ae te mendis a ee 232 ZAM ROSE MES m mU T TM 232 242 Emerngeney SloDuosscs iones lei ls laden EUR oue aot 232 243 A 232 2AA CUMING VOM DOW Cl SUDDly sssmessudes metn nete il 233 GHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION ciu is pides 235 Sw NE GOORGINATEAXIS odictor xS 235 SN E A ELM 235 Ike Mantaltapla WAV Cl SQ muda Diode Uta E Einb co mos i executio aed ese 235 3 2 JReedrate Overmide AGIUSUVTOTID eo odia oiteudt iae redes nie Besos isis 236 3 2 1 Manual Feedrate Override Adjustment ooocccconnccccnooncnnccnnnnnnonnnnnnnonnannncnnnnnnncnonnnanennnos 236 3 2 2 Manual Rapid Override Adjustment esses 236 3 2 8 spindle Override Adjustmeni vecinal did 236 CHAPTER MPGISTEP OPERATION israel aa 237 SA A E MS 237 41 1 e e PO PO PO OE A 237 4 1 2 Moving Direction Selection iieiea 237 42 MPG Hahgawrieel FSC cata adeo dee a E bebe adeo uere dE 238 4 2 1 Increment Selec unnn dae das 238 4 2 2 Moving Axis and Direction Selection ccccococcnncccoccnncccononnnononnnnononcnnnononcnnnonancnnnonanens 239 42 9 EXDISDAlon EMS ssl 239 CHAPTERS MBI OPERATION intsbotos euet a
544. value for data parameter Ne3730 when the SOO code is entered if there is still slow rotation in the spindle it means the analog voltage output by CNC is higher than OV so set a smaller value for data parameter No3731 If the machine is not fixed with an encoder the spindle speed can be detected by a speed sensor input 59999 in MDI mode to set the speed value displayed by sensor to the data parameter Ne3741 4 7 Backlash Offset The backlash offset is input by diameter value with the unit 0 001mm which is irrelevant to the programming by diameter or by radius It can be measured by a dial indicator a micrometer or a laser detector Because the backlash offset can improve the machining precision only by accurate compensation it is not recommended to measure it in MPG or Step mode but the following method is suggested e Program editing 00001 E N10 G01 Z10 F800 G91 a N20 Z15 i N30 Z1 gt N40 Z 1 S N50 M30 e Set the backlash error offset to O before measuring e Run the program by single blocks search the measuring benchmark A after 2 positioning operations record the current data move 1mm in the same direction then move 1mm reversely to point B read the current data A A d Date reading position Reverse position Fig 4 4 Schematic map of backlash measuring methods Backlash error offset value data of point A data of point B Input the calculated data to the CNC data parameter Ne034 Calcul
545. w pitch offset is set only the machine zero is returned could the compensation be done ORO 367 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 6 6 Examples of Offset Parameters Setting 1 parameter Ne3620 screw pitch error origin point 0 Data parameter N23624 screw pitch offset interval 70 Parameter Ne3621 min position number of each axis for pitch error compensation 0 parameterNe3622 max position number of each axis for pitch error compensation 199 When the screw pitch error origin is set to 0 The offset value for the 1 section is set in screw pitch compensation parameter list No0001 the offset value for the 2 section is set in screw pitch compensation parameter list N90002 and the offset value for the Nth section is set in screw pitch compensation parameter list Ne 0000 N The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of screw pitch error origin point it begins to compensate the position Ne0001 in the offset table from the machine zero So the screw pitch error compensation can only be performed in the positive moving of the machine zero coordinate system So at the moment pitch error origin O is invalid when reverse motion is done even if it is valued 0 1 2 3 Penne 16 47 C6 Machine Coordinate system 0 10 00 io 430 00 Reference Point q 0 The position No 0000 in the offset table corresponds to the reference point i e screw pitch error origin 0 th
546. when it is not specified W Z axis cutting depth of first starting downward from R reference plane should be more than 0 its absolute value is done when it is negative when the first cutting depth exceeds the groove bottom the groove bottom is the reference to machine Q Z axis cutting depth every time its absolute value is done when it is negative cutting width increment in XY plane it should be less than tool diameter its absolute value is done is negative when K is not specified K is defaulted to tool radius D C X axis cutting amount of first tool infeed it should be more than or equal to tool radius 2 0 when C value is more than 0 the tool executes infeed in positive X direction the workpiece is at positive starting point When it is less than 0 the tool executes infeed in negative X direction the workpiece is at negative starting point 9 G GSR CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual D serial number of tool radius range 0 32 DO is defaulted to be 0 The current tool radius value is taken out according to the given serial number Cycle process 1 Rapidly position to starting point XY plane 2 Rapidly approach downward point R plane 3 Rapidly approach downward the distance W 4 X axis firstly executes tool infeed amount C linear 1 is the path to execute the linear interpolation infeed 5 Execute full circle interpolation based on the path arc 2 6 Mill the circle surface its radius is 1 E from outer to
547. where the cursor is is added to the input digit value Automatic measure input first move the cursor to the required position press X Y or Z and press Input key and the current machine coordinate value is input to the position value where the cursor is El EDIT 51738 149 HAA OFT MACRO PUBLIC VARIABLE 00001 N00444 NO DAT NO DATA NO DATA 100 112 124 101 113 125 102 114 126 103 115 127 104 116 128 105 117 129 106 118 130 107 119 131 108 120 132 109 121 133 110 122 134 111 123 135 0100 Memory data set 0 after power on press Input key Press FIND P 192 to search a serial number 16 30 10 3 1 pus var LOCAL var SYS YAR FIND P Macro variable value can be directly specified by macro command or directly input by keyboard The concrete is referred to Chapter Five Macro Program Macro variable input first move the cursor to the required position directly input the digit and then Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 Public variable EDIT 81738 148 HB NO DAT NO DAT NO DATA E 100 124 181 125 102 126 103 127 104 128 105 129 106 130 107 131 188 132 109 133 110 134 111 135 0100 Memory data set 0 after power on 16 30 10 A pus va
548. ws EDIT _ 87787 148 HOB SWITCH SETTING LEVEL SETTING PARAMETER SWT amp OFF CURRENT LEVEL 4 DEGRADE PROGRAM SWT amp OFF INPUT PASSWORD AUTO SEGMENT amp OFF ALTER PASSWORD PARAMETER OPERATION CBACKUP PAR USER CRESUME PAR USER RESUME DEFAULT PAR 1 SERYO 1H LEVEL RESUME DEFAULT PAR 2 STEP MOTOR RESUME DEFAULT PAR S SERVO 0 1H LEVEL CAN EDIT PROG INPUT MACRO YAR 8 OFFSET 17 38 26 in Mee sm pom jw Note If the current level is the gth level the degradation operation is unallowed 288 Chapter 10 Document Management 9 3 Operations with Different Operation Authorities 9 3 1 Operation of Communication e PC gt CNC transmitted data Operation Authority O gram il e e ON e oe Part program dipl name is less Macro program roca name is greater than or equal to 9000 zt MD EB Al ON m e CNC gt PC Transmitted data Operation mode ag of Program Parameter switch switch Macro program Program To name is less than 9000 Part program bed M adi 3 4 name is bed than 9000 Tool offset 7 Edit MDI mode parameter Data of screw pitch LM 9 3 2 CNC CNC Operation Related operations Operation Authority of Program Parameter eee mote one eh th Alteration of state 2 3 parameter and data parameter MDI mode Alteration of screw EA A EA A parameter oO Lo D um Q ER O Alteration of tool uu Bodl 4
549. ws REF the figure is shown below REF 56847 T92 HB ABSOLUTE POS 00001 NO2663 MODAL INFORMATION GOO CO1 C02 C03 C04 Q 0001 N 0265663 G05 G06 G07 C08 COO 610 G11 612 M75 S0954 X 1 800 zs 12345 mm min MAIN INFORMATION Y 1 E 2 0 mm JOG F 2772 JOG OVRI 13 RAP OVRI 33 Z 3 p4p am SPI OVRI 39 y PART CNT 969 CUT TIME 00 00 30 rur inen assoLure POS amp PRG RELATIVE INTEGRATED El 2 Press or or key to select the machine zero of X Y or Z axis 3 he machine moves along the machine zero direction and returns to the machine zero via the deceleration signal zero signal detection And the axis stops with the machine zero finish indicator lighting up Tt Y 1 XO YO ZO 4hO Machine zero finish indicators Note 1 If the machine zero is not fixed on the machine machine zero operation B C D is unallowed Note 2 While the coordinate is moved out from the machine zero the machine zero finish indicators go out Note 3 After the machine zero operation the cancellation of the tool length offset for the CNC is set by the BIT7 of the bit parameter No 13 Note 4 See details in the 3rd part INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION for the parameters concerning with the machine zero Note 5 When machine zero return bit parameter No011 ZNIK determines whether axis movement is locked automatically 213 O Lo D um Q r O C GSK CNC
550. xpression Format GOTO n n sequence number 1 99999 Example GOTO 1 GOTO 101 5 4 2 Conditional Branch IF statement Specify a conditional expression after IF GOTO format IF conditional expression GOTO n If the specified conditional expression is satisfied a branch to sequence number n occurs If the specified condition is not satisfied the next block is executed Example U im O e a 9 3 3 e If the value of variable 1 is greater than 10 a branch to sequence number N2 occurs If the condi x 1 GT 10 GOTO 2 tion is not sa tisfied lf the condition is satisfied N2 600 G91 X10 0 THEN format IF conditional expression THEN macro statement If the specified conditional expression is satisfied a predetermined macro statement is executed Only a single macro statement is executed Example IF 1 EQ 2 THEN 73 0 If the value of 1 and 2 are the same 0 is assigned to 3 if not no execution will be performed 5 4 3 Conditional Expression Conditional expression A conditional expression must include an operator between two variables or between a variable and constant and must be enclosed in brackets An expression can be used instead of a variable Operators In 980MDc operators in the following table are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value AA EQor Equal to NE or lt gt No
551. y G92 is not needed to set coordinate system if G92 is used coordinate system 1 6 will be moved Do not confuse with G92 and G54 G589 unless workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 are to be moved When G54 G59 are in the same block with G92 G54 G59 are disabled eo Workpiece coordinate system can be modified in the program run The new coordinate system is effective till the system is restarted 66 Chapter 3 G Command ar 160 O Tool position 100 100 200 If it performs G92 X100 Y100 commands when the tool is positioned a t 200 160 in the G54 coordinate system the offset vector A for workpiece coordinate system 1 is X Y And the other workpiece coordinate systems offset for vector A U a O a um o 3 3 e 3 22 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System G54 1 The system supports sixes standard workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 and also uses 48 additional workpiece coordinates Command format G54 1 Pn or G54 Pn Pn specify commands of workpiece coordinate system n 1 48 Example 254 1 PT additional workpiece system 1 254 1 P255 additional workpiece system 2 G54 1 P48 additional workpiece system 48 When P command and G54 1 G54 are executed in the same block a corresponding workpiece coordinate system in additional workpiece coordinates is selected The selected workpiece coordinate system is valid till it is replaced by another one When the system is started again the d
552. y on the panel is pressed or external cycle start signal is ON e The program dwells at the end of each block when the single block switch is on after pressing m or switching on external cycle signal program continuously runs from the next block e Blocks with mark is skipped when the skip switch is ON The object block is executed when command G65 or macro program skip GOTO is specified e When M98 or M9000 M9999 command is performed the corresponding subprogram or macro program is called M99 is executed at the end of the subprogram or macro program after returning to the main program the subsequent block the one after the block in which the subprogram is called is executed return to a specified block if it is commanded by M99 e When M99 command is specified in the middle of a main program which is not called by other programs the current program is repeatedly executed after returning to the head of the program e The system skips the block which begins with O 1 2 2 Word Execution Sequence within Block When multiple words such as G X Y Z F R M S T are in one block most of M S and T words are interpreted by NC and sent to PLC for processing Other words are processed by NC directly M98 M99 M9000 M9999 and S word which specify the spindle speed in r min m min are directly processed by NC as well When G words share the same block with MOO M01 MO2 and M30 M words are executed after G words and NC
553. ycle 74 oocccconoccnccococcnncococonnnonoconnononnnnnononcnnnonancnnnonanennnss 76 3 2420 EFmish Boring lO ed di 77 3 24 2 4 Drilling Cycle Spot Drilling Cycle G81 occccccooccnccccoccnncccoconccnoncnnnonancnnnonanennnos 78 3 24 2 5 Drilling Cycle Counter Boring Cycle G82 occccccoonccccccooconcccooconcnconcnnconannnnnnnanonnnss 79 3 2420 Peck DIMO Cycle Gent etie lem ie eset Ou do ele us LT serene 80 9 24 2 7 Tappilg Cy Cle od Io ce i oe A Ost ces in ae be ence 80 3 24 23 Boring OVCE 39D sei iint ot ein sees Send tdsud UR tuu RN REIN ances SERIE c E 81 3 2429 BONO Gy Cle Gob ci o a Rc saa 82 9 242 T0 Back Boring Cycle GST ida ies dertarad 83 9 24 2 11Borind Cycle 9B ex cte desto Vena ia 84 3242 12 Boring GVele 399 eii 85 3 24 2 13 Groove Rough Milling Inside the Round G110 G111 86 VIII CONTENTS 3 24 2 14 Fine milling Cycle Inside Full Circle G112 G113 eeeessssesuss 88 3 24 2 15 Fine milling Cycle Outside Circle G114 G11D oooccooonccccococcnnccnoccnnnnnnnonnnonanennnnnos 89 3 24 2 16 Roughing Cycle Outside Circle G1116 G117 ooccccccnccncccncnconccnonnncononnnnnonenenncnnons 91 3 24 2 17 Rectangular Roughing G132 6133 oooooccccccccnoccccncconnnnccnncnnnanccnncconnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 93 3 24 2 18 Rectangle Groove Rough milling G134 G135 ooooooonccccononinncononcnnnonononnnonanennnnnos 95 3 24 2 19 Rectangle Groove Inner Fine milling C
554. ycle G136 G1937 98 3 24 2 20 Finish milling Cycle Outside the Rectangle G138 G139 99 3249 GCOMMMUOUS DAI estadia 101 3 24 3 1 Line Series Punch E TUNCION ocio oce as es 101 3 24 3 2 Rectangle Series Punch G140 G141 ooccccccocccncccccccnccconcnnnonannnnconanonnonononnnonons 102 3 24 3 3 Arc Serial Punching G142 G143 oooccccccnoccccconononcconononononanonnnnnannnnonannnnnnnnanonoss 103 3 24 4 Cautions for Canned CyCle ccccccccssssecccsssececeseececssececseaseeeeseageeesseuseesssegsessssaenes 104 3 24 5 Examples for Modal Data Specified in Canned CyCle cccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneees 106 3 24 6 Examples for Canned Cycle and Tool Length Compensation 107 3 25 Absolute and Incremental Commands G90 and GOlicoooccnnconoccnnccnnconnnnnncononnnnnonnonannnnnnnanznnnos 108 3 26 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting G92 occcccoccnncoccccnncocononnconononnonnnnnnnononnnnnonannnnnonanennnns 109 3 27 Feed per min G94 Feed per rev GID rrarena e a a a a a a a 109 9 28 099 AM N 110 929 Chamlerirg FUN e 110 329 1 LINO al Chains e eto 111 9 20 9 Ae ODaIieriit ss duae oeg indu cet iode eoo stadt defeat uis locusts endi cu etas A fo cies 111 nn cM ia cu tU eene ELI Auf Cura tagets 112 3 90 AICI TAPDIN erea a EE 112 3 004 ROIG FAD onem E o DUM 113 S519 23 PECK ROIC ADIN eee rtr cm EN NN 113 3003 Address
555. ying to the U disk search rename save as all deletion arranging names arranging time which are shown below MDI 59024 T50 HAB TOTAL PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 3 SPACE 00001 N07 537 30 0 M USED 20 0 M IDLE 10 0 M NAME 00001 00002 00003 SIZE DATE 811 B 2012 03 13 788 B 2011 11 30 67 B 2011 11 30 PROGRAM PREVIEW 00001 N999 650 1 G143 GI G3 X 9999 9999 Y 9999 9999 Z 9999 9999 U 9999 9999 N0005 G1 G3 GO X100 Y100 7100 A100 C100 GO N0020 GOO X75 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 MOS G82 G2 G4 N0040 G73 X60 55 Y22 2 R70 C85 58 725 05 21 N0050 G98 X52 232 Y55 789 N0060 G74 X40 Y20 R65 728 333 F1005 N0070 G91 G84 X30 Y30 N0080 G04 Xl 5 N0090 G90 GBB X50 Y50 785 A75 C45 N0100 G99 G110 X55 555 Y50 9 R75 745 25 W10 7 I 20 K8 5 09 7 F1600 N0110 G112 120 JO DO N0120 GO X55 Ybb 785 A75 C60 15 41 34 OPEN NEW amp OPEN DELETE DEL FIND P gt 189 C GSK CNC GSK980MDc Milling CNC System User Manual sk AUTO 0540 T72 HOA PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY 00001 N06371 TOTAL 3 SPACE 30 0 M USED 20 0 M IDLE 10 0 M NAME SIZE DATE PROGRAM PREVIEW 00001 2 00001 811 B 2012 03 13 N999 650 1 G143 G1 G3 X 9999 9999 Y 9999 9999 Z 00002 788 B 2011 11 30 9999 9999 U 9999 9999 00003 67 B 2011 11 30 N0005 Gl G3 GO X100 Y100 7100 A100 C100 GO N0020 GOO X75 23 Y75 86 785 A45 C36 M03 682

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

NOMAD Dental Betriebshandbuch  CATALOGUE T-MODE - Habitat Automatisme    Édito - Institut des Actuaires  Décembre 2009 - n°53    Sécurité - Villatech  Ikelite 6038.85 underwater camera housing  User Manual - Serene Baby Products, Inc.  Please click here to view and print the SEIS New Student  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file